JKT05 SPC ARC 00001 C Architectural Specifications JKT05

CONFIDENTIAL
JKT05
Architectural & LEED General
Specifications
CLIENT X
Reference: 512127
Document No.:
512127-JKT05-SPC-ARC-00001
Revision: C
2021-10-15
Document control record
Document prepared by:
PT Aurecon Indonesia
Revenue Tower, 25th Floor,
Unit 25-113, District 8
Jenderal Sudirman Kav. 52-53,
SCBD Lot 13,
South Jakarta 12190
Indonesia
T +62 21 5099 1060

F +62 21 5099 1061
E jakarta@aurecongroup.com
W aurecongroup.com
A person using Aurecon documents or data accepts the risk of:

a) Using the documents or data in electronic form without requesting and checking them for accuracy against the original hard copy
version.
b) Using the documents or data for any purpose not agreed to in writing by Aurecon.
Document control
Report title Architectural & LEED General Specifications
Document code 512127-JKT05- Project number 512127

SPC-ARC-00001
File path https://aurecongroup.sharepoint.com/:f:/r/sites/512127/5%20Deliver%20Design/501%

20Engineering/Reviews%20External/DESIGN%20DELIVERABLES/JKT05/01%20-%20Review
%20Sets/06%20-%20Issued%20for%20Permit/02%20-%20Specifications/01_Architectural_%
26_LEED?csf=1&web=1&e=5RWsYF
Client Client X
Client contact Patrick Png Client reference JKT05
Rev Date Revision details/status Author Reviewer Verifier Approver

(if required)
A 2021-08-27 60% Tender Issue Various Colin Eddison
B 2021-09-24 90% Tender Issue Various Colin Eddison
C 2021-10-15 Issued for Permit Various Colin Eddison
Current revision C
Approval
Author signature Approver signature
Name Name Colin Eddison
Title Title
Project number 512127 File Architectural & LEED General Specification 2021-10-15 Revision C
SS001_Contents
JKT05 SS1/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 1 - CONTENTS
SPECIFICATION
OCTOBER 2021
SS01 Section 1 Contents

SS02 Section 2 Suspended Ceiling System
SS03 Section 3 Supply and Installation of Drywall Partitions
SS04 Section 4 Steel and Metal Works
SS05 Section 5 Waterproofing
SS06 Section 6 External and Internal Aluminium Works
SS07 Section 7 Glass and Glazing
SS08 Section 8 Epoxy Flooring
SS09 Section 9 Mock-ups and Tests
SS10 Section 10 Roofing
SS11 Section 11 Floor Screed and Hardeners
SS12 Section 12 Bricklayer, Blockwork and Plastering
SS13 Section 13 Supply and Installation of Concrete Wall Panels
SS14 Section 14 Handrails Guarding and Railing
SS15 Section 15 Cement Paving
SS16 Section 16 Tiling and Tiling Adhesives
SS17 Section 17 Stonework
SS18 Section 18 Painting and Texture Coating
SS19 Section 19 Siphonic Roof Drainage System
SS20 Section 20 Signage
SS21 Section 21 Termite Control Treatment
SS22 Section 22 Ironmongery
SS23 Section 23 Acoustic Design and Noise & Vibration Control
Consideration
SS24 Section 24 External Works
SS25 Section 25 Carpet Finishes
SS26 Section 26 Acoustic Wall Lining System
SS27 Section 27 Sealant
SS28 Section 28 Door
SS29 Section 29 General Repairs
SS30 Section 30 Sanitary Fittings and Accessories
SS31 Section 31 Carpentry and Joinery
SS32 Section 32 Others and Miscellaneous Items
COPYRIGHT BY M/S AWP PTE LTD. THIS SPECIFICATION IS THE PROPERTY OF M/S AWP PTE LTD AND CANNOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED PARTLY OR
WHOLLY WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF M/S AWP PTE LTD.
SS002_Suspended Ceiling
JKT05 SS2/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 2 - SUSPENDED CEILING
SECTION 2
2.0 SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM
2.1 GENERALLY
Whenever a material, item, article or product is specified by trade/brand name,

manufacturer's name or catalogue reference, the Contractor may propose to use its
equivalent in the Works, subject to the written approval of the Architect.
Suspended ceiling systems used in the Works shall be of proprietary design, proven
in use and erected to approval by the manufacturer/supplier's erection service.
Proprietary fire rated ceiling shall be constructed to specialist supplier’s
specifications.
All components shall be compatible with each other and when assembled, the
system shall form a functional and aesthetic whole.
Upon completion of the ceiling works, remove debris and excess materials, clean or
replace dirty or damaged material and leave the work clean and neat.
All components of the suspension system to be metal.
All components of ceiling panels and suspension systems in exterior, non air-
conditioned or exposed location to be external quality, humidity resistant and non-
ferrous.
The suspended ceiling includes the suspension system, acoustical materials, ceiling
boards, stainless steel trimmers/framing/lighting trough, egg crate diffusers and
aluminium trimmers/framing for the integration of lighting and ventilation
components.
The Contractor shall provide all penetrations for ducting, diffuser grilles, fire
protection services, cables etc trim and seal around all ducts and registers
penetrating the ceiling.
The Floor to ceiling heights shown on the drawings must be achieved and the
contractor will have allowed all necessary measures in the services and structure to
maintain the specified ceiling heights while meeting all other requirements of the
contract drawings and specifications.
JKT05 SS2/2
At least 90% of all ceilings, by cost or surface area, meet the VOC emissions
evaluation, OR inherently nonemitting sources criteria, OR salvaged and reused
materials criteria.
2.2 STANDARDS
Unless otherwise agreed by Architect, ensure all of the works comply with the
relevant requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the
body of the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be submitted to the
Architect provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes
comply with the requirements of the standards specified. All standards and Codes
quoted are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Other Standards
BS EN 1461 Hot Dip Galvanised Steel
BS EN 10152 Steel Finishes
BS EN 20354 Acoustics of sound in reverberation rooms
BS CP 290 Code of Practice for Suspended Ceiling using Metal Fixing

Systems
BS 1191 Gypsum building plaster
BS 5368: Part 3 Methods of testing window: Wind resistance test
BS 5821 Sound Transmission
BS 6375: Part 1 Performance of Windows: Classification of weathertightness
BS 6496 Specification for powder organic coatings for application and

stoving to aluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and preformed
sections for external architectural purposes
BS 6497 Powder Coating Steelwork
BS 8290 Suspended ceilings
ASTM C 636 Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension

Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels
JKT05 SS2/3
ASTM E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials
ASTM E 580 Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems

for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to
Earthquake Ground Motions.
2.3 COORDINATION WITH M&E AND OTHER SERVICES
Co-ordinate the ceiling works particularly the interfacing with the following trades
a) Partition and heads of partition
b) Affected mechanical and electrical services installations interfacing with the

suspended ceilings both above and below the ceiling line, including forming
openings for modular lighting, air diffusers, smoke and heat detection systems,
sprinkler installations, signage and the like,
c) The air-conditioning duct/grilles, light trunking/ fittings and other M&E services
will be done by other specialist contractors.
The Contractor will also have to liaise and co-ordinate with the other contractors on
the work sequence and structured cabling works, building construction works, etc.
2.4 CEILING LAYOUT AND SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor is required to submit shop and detailed drawings for the ceiling for
the Architect's approval before proceeding with the works.
Although the ceiling layout is indicated on drawing, this is only indicative and the
Contractor must submit a larger scale plan showing the exact layout after
coordination between MEP, structure and any specialist services and to indicate any
cutting of ceiling boards/panels.
2.4.1 Work Submissions
Upon commencement of the works, submit technical information and data

demonstrating conformance with the design intent as shown in the drawings.
Contractor to prepare shop drawings showing clear and complete details of each
assembly, component and connection together with detailed information relative to
their fabrication, material, surface treatment and erection.
JKT05 SS2/4
Include information on:
a) Setting out plans
b) Sectional details of typical and non-typical elements and associated elements
c) Sectional details of all interfaces with adjoining structures and disciplines
d) Dimensions of overall assembly
e) Procedures and sequence to produce distortion-free components and

assemblies
f) Identification of type and extent of protective coatings to be applied
g) Methods of meeting performance requirements for thermal insulation, fire

resistance, sound transmission and the like
h) Identification of type and location of attachments to be built in to the building

structure
i) Identification of junctions and trims to adjoining surfaces
2.5 SAMPLES AND MOCK-UPS
2.5.1 Samples
Contractor to submit samples of part of each ceiling showing face materials, and
grid supports and technical data.
In addition, the contractor is required to submit fire and acoustic test certificates and
assessments for each type of ceiling assembly, where applicable.
2.5.2 Mock-ups
The Contractor is required to install a mock up ceiling of each different type

indicated on the drawings, for the Architect’s approval, before proceeding with the
works. Mock-ups to reflect all typical junctions and features in the ceiling design.
Unless otherwise agreed, selected area to be 4500mm x 4500mm. Complete the
mock-up and submit to the Architect prior to procurement and fabrication.
JKT05 SS2/5
2.6 TEST
2.6.1 Tensile pull out test
Unless otherwise directed, conduct tensile pull out test for all ceiling works at one
location per 5 floors of building. At least one pull out test shall be conducted per
project. The location of pull out tests shall be selected by the Architect.
2.6.1.1 Mineral Fibreboard ceiling
Tensile pull out test results shall exceed:
a) For 1200mm x 600mm ceiling panel – 2kg
b) For 600mm x 600mm ceiling panel – 4kg
c) For suspension system (or wall-mounted ceiling grid system)
i. At anchor points – 50kg
ii. At mid span of suspension grid – 12kg before L/20

deflection.
2.6.1.2 Seamless fibrous plasterboard
Tensile pull out test results shall exceed:
a) For plasterboard at centre of suspension grid – 20kg
b) For suspension system
i. At anchor points – 50kg
ii. At mid span of suspension grid – 12kg before L/20

deflection.
2.6.1.3 Skim Coat Ceiling
Conduct tensile pull out test between 21 days to 28 days after

application. Average result of pull out test shall exceed 0.40N/mm2.
Test result of each location shall not be less than 0.30N/mm2.
JKT05 SS2/6
2.6.2 Moisture Penetration
Conduct inspection of plasterboard ceiling after operating building M&E services for
48 hours to observe for wet or damp locations due to leakage or condensation.
Conduct inspection of plasterboard ceiling after completion of roof shelter works to

check for evidence of rainwater drips to plasterboard ceiling.
Mark and annotate on a relevant reflected ceiling plan drawing with description of
causes for moisture or damp.
Submit remedial measures to eliminate moisture due to leakage or condensation, to

SO before commencement of the measures. Include approved remedial measures
in the maintenance manual.
2.7 CEILING SPECIFICATIONS
2.7.1 Types of Suspended Ceilings
Suspended ceiling system(s) for the project may consist of one of the following types:
a) Mineral fibreboard acoustic ceiling: Modular, regular mineral fibreboard suspended

ceiling tiles, on a pre-finished metal suspension system, in either concealed or
exposed manner.
b) Metal ceiling: Modular, metal suspended ceiling either in tiles or as planks (strips)
on concealed suspension systems.
c) Seamless fibrous plasterboard suspended ceiling system with a skim coat of

plaster finish, supported on concealed metal suspended system
d) Skim coating to soffit of exposed concrete slab where there is no suspended

ceiling.
e) Semi -concealed resin-bonded glass fibre ceiling.
2.7.2 Mineral Board Acoustic Ceiling
Where described in the schedule, mineral board ceiling shall be manufactured from
acoustic mineral fibre or high-density resin bonded glass fibre finished with
microporous white textured surface and fully sealed painted edges or equal and
approved.
JKT05 SS2/7
The acoustic ceiling boards shall be in 1200/600x600x40mm thick suspended on an

exposed, concealed or semi-recessed on all 4 sides. The visible surface and edges
shall be factory painted finish with light reflectance of  84% and light diffusion of 
87% providing optimum light efficiency for indirect lighting. The microporous painted
surface provide good air permeability for excellent sound absorption properties. The
back of the boards shall be faced with clear glass tissue to provide a fully sealed,
high performance acoustic ceiling board. All cut edges of the ceiling board for
edging, opening, etc shall be painted/ sealed with emulsion paint on site.
Colour of board shall be in RAL9010 (otherwise stated by Architect).
a) Total Moisture Resistance
The boards shall meet the Standard for Total Moisture Resistance (TMR) in
accordance with ISO 461 and shall withstand relative air humidity exposure of
up to 95% at 40o C without causing visible sagging, warping or delamination.

No hygroscopic ceiling materials shall be used.
b) Thermal Insulation
The boards shall have U value not exceeding 0.031W/m2.
c) Fire Safety Performance
Fire resistance shall meet with FSSD or local Fire Bureau requirements.
The boards shall be non-combustible meeting Class 0 rating as defined in the

Building Regulations BS 476 Fire Propagation Test and Surface Spread of
Flame Test. Ceiling materials or any of its parts shall not contain any
substance, which will emit toxic fumes as a result of overheating or combustion
and also meeting DIN Classification.
Where a Ceiling is penetrating by Multi-service runs, e.g. pipework, ductwork,

trunking, cabling, etc., the relevant section or sections of the barrier shall be
replaced with materials which are equally incombustible and to details
approved by Architect.
Mineral wool wire reinforced mattress cavity barriers shall be installed where
necessary as per fire safety report/ local fire regulations.
JKT05 SS2/8
d) Sound Absorption
The absorptive boards and reflective boards shall achieve sound absorption
Class A and C respectively tabulated below in accordance with the BS EN
20354, obtained by testing in accordance with the room method (EN ISO 354).
Boards shall be laid in accordance with the ceiling layout plans.
Absorptive Boards with 200mm Air Gap
Frequency 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000

(Hz)
Absorption 0.10 0.45 0.65 0.75 0.85 0.8

Coefficient
Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) is 0.9
Reflective Boards with 200mm Air Gap
Frequency 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000

(Hz)
Absorption 0.40 0.30 0.30 0.25 0.15 0.10

Coefficient
The method of testing shall conform to EN ISO 354 and carried out by any of
the following accredited laboratories:
1) SP – Swedish National Testing and Research Institute
2) Institute of Sound and Vibration Research, University of Southampton, UK
3) Acoustical Investigation and Research Organisation Ltd, UK
4) Sound Research Laboratories Ltd, UK
Products tested in laboratories not listed above shall be accompanied by or full

laboratory technical report for Consultant’s verification.
e) Reverberation Time Results
The performance of the combined absorptive and reflective ceiling system shall
meet the reverberation time (RT) criterion recommend by Acoustical society of
America or Building Bulletin 87 (UK). Contractor shall ensure that the RT does
not exceed 0.8 seconds (mean of 500Hz and 1000Hz) in an unoccupied
classroom.
JKT05 SS2/9
f) Suspension System
[Applicable to proposed Ceiling Type 1 & 2]
Suspension system shall be of Armstrong Ceiling system Ultima+ Op or
approved equivalent, unless otherwise specified by Architect. The ceiling shall
conform to BS EN 13964.
Ceiling Type 1 :
Armstrong Ultima+ Op Clean Room System 7684M, White
• 1200mm x 600mm x 20mm grid with square lay-in
• Suspension System: Clean room 24mm grid system; Colour to match
• Accessories: PVC hold down clip for lay-in board
• Location: As specified in Finishes Key Plan Series
Ceiling Type 2 :
Armstrong Ultima+ Op Square Lay-In 7682M, White
• 600mm x 600mm x 20mm grid with square lay-in
• Suspension System: Prelude Grid Square Lay-in, 24mm exposed tee grid;
Colour to match
• Location: As specified in Finishes Key Plan Series
Suspension system may be of the following types, comply with BS CP 290:
a) Joint-less systems
b) Frame and tile systems (exposed grid)
Mineral fibreboard ceiling panel relying on self-weight on exposed metal grids

shall not be used in areas where there are open fenestrations. No ceiling board
shall be dislodged resulting from wind uplift pressure.
Exposed Ceiling grid & tee system colour shall match with selected ceiling
board colour, unless otherwise stated by Architect, to be submitted for
Architect’s approval.
JKT05 SS2/10
g) Indoor Air Quality
The boards shall be suitable for clean and hygienic environment usage, tested
and achieve cleanroom class M3.5/100 according to US Federal Standard
209E. The boards shall also conform to the Swedish Asthma and Allergy
Association Certification, or equivalent local Standards.
h) Environmental Impact
The boards shall be environmental friendly and of sustainable materials to

achieve intended LEED Gold Rating.
At least 90% of all ceilings, by cost and surface area, meet the VOC emission
evaluation or inherently non-emitting source criteria.
The ceiling product category includes all ceiling panels, ceiling tile, surface
ceiling structures such as gypsum or plaster, suspended systems (including
canopies and clouds), and glazed skylights.
i) Cleaning and Maintenance
The board surface shall withstand and can easily be cleaned by dusting,
vacuum, dry cloth or damp sponge.
2.7.3 Seamless Fibrous Plaster Board Ceiling
The fibrous plaster ceiling shall be 12.5 mm thick and to be moisture resistant and
external quality. Where ceiling is used externally, such as walkways, corridors or car
porches, submit waterproofing additives for water resistance.
a) General Composition
Plasterglass shall consist of Gypsum Plaster reinforced with strands of

Fibreglass at the ratio of 365 gms per m² for 12.5mm thickness. Gypsum
plaster shall be manufactured to the relevant AS Gypsum Plaster for Building
purposes.
Fibreglass shall be Siland sized Type C glass, filament dia. 19 ±0.8 microns.
Water moisture resistant fibrous plaster ceilings shall be an approved

Plasterglass ceiling incorporating a silicone based additive, which when added,
forges a close knit crystalline gypsum particle, reducing porosity and has a
water repellent surface.
JKT05 SS2/11
b) Perimeter Treatment
At all perimeter interfaces use aluminium profile to stiffen edge, either straight
or curved as necessary. Edging material shall be capable of receiving skim
coat in a manner consistent with a ceiling soffit.
Jointing of perimeter trims shall be carried out neatly without lipping and
twisted. Use mitred joints at all internal and external corners and the longest
lengths of trims available from the manufacturer to keep immediate butt joints
to a minimum. Coordinate joints of straight runs to coincide with grid locations.
c) Early Fire Hazard Properties
Plasterglass shall be tested in accordance with AS 30 and results confirmed in

respect of:
Fire Hazard Properties
Ignitability Index 0
Spread of Flame Index 0
Heat Evolved Index 0
Smoke Develop 0
Fire Rating 0
Test results indicating that Plasterglass materials supplied to projects have

qualified for Fire Resistance rating in accordance with PSB.
d) Workmanship
Installation of fibrous plaster ceiling is to be carried out by competent

tradesmen experienced in fibrous plaster ceiling methods.
e) Metal Suspension System
The ceiling shall be suspended by metal suspension in hot dip galvanised

metal.
Hangers to be suspended at maximum 1000mm centres by means of 22

gauge x 25mm Galvanised metal straps power fixed to concrete soffit at
1000mm centres.
JKT05 SS2/12
Perimeters to have 50 x 50mm wall plate at joist ends power fixed to wall at
approximately 600mm centres.
f) Fixing of fibrous plaster ceiling by Grouting
i. Where fibrous plaster ceiling are fixed for ceiling by grouting over joists or
battens the background shall be substantially even and free from any
protrusions liable to adversely affect the fixing of the sheets.
ii. Fibrous plaster ceiling shall be fixed to joists or battens with 40mm
temporary pin-up nails, ensuring that each sheet finishes level with the
adjacent sheets. Perimeter of ceiling may be permanently nailed with
25mm galvanised clouts, ensuring such nailing points will be covered by
Plasterglass or other cornice moldings.
iii. Using approved Casting Plaster mixed with water at the ratio of two
plaster to one of clean water by volume and Fibreglass Strands, the
Plasterglass sheets are then grouted over joists or battens. Each grout to
be approximately 35mm wide and are to be spaced at approximately
450mm along each joist. Continuous grouts are to be applied to all joints.
iv. Screws must be rust proof.
g) Flush Joints
Where grouting is not applied at the back of the flush joint, the joint shall be
kept open 10mm to facilitate caulking with approved Bonding compound from
the face side. The joint is then trowelled with Stopping Compound to leave a
flush surface in true relationship to the adjacent surface.
h) Services and fittings
Seamless fibrous plasterboard ceiling may house equipment such as light

fittings, electronic alarm sounders, smoke detectors, air grilles and sprinkler
heads. These shall be independently supported without imposing load on ceiling
material and system.
Forming apertures and perforations to receive equipment shall be in accordance

with manufacturer’s procedures using approved tools.
JKT05 SS2/13
2.7.4 Concealed Grid Ceiling with Fire Rating
[Applicable to proposed Ceiling Type 3 & 4]
Where described in the schedule, the ceiling system shall comprise of Firestop
boards suspended from hanger systems, cross rails, and furring channels. The fire
rating is provided by the complete system.
Ceiling Type 3 :
USG BORAL (or approved equivalent) 2HR Fire Rated Ceiling
• Board : 4 layers of USG Boral Firestop 16mm
• Suspension System :
o JayaBMS Hanger System (Bracket PN 220/221, Clip Adjuster PN

224, Rod PN 226) at 800mm max. center to center
o JayaBMS Top Cross Rail PN 202 at 800mm max. center to center
o JayaBMS Furring PN 205 at 400mm (sub system I) and 600mm

(sub system II) max. center to center
Suspension System for 2hr Fire Rating
Sub System I Suspension Clip PN 224 800mm C/C
Top Cross Rail PN 202 800mm C/C
Furring Channel PN 205 400mm C/C
2 layers of USG Boral Firestop 16mm -
Sub System II Direct Fixed Clip PN 219 800mm C/C
• Weight : 54kg/m2
• Location : As specified in Finishes Key Plan Series
• Access Panel (minimum 600mm x 600mm) to specialist’s detail, location &

provision to MEP requirement, detail to Architect’s approval
JKT05 SS2/14
Ceiling Type 4 :
USG BORAL (or approved equivalent) 1HR Fire Rated Ceiling
• Board : 2 layers of USG Boral Firestop 16mm
• Suspension System :
o JayaBMS Hanger System (Bracket PN 220/221, Clip Adjuster PN

224, Rod PN 226) at 900mm max. center to center
o JayaBMS Top Cross Rail PN 202 at 900mm max. center to center
o JayaBMS Furring PN 205 at 400mm (sub system I) and 600mm

(sub system II) max. center to center
Suspension System for 1hr Fire Rating
Sub System Suspension Clip PN 224 900mm C/C
Top Cross Rail PN 202 900mm C/C
• Weight : 28.2kg/m2
• Location : As specified in Finishes Key Plan Series

2.7.5 Skim Coat to Exposed Slab Soffit
[Applicable to proposed Ceiling Type 6]
Use premixed plastering compound to achieve level surface on the soffit of RC slabs
and beams where there is no suspended ceiling. Completed skim coat surface shall be
suitable to receive paint. Use proprietary edge beading to all corners and edges.
a) Material
Use pre packed plastering compound conforming to BS 1191 and consisting

mainly of gypsum with chemical additives. When accepted by Architect includes
JKT05 SS2/15
aggregates and/or fibres for added adhesion and bulk. Unless otherwise agreed
apply one finishing coat 3mm thick plaster conforming to BS 1191 class C & D.
b) Fire Performance
Where fire performance is indicated in drawings, use only non-flammable and

non-fire hazardous pre packed plaster.
2.7.6 Semi-Concealed 1200 x 600 mm resin-bonded glass fibre ceiling
The suspended resin-bonded glass fibre acoustic ceiling board ceiling shall be semi-
concealed system. The ceiling boards shall be of 1200 x 600 x 20mm thick high
density (120kg/m3) resin-bonded glass fibre.
The boards must be able to withstand continuous exposure to high humidity without
causing visible sagging, warping or de-lamination under our extreme local conditions.
The visible surfaces and edges of the ceiling boards shall be factory painted finish in
White (F157) colour. The painted surface shall be partly porous giving good air
permeability for excellent sound absorption properties. The back of the boards shall
be faced with glass tissue.
When necessary, the surface of the boards can be easily cleaned using vacuum
cleaner, dry cloth or damp sponge.
a) Acoustic Performance
The sound absorption coefficient shall be in conformance with ISO 354 and are
measured as follows:
20mm thick boards with 200mm air gap
Absorptive Boards with 200mm Air Gap
Frequency 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000

(Hz)
Absorption 0.41 0.59 0.66 0.62 0.76 0.64

Coefficient
JKT05 SS2/16
b) Fire Characteristics
The ceiling boards shall achieve Class 0 (zero) rating tested in accordance
with BS 476: Part 6 & 7; or Surface Burning Characteristics of Maximum
25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 84.
c) Suspension System
The suspension system shall be standard 15/24mm T-grid hot dip galvanised
steel or galvanised steel finish with pre-coated low sheen white colour capping
and shall be supported by 12/14 gauge hanger wires or other equal and
approved suspension system.
d) Installation System
The suspended ceiling boards shall be installed by suspending on T-grid for

edge profiles S/R2/R4 or fine-line true grid system for edge profile R5 or
fastening them directly on the back of the ceiling with glue, box slats or
mechanical fasteners for edge profiles S/R1.
e) Perimeter Trim
Provide and fix 14 x 10 x 10 x 20 x 3000mm long aluminium shadow line W-

angle trim and edge trim at wall junctions. Provide 14 x 40mm aluminium L-
angle trims where abutting walls are curved in plan.
f) Accessibility
Provide 100% accessibility to the ceiling space.
g) Installation
Examine the substrate and conditions under which work of this section will be
performed. Do not proceed until conditions detrimental to timely and proper
completion of the work have been rectified.
The ceiling grid shall be set out as indicated on the Drawings.
Confirm the positions of all exposed building services e.g. light fittings, fire
protection systems, speakers, air supply and exhaust grilles etc prior to setting
out the ceiling grid.
JKT05 SS2/17
Confirm the temporary openings to be left for installation or commissioning of

equipment or the running of cables by trades or services not directly employed
within the scope of this Contract, prior to laying any panels.
Work shall be done by competent experienced tradesmen in the fixing of

suspended ceilings. The Contractor shall furnish the Architect with evidence of
experience and skill of his tradesmen before work is commenced.
The ceiling panels shall be stored for at least 24 hours before installation in the
rooms in which they are to be installed to allow for temperature adjustment.
The relative humidity of the area to be installed shall not exceed 90%.
Ceiling panels shall be neatly and accurately cut. Panels shall be placed to fit
snugly into the main and cross tees, with no space between the bottom of the
panels and the grid system, and without gaps or panel edges showing in the
completed installation
2.8 INDEMNITY FOR CEILING WORKS
Prior to commencement of ceiling works, the Contractor shall lodge with the
Architect a 5-year indemnity against defects in the ceiling works.
Under this indemnity, the Contractor will be required to make good any defects and
failure in the materials or installation and will be responsible for any consequential
loss attributable to any failure in the ceiling works during the warranty period.
If in the opinion of the Contractor, the Specifications are sufficient for him to give the
specified indemnity then the Contractor shall allow in his tender for upgrading the
Specifications as necessary to enable him to so indemnify.
2.9 RECESSED OPENINGS
Where a/c diffuser grilles, return air grilles and recessed light fittings etc, occurs,
provide recessed opening in suspended ceilings including all additional frames to
suit. These shall be included in the rates for the ceiling.
JKT05 SS2/18
2.10 CO-ORDINATION AND CEILING PROGRAMMING SCHEDULE
The Contractor shall co-ordinate with the ceiling specialist to ensure that the installed
suspended ceilings are not unnecessarily taken down, altered or damaged due to the
omission of work in the ceiling space.
The contractor shall verify all measurements and dimensions at the job site and shall
co-ordinate and schedule his work with the work of other specialist contractors
affected by his installation, with particular attention to the Mechanical and Electrical
Trades.
It will be the contractor’s responsibility to ascertain actual dimension on site and to

obtain complete information regarding the exact position of all items that occur in the
ceiling which are installed by other specialist contractors prior to the installation of the
ceiling.
2.11 ACCESS PANEL/ INSPECTION HATCH
All access panels and inspection hatches shall be constructed by the Contractor as
required by the Architect/MEP drawings. Access panels/inspection hatches shall
have approved framing, ironmongeries and finished with matching colour of the
whole ceiling.

2.12 PROTECTION / DELIVERY / STORAGE
All ceiling panels to be covered by a foil protecting them during delivery, unpacking
and installation.
Ceiling panels and all components of the suspension system shall be delivered to the
job site in the original packages of the manufacturer.
All material shall be stored in dry areas where the temperature and humidity will be
maintained during the building occupancy.
JKT05 SS2/19
2.13 INSTALLATION
Installation shall be performed by skilled installers following the manufacturer’s

printed installation instruction.
The installer must examine the conditions under which the ceiling work is to be
performed and notify the contractor of any unsatisfactory conditions before
proceeding.
2.14 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
The Contractor shall maintain and provide sufficient protection for the completed
ceiling until handing over at completion. Until such time the Contractor shall be
responsible for and shall replace and/or make good any soils, dents or defacements
to the finished work at his own cost.
2.15 MAINTENANCE
The Contractor shall provide 5% spares of each of the ceiling type used in the project
for maintenance stock, and 2% of exposed suspension system components. It
should be delivered in manufacturer’s standard packages clearly marked with the
contents.
2.16 METAL CEILING PANELS
2.16.1 The metal ceiling panels to be used within corridors & specified areas are to be
Hunter Douglas Lay-in Panels or any other approved equivalent.
2.16.2 Specifications
The panels are simply laid on the exposed suspension grid system, allowing simple
and easy access to the plenum. This is especially useful for areas that require
frequent maintenance.
Material 0.5 - 0.8mm thick aluminium plate.

Surface Finish PVF2
Dimension 575mm x 575mm; 585mm x 585mm (otherwise stated by
JKT05 SS2/20
Architect)
Colour White and other colours to be approved by the Architect
[Refer Design drawings where applicable]
2.16.3 Perforation
Panels are either plain or perforated.

The standard perforation is 1.8mm dia. holes on 3.3 mm diagonal square pattern
giving a 19% open area. Open area perforated shall comply with M&E requirements.
2.16.4 Sound Absorption
The back of the perforated panels come with acoustic material, SOUNDTEX C 1986
S/W. This material is non-flammable and meets the requirement of building material
class B1. This material has been approved by British (BS) and European (EN)
standards.
SOUNDTEX acoustic non-woven C 1986, in conjunction with perforated steel sheet

panels, has been tested for its sound absorption performance by The Building Test
Centre in East Leake, Loughborough, UK under the report numbers BTC 3327 A to
BTC 3329 A. In accordance with BS EN 20 354 : 1993 (ISO 354 : 1985) on 10th
September 1997.
The Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) was calculated in accordance with ASTM
C423-90a. The degree of Sound Absorption was determined as follows for three
perforation patterns with a ceiling cavity of 400mm.
Curve 1 1.8mm diameter holes with 20% open area

JKT05 SS2/21
2.16.5 Fire Resistance
Ceiling panels shall be tested by PSB in accordance with British Standard 476, Pt 6 :
1989 "method of test for Fire Propagation for products" and BS 476, Pt : 1997 on
Flame Spread. They also meet the stringent requirements of Class O fire rating, or
equivalent local Authority/ Code requirements and FM Global Standards.
2.16.6 The Suspension System
All main and cross carriers as well as brackets and clips are made of galvanized
steel.
Rod Hanger 4mm hanger with adjustable clip.
Angle Aluminium capping wall angle or painted steel wall angle.
Size 24mm x 24mm
2.16.7 Code Compliance
Contractor is to ensure that the acoustic and other relevant qualities meet the client’s
requirements and Architect’s approval. The ceiling panels are to comply with Local
Code requirements and FM Global Standards.
2.16.8 Packing
Each panel is protected by an individual plastic cover. Each carton box contains 20
panels
2.17 SEISMIC DESIGN & ANALYSIS FOR CEILING GRID SYSTEM
Seismic design to specialist’s design & detail shall be included and provided as a
part of the Suspended Ceiling Grid system. In order to prevent damage and
reduce the risk of damage caused by within Data Hall/ critical M&E Room areas
(where applicable).
Seismic Design requirements shall be completed and comply with the following:
• The seismic restraints for the ceiling system shall be designed using ASCE 7
Chapter 13 or SNI1726 Chapter 9.
• The development is specified as Risk Category III (RC III).
• Soil class D at site location
• The peak ground acceleration, PGAM, shall be considered as 0.358g for the
project.
JKT05 SS2/22
•
The ground motion (0.2s), SS, shall be considered as 0.729g.
•
The ground motion (1.0s), S1, shall be considered as 0.302g.
•
The short period spectral acceleration co-efficient, SDS, shall be considered as
0.591g for the project.
• The spectral response acceleration parameter at 1 second, SD1, shall be
considered as 0.403g for the project.
Seismic design, assessment & analysis (incl. necessary drawings, calculations,
simulation, etc) shall be submitted for Structural Engineer’s or Seismic Consultant’s
review & approval, prior fabrication & installation on Site.
Seismic design (design intent)

[Design, installation details & provision subject to final assessment reviewed by
Structural Engineer’s or Seismic Consultant’s in due course].
The following components/ systems shall be included, but not limited to:
i. Bracing system with seismic cable, brackets, fasteners, etc.

ii. Rod hangers and/or stiffeners
SS003_Drywall Partitions
JKT05 SS3/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 3 - SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL PARTITIONS
SECTION 3
3.0 SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL PARTITIONS
3.1 GENERAL

manufacturer’s name or catalogue reference, the Contractor may propose to use its
equivalent in the Works, subject to the written confirmation of the Architect.
The partitions shall generally be 150mm thick cavity type drywall partitions and shall
be constructed full height from floor level up soffit of the concrete slab above or to
200mm above suspended ceiling unless otherwise stated. The partitions shall be
installed on 100mm (H) concrete dike depth aligning with proposed partition depths
as included in details particularly to all ground structures and/ or adjacent to internal
space which potentially exposed to water ingress or moisture from floor slabs.
The construction of the partitions shall be made up of galvanised mild steel vertical
and horizontal studs spaces internally at 600mm centres erected on steel floor tracks
with 13mm gypsum plaster boards cladding on both faces of the partition. The
bottom track is made up of a steel floor tract and vinyl coving skirting.
The applied finish on the exposed surfaces of the gypsum plaster board shall be
selected and approved by the Architect and the Architect reserves the right to use on
or combination of the finishes at the rates priced for.
The internal hollow core of the partitions shall be filled up with min. 50mm thick
rockwool for 100mm thick partition or 75mm thick for 150mm thick partition as
described in the drawing.
The Contractor shall also guarantee that the demountable partition system including
doors shall achieve a sound absorption factor of at least 50 decibels.
Demountable partition shall be pre-fabricated, quickly assembled on site and non-

structural with components salvageable for relocation according to the degree of
adaptability.
The partition shall incorporate skirting, trim, fixing clip cover and adjusting pieces and
includes the provision for jointing to the floor, ceiling, column or other walls and to
form door openings complete with solid timber door jambs, etc.
JKT05 SS3/2
The Contractor must apply the relevant test certificate to substantiate that the
partition is non-combustible or other requirements as specified in this document.
The Contractor must provide 5 years of indemnity to the dry wall partitions against
defects, defects in installation and any related components.
3.2 STANDARDS
Singapore Standards
SS CP 1 The use of timber in building construction
SS 72 Treatment of timber and plywood with copper / chrome / arsenic /

wood preservative
Other Standards
BS EN10143 Specification for continuously hot-dip, metal coated steel sheet and
strip
BS 1230 Pt 1 Specification for plasterboard excluding materials submitted to

secondary operation
BS 5234 1&2 Partitions (including matching linings)
BS 5588 Fire precautions in design construction and use of buildings. Code of

practice for shops, offices, industrial and storage
BS 7364 Galvanised steel studs and channels for stud and sheet partitions and
linings using screw fixed plasterboard
BS 8212 Code of practice for dry lining and partitioning using gypsum
plasterboard
AS 1604 Specification for preservative treatment-sawn and round timber

JKT05 SS3/3
BS8110 Structural use of concrete (in particular Section 5 – Part 1 Design and
Detailing of Precast Composite Structures.
BS5328 Concrete parts 1, 2 & 3.
CP297 Precast concrete cladding non-load bearing.
BS8297 Superseding BS297.
BS1217 Cast stone
BS12 Specification for ordinary and rapid hardening Portland cement.
BS146 Portland-blast furnace cement.
BS410 Specification for test sieves.
BS882 Specification for aggregates from natural sources for concrete.
BS1014 Pigments for Portland cement and Portland products.
BS1881 Methods of testing concrete.
Part 108 Method for making test cubes from fresh concrete.
Part 111 Method of normal during of test specimens (20C method).
Part 116 Method for determination of compressive strength of concrete cubes.
BS3148 Methods of test for water for making concrete (including notes on the
suitability of the water).
BS3797 Specification for lightweight aggregates for concrete.
BS4027 Sulphate resisting Portland Cement
BS5070 Concrete admixtures.
Part 1 Specification for accelerating admixtures, retarding admixtures

and water-reducing admixtures.
Part 2 Specification for air-entraining admixtures.
BS5328 Part 1 to 4
BS7583 Portland Limestone Cement
JKT05 SS3/4
BS8298 Code of Practice Design, Manufacture and Installation of Natural

Stone Cladding and Lining.
ASTM C475 Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for
Finishing Gypsum Board
ASTM C514 Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board
ASTM C645 Standard Specification for Non-structural Steel Framing Members
ASTM C665 Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing
ASTM C754 Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to

Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products
ASTM C840 Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board
ASTM C1002 Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of
Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases
ASTM C1047 Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and
Gypsum Veneer Base
ASTM C1178 Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum
Backing Panel
ASTM C1288 Standard Specification for Discrete Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement

Interior Substrate Sheets
ASTM C1325 Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced

Cement Substrate Sheets
ASTM C1396 Standard Specification for Gypsum Board
ASTM E 90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound

Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements
ASTM F 1667 Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and
Staples
IBC International Building Code
GA 214 Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish
JKT05 SS3/5
GA 216 Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products.
SCAQMD Rl 1168Adhesive and Sealant Applications.
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Fire Resistance Directory
3.3 DEFINITIONS
3.3.1 High Purity Synthetic Gypsum (HPSG) Board Construction Terminology
High purity synthetic gypsum (HPSG) is fire resistant and moisture resistant
plasterboard consists of gypsum plaster core with vermiculite, fibre glass, silicon and
fly ash additives. Heavy impact board shall be 100% asbestos free, fire reinforced
boards having a density of not less than 925 kg/m3 and approved by Fire Safety
Bureau to be non-combustible/limited combustibility in accordance with the British
Standard 476 Part 22:1987.
The construction of the drywall solid partition shall be tested in accordance with BS
476.
3.4 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
3.4.1 Sound Transmission Characteristics
Unless otherwise stated, all drywall assemblies to achieve minimum acoustic of

STC50. For drywall assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construction
identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined according to
ASTM-E90 and classified according to ASTM-E413 by a qualified independent
testing agency.
For Conference Rooms and Meeting Rooms : STC shall achieve minimum acoustic
of STC53 on all walls, including walls adjoining private offices and/or any other room
space for teleconference/meeting room use.
3.4.2 Thermal Properties
All drywall shall achieve:
• Thermal conductivity of 0.167W/mk;
JKT05 SS3/6
• Thermal resistance (R) Value of 0.118m2K/W.
3.4.3 P.E. Endorsement
For fire-rated partitions, Endorsement by the Installers PE is required for special

building materials.
3.4.4 Test Reference
BS 1230 Part 1 : 1985 (Type 4)
Breaking Strength
Transverse 734 N
Longitudinal 857 N
Surface Water Resistance 100 gm/sq.m
Average Water Absorption 2.6%
a) ASTM C1185
Determination of Moisture Content 13.8%
Determination of Moisture Movement 0.03%
b) BS EN 1373
Shear Strength 0.39N/mm2
c) ASTM C109
Compressive Strength 18.9N/mm2
3.5 DRYWALL PARTITION
a) General
All drywall partitions shall be approved screw stud abuse-resistant gypsum

demountable drywall partition system, tested to BS5234 Part 2: 1992, Strength
& Robustness Test.
b) One-Hour (1-hour) Fire-rated Drywall Partition System
[Applicable to proposed Wall Type 5]

One-hour fire-rated drywall system shall be USG Boral FIRESTOP® Drywall
Partition system or approved equivalent.
JKT05 SS3/7
One (1) layer of 16mm thick fire-rated gypsum fiber panel clad on both sides of
100mm studs system to form an overall wall thickness of approximately
132mm (without wall finishes). Cavity shall be filled with rockwool insulation for
enhanced STC.
Alternative drywall system & built-ups may be submitted to the Architect

provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative proposal comply with the
requirements of the standards specified as well as relevant local authority Fire
c) Two-Hour (2-hour) Fire-rated Drywall Partition System

Two-hour fire-rated drywall system shall be USG Boral FIRESTOP® Drywall
Partition system or approved equivalent.
Two (2) layers of 13mm thick fire-rated gypsum fiber panel clad on both sides
of 90mm studs system to form an overall wall thickness of approximately
142mm (without wall finishes). Cavity shall be filled with rockwool insulation for
enhanced STC.
Alternative drywall system & built-ups may be submitted to the Architect

provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative proposal comply with the
requirements of the standards specified as well as relevant local authority Fire
d) Installation Drywall Steel Framing
Unless otherwise specified, the drywall framing shall be profiled steel studs &
runners. The studs shall have minimum 90mm deep of 22 gauge thick with
proprietary screw of lengths greater than 30 mm. The runners shall also be
90mm deep of 22 gauge thick. Self-bracket bearing and all necessary
accessories, method of fixing and installation shall be strictly in accordance
with manufacturer’s written instruction.
Install metal stud wall framing in strict accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions:
i. Attach top tracks and bottom runners to floor structure and structural
elements with suitable fasteners located 50mm from each end and
JKT05 SS3/8
spaced at maximum 300mm centres. Provide continuous sealant joint at

the base track.
ii. Position studs vertically, engaging top tracks and bottom runners, spaced
at maximum 600mm on centre. At splice to bottom runners, place metal
stud section over splice between adjacent vertical studs. Secure splice
piece to each runner with 4 framing screws on each side of runners.
Place studs in direct contact with all doors frame jambs, abutting
partitions, partition corners and existing construction elements.
iii. Do not splice vertical metal stud members.
iv. All full-height partition wall framing attached to structure or structural

elements above shall be installed with separated deflection and top
tracks allowing for 20mm gap for building deflection. Install min. 50mm
thick, rockwool density 100kg/m3, acoustical sealant at all gaps to
provide sound insulation and fire smoke barrier.
v. Provide horizontal bridging for all stud partitions over 2400mm high at
1200mm on centre maximum with 38mm rolled channels through studs
and screw attached in place. Lap channels by nesting one inside the
other at a depth of at least 200mm and secure with end angle clips.
vi. Provide all braced framing of steel stud framing as detailed in shop
drawings. Use only mechanical attachment or welding as required per
AISI Specification.
vii. Partition above ceiling shall allow for cut out opening service ducts,
trunking and cable trays. The Contractor shall co-ordinate with all sub-
contractors for the exact size and location of the openings. Any gaps
around any pipes, ducts, through the partition shall be properly sealed
with proprietary fire and smoke stop system.
viii. If full height partition had to be terminated below ventilation duct routed
parallel to the partition, the stud of the partition shall be secured to the
support frame of the duct. In such cases, space between the duct and
reinforced concrete soffit need not be sealed up.
ix. Steel stud framing system shall require to be provided taking into
consideration of load/ weight of proposed door, glazing, glass partition
JKT05 SS3/9
whichever openings provision deem required & specified in drawings &

schedule.
e) Lining - Fire-rated Gypsum Fiber Board
The lining material shall be 13 mm thick, high abuse resistance, USG Boral
FIBEROCK® Board or approved equivalent.
Characteristics of Fiber-reinforced Gypsum Panels
Panel Composite 13mm thick fiber reinforced gypsum core, with 2.5mm
thick high strength cellulose surface, pre-coated and
ready to receive final finish
Core BS 476 Part 4, non-combustibility (SPRING tested)
Surface BS 476 Part 6 & 7, Class ‘O’ (SPRING tested)
System structural BS 5234: Part 2, 1992 (SPRING tested)
Fire Rating Up to 2 hours (FRL -/120/120)
Acoustic Rating STC50 (no insulation); STC57 (Insulation 60kg/m3)
Strength (Annex A – L)
Weight 54 kg/m2
Nail-Pull Resistance 120 lbf
Screw Withdrawal 90 lbf
Flexural Strength 110 lbf
Bending Radius > 30 ft.
Edge Configuration Long edges tapered; ends cut square
f) Installation of Abuse Resistant Gypsum Fiber Board
i. Install gypsum fiberboard in strict accordance with Manufacturer’s

instructions, GA 216, and UL Fire Resistance Directory/Installation
Requirement.
ii. Apply gypsum fiber board panel perpendicular to stud or framing with all
attachment to firm bearing surfaces over framing members. Install
panels in such a manner that panel joints do not align with edge of
opening. Staggered joints on the opposite side of panel. Tightly butt
tapered end board edge joints.
JKT05 SS3/10
iii. Treat cut edges, holes, fastener heads, and joints, including those at
angle intersections with partition paper tapes and All-Purpose Ready-
mixed joint compound.
iv. Place gypsum fibre board panels over supporting framing members with
panel ends aligning and parallel with framing members.
v. Application of fasteners shall proceed from centre of field of panel toward

ends and edges. Install fasteners 9.5mm from ends and edges of panels,
and 300mm on centre within the field of the panel, and along abutting
end joints.
g) Insulation
All partition shall be filled with termite resistant Acoustical Fire Slab 100kg/m3
density, min. 50mm thick rockwool slab, to give an overall STC50 to the
Drywall system.
Acoustic Slab Technical Properties
Nominal Density 100 kg/m3
Dimension min. 50mm thick x 1200mm x 600mm (Thickness

shall subject to specialist’s detail to achieve Drywall
STC requirements)
Thermal Conductivity 0.034 W/mk at 25 oC (ASTM C518-1991)
Fire Performance Non-combustible (BS 476 Part 4)
Moisture Resistance Absorb less than 0.02 Vol % (ASTM C1104/1104M)
Water Absorption Less than 1% (BS 2972:75)
Melting Point Approximately 1000 oC
Sound Absorption ASTM C423
Frequency Hz
125250500100020004000NRC* (Noise Reduction Coefficient)
Thickness (75mm) 0.540.811.101.101.031.011.03
Tested and approved in accordance to SIRIM and SPRING
Conforms to BS 3958 : Part 5 : 1986. “Specification for bonded Man-made

mineral fibre”.
JKT05 SS3/11
h) Compatibility
i. Rockwool is compatible with all materials in which it is likely to come into

contact with in normal building applications.
ii. Environment - No CFCs or HCFCs are used in the manufacturing of

rockwool. The product shall be free of asbestos.
iii. Biological - Rockwool offers no sustenance to vermin and does not

encourage the growth of fungi, moulds or bacteria.
iv. Chemical - Rockwool is chemically inert. An aqueous extract of the

products is neutral or slightly alkaline
i) Sound and Thermal Insulation Control
i. All partition shall be filled with termite resistant Acoustical Fire Slab
100kg/m3 density, min. 50mm thick rockwool slab; to give an overall
STC50 to the Drywall system.
ii. Seal all perimeter gaps of the wall frame system with acoustical sealant
prior to installation of gypsum panel, for maximum sound transmission
loss.
iii. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around Cut
openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or
behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.
iv. Insure that all recessed panels, electrical outlets, light switch boxes, etc
are encased with fire-barrier seal wrap to seal all gaps and maintain
continuity in fire and smoke protection in all fire-rated assemblies.
j) Installation of Control and Expansion Joint
i. Gypsum base assemblies shall be isolated with control joints or other

means where:
a. Partition or furring abuts a structural element (except floor) or

dissimilar wall or ceiling;
b. A ceiling abuts a structural element, dissimilar wall or partition or

other vertical penetration;
JKT05 SS3/12
c. Construction changes within the plane of the partition or ceiling;
d. Partition or furring run exceeds 9000mm;
e. Ceiling dimensions exceed 15000mm in either direction with

perimeter relief, 9000mm without relief;
f. Expansion or control joints occur in the based exterior wall.
ii. Ceiling height door frames may be used as control joints. Less-than-
ceiling height frame shall have control joints extending to ceiling from
both corners.
iii. At locations indicated on the approved shop drawings.
iv. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces, with 12.5mm
between board. Apply Acoustical Sealant at base of space, apply control
joint accessory piece at face. Place joints vertically at jamb head of
double doors. Place vertical joint at jamb head, latch side, of doors set in
gypsum board walls, U.N.O. on the approved shop drawings.
k) Installation of Accessory Trims & Beads
i. Reinforced all vertical and horizontal exterior corners with corner beads
fastened with stainless steel stapled at 230mm o.c. on both flanges along
entire length of beads.
ii. Where walls terminates against masonry or other dissimilar material,

apply trims over face layer edge and fasten with stainless steel staples
space at 230mm o.c. Install L-shape casing bead at all exposed ends of
gypsum plaster board, and at locations indicated on the Drawings.
l) Joint Treatment
i. Reinforce all interior and exterior corners for both ceiling and wall
surfaces. Apply initial coating of joint compound about 76mm wide,
pressing tape firmly into compound, wipe off excess compound. Apply
second coat of compound with tools of sufficient width to extend beyond
joint centre approximately 100mm. Drawn compound down to a smooth
even plane.
ii. After drying or setting, sand or sponge joints, edges and corners,
eliminating high spot and excessive compound to produce smooth finish
JKT05 SS3/13
surface. Prepare surface to receive subsequent finishes to a height of

150mm above finish surface. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so
that camber is o greater than 3mm when measured using 450mm
straight edge.
iii. Sand after second and third applications of joint compound. Take
precautions not to raise nap of paper when sanding.
m) Gypsum Accessories
i. Corner Reinforcement
Corner beads permit construction of true, concealed external angles with

gypsum base and panels. The exposed nose of the bead helps to
prevent damage from impact and provides a screed for finishing. It
provides a key for jointing compound and eliminates shadowing and edge
cracking.
ii. Bull-nose/Spray Corner (Internal & External) Beads
Paper faced metal tape corner bead with internal and external corner
beads in bull nose of various radius, or spray corner.
Material:
B1W (90o Outside Corner), B2 (90 o Inside Corner)
B1OS (135 o Outside Corner), B2OS (135 o inner Cove)
SLOC (19mm radius Bullnose Outside Corner)
SLIC (19mm radius Bullnose Inner Cove)
Danish (38mm radius Bullnose Outside Corner)
iii. Edge Reinforcement
Material: L-shaped or J-shaped Casing bead
iv. Control Joint
Relieves stresses of expansion and construction across the joint in large

wall areas.
JKT05 SS3/14
Material: Roll-formed zinc control joint with perforated flanges, 1-3/4 inch
wide, with ¼ inch wide center channel.
v. Expansion Joint Trims
W-shaped, roll-formed zinc expansion joint trim with integral nailing

flange. Zinc alloy to conform to BS6561:1985 (1991) of minimum 24
gage (0.70mm). Trim depths to match board thickness.
vi. Joint Tape - 50mm width fibreglass reinforced paper tape conforms to
requirements of ASTM C475.
vii. Joint Compound - All Purpose Ready-mixed
Joint Compound conforms to requirements of ASTM C475.
3.6 CONSTRUCTION
Construction shall be carried out to the approval of the Architect under experiences
factory supervision and control. Only work which cannot be carried out in the
workshop or factory should be prefabricated and assembled quickly on site.
All joints shall be to the best trade practice type of joints. They should be cut and
assembled neatly and accurately and all joints, junctions and intersections shall have
neat hairline.
Butt joints shall be constructed between gypsum plaster board panels. Edges of
jointing panels shall be taped and plastered with approved jointing compound and
thereafter apply with sealant to receive wall covering.
The Contractor is to submit detailed section of the joints before installation.
Adequate allowance must be made for thermal movements of any aluminium frame
members.
All members shall be of sufficient strength and deflection shall be kept to maximum
of L/50 considering a distributed load of 5 Ibs per sq ft. The weight of the partition
shall not exceed 6 Ibs per sq ft
Accessories to be used to facilitate jointing and fixing may be connected to the edges
of adjacent spaces. He is to allow for in his pricing, methods of finishing above
JKT05 SS3/15
finished ceiling level, below finished floor level and beyond grid lines against other
wall and windows elements all to the Architect’s satisfaction.
The deviation range to be allowed for on the floor to ceiling height shall be from 0 to
30mm. This includes an allowance of 6mm for variation in the horizontally of the floor
level, 20mm for deflection of ceiling and 6mm for variation sin horizontally of the
ceiling. The partition shall maintain this performance under the most adverse
condition of deviation.
The partition shall not show signs of deterioration which could be objectionable from
points of view of appearance, habitability or application of finishes. The installed
partitions and its component parts shall run straight to line and to be set vertical and
plumb.
3.7 SKIRTING
The partition shall incorporate homogeneous tile/ PU/ epoxy/ stainless steel skirting
as detailed in drawings.
Skirting should be provided on both sides of the partitions and shall be capable of
carrying electrical and telephone services and minor plumbing pipes.
3.8 PARTITION PANELS
The panels on both sides of the cavity type partition generally comprised of approved
quality 12.5mm thick plain gypsum plaster board.
The total thickness of the cavity type partition panel shall be 100mm thick and this
overall thickness should be flushed with the aluminium framing.
The partition panel shall be assembled neatly. All panels shall come one piece and
fixed between the aluminium frame members and no joint shall be exposed. No
cutting piece shall be allowed.
The sample of partition panel shall be submitted to the Architect for approval.
The panel shall be free from warps and other defects. Any replacement of defective
panels shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
JKT05 SS3/16
The fire resistant material for in in-fill must satisfy the local Building Authority and
Fire Service Bureau and comply with the specifications shown within the fire
protection drawings.
3.9 FINISHES TO PARTITION PANELS
The gypsum plaster board panels for the partitions shall be finished with the wall
covering/ painting as specified.
Thickness of applied finishes to the gypsum plaster board panel shall require to
comply with requirements or standards stipulated by the Building Control Division
and Fire Service Bureau or any equivalent local authority Code and requirements
(where applicable).
The colour of the surface finish shall not appreciable fade or darken due to action of
natural or artificial light during the defects liability period.
3.10 IN-FILL MATERIAL FOR SOUND PROOFING
Basic in-fill material in partition shall be 75mm rock wool material of not less than 1kg
or 2lbs density or other equivalent materials acceptable to Building Control Authority
or equivalent local authority Building Department. The panels shall be retained with
no fastening of fixing visible. All anchorages shall be concealed. Such sound proof
walls shall go all the way up to the soffit of the concrete floor above.
3.11 GLAZING
[Applicable to proposed Wall Type 8 & 10]
All glazed panels to the partitions shall have solid aluminium or stainless steel or
timber frame and glazing bars and are glazed in 8mm thick first quality coated or
patterned float glass or otherwise stated or shown on the drawings. All glass shall
conform to BS 952 and shall be free from blemishes, bubbles, air holes, specks,
scratches and other defects and samples shall be submitted for the approval of the
Architect.
JKT05 SS3/17
All glass delivered to site must be in its original packing showing the manufacturer’s
markings, guarantee, type of glass, etc attached to the outside of the container.
All broken, cracked or scratched glass must be removed and replaced with new
glass to satisfaction of the Architect.
All glass must be clean inside and outside after installation. On no account shall be
cleaned by scraping the glass.
All glass panels shall be fixed with neoprene or other approved gaskets and
aluminium fixing beads.
3.12 UNEVEN ABUTTING SURFACE
The Nominated Sub-Contractor is deemed to have allowed for in his unit rates for the
filling up of all cavities formed when his partition abuts the existing surfaces of walls,
ceiling and other adjoining structure. The fill used is to be approved by the Architect
and this may be in the manner of felt strips, neoprene strips or wet calcium plaster in
filling.
3.13 SAMPLES AND MOCK-UP PARTITION
The Contractor is deemed to have allowed for in his unit rate for the erection of one
full and complete “mock-up” partition for the full storey height inclusive of security
screen and one double leaf door all as specified. The length of the partition shall
consist of three panels and totaling 12’0” long. Counter-proposed size of mock-up
partition shall obtain Architect’s clearance.
3.14 CO-ORDINATION
The Contractor shall co-ordinate with sub-contractors for all other trades in the
programming of his work, for example trades listed in the following but not limited to:
• Mechanical & electrical services/ penetrations;
• Any door/ window/ louvre/ glass walls/ security mesh wall systems;
• Suspended/ wall-mounted ceiling system;

JKT05 SS3/18
• Roof termination & interfacing (if any works affected)
• Other architectural components & adjacent trades.
3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
The Architect will conduct an above-ceiling observation prior to installation of gypsum

board ceilings and report any deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not proceed with
installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have been
corrected.
Notify Architect one week in advance of the date and the time when the Project, or
part of the Project, will be ready for an above-ceiling observation.
3.16 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces, and where
ever to the clean room standard.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer,

that ensure gypsum board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the
time of Completion.
3.17 ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS AND TENDER
3.17.1 The architectural drawings are diagrammatic and do not purport to identify or solve
the problems of thermal or structural movement, vapour barriers, fixings and
anchorage, flatness and stability of facing, and moisture disposal.
The drawings merely indicated the ‘profile, configurations and finishes required
together with the position relative to the structural frame and interior building
elements. The details contain therein serve merely as suggested directions for
solving some of the major design requirements. The Contractor may use these
details and develop them as he deems fit.
The Specification specifies the minimum requirements without limiting the Fabricator
as to the method of achieving such performance.
JKT05 SS3/19
3.18 SITE CONDITIONS & EXISTING STRUCTURES
The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited the site before submitting his Tender
and shall be wholly responsible for acquainting himself with the nature, position,
constraints of the site and the full extent and character of the works and all other
information relevant to the execution of the works.
The Contractor shall not be entitled to claim extra payment on the grounds of
insufficient or inaccurate tender information relating to propose or existing structures.
A thorough examination of all available drawings shall be carried out by the

Contractor. The accuracy and completeness of any available drawings of existing
structure(s) is not guaranteed. The Contractor shall check all dimensions and beam
etc., positions on site himself.
3.19 DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS/PROPOSALS
Preliminary design proposals must be submitted with the tender. Notwithstanding the
acceptance of the Contractor’s design recommendation/ proposals by the Architect,
Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of the works including design
and shall make good any damage or defects arising from inadequate design.
3.20 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall submit for the consideration of the Architect preliminary design
drawings showing typical details fully dimensioned, showing finish, thickness,
profiles, jointing, welds, intersections and assembly; details of construction,
weatherproofing hardware and hardware schedules; reinforcement, anchorage and
structural supports; and such drawings and details (whichever applicable) as
required to fully illustrate all details of the work. The scale and detail of the drawings
are subject to Architect’s approval.
The Contractor shall outline details of his intended temporary works to the Architect
and incorporate his comments into the design. He shall then submit for the
Architect’s approval before the commencement of any on site construction, shop
drawings and calculations showing all details, manner and magnitude of the loading
on the structure. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the structural
elements to which the elements are to be fixed is adequate to support the load.
JKT05 SS3/20
3.21.1 Measurements
All true measurements of the building are to be in the metric system. The Contractor
shall be responsible for verifying all the dimensions and actual conditions on site.
These dimensions should be incorporated in the shop drawings prior to final
approval.
3.21.2 Preliminary Programme
The Tenderer shall also submit a preliminary programme of the works showing the
various stages of design sampling, testing, fabrication, delivery and installation of the
works.
3.22 TENDER REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall submit with his Tender details of builder’s work and special
attendance required other than those already described in this Specification. Any
other items of work or facilities not so stated shall be deemed to be provided by the
Contractor when required.
3.22.1 Submittals
Within one month of award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit updated
information as follows:-
i. Organization Chart.
ii. Detailed programme of the Works.
iii. Shop Drawings:-
Complete scaled construction detail drawings drawn to full scale. The drawings
shall fulfil all requirements made by the Architect during the technical
negotiation with the Contractor.
iv. Sealant & Gaskets
Samples and performance data of sealant and gasket materials.
v. Structural calculations as required verified and endorsed by a Professional

Engineer.
JKT05 SS3/21
vi. Performance Testing Particulars
The testing programme with detailed description of the testing procedure,

testing facilities to be used and the testing mock-up drawings, following the
testing requirements as specified in Part IV.
3.23.2 Upon Architect’s approval of the shop drawings, four copies and one reproducible
print for each of the final approved drawings, plus four sets of the above reduce to
one-quarter of the original size shall be submitted for the Architect’s and Employer’s
use.
3.23.3 After the shop drawings and the structural calculation, etc. are approved, the
Contractor shall submit the following for the Architect’s approval before fabrication of
the bulk.
i. Plan of Inspection of Component
Material specification, supply source, and procedure for inspection of the

quality of the components of the systems during the manufacturing and
fabricating process.
3.23.4 Should the Contractor consider it necessary to fabricate in bulk before approval in
order to meet completion date, it is entirely at his own risk and no compensation in
time and cost will be granted if the material and/or workmanship is eventually not
acceptable to the Architect.
3.23.5 Before the components are installed, the Contractor shall submit the following for the
i. Performance Test Report –
Four copies of the performance Report as described in this Specification

shall be submitted upon approval of the testing by the Architect.
ii. Report of Inspection of Components –
Report on the conditions and procedure of the manufacturing process and

also results of the inspection the products in accordance with the approved
‘Plan of Inspection of Components’.
iii. Report on Inspection on Building Works/Site Conditions –
The Contractor shall monitor the site conditions constantly and report every
month the results of the inspection, in a deviation/defects list form to the
Architect. Format to be submitted for approval.
JKT05 SS3/22
iv. Plan of Inspection –
Preliminary plan of the procedure for site inspection during installation stage
so as to maintain quality control on the site.
v. Plan of Protection –
Preliminary plan of the method of protecting the works with description as to

when the protection can be removed. The plan to consider effect on other
trades.
3.23.6 Before the date of completion of the works, the contractor shall prepare and supply
to the Architect, record drawings and record photographs of the whole of the works
as installed and as requested by the Architect. These drawings and photographs
shall be specially prepared for record purpose
3.23.7 The Contractor shall submit a maintenance manual for all systems.
3.24 Manufacturers & Installers
Manufacturers and installers shall have proven achievement experience in similar

work for at least 3 years and are subject to approval by the Architect.
3.25 Guarantee
a) Submit written guarantee agreeing to repair or replace defective materials and

workmanship during the guarantee period. The Contractor shall be responsible
for damages to building and furnishings caused by defective materials and
workmanship including water leakage during the guarantee period.
Defective materials and workmanship of the work shall include abnormal

deterioration, aging or weathering of the work, leakage of water or air
pressures and forces, failure of operating parts to function normally,
deterioration or discolouration of finishes in excess of normal weathering and
aging, glass breakage, secondary glass damage or breakage due to falling
fragments, and failure of work to fulfil other specified performance
requirements (whichever applicable). The guarantee should not include
damage caused by vandalism, or natural conditions exceeding the
performance requirements. However, the guarantee should include failures or
JKT05 SS3/23
defects for which the causes cannot be determined. This guarantee and its
enforcement shall not deprive the Employer of other action, right or remedy
available to him.
b) The general guarantee shall cover a period of ten (10) years from the date of
issue of the Completion Certification of the Main contract by the Architect.
c) Repairs or replacements during the guaranteed period required by unforeseen

circumstances (which exceed performance requirements), alterations, abuse of
the work, vandalism will be completed by the Contractor at Employer’s
discretion and paid for by the Employer at prevailing rates.
d) The guarantee shall cover structural failure and latent defects of the system in
compliance with the current and latest regulations and requirements stipulated
by the relevant local authorities.
SS004_Steel & Metal Works
JKT05 SS4/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 4 - STEEL AND METAL WORKS
SECTION 4
4.0 STEEL AND METAL WORKS
4.1 METAL GENERALLY
All materials shall be of the best quality obtainable and shall be clean, straight and
free from twist before assembly. If straightening and flattening is necessary, it shall
be done in a manner that will not alter the integrity of the material.
All materials shall be subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer, but the fact
that the contractor has used ‘approved’ materials will not absolve him of his
responsibility in respect of this section of the Works.
All steel and iron shall be approved origin and to comply with the relevant
requirements of British Standards Institution.
The Contractor is to furnish, for structural steelwork supplied by him, manufacturer’s

mill test certificates, and these are to be submitted for approval, by the
Architect/Engineer before any material is brought on to the Site.
The costs of preparing materials for testing, and for all Site and laboratory tests
under this heading will be borne by the Contractor, who will also provide all
necessary apparatus and facilities, transportation, and pay all charges for such
tests.
The Contractor will, as directed, take and deliver samples of structural steel for
testing at an approved laboratory. Should the results of a test be unsatisfactory, the
whole consignment of steel that the sample represents will be rejected.
The Contractor is to provide and maintain all necessary equipment for tests, in a
satisfactory condition on Site, for as long as the Architect/Engineer may require.
The Contractor is to provide the Architect with copies of all test results.
Structural steel, steel tubes, rectangular hollow sections and testing is to comply
with the relevant British Standard.
4.1.1 Drawings
The Drawings prepared by the Architect/Engineer are layout drawings for the
purposes of tendering and contracting. The Contractor is to prepare his own shop
JKT05 SS4/2
drawings, showing sizes, dimensions of all members, and sizes and dimensions of
all bolts and rivets, complete with details of welds, type of electrodes, welding
procedures, whether welding is to be shop or Site executed, and the other details as
are required for the purposes of fabrication and erection.
Before fabrication is commenced, the Contractor is to submit two copies of his shop
drawings to the Architect/Engineer for approval. When approved, one set will be
returned to the Contractor signed as approved, upon receipt of which the Contractor
will be free to commence fabrication.
It is to be expressly understood that such approval of shop drawings by the

Architect/Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors and/or
omissions contained in the drawings. The Contractor is to include for the costs of
preparing shop drawings for approval and fabrication purposes.
4.2 STANDARDS
Singapore Standards
SS 470 Hot Finished Structural Hollow Sections of Non-Alloy and Fine

Grain Structural Steel
Other Standards
BS EN 10152 Steel Finishes
BS EN ISO 3506-1 Mechanical properties of corrosion resistant stainless steel

fasteners. Bolts, screws and studs
BS EN ISO 3506-2 Mechanical properties of corrosion-resistant stainless-steel

fasteners.
JKT05 SS4/3
BS EN 485 Aluminium and aluminium alloys
BS EN 499 Welding consumables
BS EN 895 Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials
BS EN 1172 Sheet & strip for building purposes
BS EN 1461 Galvanising
BS EN 1652 Plate, sheet, strip & circles for general purposes
BS EN 3506-1 Mechanical properties of corrosion resistant stainless steel
fasteners
BS EN 10048 Stainless Steel
BS EN 10055 Equal flange tees
BS EN 10056-1&2 Equal and unequal angles
BS EN 10088 Stainless Steels
BS EN 10088-01 Stainless steel-List of Stainless steel
BS EN 10088-02 Technically Delivery Conditions For Semi Finished Products-

Sheet/Plate And Strip For General Purposes
BS EN 10088-3 Technically delivery conditions for semi finished products-bars

rods and sections for general purposes
BS EN 10111 Low carbon steel sheet & strip for cold forming
BS EN 10130 Cold-rolled low carbon steel flat products for cold forming –
technical delivery conditions
BS EN 10131 Cold-rolled uncoated high yield strength steel flats products
BS EN 10137-1 to 3 Plates & wide flats. High yield strength steel
BS EN 10139 Uncoated mild steel narrow strip (1) for cold forming
BS EN 10140 Cold rolled narrow steel strip-tolerances on dimension & shape
JKT05 SS4/4
BS EN 10142 Continuously hot dip zinc coated low carbon steels strip and
sheet for cold forming – technical delivery conditions
BS EN 10143 Continuously hot dip metal coated steel sheet and strip –
tolerances on dimensions and shape
BS EN 10147 Continuously hot dip zinc coated structural steel sheet & strip-
technical delivery conditions
BS EN 10149 Flat products. High yield strength for cold forming
BS EN 10152 Electrolytically zinc coated cold rolled steel flat products for
cold forming– Technical delivery conditions
BS EN 10169-1 Organic coated flat products
BS EN 10209 Low carbon steel flat products for vitreous enamelling
BS EN 10210-1&2 Non alloy & fine grain steels. Hot finished
BS EN 10214 Hot dip zinc-aluminium (za) coated sheet & strip
BS EN 10215 Hot dip aluminium-zinc (az) coated sheet & strip
BS EN 10218-2 Wire and wire products. General
BS EN 10258 Cold-rolled stainless steel and narrow strip and cut lengths -
BS EN 10259 Cold-rolled stainless steel wide strip and plate/sheet -

BS EN 10268 Flat products. High yield strength micro-alloyed steels for cold
forming
BS EN 12020 Aluminium and aluminium alloys
BS EN 12163 Rod for general purposes
BS EN 12166 Wire for general purposes
BS EN 12167 Profiles & rectangular bar for general purposes
BS EN 12449 Tube for general purposes
BS EN 12540 Corrosion protection of metals - Electrodeposited coatings
JKT05 SS4/5
BS 499 Welding terms and symbols
BS 1052 Wire: Mild steel for general engineering purposes
BS 1453 Specification for filler materials for gas welding
BS 2901 Fillers and rods for gas shielded arc welding
BS 2994 Steel sections
BS 3692 ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts
BS 3830 Vitreous enamelled steel building components
BS 3987 Specification for anodic oxide coatings on wrought aluminium

for external architectural applications (AMD 10944)
BS 4190 ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts
BS 4320 Metal washers for general engineering purposes
BS 4360 Specification for weldable structural steels
BS 4464 Spring washers for engineering work
BS 4604 The use of high strength friction grip bolts in structural steel
work.
BS 6323-1 to 7 Tubes. Seamless & welded
BS 6363 Specification for welded cold formed steel structural hollow

sections
BS 7668 Weather resistant steels. Hot finished
AS 1231 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Anodic oxidation coatings
AS 3715 Metal finishing: Thermoset powder coating
ASTM 2605.2 Organic coatings on aluminium extrusions
4.2 GALVANIZED STEEL TUBING
Galvanized steel tubing shall comply with the requirements of BS:1387 medium
grade.
JKT05 SS4/6
4.3 FABRICATED MILD STEEL
a. Generally mild steel shall be fabricated by welding or brazing and shall be

ground smooth after manufacture, and free from all defects.
b. Welds shall be 7mm fillet and full butt welds as required.
c. Mild steel shall be fabricated by workpeople skilled in this work and shall be
accurately manufactured and assembled to angles, curves and sizes as
specified, free from warps, hammer marks, burrs, distortion and other
imperfections.
d. No fabrication work shall be commenced until shop drawings have been

prepared and approved by the Architect/Engineer. Mild steel shall be
fabricated in convenient sections for transport and fixing.
e. Fabricated mild steel, plugged and screwed to concrete or masonry shall be

fixed with galvanized or cadmium plated screws and approved patent plugs.
f. Hot-rolled steel sections, including angles, shall comply and be made from
steel complying with British Standard.
g. Hot-rolled steel bars shall comply with relevant British Standard.
h. Cold-rolled steel sections shall comply with relevant British Standard and be
made from steel complying with BS:1449.
i. Rectangular hollow sections are to comply with British Standard.Steel plate

shall comply with relevant British Standard.
j. Steel sheet and strip shall comply with relevant British Standard.
k. Steel tubes shall comply with relevant British Standard.
l. Welded wire mesh is to be made from wire complying with relevant British
Standard.
4.4 CAST IRON
Cast iron shall be from the best quality tough gray pegs, and of not less quality than
the relevant British Standard.
Castings shall be sharp and of the exact form required, shaped to fit the parts truly
JKT05 SS4/7
and hold full dimensions. They shall be entirely free from air holes, scoriae, core
nails, flaws and defects of every kind. Holes shall be filled afterwards, all at the
Contractor’s expense.
Sea sand or salt water shall not be used in casting.
4.5 TESTS
All wrought iron, steel and cast iron articles shall be submitted to a reasonable test
for strength, if so required by the Architect, at the Contractor’s expense.
4.6 STAINLESS STEEL
a) All stainless steel shall be low carbon chromium nickel austenitic steel in
accordance with relevant BS. All exposed screws fastenings etc., shall be of
appropriate material, to the approval of the Architect.
b) The hairline finish on stainless steel shall be achieved by brushing in one

direction with 150 N 200 abrasive mesh, to the approval of the Architect.
c) Unless otherwise specify, all stainless steel should be grade 316.
Fabrication shall be carried out by a manufacturer regularly engaged in production

of architectural metalwork whose workpeople shall be skilled at fabricating high-
grade ornamental metalwork. Materials, methods of fabrication, assembly,
installation, fastenings, supports, and braces, shall all be in accordance with the
approved shop drawings. The work shall be fabricated and assembled in as large
sections in the workshop as is consistent with the transport and site requirements.
All mitres and joints shall form flush, hairline joints and all joints between sections
and all site splices shall produce enough strength to resist deformation and
misalignment. The work shall be fabricated and installed with concealed fastenings
in as far as practicable.
Welding of non-ferrous metals and stainless steel shall be on concealed sides to

minimize pitting, discoloration, weld halo, or other surface imperfections after
finishing. Welds shall thoroughly penetrate the material and produce a complete
fusion of metal. Wire brushes used for shop or site work shall be made of non-
corrosive wire. Dissimilar metals shall be insulated against electrolytic or galvanic
JKT05 SS4/8
action.
All stainless steel work shall be securely installed and anchored in position, set
plumb, square and level, and in proper alignment with other works.
Components shall be delivered, stored and handled to prevent damage of whatever

nature, factory-finished metals shall be protected in such an approved manner
during transportation and installation and such protection and shall be removed
when directed. Finished surfaces of work shall be cleaned to leave free of strains,
markings and defects of any kind and burrs and sharp corners shall be removed
from exposed work.
Stainless Steel railings for internal use shall comply with relevant British Standard
containing Nickel and Chromium in the percentage of 18 and 8 respectively.
Stainless Steel railings for external use shall comply with relevant British Standard
containing Chromium, Nickel-molybdenum in the percentages of 18/10/3
respectively.
4.7 ALUMINIUM
Aluminium shall be an approved architectural alloy conforming to the requirements

of relevant Singapore Standard (or equivalent local Standards) and British Standard
and suitable for the purpose employed, based on the following:-
Type of Material & Use General Application External High Strength

Purpose
Extruded bars and HE30 or HE20 NE5 HE15
sections including round
tube and hollow sections
Drawn Tube HT30 NT5 HT15
Plate, sheet and strip HS30 or NS30 NS5 HC15
Bolts HB30 NB6 HB15
Rivets HR30 or NR60 NR5 HR15
Castings LM40 or LM60 LM5 or LM6 LM10 or LM25
Forgings HP30 HF30 HF15

Extruded glazing bars HE9 HE9 -
JKT05 SS4/9
The finish shall described as either mill finish, rough textured finish, soft textured
finish, polished, or anodized clear or coloured.
Aluminium units shall be framed with corners of adequate strength and design to
prevent distortion, reinforced with steel as necessary and with hardwood cores
where required and factory welded, riveted or bolted. All bolts screws shall be of
stainless steel or approved alloy, anodized as a unit, countersunk flush where
practicable, or semi-countersunk round headed where it is not practicable to
countersunk fully.
4.8 ANODIZING
All aluminium surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and given a coating of clear
non-fading coloured anodizing of the hard inorganic type compatible with the alloy
use. The coating shall be applied over a caustic etched finished and sealed
effectively. The coating shall have a minimum film thickness of 0.02032 mm when
tested in accordance with ASIM and British Standards. Protect surfaces from
handling marks until sealers and protective coatings are applied.
After cleaning and finishing, a clear, non-yellowing colourless coating shall be

applied to all surfaces of aluminium. The coating shall be of sufficient thickness to
resist damage from alkaline mortar and plaster for the period of the works.
Protective tapes and stripping shall be applied on all aluminium surfaces and shall
not be removed until the final cleaning down of the building.
Where aluminium comes into contact with concrete, brickwork or plaster, it shall be
coated with an insulating lacquer paint or tape etc., to ensure that electrolyte
corrosion is avoided.
4.9 BRASS
Brass for general use shall consist of 61.5% - 64% copper and 34% - 38.5% zinc.
Brass for all decorative work or external work such as handrails or brass in contact
with sea water shall consist of 70% copper, 29% zinc, 1% tin.
JKT05 SS4/10
4.10 BRONZE
Bronze shall consist of 85% copper, 5% zinc, 5% tin, and unless otherwise specified
shall have a natural colour polished finish.
4.11 EXPANDED METAL LATH
The Contractor is required to submit sample for the Architect's approval before
proceeding with the works.
All metal lath is to be fixed as taut as possible, with the largest dimension of the
mesh running between supports and with stiffening ribs uppermost in the same
direction. Cut ends are to be turned away from the plastered surface.
End laps are to be less than 25mm when the lap occurs at the bearer and otherwise
not less than 50mm. Side laps are to be not less than 25mm. All laps are to be
securely wired together with 18 gauge soft galvanized binding wire at intervals of
not more than 75 mm.
4.12 CHICKEN WIRE MESH
Chicken wire mesh for reinforcing screeds is to be galvanized, 18 SWG, with mesh
not longer than 19mm.
4.13 CHROMIUM PLATING
In all cases where chromium plated articles are specified to be provided by the
Contractor, the plating shall be on a base material of copper or brass.
The plating shall be of the quality described in relevant BS for service condition no.
3 - normal outdoor conditions and shall be free from visible defects, such as
blisters, pits, unplated areas, cloudy patches, cracks or stains.
4.14 GALVANIZING / SHERARDIZING
Galvanized articles are to be thoroughly and evenly coated with zinc by the hot
dipped process and are to be free from stains, bare spots and other defects.
JKT05 SS4/11
Galvanizing shall be carried out after fabrication, and articles shall be thorough
cleaned in caustic and acid solutions before the galvanizing process is carried out.
The minimum weight of zinc deposited by galvanizing shall be 300 g/m2 of surface.
The galvanizing shall comply with the requirements of relevant BS.
The galvanizing articles are to be packed with care for transportation.
Any cutting, drilling abrasions or welding carried out after galvanizing must be
ground down to bare white metal and treated accordingly and approved cold
galvanizing paint. Wherever possible galvanizing is to be carried out after all
welding, cutting and drilling is to complete and the surface suitably protected.
Sherardized coatings shall comply with relevant BS class 1 to a minimum local

coating thickness of 30 microns.
Galvanizing to steel & metal works are to be guaranteed against defects and
workmanship for min. 10 years. In term of corrosion resistance, steel & metal works
shall not display more than 5% of surface rust after 10 years for pre-galvanizing
steel and 15 years for hot-dipped galvanized steel (performed after welding). Pro-
rated warranty schedule shall require to be submitted for Client’s acceptance should
there be any applicable.
4.15 POLYESTER POWDER PAINT FINISHES
Polyester powder finishes should comply with the requirements of relevant BS for
aluminium alloy components and relevant BS for steel components. The
components should be factory finished by applicators approved by the supplier of
the polyester powder. Where conditions allow, only one applicator should be used
for the whole of the works. One powder supplier only should be used for the whole
of the works.
The reference to one applicator is made to ensure the greatest control of colour
consistency throughout the production period. Al components should be control to
a minimum dry film thickness of 75 microns.
JKT05 SS4/12
4.16 PVDF POLYVINYLIDENE FLUORIDE
PVDF may reasonably be specified to be in accordance with relevant BS or AAMA

and the paint manufacturer’s specification.
For architectural use, PVF2/acrylic blends should contain no less than 70% of
polyvinylidene fluoride resin.
The components should be factory finished by applicators approved by the paint

supplier. Where conditions allow only one applicator should used for the whole of
the works.
The reference to one applicator is made to ensure the greatest control of colour
consistency throughout the production period.
All components should be coated on all significant surfaces with a spray primer coat
to a thickness recommended by the paint supplier and allowed to cure for the
interval recommended by the manufacturer before spray application of top coat to a
minimum dry film thickness of 25 microns.
The finish shall meet or exceed the requirements of AAMA 605.2 when tested by an
independent testing laboratory for the following properties:
a adhesion
b scratch resistance impact
c cupping
d Resistance to mortar
e resistance to acetic acid/salt spray
f resistance to humidity
g weathering
4.17 FLUOROCARBON FINISH ON ALUMINIUM
Surfaces shall receive a thermally cured metallic/ colour pigmented Polyvinylidene

fluoride resin (PVDF) coating system, containing not less than 70% of the
fluorocarbon resin “Kynar 500”.
The coating system must be spray applied under factory conditions to pretreated
base metal in a three coat, three bake process (with a top coat of clear PVF2 resin),
JKT05 SS4/13
in strict accordance with the coating systems, manufacturers recommendations,

and to relevant AAMA for “Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on
Architectural Aluminium Extrusions & Panels”.
The coating shall meet or exceed the performance requirements specified in

relevant AAMA in respect to:-
a. Colour uniformity
b. Specular gloss
c. Dry film hardness
d. Film adhesion
e. Chemical resistance
f. Abrasion resistance
g. Chemical test :
- muriatic acid resistance test
- mortar test
- resistance to acid pollutants
- detergent resistance test
h. Corrosion test :
- humidity resistance
- salt spray resistance
i. Weathering :
- color retention
- chalk resistance
j. Sealant compatibility test
The coating system must be applied by the coating system manufacturer. The
applicator shall propose a program of records and samples of the entire coating
production for approval by the Architect, and which records and samples shall be
made available to the Architect for approval upon request. The surface quality of
the coating must be smooth and free of flow lines, streaks, blistering or other
imperfections. The coating must be opaque and uniform, within the range of
approved upper and lower limit samples when viewed under a uniform light source,
such as north daylight.
JKT05 SS4/14
Provide and furnish a compatible field touch-up PVF2 coating system formulated for
air-drying at ambient temperature, based on the “Kynar ADS” fluorocarbon resin, in
colour to match factory-applied finish. (Submit samples of the air dry system as well
as samples of actual touch-up work to factory-applied coating system).
Warrant the organic coating will not peel, check, crack, chalk or change colour for a
period of ten years from the Completion Date in the Architect’s Completion
Certificate and that the finish exceed or meets the standards set out in relevant
AAMA and BS which include but are not limited to the following: -
a. Colour change must not exceed 5 NBS colour units, or 5 E units on a Hunter
Colour Difference Meter, when measured in accordance with relevant ASTM
after five years of 45o South Florida exposure or equivalent.
b. Chalking must not exceed a no. 8 rating measured in accordance with

relevant ASTM after five years of 45o South Florida exposure or equivalent.
All surfaces exposed to view shall be finished. Surfaces shall match the
appearance, colour and texture of mock-up as approved by the Architect.
The Architect will inspect material prior to finishing and shall serve as sole judge
concerning the quality of material and its conformance to the drawings and
specifications. Colours shall be to the approval of the Architect. Colour range shall
not deviate from approved mock-up.
Complete certified inspection records for quality of finish and finish process records
shall be maintained.
All aluminium components shall be covered by special protective coatings. The

Sub-contractor shall state in his tender the type of protection proposed, complete
with samples and references to previous uses.
4.18 PRIME PAINT
At aluminium surfaces in contact with masonry, concrete to steel, prime paint steel
with zinc chromate or bituminous paint. Prime paint steel part of anchors, anchor
inserts, reinforcement and supports with zinc chromate. After field welding, remove
weld slag and touch up primed surface.
Provide minimum dry film thickness of one mil for zinc chromate and 30 mils for
JKT05 SS4/15
bituminous paint. Zinc chromate primer shall conform to GSA Specification.
4.19 FASTENERS
Bolts screws and nuts are to comply with relevant British Standard.
All screwed work is projecting at least two threads through nuts, and all bolts are to
have hexagon heads and nuts with standard threads. All bolts are to be fitted with
washers that are to be splayed if necessary to give a level and even bearing for the
nuts.
4.20 FIXING
Prevent distortion of metalwork during transit, handling or storage. Prevent damage

to arises, projecting features and surfaces which will be exposed in the finished
work.
Install the work permanently and securely in place. Metalwork must not be allowed
to carry any structural loads unless specifically designed for that purpose. Railings
or balustrades must not be used as strutting or supports after fixing.
4.20.1 Workmanship
The fabrication and erection of steelwork shall comply with relevant BS.
Any part of the work that does not comply with the Drawings and/or the
Specification will be rejected, and shall be removed from the Site, if delivered, within
24 hours from receipt of such notice of rejection.
Where fabrication is executed at the Contractor’s workshop, the Contractor is to

give four days notice of steelwork ready for inspection at the said workshop. After
inspection all members and fittings are to be painted with identification marks
corresponding to those on the marking plans, for the purpose of identification during
erection.
To check the accuracy of fabrication, when practicable, one complete frame or

component is to be erected temporarily on Site or in the said workshop, for the
inspection of the Architect.
Ends of beams, channels and other parts abutting against or upon other parts, are
JKT05 SS4/16
to be cut to exact lengths, true and square, so as to provide a good bed or joint as
the case may be. Proper cover plates are to be provided where necessary and
covers to angles are to be diminished leg dimensions while maintaining at least the
same sectional area. Edges of web plates are to be flush with the faces of the
flange angles, and stiffeners are to fit closely against the flanges. Bolts heads and
ends of eye rods are not to be welded on but formed out of the solid metal.
The following tolerances are allowed:-
a. End of members connecting steel to steel + 1.60mm at each end.
b. Horizontal overall measurement of trusses, beams and frames + 6mm.
c. Deviation from straight line, 6mm for beams & trusses + 3mm for ties & struts.
d. Deviations from vertical for columns + 3mm.
e. Upward camber beams from 1/300 to 1/500 of the span.
4.21 WELDING AND BRAZING
Welding shall be carried out by expert tradesmen in strict accordance with the
current Code of Practice.
4.21.1 Welded Connections
Welding is to be carried out in accordance with methods approved by the Architect/

Engineer.
The Contractor, before the work is commenced, is to establish to the satisfaction of

the Architect/Engineer that the proposed welders are experienced for the work they
are to carry out.
Welding plant is to be of modern design and of adequate capacity to produce the

required current at each welding point, without appreciable fluctuation.
No welding of members will be permitted except where shown on the Drawings. All
welding, where possible, is to be fillet welding.
Surfaces to be paint welded to be free from loose scale, slag, rust, grease, paint
and other deleterious materials. Surfaces are also be free from fins, tears and other
defects. Preparation of bevelled edges for welding is to be executed by planning or
JKT05 SS4/17
machine flame cutting. Grinding or flame cutting such surfaces by hand is to be

done only when approved by the Architect/Engineer.
Welding sequences and procedures are to be such as to cause minimum distortion

of the welded parts.
The Contractor is to make sure welds as may be required to demonstrate the

soundness of his proposed methods and the competence of his workpeople. Trial
welds are to be made with the parts fitted together with the clearances, coupled with
the maximum limits of fit, lowest preheat and worst combinations of electrode
conditions allowed by the Specification, or by the Contractor’s proposed procedure.
All members to be welded are to be accurately prepared so that components will fit
closely together. After assembly and before general welding commences, the parts
are to tack welded with small fillet welds about 50mm long made with 5mm
electrodes and a high current. The tack welds are to be of same quality and size as
the first run of the main weld. When the latter is deposited complete fusion with the
ends of the tack welds to form a final profile free from irregularities is required.
Any defective or unsound welds are to be cut out and replaced or suitably
corrected, as instructed by the Architect/Engineer.
4.22 ROLLER SHUTTERS
4.22.1 Aluminium Roller Shutters
Aluminium roller shutters are to be constructed of a minimum 1.5mm thick

aluminium slats to Architect’s required profile. Shop drawings are to indicate profile
side guides, end plates, roller shaft, shutter head and accessories together with
mechanism specifications to be submitted to Architect for approval.
4.22.2 Fire Rated Roller Shutters
Fire-rated roller shutters shall be approved by local fire regulations standards. Fire
shutter markings shall be etch, emboss, stamp or print onto identification tags, the
required information to comply with Clause 8.2 and Clause 8.3 of SS489, and fix
firmly to the bottom rail of the fire shutter. Fire-rated roller shutters shall be
manufactured from the following requirements:-
a. Curtain
JKT05 SS4/18
This shall be constructed from roll-formed galvanised steel shutter lath, 70mm
pitch 1.2mm thick. Lath shall be provided with end locks. It shall be finished
colourbond or power coated.
b. Roller Drum
This shall be constructed from mild steel tube of sufficient diameter to avoid
deflection of shutter curtain. It shall be finished with primer and rust-resistant
grey paint.
c. Roller Casing/Hood
This shall be constructed from 1.2mm galvanised steel supported by 38 x 38 x

3mm thick mild steel angle frame. It shall be finished with primer and rust-
resistant grey paint
d. Side Rails
This shall be constructed from 2mm mild steel profiles to be faced fixed to
concrete or masonry using 8mm diameter/50mm long expansion bolts at
532mm centres, and finished with primer and rust-resistant grey paint.
e. Bottom Rail
This shall be constructed from 2 numbers of (38 x 38 x 3)mm thick mild steel
angles bolted back to back to form a tee section, with primer and rust-
resistant grey paint.
f. Operation
Operation shall be motorised type, with gear-reduction-controlled descent.

Motor shall be equipped with auto-brake release lever, limit switches, built-in
thermal protector, manual handchain override in case of power failure. Motor
shall be operated by 3-way push button in lockable stainless steel casing.
g. Automatic Closing
All fire shutters shall be fitted with fusible link that breaks at 65oC and release
the brake to allow the shutters to descent at a controlled speed.
Connection to a fire alarm panel shall be provided and upon receipt of 24-volt
signal, the shutters shall close at a controlled speed.
A dual system option shall be provided whereby the shutters are required to
have a fusible link as well as connection to the fire alarm all as described.
JKT05 SS4/19
h. Ironmongery
All ironmongery to be at least half hour fire rated. Where fire doors of a higher
rating are to be provided, the ironmongery must comply with this requirement.
i. Sealants
Insert intumescent sealant at the wall/roller shutter channel and head junction
of all fire rated shutters. Submit intumescent sealant to the Architect for
approval. Inset silicone sealant at junction of all external walls and roller
shutter channel and head.
j. Gasket and seals
PSB certify and fire test gasket and seals, where incorporated into fire rated
roller shutters, in conjunction with the roller shutter as an integral assembly.
Provide waterproof seals at the base of all external roller shutters.
4.22.3 Standard Heavy-Duty Roller Shutter
Standard heavy duty roller shutter shall be manufactured from the following
requirements:-
a. Curtain
This shall be constructed from first grade high tensile galvanised or pre-
coated colour steel with carefully design interlocking groove, advance design
cut-off edge endlock to achieve maximum holding strength to each
interlocking lath. It shall be 1.5mm thick.
b. Bottom Bar
This shall be rolled-formed from high tensile steel of minimum 1.5m thick to
the shape of single angle design with mitred edge.
c. Side Guide Rails
This shall be rolled-formed steel U-shape section of (38 x 25 x 1.4)mm with

mitred edge with reinforced lining at both sides. It shall be fabricated from
high tensile steel of minimum thickness of 2mm with a groove of 75mm depth
or roll from guide design with 75mm depth groove.
d. Shutters Encloser Box
It shall be fabricated with hollow steel section with mild steel sheet covers to
be painted with one coat of anti-rust primer to factory standard.
JKT05 SS4/20
e. Operation
Operation shall be motorised type, with gear-reduction-controlled descent.

Motor shall be equipped with auto-brake release lever, limit switches, built-in
thermal protector, and manual handchain override in case of power failure.
Motor shall be operated by 3-way push button in lockable stainless steel
casing.
All external roller shutters shall be powder coated with weather seal for bottom bar.
The colour shall be to Architect’s approval.
4.22.4 Shop Drawings Submission
Prepare and submit shop drawings to enable the fabrication and installation of the
doors, including:
a. Elevation and section of all roller shutter doors together with head
shutter box. Clearance for opening the doors to be set out.
b. Section showing door jamb, head and floor junction with all fixing
positions.
c. Ironmongery and door schedule in the agreed format
d. Key schedule and format agreed with the Architect.
e. Layout location of all ironmongery.
Contractor to coordinate the roller shutter door works, particularly the interfaces with
the following packages and trades:
a. External walls including masonry, in-insitu concrete and glazing.
b. Internal walls, including masonry walls, dry walls, glass partitions,

adjacent floor finishes/ raised floors and suspended ceiling, if applicable.
Liaise and coordinate with services engineer for location of all doors linked to
security or fire system.
4.22.5 Indemnity for all Roller Shutters
All roller shutters should be provided with 5 years warranty. This is to be provided
against any defects, installation defects and defects against any related equipment
or components.
JKT05 SS4/21
4.23 FUSIBLE LINK FIRE BARRIERS
All fusible links are to comply with FSSD requirements and comply with SS 489.
Shop drawings and mechanism specifications to be submitted for Architect’s
approval.
4.24 COMPONENTS GENERALLY
Check all dimensions, both on drawings and on site before starting fabrication.
Prevent distortion of components during transit, handling and storage and prevent
finished surfaces from rubbing together.
Fastenings are to be supplied by the manufacturer of the component being fixed.
Install components securely in place, plumb, square, level and in proper alignment
with other work.
Pack joints to maintain specified widths especially at positions where fixings tighten
frame against the structure.
Keep opening lights of window closed and secured during all operations until fixed.
Retain any clamping devices in position. Pack between light and frame to maintain
correct clearances.
Bed mating surfaces of composite assemblies with metal to metal joints in bedding
compound.
Assemble and fix ironmongery using fastenings with matching finish supplied by the
ironmongery manufacturer.
On completion, check and adjust all moving parts and ironmongery, lubricating as
necessary to ensure correct functioning.
4.25 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP
The whole of the fabrication, welding, bolting, priming and installation shall be
carried out by skilled tradesmen in accordance with the best trade practice.
All joints and mitres shall be carefully and accurately assembled and machined so
as to provide close smooth connections that will be weather and water-tight and not
noticeable.
JKT05 SS4/22
Screws and bolts-heads shall be concealed wherever possible and countersunk

flush on exposed surfaces. Provision shall be made for appropriate expansion and
contraction joints in all long runs of exposed members and be subject to Architect’s
inspection prior to fabrication and installation.
Faces of metal in contact shall have hairline joints. Work shall be assembled with
concealed fittings insofar as practicable. Mouldings shall be in true alignment at
joints, straight, tightly and neatly fitted. Junctions of identical sections shall be
mitred. When assembled, all moving parts shall move freely without binding.
Remove all burrs and sharp arises which would be visible after fixing or a hazard to
the user.
4.26 RATES
The description of and rate for each item of ‘Metalworker’ etc., will be held to
include for taking delivery, unloading, carrying in, sorting, stripping or removing
protective wrapping or coverings, checking, assembling, returning packages,
handling, hoisting and placing and lowering, or fitting and fixing materials and goods
in position, adjusting, re-fixing, and for cutting away and making good, levelling,
packing, grouting, providing templates and plugged grounds, and touching up all in
accordance with the generally accepted requirements of the specific item, including
protecting and safeguarding until the issue of the Completion Certificate.
The description of and rate for each item of ‘Metalwork’ included will be held to
include for all straight, skew and circular cutting etc., and all holes for pipes, etc.
4.27 METAL COMPOSITE PANEL CLADDING/COVERING

Metal composite removable panel cladding or covering shall be of Kingspan
Europanel F-Series (F5 Flat, non-ribbed panels) or approved equivalent, fixed
horizontally or vertically based on supplier’s recommendation. Substrate must be
ZA275 Galvalloy hot-dip zinc coated steel to BS EN 10326. The metal thickness
shall be a nominal 0.6mm (inclusive of zinc coating)
JKT05 SS4/23
4.21.1 Product Information
a) External sheet : Thickness to be a nominal 0.6mm, finish and standard colour

from the TATA Steel Prisma or HPS200 Ultra finish ranges. Colour from
Colorcoat Prisma or HPS 200 Ultra ranges
b) Internal facing material : Thickness to be 0.5mm White Liner PE INT, of Bright

White colour
c) Core insulation : Non-Combustible Stonewool (K-value 0.044W/m²K)
d) Module Width : 600 - 1200mm module
e) Panel thickness: 75mm - 300mm
Panel Properties
Thickness 75 100 125 150 175 200 240 300

(mm)
K-Value 0.54 0.40 0.33 0.27 0.23 0.20 0.18 0.15
(W/m2K)
4.21.2 Accessories
a) EBS1 Z Base support 2450mm long laid continuously to locate bottom panel
for Horizontally laid panels only)
b) 200m long EBS2 Z edge clip for Vertically laid panels only.
c) 12mm x 6mm x 10m Rear Air Seal to air seal openings and junctions
including windows and doors
d) 95mm x 10mm Structural Rear Air Seal applied continuously up the vertical
steel support, for Horizontal panel instillation only
e) 9mm x 3mm Butyl Mastic Strip to be used between the panel face and the
proposed flashings / omega sections
f) 100mm long 3 Hole / 4 Hole Spreader Washer pre-punched to provide a

positive fixing location for the fasteners
g) 1200mm long Rockwool infill (depth to match panel thickness) fitted behind
Omega Section
h) 3656mm and 6000mm long flush Omega Section & Cap insert at each vertical
joint location
JKT05 SS4/24
i) Flashings, trims, drips, cappings to match/contrast as required (available via

Euroclad)
j) Vertical base trim 30mm x 15mm (available via Euroclad)
k) 3000mm long EBS1 J Base support if required (available via Euroclad)
l) Primary fasteners: Self drilling and tapping stainless steel screws
m) Number and location of fasteners: Minimum of three fasteners at each end of

panel
n) Depth gauges on fixing guns must be used to ensure correct compression of

the fixings and therefore no distortion of the panel face
o) Special features: Air permeability rates of <1m3/hr/m2 when installed in

accordance with our standard recommendations.
p) Pre-formed corners are available in the following parameters.
q) Horizontal corners: min leg size = panel thickness + 150mm
max overall girth including both legs = 2000mm
r) Vertical corners: min leg size = panel thickness + 150mm
max length, panels up to 150mm = 2400mm
max length, panels over 150mm = 1200mm
4.21.3 General Requirements
a) Design
• Cladding: Complete detailed design of the cladding system and submit

before commencement of fabrication.
- Standard: To BS 5427-1.
• Related works: Coordinate in detailed design.
b) Thermal Performance/ Bridging
• Requirement: Complete thermal design of the cladding/ covering system

to avoid excessive thermal bridging.
- Standard: MCRMA Technical Paper 14 and BRE Information

JKT05 SS4/25
Paper 1/06.
c) Product Samples
• Before commencing detailed design, submit labelled samples of each of

the following:
- Panels
- Fasteners
4.21.4 Design/Performance Requirements
a) Performance Compliance
• Verification : Before commencing fabrication, submit evidence based on

laboratory testing of computer modelling.
- Verification Authority : Euroclad Group Ltd.
b) Sound Transmittance of Cladding / Covering System
• Minimum weighted sound reduction index (RW) within 100 to 3150 Hz

frequency range to BS 5821-3:
Sound Reduction Index
Thickness 75 100 125 150 175 200 240 300

(mm)
Rw (db) 31 33 33 34 35 36 36 36
c) Integrity of Cladding / Covering
• Requirement: Determine profiles, sizes and thicknesses of panels and

sheets, the sizes, number and spacing of fixings, and incorporation of
other accessories and fittings to ensure cladding/ covering system will
resist factored dead, imposed and design live loads, and accommodate
deflections and thermal movements without damage, in accordance with
BS 5427-1.
• Primary fasteners: Not to be subjected to any bending moment.
• Wind loads: Calculate to Eurocode 1 (EN1991.4) Standard Method and

BS 5427-1 appropriate to location, exposure, height, building shape and
size, taking account of existing and known future adjacent structures.
JKT05 SS4/26
In order to run span/load calculations for the panels in question the

specific wind loads acting upon the cladding is required for 3 zones –
Zone A (corners of the building), Zone B (just in from the corners) and
Zone C (remainder of elevation). All calculations must be reviewed by a
Structural Engineer to ensure that the calculations conform to the site-
specific requirements.
d) Water Penetration
• Requirement: Under site exposure conditions, moisture must not

penetrate onto internal surfaces, or into cavities not designed to be
wetted.
e) Avoidance of Surface Condensation
• Requirement: Determine surface condensation risk of cladding system

using the method described in BS EN ISO 13788. If necessary, revise
thermal insulation to provide satisfactory temperature factor (fmin).
Ensure that damage and nuisance from surface condensation and does
not occur.
f) Fire Performance
• To be 2hr fire rated in accordance to
BS EN 15725:2010 Extended application reports on the fire
performance of construction products and
building elements
4.21.5 Fixing Cladding / Covering
Support structure: As specified by structural engineer, minimum thickness 1.5mm,

and a bearing width on minimum 160mm
a) Painting Structure
• Sequence: Paint outer surface of supporting structure before fixing

cladding/ covering.
b) Fasteners
• Stainless steel fasteners are recommended. Specification of which shall

depend on the gauge of steelwork to which the panels are to be
JKT05 SS4/27
positively fixed.
c) Fittings and Accessories
• Unspecified fittings and accessories: Recommended for the purpose by

the cladding/ covering manufacturer.
d) Prevention of Electrolytic Action
• Isolating tape: Type recommended by cladding/ covering manufacturer.
- Location: To contact surfaces of supports and sheets of dissimilar

metals.
e) Continuity Thermal Insulation
• Material:
- Manufacturer:
- Product reference:
• Recycled content:
• Installation: Secure and continuous with cladding/ covering insulation.
f) Fixing Panels and Sheets Generally
• Cut edges: Clean true.
- Penetrations: Openings to minimum size necessary with edge

reinforcements to engineer’s review.
• Orientation: Exposed joints of side laps away from prevailing wind

unless shown otherwise on drawings.
• Panel and sheet ends, laps and raking cut edges: Fully supported and
with fixings at top of lap.
• Fasteners: Drill holes. Position at regular intervals in straight lines,

centred on support bearings.
• Position of fasteners in oversized drilled holes: Central.
• Fasteners torque: Sufficient to correctly compress washers.
JKT05 SS4/28
• Debris: Remove dust and other foreign matter before finally fixing panel
and sheets.
• Completion: Check fixings to ensure weathertightness and that panels

and sheets are secure.
• Cut edges: Paint to match face finish.
g) Structural Movement Joints
• Type: Cover flashing fixed on one side over gap between panels.
• Location: Coincident with structural movement joint.
• Width of gap: To match structural movement joint requirements.
• Requirement: Weathertight.
h) Flashings / Trims Generally
• Lap joint treatment:
- Vertical and sloping flashings/ trims: End laps to be same as for

adjacent panels.
- Horizontal flashings/ trims: End laps to be 150 mm, sealed and

where possible arranged with laps away from prevailing wind.
• Method of fixing: To structure in conjunction with adjacent panels.

Otherwise to panels.
i) Abutments
• Junctions with flashings: Weathertight and neatly dressed down.
4.21.6 Testing
Panel cladding and covering to pass Ash, Combustion and Heat tests. Fire
resistance tested from both sides, of up to 120 minutes. Integrity & 120 minutes
Insulation when tested to EN1364-1:1999.
- LPCB LPS1181 Grade EXT-A30 to EXT-A120 Approved, Certificate number 545b
- LPCB LPS1208 Grade FR30 - FR120 Approved, Certificate number 545a
JKT05 SS4/29
4.21.7 Penetrations through the Panels
All penetrations through the panels must be filled tightly with stonewool insulation
(or similar) with a minimum density of 23kg/m3 and weather proof sealant and must
be capped off with stainless steel flashing to colour and finish to match the cladding
panels unless mentioned otherwise. The detail must be verified and approved by
the manufacturer before execution at site. The joints must be tested on their water
indemnity upon completion of works.
The following types of penetrations are possible without the requirement of

additional/secondary steel supports :
• Penetrations upto the size of 300mm x 300mm
• Multiple 300mm x 300mm penetrations linearly aligned along the length of the
panels
• Load and penetration sizes can be shared across panels to make larger sized
opennings.
• Penetrations at fixing joints and across interlocking joints
For the following cases, penetrations shall require to be supported with

independent structural steelwork to structural engineer’s review and approval :
• Penetrations larger than 300mm x 300mm
• Adjacent penetrations spaced at a distance closer than the height of the

largest penetrations.
• Multiple punctures that cover more than an approved extent of the panels
All punctures through the façade cladding must be reviewed by the

manufacturer / specialist.
SS005_Waterproofing
JKT05 SS5/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 5 – WATERPROOFING
SECTION - 5
5.0 WATERPROOFING
5.1 GENERALLY

manufacturer’s name or catalogue reference, the Contractor may propose its
equivalent alternative, subject to the written approval of the Architect.
The Contractor shall arrange for an approved Specialist Contractor acceptable to the
Architect to carry out all the waterproofing works. On completion of the whole
Contract, the Contractor shall jointly and severally with the Specialist Contractor
furnish a ten-year guarantee against leakage, faults in installation, workmanship,
premature deterioration of the waterproofing, etc.
5.2 WATERPROOFING TO FLAT REINFORCED CONCRETE ROOFS AND DECKS

(INVERTED ROOF)
Flat roof waterproofing to be membrane system laid on structural Concrete to falls.

Over is to be laid an external quality extruded polystyrene insulation, such as ‘Dow
roofmate’, a separating membrane, and an insitu panel over to detail.
Supply and install bonded insulated roof waterproofing system as shown on the
drawings or specified herein consisting of:
a) Pre-cast/Cast in-situ panels OR screed bedding to receive finishes
b) Separation layer
c) Insulation
d) Under-screed drainage mat
e) Waterproofing membrane
f) Cement and sand screed to fall
General Areas: Conventional RC roofs, RC Flat Roofs of Ancillary buildings –
COPYRIGHT BY M/S AWPPTE LTD. THIS SPECIFICATION IS THE PROPERTY OF M/S AWP PTE LTD AND CANNOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED PARTLY OR
JKT05 SS5/2
Substations, Pump House, Bin Centre, etc.. wherever applicable. Refer drawings &
schedules.
The contractor may select one of the following systems or approved equivalent. The
installation must strictly comply with the specifications and application procedure of
the manufacturer of the system selected.
The application must be carried out by a specialist contractor, licensed by the

product manufacturer and by trained personnel.
Option A AV Syntec Dynaflex HVS Liquid Applied Membrane.
M.K. Eng. Trading Pte Ltd
Option B Purcote 1 Part PU Elastomeric Seamless waterproofer
Scott Vickers (FE) Pte Ltd
Option C Sikaplan PVC 12G/15G
Sika (Singapore) Pte ltd
Option D Contractors Proposal for approved equivalent
Subject to Architects approval
5.3 WATERPROOFING TO LANDSCAPE ROOFS AND PLANTER BOXES
[Applicable to proposed Waterproofing Type 5]
- Application & details to be read in conjunction with detail drawings included in

A-700 Series – Waterproofing.
Supply and install bonded waterproofing system as shown on the drawings or

specified herein consisting of:
a) Growth media and sand to Landscape Architect’s / Architect’s

requirements
b) Separation layer ie Geotextile filter fabric
c) Sub-soil drainage
- VersiCell® - 20mm thick Sub-Surface Drainage Modules or

approved equivalent
JKT05 SS5/3
d) Waterproofing membrane
- Evalon® V or approved equivalent
e) Cement and sand screed to fall
5.4 WATERPROOFING TO INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL WET AREAS

Wet Areas Waterproofing is to be applied to the Structural concrete prior to the

laying of screeds etc.
Wet areas include toilets, kitchen/ kitchennette or pantry, refuse compactor room, bin
centre, bin room, janitor/ cleaner’s room, AHU rooms, pump sump room, bulk refuse
room, sprinkler tank room, potable water pump/tank room, Chiller rooms, unloading
bay, areas open to the exterior, etc. shall be treated with waterproofing system.
The waterproofing will extend up to 1800mm up the vertical surfaces of walls in wet
areas unless stated otherwise.
Supply and install liquid-applied waterproofing system as shown on the drawings or

specified herein.
General Areas: Toilets, Janitor/ cleaner’s room, pantries, refuse collection points, bin
centre, pump rooms, etc.
the manufacturer of the system selected. The application must be carried out by a
specialist contractor, licensed by the product manufacturer and by trained personnel.
Option A AV Syntec Dampseal.
M.K. Eng. Trading Pte Ltd
Option B Laticote waterproofer
Scott Vickers (FE) Pte Ltd
JKT05 SS5/4
Option C ii. SikaTop Seal 107
Sika (Singapore) Pte ltd
Option D Contractors Proposal
5.5 WATERPROOFING TO GROUND FLOOR
[Applicable to proposed Waterproofing Type 3 (part of)]

The full extent of the Ground Floor inclusive of lift pits, water tanks and cable
chambers etc…are to be waterproofed as follows to prevent the ingress of rising
damp.
The Exposed external areas will have structural slabs laid to fall.
There will be two waterproofing systems,
i. an integral concrete waterproofer (to specifications) and
ii. a surface applied system which will be topped with screed and respective
floor finish
the manufacturer of the system selected. The application must be carried out by a
specialist contractor, licensed by the product manufacturer and by trained personnel.
A method statement must be submitted by the contractor seeking the approval of the
Architect before proceeding with relevant works.
Pre-applied fully bonded TPA Membrane
Option A SikaProof-808 and SikaProof Tape-120AV
Sika Indonesia
Option B Contractors Proposal

JKT05 SS5/5
5.6 WATERPROOFING TO WATER-RETAINING STRUCTURES


specified herein.
General Areas: water tanks, sprinkler tanks, underground trenches, pump rooms,
etc.
5.6.1 WATERPROOFING TO CHEMICALS-RETAINING STRUCTURES

specified herein.
Areas: All relevant structures ie 150kV Substations – underground Oil Pit.
5.6.2 WATERPROOFING TO STRUCTURES BELOW AND ON GROUND
Supply and install waterproofing system or blind side waterproofing as shown on the
drawings or specified herein.
Option A Sikaproof-808 TPO Sheet Membrane
Sika Indonesia
Areas: all structures below ground and in contact with the earth. [To be read in
conjunction of Consultants’ drawings & schedules]
5.7 WATERPROOFING TO EXTERNAL WALL DRAINAGE
Supply and install protection cum drainage to external surfaces of walls in contact
with the earth as shown on the drawings or specified herein.
Areas: retaining walls, lift pit walls etc.
JKT05 SS5/6
5.8 WATERPROOFING TO INTERNAL WALL DRAINAGE
Supply and install mechanically-fastened dimpled sheet drainage to internal surfaces

of walls as shown on the drawings or specified herein.
Areas: All relevant structures
5.9 CEMENT/SAND PANEL TOPPING
Supply and lay cast-in-situ cement/sand panel topping on the separation felt to fall
with minimum thickness of 40mm in bay of 1m x 1m (panel size depending on site
condition) with joint size of 12mm and filled with hot bitumen.
5.10 VENT PIPE, RAINWATER DOWNPIPE, DUCT AND OTHER PENETRATION FROM
ROOF SLAB
The waterproofing system must be turned up along skirting, vent pipes, etc to a level
of at least up to the top of the parapet wall above the roof surface. All rain water
outlets must be similarly dressed down.
5.11 SEALANT TO STRUCTURAL CONSTRUCTION JOINTS AND EXPANSION

JOINTS
Waterstop shall be provided to structural joints where deem required. Only

waterstops of approved types and properties recommended by waterproofing
specialist and approved by the Architect shall be used at construction joints and
expansion joints in all wet areas.
The entire system of waterstop at construction joints and expansion joints shall be
compatible with the waterproofing system approved and they shall be carried out
strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
JKT05 SS5/7
5.12 WATERPROOFING TO OTHER AREAS
5.12.1 Waterproofing To Grease Trap and Receptor
The grease traps are located at the first storey area. The Contractor shall take all
measures (if necessary, grout the perimeter joints) in ensuring that the grease trap
base and perimeter is waterproofed. Internal waterproofing of the grease trap shall
be carried out by the Contractor who shall submit their type/details for approval. Such
waterproofing shall be durable to food acids, heat and other food wastes produced.
The Contractor is to consider carefully details concerning the grease trap (i.e.
internal & external waterproofing, compartmentalisation, dust screw area, etc.)
before commencing works in this area.
5.12.2 Waterproofing External Walls Behind Façade Cladding
Waterproofing/ Vapour Barrier is required to be provided behind all façade cladding:

Refer to the Section relevant to the façade cladding included in drawings.
5.13 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS
5.13.1 Evalon V 2.2mm THK Fleece-backed EVA/PVC Terpolymer Roofing Membrane
The waterproofing membrane shall be EVALON V membrane supplied by Elmich Pte

Ltd or approved equivalent.
The waterproofing membrane shall be a 1.2mm thick homogeneous thermoplastic

sheet of EVA/PVC terpolymer material measured without any adhesive or fleece
backing. It shall be inherently bitumen and polystyrene-compatible without need for a
separation layer. The membrane shall be manufactured as a single non-laminated
layer that is UV-resistant without any surface coating on both sides. The non-solids
(liquids) content shall be less than 10 percent and the membrane shall be
dimensionally stable enough to be used as exposed membrane without any need for
a centrally laid reinforcement.
The waterproofing membrane shall have been used under the same name and
composition in Singapore for at least 15 years. The waterproofing membrane shall
possess a British Board of Agrément (“BBA”) or European (“UEAtc”) Agrément
certificate with durability rating of at least 30 years. Where the membrane is to be
JKT05 SS5/8
exposed, it shall be according to the RAL colour specified. For areas where the
waterproofing membrane is to be fully adhered, the cold applied adhesive shall be
according to the manufacturer's recommendations. The waterproofing membrane
shall be manufactured to ISO 9001 quality assurance.
The Performance Standards of the waterproofing membrane is required to match or

surpass the following:
Property Value Test Method

Country of manufacture Germany
Membrane thickness (measured without 1.2 mm
any adhesive or fleece backing)
Solids content (M. Wt. >100,000) >90% -
Bitumen resistance Yes prEN 1548
Water vapour permeability 20,000 EN 1931
Reaction to fire Class E EN 13501-1
Root resistance Root-proof FLL
Tensile strength >500 N/50mm EN 12311-2
Elongation >300% EN 12311-2
Resistance to impact load >300 mm EN 12691
5.13.2 Fleximent 201 Flexible Cementitous Waterproofing Coating
The waterproofing membrane shall be FLEXIMENT 201 coating supplied by Elmich

Pte Ltd or approved equivalent.
The waterproofing coating shall be a flexible cementitious coating. When cured, it

shall have a dry film thickness not less than 1.2 mm and provide excellent resistance
to aggressive soils and contaminated ground water. The waterproof coating shall
meet/exceed the requirements of BS 6920:90 and SS 375:94 (or equivalent local
Standards). Where the waterproof coating is to be used in contact with potable
water, it shall be approved for such use by the Local Standards/ relevant authority
requirements.
The Performance Standards of the waterproofing coating is required to match or

JKT05 SS5/9

Mix density 1300 kg/m³ -
Tensile strength >1.6 N/mm² ASTM D412
Elongation at break >150% ASTM D412
Water vapour transmission 21 g/m²/24hrs ASTM E96
Crack bridging ability 2 mm ASTM C836
Shore “A” hardness >50 ASTM D2240
Adhesion to concrete >0.6 N/mm² ASTM D4541
5.13.3 Eurathane 2000 Single Component Elastomeric Polyurethane Waterproofing

Coating
The waterproofing membrane shall be Eurathane 2000 coating supplied by Elmich

Pte Ltd or approved equivalent.
The waterproofing coating shall provide an effective waterproofing coating for floors,
walls and water retaining structures and as a damp-proof membrane in sandwich
constructions in accordance with BS 8102:2009 (Code of Practice for protection of
below ground structures against water from the ground). The waterprrof coating shall
be applied at a rate of 0.75 litre/m2/coat. Two coats are recommended, allowing the
first to fully dry prior to application of the second. A dry film thickness of 1.0 mm to
1.2 mm is recommended.

Solid content >95% -
Track-free time @25oC 12h -
Re-coat time @25oC 12-24h -
Tensile strength >1.2 N/mm2 ASTM D412
Elongation >600% ASTM D412
Water vapour transmission <30 g/m2d ASTM E96
Crack bridging >2mm ASTM C836
Hardness shore A 27 ASTM D2240
Adhesion to concrete 0.7 N/mm2 ASTM D903
Hydrostatic pressure resistance 0.65 N/mm2 ASTM D751
JKT05 SS5/10
Recovery 94% ASTM D412

Flash point 59oC -
5.13.4 1.5mm THK Bitulen SK 374 SBS – Modified Self-Adhesive Waterproofing

Membrane
The waterproofing membrane shall be BITULEN SK374 membrane supplied by

Elmich Pte Ltd or approved equivalent.
The waterproofing membrane shall be a SBS-modified self-adhesive sheet with a

high bi-axial strength cross-laminated polyethylene reinforcement film and thickness
not less than 1.5 mm.
The Performance Standards of the waterproofing membrane is required to match or

surpass the following values tested to the methods prescribed in Singapore Standard
SS 374:1994 (or equivalent local Standards), technical performance below for
guideline reference:

Tensile strength >4.5 N/mm2 (long.); >4.5 -
N/mm2 (trans.)
Elongation at break >250% (long.); >250% -
(trans.)
Tensile shear at joints >350 N -
Water vapour transmission < 0.05 g/m2/h -
5.13.5 Blind Side Waterproofing
The blind side waterproofing waterproofing membrane shall be Elmich Colphene

BSW supplied by Elmich Pte Ltd or approved equivalent
Colphene BSW is a fully reinforced pre-applied system membrane designed for

horizontal and vertical external blind-sides waterproofing applications. The system is
composed of a selected blend of high performance SBS-modified bitumen combined
with ultra-high strength reinforcement and a specially formulated top surface.
Colphene BSW H (for horizontal applications) shall be a 3.5mm thick bituminous
membrane. Colphene BSW V (for vertical applications) shall be a 3mm thick
bituminous membrane.
JKT05 SS5/11
The Performance Standards of the waterproof membrane is required to match or


Thickness 3.0 / 3.5mm ASTM D3767
Tensile strength 14.2 / 11.9 MPa ASTM D5147
Ultimate elongation 101 / 123% ASTM D5147
Flexibility at cold temperature Unaffected at -23 °C ASTM D1970
Puncture resistance 1210 N ASTM E154
Tear resistance 611 / 474 N ASTM D5147
Lap peel adhesion 1.5 / 23.5 kN/m ASTM D1876
Water absorption 0.5% ASTM D570
Adhesion of poured concrete 4248 N/m ASTM D903
Resistance to hydrostatic head 114 m ASTM D5385
Water vapour transmission 0.21 ng/Pa.s.m² ASTM E96 method B
5.13.6 DELTA TERRAXX - Drainage System
The protection cum drainage sheeting to all waterproofing applied on vertical

surfaces shall be DELTA TERRAXX sheeting supplied by Elmich Pte Ltd or
approved equivalent.
GENERIC SPECIFICATION
The protection-cum-drainage sheeting with welded geotextile shall be a dimpled

sheet manufactured from high density polyethylene and without any recycled
materials. It shall have excellent resistance to puncture and decay. It shall
meet/exceed the requirements of DIN 4095 and DIN 18195 for protection and
drainage applications.
The Performance Standards of the protection-cum-drainage sheeting shall match

or surpass the following tested according to DIN 53576:
JKT05 SS5/12

Material HDPE silver -
Overall height 9 mm -
Tensile strength 6.0 kN/m -
Compressive strength 400 kN/m2 -
Drainage capacity ~3.5 l/s.m -
Temperature resistance -30oC to 80oC -
Chemical properties Chemical, root and rot resistant -
Fire resistance B2 (DIN 4102) -
5.13.7 DELTA MS - Drainage System
The drainage sheeting to all vertical surfaces shall be DELTA MS sheeting supplied
by Elmich Pte Ltd or approved equivalent.
The drainage sheeting shall be a dimpled sheet manufactured from high density
polyethylene and without any recycled materials. It shall have excellent resistance to
puncture and decay. It shall meet/exceed the requirements of DIN 4095 and DIN
18195 for protection and drainage applications. The sheeting shall be mechanically
fastened to the substrate using proprietary studs from the same manufacturer to
ensure water-tightness.
The Performance Standards of the drainage sheeting shall match or surpass the
following tested according to DIN 53576:

Material virgin HDPE -
Overall height 8 mm -
Thickness 0.6 mm -
Compressive strength >200 kN/mm2 -
Drainage capacity ~2.25 l/s.m -
Temperature resistance -30oC to 80oC -
Chemical properties Chemical, root and rot resistant -
Fire resistance B2 (DIN 4102) -
JKT05 SS5/13
5.13.8 VERSICELL - Sub-soil drainage
The sub-soil protection cum drainage system to all waterproofing applied on vertical
surfaces shall be VERSICELL interlocking cellular drainage modules (‘draincells’)
with non-woven geotextile filter fabric supplied by Elmich Pte Ltd or equivalent. The
sub-soil protection cum drainage modules (‘draincells’) shall have a compressive
strength of at least 100 tonne/m2 to accommodate both static and dynamic loads
during and after installation. It shall have good resistance to petroleum-based
chemicals and naturally occurring soil chemicals.
The draincells shall have surface perforations each not exceeding 350 mm2 to
prevent entry of large fill aggregates. The openings on the horizontal surfaces shall
be at least 65% of the total surface area to provide optimum flow rate. The draincells
shall be at least 30 mm high and shall be interlocked with adjacent draincells along
connecting edges to form a continuous entity whether as panels, conduits or tanks.
The draincells shall comprise of one or more layers to ensure a total flow rate of at
least 16.5 l/m.s for maximum rainfall under Singapore Code of Practice SS 525 :
2006 (or equivalent local Standards/ Code Requirements).
Typical properties of the draincells are:

Material Recycled polypropylene -
Dimensions 500 L x 250 W mm -
Height 30 mm -
Weight c.a. 3 kg/m2 -
Area of perforation < 350 mm2 -
Void horizontal area > 65% -
Void internal volume > 95% -
Compressive strength > 100 tonne/m2 -
Drainage capacity @ 1% > 16.5 l/m.s
hydraulic gradient
5.13.9 VERSIDRAIN 6P – Under screed drainage mat
The under-screed drainage mat shall be VERSIDRAIN 6P supplied by Elmich Pte Ltd
or approved equivalent.
JKT05 SS5/14
The under-screed drainage mat shall be an interlocking dimpled high density

polypropylene sheet with multiple perforations to form a hollow space between the
bedding screed and the waterproofing membrane or concrete structure. The water
which seeps through the bedding screed shall pass through the perforated holes to
the waterproofing membrane or concrete structure and can run off freely through the
hollow spaces towards the drainage outlet.
Typical properties of the under-screed drainage mat are:
Property Value
Material Recycled polypropylene
Sheet thickness ~1.2 mm
Overall height 6 mm
Compressive strength >80 t/m2 (unfilled)
>1,500 t/m2 (filled with G20 cement and sand

screed)
Service temperature -30oC to 80oC
Chemical properties Chemical, root and rot resistant
Fire resistance B2 (DIN 4102)
5.13.10 Insulation to all external areas requiring insulation
The insulation shall be closed-cell extruded polystyrene board of at least 32 kg/m3

density with self-extinguishing properties and ship-lapped edges not less than 50 mm
thick unless otherwise indicated.
5.13.11 Integral Waterproofing by Crystallisation
The integral waterproofing admixture to all areas specified shall be Elmich

Envirocrete Crystallisation mixture or approved equivalent.
Envirocrete is a unique chemical treatment for waterproofing and protecting

concrete. It is specially designed as a concrete additive at the time of batching and
form catalytic crystalline growth within the concrete, making it waterproof.
Typical properties of the admixture are:
JKT05 SS5/15
Property Value
Chloride permeability (ASTM 1202-94) Very Low < 525
Water permeability
Water penetration (DIN 1048.5) < 20mm
Shrinkage (AS 1012-13) 28 days < 600 microstrains
Chemical resistance Resists mild acids in the pH range 3-12
Hydrostatic pressure > 7 bars
Potable water (SS 375:2001) Yes
5.13.12 Elmich Sealing Tape P50
The sealing tape shall be ELMICH SEALING TAPE P50 tape supplied by Elmich Pte
Ltd or approved equivalent.
The sealing tape shall be a self-adhesive butyl sealing tape protected by a strong,
high-density, cross-laminated, white creped polyethylene film. It is ideal for the
sealing of connections and moulds perfectly to irregular structures. Elmich Sealing
Tape P50 is highly adhesive to steel, concrete, bricks, glass and most other
substrates.
Typical properties of the sealing tape are:
PROPERTY VALUE
Standard thickness 1.2mm
Compound colour Grey
Tensile strength (EN12311-1) 215N/50mm (Long.); 220N/50mm (Trans.)
Elongation @ break (EN12311-1) 324% + 60% (Long.); 238% (Trans.)
Solids 100%
Peel Adhesion 90° (ASTM D1000) ≥90N
Loop tack test (ASTM D6195) ≥80N
Probe tack test (ASTM D2979) ≥8.0N
Service temperature -30°C / +80°C; Up to 160°C for max. 24hrs
Application temperature 0°C / +40°C
JKT05 SS5/16
5.13.13 Elmich Reinforcement Tape F100
The sealing tape shall be ELMICH REINFORCEMENT TAPE F100 tape supplied by
Elmich Pte Ltd or approved equivalent.
The reinforcement tape shall be a self-adhesive butyl tape protected by a fleece in

polypropylene. The tape consists of easy peel silicon release paper. It is ideal for
reinforcement of waterproofing at angle changes. Elmich Reinforcement Tape F100
is compatible and highly adhesive to all materials like plastic, glass, steel,
polycarbonate, wood and bitumen.
Typical properties of the reinforcement tape are:
Property Value
Compound colour Grey
Tensile strength (EN12311-1) ≥100N/50mm (Long.); ≥100N/50mm (Trans.)
Elongation @ break (EN12311-1) ≥70% (Long.); ≥70% (Trans.)
Solids 100%
Peel Adhesion 90° (ASTM D1000) ≥90N
Loop tack test (ASTM D6195) ≥80N
Probe tack test (ASTM D2979) ≥8.0N
Cement adhesive strength C2E on 0.9N/mmq

fleece (EN 12004 – EN 1348)
Service temperature -30°C / +80°C; Up to 160°C for max. 24hrs
Application temperature 0°C / +40°C
5.13.14 SikaProof-808 – Pre-applied Fully Bonded TPO Sheet Membrane
The blind-side adhesive waterproofing membrane shall be SIKAPROOF-808

supplied by Sika Indonesia or approved equivalent.
The waterproof membrane shall be a sheet membrane for reinforced concrete

structures. A special hybrid bonding layer on the membrane forms a permanent bond
with the fresh concrete and prevents lateral water migration between the membrane
and the concrete structure. Overlap joints are sealed using cold-applied tapes or by
JKT05 SS5/17
thermal jointing.
The application must be carried out by Sika trained/approved contractors or

applicators in accordance to the attached method statement
Typical properties of the membrane are:
Property Value
Standard thickness 1.0mm (+/-5 / +10 %)
Compound appearance / colour Rough surface on A+ bonding layer / Light

grey
Tensile strength (EN12311-1) Machine Direction – ≥500N / 50mm;
Cross Direction – ≥500N / 50mm
Elongation @ break (EN12311-1) ≥500% (Method A)
Joint shear resistance (EN12317-2) ≥50N/50mm
Reaction to Fire (EN13501-1) Class E
Resistance to Lateral Water Pass, upto 7 bar

Migration (ASTM D6195)
Service temperature -10°C min / +35°C max
Application temperature Ambient air - +5°C min / +45°C max
Substrate - +5°C min / +60°C max
5.13.15 SikaProof Tape-120
The sealing tape shall be SIKAPROOF TAPE-120 supplied by Sika Indonesia or

approved equivalent.
The reinforcement tape shall be a self-adhesive tape for internal jointing/detailing of

Sikaproof-808/801. The tape is based on a hotmelt adhesive with a carrier film and a
release liner s of easy peel silicon release paper.
The application must be carried out by Sika trained/approved contractors or

applicators in accordance to the attached method statement
JKT05 SS5/18
Typical properties of the reinforcement tape are:
Property Value
Compound colour Top layer – Light Grey A+ bonding layer with

a grey waterproofing layer
Bottom layer – Transparent/yellowish hotmelt

adhesive covered in release liner
Application temperature Ambient air - +5°C min / +45°C max
Substrate - +5°C min / +60°C max
5.13.15 Separation Layer
The separation layer where shown on the drawings or required to separate

incompatible materials shall be a geotextile of polypropylene material at least
100g/m2 density.
5.14 INDEMNITY OF WATERTIGHTNESS
Prior to commencement of waterproofing works, the Contractor shall lodge with the
Architect a 10-year indemnity against leaks and any failure of the waterproofing and
watertightness and waterproofing additives of the following:
i) Flat concrete roofs and insulated flat concrete roofs
ii) Planting deck areas & planter boxes
iii) Toilets, Wet areas, Water Contained Structures and chemical contained
structures
iv) Lift pits.
v) Structures below ground, internal and external retaining walls
vi) Other external structures such as grease trap, receptors and Bin centre
Under these indemnities, the Contractor will be required to make good any defects to
keep the whole works perfectly watertight and will be responsible for any
consequential loss attributable to leakage during the warranty period.
If in the opinion of the Contractor, the Specification, the Specifications are insufficient
JKT05 SS5/19
for him to give the specified indemnity then the Contractor shall allow in his tender for
upgrading the Specifications as necessary to enable him to so indemnify.
Specimen of the indemnities are attached at the end of this Specification.
5.15 SUBMISSIONS / VERIFICATION
5.15.1 Submissions
Include in the construction programme, event for submission of the following

information
a Waterproofing System
i Manufacturer, supplier and proprietary brand and technical details

of the membrane being used
ii Composition of the waterproofing system and other associated

components
b Membrane Applicator
i Name
ii Information of contracts, current or completed over the last 5 years

and details of Quality Control Procedures adopted
5.15.2 Method Statements
Prior to commencing construction work, submit a detailed method statement

including at least the following information
a Sequence of Construction
b Application of waterproofing system
c Protection of the works
5.15.3 Shop Drawings
Prepare shop drawings including
a Setting out plans, including the following information
JKT05 SS5/20
i Locations of services and protrusions
ii Layout of membrane
iii Layout of surface finishes
b Co-ordination drawings showing integration of the following items
i Drainage and mechanical services system
ii Surface finishes
c Typical sectional details including but not limited to
i Composition of the waterproofing system
ii Flashing at upstands
iii Flashing of services and protrusions
iv Termination of surfacing materials
v Dressing of waterproofing membrane at floor traps and wastes
Do not commence installation until shop and installation drawings have been reviewed
and permission to proceed has been obtained
5.15.4 Material Certification
Provide certification from the manufacturer(s) of the following materials/ components.

Certifying that the respective materials are the correct grade, strength, size, finish etc
and are in accordance with the relevant codes and standards specified
a Waterproofing membrane
b Sealant materials
5.15.5 Procedure
a) The waterproofing system and installation details shall be provided and

endorsed by a Waterproofing Specialist with ISO 9001 quality assurance,
SS 540 and BS 25999 Business Continuity Management and totally
compliant to Indonesian Standards.
b) Proprietary materials supplied shall be identified clearly with the

manufacturer’s name and product description. Packaged materials shall
be stored in manufacturer’s wrappings and containers with the
manufacturer’s labels and seals intact.
JKT05 SS5/21
c) The design, supply and installation of all waterproofing systems and

products specified herein include all components such as cement and
sand screed to falls (if required), insulation, pre-formed corners, outlets,
fillers, primers, galvanised iron reinforcement mesh, metal flashings,
protection layer etc. and all other measures and materials required to
satisfactorily complete the waterproofing system.
d) Surfaces to receive waterproofing shall have at least a wood float finish

and be clean and dry. Concrete substrate must be cured minimum 28
days and dried. All holes, joints, and cracks and honeycombs in concrete
or masonry surfaces should be filled with an approved grout and allowed
to cure. High spots in concrete or masonry surfaces shall be cut off or
ground down.
e) The waterproofing system shall include procedures for testing of the

membrane integrity during installation.
f) For wet areas and water-retaining structures, the substrate to be

waterproofed shall be checked for structural integrity by conducting a
ponding test. At the conclusion of the waterproofing treatment but prior to
laying of the protective screed, the waterproofed area shall be tested by
ponding for at least 48 hours.
5.15.6 Execution
a) Prior to commencing waterproofing, all dust, dirt and foreign matter, shall
be removed and the substrate shall be inspected and approved by
waterproofing manufacturer's representative.
b) Prior to commencement of the waterproofing installation, the Specialist

Waterproofing Contractor shall submit shop drawings for each
waterproofing detail endorsed by the manufacturer or its approved
representative. The CAD-recognisable format shop drawings are to be
approved by the Architect and/or Engineer.
c) The schedule of information required for submission prior to the

waterproofing works includes the following:
i) Brand Name
ii) Manufacturer
JKT05 SS5/22
iii) Country of Origin
d) The country of origin and manufacture for the waterproofing membranes

used during each project shall remain as per stated in the submission.
e) For the roof, at the conclusion of the waterproofing treatment but prior to
the installation of the other components forming the roofing system, the
waterproofed area shall be tested by ponding either entirely or in
sections for at least 48 hours.
f) The Contractor shall provide adequate measures to protect the

waterproofing system from being damaged during subsequent
construction activities.
5.16 STANDARDS
Unless otherwise agreed with the architect, ensure all works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by
the architect, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and
Codes comply with the requirements of the standards specification. All Standards
and Codes quoted refer to the current version
Singapore Standards (or equivalent local Standards)
Including but not limited to the following
SS 133 Bituminous emulsion for Roof Waterproofing
SS 374 Preformed Waterproofing Membranes for Concealed Roof
SS CP 892 Waterproofing of Reinforced Concrete Buildings
5.17.1 Mock-ups
Prepare 1 x 1 metre panel sample of each internal floor and wall waterproofing type,
clearly showing compositional materials and components from structural slab to
JKT05 SS5/23
finished surface. Include a sample of the floor/wall junction, the flashing around a
50mm diameter pipe and the drain outlet. Keep at least one panel of each respective
sample on site, for use as a site quality standard for the remainder of the works.
Provide additional mock-ups for the project as required by the architect.
5.18 TESTING
5.18.1 Inspections
Carry out inspections at the following stages, ensuring that the work is carried out in
a proper and orderly manner:
a. Preparation of the building substrate, ready for the application of the

waterproofing membrane.
b. Application of the waterproofing membrane.
c. Commencement of any required testing, on or off site.
5.18.2 On Site Water Test
Carry out on site water tests at the following stages to verify serviceability and water-
tightness, in accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s recommendations and
specifications.
a. Upon completion of final coat of membrane.
b. Upon completion of surfacing material installation.
Do not conduct on-site water test until the membrane is cured and set.
Inform the architect 5 days prior to the tests being carried out
Carry out the water tests by blocking up the drain holes and flooding the floor to a
depth of 25mm above the highest point of the floor for 24 hours and the running of
the shower head onto each of the tiled walls for 15minutes.
Any areas showing water penetration through the floor, signs of seepage or other
defects, shall be made good. Submit a method statement and remedial measures to
the SO. Re-test the area after the remedial works have been completed.
SS006_External & Internal Aluminium Works
JKT05 SS6/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 6 - ALUMINIUM WORKS
SECTION 6
6.0 EXTERNAL AND INTERNAL ALUMINIUM WORKS
6.1 SCOPE OF WORKS
The Specialist’s Contractor shall design, engineer, test, fabricate, deliver, install and
guarantee all construction necessary to provide the External and Internal Aluminium
Works, complete with all accessories and components, in conformance with the
requirements of the drawings and specifications. The work shall be carried out under
the direction of the Main Contractor.
The references made under the specification ‘Metalworker’ applies equally to this
section.
Without limiting the generalities of the foregoing, the works shall include, without being
limited to:
i. Aluminium windows and glazing, curtain walling, aluminium letterbox and trap
door.
ii. Bolts, fasteners and secondary metal work connecting the Aluminium Works to
the structure.
iii. All anchors, attachments and reinforcements for mullions and transoms as
required for a complete installation.
iv. Supply and installation of glass.
v. All water proofing required between structure and window frames.
vi. All caulking, polyurethane sealing and flashing as required for a watertight
assembly.
vii. Isolation of dissimilar metals.
viii. Drainage system to external glazed and louvered panels.
ix. Engineering proposals, drawings and data.
x. Shop drawings.
xi. Samples and mock-ups.
JKT05 SS6/2
xii.Performance testing as specified.
xiii.Co-ordination with work of specialist’s contractor.
xiv.Protection of the work.
xv.Guarantee and warranty.
xvi.All final exterior and interior cleaning of the systems.
Other Standards
AA ADM 1 Aluminum Design Manual
AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2 Specification for Windows, Doors and Unit Skylights
AAMA 502 Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Windows
and Sliding Glass Doors
AAMA 503 Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Metal
Storefronts. Curtain Wall and Sloped Glazing Systems
AAMA 611 Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural
Aluminum
AAMA 1503 Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and
Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and
Glazed Wall Sections
AAMA 2603 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and
Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on
Aluminum Extrusions and Panels
AAMA 2604 Voluntary specification, Performance Requirements and
Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings
on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels
AAMA 2605 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and
Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic
Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels
AAMA CW-10 Care & Handling of Architectural Aluminum
JKT05 SS6/3
AAMA SFM-1 Aluminum Store Front and Entrance Manual
ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings & Other Structures
ASTM A 36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A 123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
ASTM B 209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Sheet and Plate
ASTM B 221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-
Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
ASTM B 633 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of
Zinc on Iron and Steel
ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials
ASTM E 283 Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air
Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and
Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen
ASTM E 330 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform
Static Air Pressure Difference
ASTM E 331 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air
Pressure Difference
ASTM E 1886 Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective
Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to Cyclic
Pressure Differentials
ASTM E 1996 Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior
JKT05 SS6/4
Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors and Impact Protective
Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes
ASTM F 1450 Standard Test Methods for Hollow Metal Swinging Door
Assemblies for Detention Facilities
GC-03 Anti-Corrosive Paints
NFRC 100 Procedures for Determining Fenestration Product U-
Factors
SSPC Paint 20 Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I - Inorganic and Type II –
Organic)
SSPC Paint 25 Red Iron Oxide, Zinc Oxide, Raw Linseed Oil, and Alkyd
Primer
UL 752 - 00, 10th Edition, Bullet Resistant Equipment
ICC International Building Code (IBC).
6.1.1 Performance contract
The Specification is of the “performance” type and includes the minimum

requirements for External and Internal Aluminium Works without limiting the Sub-
Contractor to the method of achieving the performance required. The Sub-Contractor
shall be responsible for the entire design of the External and Internal Aluminium
Works based on the outline drawings and details prepared by the Architect.
The tender drawings do not purport to identify or solve completely the problems of
thermal or structural movement, pressure equalization, vapor barriers, fixings and
anchorage, flatness and stability of facing, moisture disposal, etc. The drawings also
do not purport to solve problems at the glass line associated with glass movement,
pressure factor or thermal shock.
The tender drawings only indicate profile and configuration required together with
relationship to structural frame and interior building elements.
Any additional requirements in respect of the Sub-Contractor’s design as aforesaid

which may subsequently be found or deemed necessary by the Sub-Contractor, the
Contractor or the Architect, will be held to be included in the Contract Sum.
JKT05 SS6/5
The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the design of all components of the
External and Internal Aluminium works installation, including (but not by way of
limitation) frame sections and sizes, catches, locks, rating gears, glass thickness,
glass location, weather stripping and neoprene gaskets, to meet all performance
requirements and shall be subject to the approval of the Architect.
The design drawings of the Sub-Contractor will be subject to the inspection and
acceptance of the Architect and Contractor, and will subsequently form part of the
Contract Documents.
The following Specification contains comprehensive technical requirements for the

Aluminium works and the Sub-Contractor in submitting proposals for the Aluminium
Works will be deemed to have included against the entire contents of this
Specification in the Contract sum, as a minimum requirement, and also to have
included for any measures necessary for compliance with the Specification,
regardless of whether such means are specifically referred to in the Specification.
6.1.2 Shop drawings, samples & mock-ups
Shop drawings, samples, etc. shall be submitted to the Architect for approval before
the Sub-Contractor is allowed to proceed with the fabrication. However, the approval
of the drawings by the Architect shall not absolve the Sub-Contractor from all
responsibilities and liabilities as to performance and the efficiency of the External and
Internal Aluminium Works.
In addition, the Sub-Contractor will be requested to prepare shop drawings when

instructed by the Architect during the course of the Contract Works.
Aluminium sections, assemblies, sealants and glass samples are to be submitted for
Architect’s approval prior to fabrication.
Mock-up unit of typical open able and fixed units to be submitted to for approval prior
to fabrication.
6.1.3 Involvement by manufacturers
Tenderers submitting proposals or systems based on the design of a parent

company or manufacturer are to include in their tenders for the participation by the
parent or manufacturer in the whole process of the designing and installation of the
Works.
6.1.4 Ease of maintenance
JKT05 SS6/6
The installation is to be designed to facilitate ease of future repair and maintenance.

To this end, it must be possible to remove any designated unit without the need to
remove any other unit. The Contractor is to submit with his tender a description of
the method of removing a single unit.
6.1.5 Sound insulation
All assemblies shall comply with relevant CP. The arithmetic mean of the sound
transmission loss at 1/3 active bands over frequency bands from 125 Hz shall not be
less than 40 dB for fixed panels and 36 dB for operable windows.
6.1.6 Local authority approval
The whole External and Internal Aluminium Works assemblies and their individual
components shall comply with all local or other statutory requirements. The Sub-
Contractor will be fully responsible for any submissions to the relevant authorities as
may be necessary to demonstrate the compliance with statutory requirements of any
material used in the assemblies.
6.1.7 Aluminium windows and doors
All window and doorframes shall be Polyester Powder-Coated treated and shall be
designed, fabricated, supplied and installed as manufacturer’s recommendations and
to the approval of the Architect. Colour is to be determined only after the
submissions of the relevant sample by the contractor and approved by the Architect.
Aluminium shall be an approved Architectural aluminium alloy conforming to the

requirements of all relevant local Codes of Practice.
Aluminium unit shall be framed with corners of adequate strength and design to
prevent distortion, reinforced with steel as necessary and with hardwood cores where
required and factory welded, riveted or bolted. All units countersunk flush where
practicable or semi-countersunk round headed where it is not practicable to
countersink fully.
Mullions, transoms and other sections are to be submitted to Architect for approval
prior to fabrication.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary accessories and fixings for proper
completion of the Works.
Frames shall be fixed in structural drawing openings using appropriate fixing lugs
JKT05 SS6/7
and properly bolted to the structure.
Aluminium doors and windows shall be installed complete with all operating
ironmongery, locks, keys, etc. to the Architect’s approval.
Protective tapes, strippings, etc. shall be provided for all aluminium surfaces and
shall not be removed until final cleaning down of the building.
6.1.8 Installation
The following shall also be provided in the design and installation:
Expansion joints of structural supports and frames relative to varying expansion

coefficients of different materials.
Sealing of expansion/frame joints with an approved stable rubber sleeve.
Protection of frame surfaces as per metal worker specifications.
Cleaning of frame surfaces upon completion.
All joints between masonry and concrete shall be fully caulked with polyurethane
sealant or equivalent, a non-staining, permanently elastic and waterproof sealant.
The complete work shall present a substantially uniform appearance in regard to

colour and texture and shall be a satisfactory match with identical samples or colour
patches held by the Architect and the Main Contractor.
6.1.9 Other
The façade is to perform satisfactorily for the following periods:
A 25 years with minimum maintenance (apart from regular cleaning)
b 50 years with appropriate maintenance
Requirements for warranties are given in the Contract Document. The expected life
of products used in the façade shall be confirmed by providing at least the
information below:
a) the economic life of the product/material in the environment in which it

shall be used (this is not a warranty or guarantee);
b) requisite maintenance procedures which must be followed in order to

achieve the economic life of the product/material;
JKT05 SS6/8
c) an assurance from the supplier/manufacturer that the product is

suitable for the proposed application;
d) relevant product data including names of supplier and manufacturers.
All materials that are exposed to sunlight, including materials exposed through glass,
shall not be affected due to exposure to heat or ultraviolet radiation such that the
material can no longer perform as intended, for a period of 20 years.
6.2 FAÇADE CLADDING SYSTEM – ALUCOBOND® A2 CLADDING OR APPROVED
EQUIVALENT
6.2.1 SCOPE
A. SECTION INCLUDES
1. The extent of panel system work is indicated on the drawings and in these
specifications.
2. Panel system requirements include the following components:
a. Aluminum faced non-combustible composite panels with mounting

system. Panel mounting system including anchorages, shims, furring,
fasteners, gaskets and sealants, related flashing adapters, and masking
(as required) for a complete watertight installation.
b. Parapet coping, column covers, soffits, sills, border, and filler items
indicated as integral components of the panel system or as designed.
c. Interior panel system work that basically matches exterior panel system
work.
B. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
1. Section 05100: Structural steel
2. Section 06100: Back up walls
3. Section 07200: Insulation
4. Section 07600: Metal flashing and counter flashing
5. Section 07920: Caulking and sealants
6. Section 09200: Interior wall finishes
JKT05 SS6/9
6.2.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Composite Panel Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 20 years experience

in the manufacturing of this product.
2. Composite Panel Manufacturer shall be solely responsible for panel

manufacture and application of the finish.
3. Fabricator/installer shall be acceptable to the composite panel manufacturer.
4. Fabricator/Installer shall have a minimum 5 years experience of metal panel

work similar in scope and size to this project.
5. Field measurements should be taken prior to the completion of shop fabrication

whenever possible. However, coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress as directed by the Contractor to avoid delay of work. Field fabrication
may be allowed to ensure proper fit. However, field fabrication shall be kept to
an absolute minimum with the majority of the fabrication being done under
controlled shop conditions.
6. Shop drawings shall show the preferred joint details providing a watertight and
structurally sound wall panel system that allows no uncontrolled water
penetration on the inside face of the panel system as determined by ASTM E
331. Systems not utilizing a construction sealant at the panel joints (i.e. Rout
and Return Dry and Rear Ventilated System) shall provide a means of
concealed drainage with baffles and weeps for water which may accumulate in
members of the system.
7. Maximum deviation from vertical and horizontal alignment of erected panels:

6mm (1/4”) in 6m (20’) non-accumulative.
8. Panel fabricator/installer shall assume undivided responsibility for all

components of the exterior panel system including, but not limited to
attachment to sub-construction, panel to panel joinery, panel to dissimilar
material joinery, and joint seal associated with the panel system.
9. Composite panel manufacturer shall have established a Certification Program

acceptable to the local Code Authorities.
6.2.3 REFERENCES
ALUMINIUM WINDOWS, DOORS & FAÇADE RELATED MATERIALS
JKT05 SS6/10
All window and door frames shall be either Polyester Powder-Coated treated
aluminium and shall be designed, fabricated, supplied and installed as
manufacturer’s recommendations and to the approval of the Architect.
Aluminium shall be an approved Architectural aluminium alloy conforming to the

requirements of BS 1470 – 1475 and BS 1161.
Aluminium unit shall be framed with corners of adequate strength and design to
prevent distortion, reinforced with steel as necessary and with hardwood cores where
required and factory welded, riveted or bolted. All units countersunk flush where
practicable or semi-countersunk round headed where it is not practicable to
countersink fully.
Mullion, transom and other sections to be submitted to Architect for approvals prior to
fabrication.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary accessories and fixings for proper
completion of the Works.
Frames shall be fixed in structural drawing openings using appropriate fixing lugs
and properly bolted to the structure.
Fixed louvres shall be of weatherproof type suitable for overcoming water carry-over
by wind up to a velocity of 161 kph and have a pressure drop of not more than 40 Fa
when subjected to a gross face velocity of 150m/min for airflow directions normal to
the louvre blades.
Aluminium doors and windows shall be installed complete with all operating
ironmongery, locks, keys, etc. to the Architect’s approval.
Protective tapes, strippings, etc. shall be provided for all aluminium surfaces and
shall not be removed until final cleaning down of the building.
All aluminium façade details are to be captured within a mock up extending a min. of
1m in height and 4m in width.
JKT05 SS6/11
6.2.4 SUBMITTALS
A. SAMPLES
1. Panel System Assembly: Two samples of each type of assembly. 304mm

(12”) x 304mm (12”) minimum.
2. Two samples of each color or finish selected, 76mm (3”) x 102mm (4”)
minimum.
B. SHOP DRAWINGS
Submit shop drawings showing project layout and elevations; fastening and anchoring
methods; detail and location of joints, sealants, and gaskets, including joints
necessary to accommodate thermal movement; trim; flashing; and accessories.
C. AFFIDAVIT CERTIFYING MATERIAL MEETS REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED.
D. TWO COPIES OF MANUFACTURER’S LITERATURE FOR PANEL MATERIAL.
E. CODE COMPLAINCE
Documents showing product compliance with the national and local building code shall
be submitted prior to the bid. These documents shall include, but not be limited to,
appropriate Evaluation Reports and/or test reports supporting the use of the product.
F. ALTERNATE MATERIALS MUST BE APPROVED BY THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO

THE BID DATE.
6.2.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1. Protect finish and edges in accordance with panel manufacturer’s

recommendations.
2. Store material in accordance with panel manufacturer’s recommendations.
PRODUCTS
6.2.6 PANELS
G. COMPOSITE PANELS
1. ALUCOBOND A2material manufactured by 3A Composites USA, Inc. 208

West 5th Street, Benton, KY 42025 (800-626-3365 or 270-527-4200)
JKT05 SS6/12
2. Items of the same function and performance, which have received prior
approval from the architect, shall be allowed for this project. Approval shall
be based on documentation submitted showing the adequacy of the material.
H. THICKNESS: 4MM (0.157”); 6MM (0.236”)
I. PRODUCT PERFORMANCE
1. Bond Integrity
When tested for bond integrity, in accordance with ASTM D1781 (simulating
resistance to panel delamination), there shall be no adhesive failure of the
bond a) between the core and the skin nor b) cohesive failure of the core itself
below the following values:
Peel Strength: 115 N mm/mm (22.5 in lb/in) as manufactured
115 N mm/mm (22.5 in lb/in) after 21 days soaking in water at

70°F
2. Fire Performance
ASTM E 84 Flame Spread Index must be less than 25, Smoke Developed
Index must be less than 450.
ASTM D 1929 A self ignition temperature of 350oC or greater
ASTM D-635 Requires a CC1 classification
Panel must comply with one of the following BS 476 Part 4 or BS 476 part 11
or BS 476 Part 6+7 or EN 13501-1 or NFPA 285. Panel must not have
flammable core (plastic or polyethylene core is not permitted).
J. FINISHES
1. Coil coated Powder Coating in conformance with the following general

requirements of AAMA 2605 (or equivalent local Standards).
a. Color: (Select one of the following)
1) Standard color as selected by the Architect from manufacturer’s

standard color palette.
2) Custom color to be matched by the panel supplier.
JKT05 SS6/13
3) Clear coat over pretreated natural and brushed aluminum

substrates.
b. Coating Thickness:
1) Colors: 1.0 mil (±0.2 mil).
2) Clear: 0.50 mil (± 0.05 mil).
c. Hardness: ASTM D-3363; HB minimum using Eagle Turquoise Pencil.
d. Impact:
1) Test method: ASTM D-2794; Gardner Variable Impact Tester with

5/8” mandrel.
2) Coating shall withstand reverse impact of 0.2Nm per mil substrate

thickness.
3) Coating shall adhere tightly to metal when subjected to #600

Scotch Tape pick-off test. Slight minute cracking permissible. No
removal of film to substrate.
e. Adhesion:
1) Test Method: ASTM D-3359.
2) Coating shall not pick off when subjected to an 300 x 300mm x

1.5mm grid and taped with #600 Scotch Tape.
f. Humidity Resistance
1) Test Method: ASTM D-2247.
2) No formation of blisters when subject to condensing water fog at

100% relative humidity and 38°C for 4000 hours.
g. Salt Spray Resistance:
1) Test Method: ASTM B-117; Expose coating system to 4000 hours,

using 5% NaCl solution.
2) Corrosion creepage from scribe line: 1.5mm max.
3) Minimum blister rating of 8 within the test specimen field.
JKT05 SS6/14
h. Weather Exposure
1) Outdoor:
a. Ten-year exposure at 45° angle facing south Florida exposure.
b. Maximum color change of 5 Delta E units as calculated in

accordance with ASTM D-2244.
c. Maximum chalk rating of 8 in accordance with ASTM D-4214.
d. No checking, crazing, adhesion loss.
i. Chemical Resistance:
1) ASTM D-1308 utilizing 10% Muriatic Acid for an exposure time of

15 minutes. No loss of film adhesion or visual change when
viewed by the unaided eye.
2) ASTM D-1308 utilizing 20% Sulfuric Acid for an exposure time of

18 hours. No loss of film adhesion or visual change when viewed
by the unaided eye.
3) AAMA 2605 utilizing 70% reagent grade Nitric Acid vapor for an
exposure time of 30 minutes. Maximum color change of 5 Delta E
units as calculated in accordance with ASTM D-2244.
2. Anodized:
Color (Clear): AA-C22-A41 Architectural Class I Color Coating: AA-C22-A44,
light bronze, medium bronze, dark bronze and black.
Architectural Class I/II
3. Urethane Coating:
For small quantity aluminum accent panels or custom color applications,
provide a multi coat urethane finish in accordance with the paint
manufacturer’s requirements.
4. High Performance Clear:
For application over pre-treated natural and brushed aluminium substrates,

provide a high performance single coat clear finish.
JKT05 SS6/15
6.2.7 PANEL FABRICATION
A. COMPOSITION:
Two sheets of aluminum sandwiching a solid core of non-combustible material formed

in a continuous process with no glues or adhesives between dissimilar materials. The
core material shall be free of voids and/or air spaces and not contain foamed
insulation material. Products laminated sheet by sheet in a batch process using glues
or adhesives between materials shall not be acceptable.
B. ALUMINUM FACE SHEETS:
Thickness: 0.50mm (0.0197”) (nominal)
Alloy: AA3000 Series (Paintedmaterial)
AA5000 Series (Anodized material)
C. PANEL WEIGHT:
1. 4mm (0.157”): 7.6 kg/m2
2. 6mm (0.236”): 10.8 kg/m2
D. TOLERANCES
1. Panel Bow: Maximum 0.8% of any 1828mm (72”) panel dimension.
2. Panel Dimensions: Field fabrication shall be allowed where necessary, but

shall be kept to an absolute minimum. All fabrication shall be done under
controlled shop conditions when possible.
3. Panel lines, breaks, and angles shall be sharp, true, and surfaces free from
warp and buckle.
4. Maximum deviation from panel flatness shall be 3mm in 1500mm on panel in

any direction for assembled units. (Non-accumulative – No Oil Canning)
E. SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
1. Plans, elevations, details, characteristics, and other requirements indicated

are based upon standards by one manufacturer. It is intended that other
manufacturers, receiving prior approval, may be acceptable, provided their
details and characteristics comply with size and profile requirements, and
material/performance standards.
JKT05 SS6/16
2. System must not generally have any visible fasteners, telegraphing or

fastening on the panel faces or any other compromise of a neat and flat
appearance.
3. System shall comply with the applicable provisions of the “Metal Curtain Wall,
Window, Storefront, and Entrance Guide Specifications Manual” by AAMA
and ANSI/AAMA 302.9 requirements for aluminum windows.
4. Fabricate panel system to dimension, size, and profile indicated on the

drawings based on a design temperature of 25°C.
5. Fabricate panel system so that no restraints can be placed on the panel,

which might result in compressive skin stresses. The installation detailing
shall be such that the panels remain flat regardless of temperature change
and at all times remain air and water tight.
6. The finish side of the panel shall have a removable plastic film applied prior
to fabrication, which shall remain on the panel during fabrication, shipping,
and erection to protect the surface from damage.
F. SYSTEM TYPE
1. Tray Panel Rout and Return Dry:
System must provide a perimeter aluminum extrusion with integral weather-

stripping as detailed on drawings.
No field sealant required in joints unless specifically noted on drawings.
G. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
1. Composite panels shall be capable of withstanding building movements and

weather exposures based on the following test standards required by the
Architect and/or the local building code.
a. Wind Load
If system tests are not available, mock-ups shall be constructed and

tests performed under the direction of an independent third party
laboratory, which show compliance to the following minimum standards:
Panels shall be designed to withstand the Design Wind Load based

upon the local building code, but in no case l1 kilopascal (kPa) and 1.5
JKT05 SS6/17
kPa on parapet and corner panels. Wind load testing shall be

conducted in accordance with ASTM E330 to obtain the following
results.
Normal to the plane of the wall between supports, deflection of the

secured perimeter-framing members shall not exceed L/175 or 20mm,
whichever is less.
Normal to the plane of the wall, the maximum panel deflection shall not
exceed L/60 of the full span.
Maximum anchor deflection shall not exceed 1.5mm.
At 1-1/2 times design pressure, permanent deflections of framing

members shall not exceed L/100 of span length and components
shall not experience failure or gross permanent distortion. At
connection points of framing members to anchors, permanent set shall
not exceed 1/16”.
b. Air/Water System Test
If system tests are not available, mock-ups shall be constructed and

tests performed under the direction of an independent third party
laboratory, which show compliance to the following minimum standards:
Air Infiltration – When tested in accordance with ASTM E283, air

infiltration at 1 kPa must not exceed 1.25m3h/m2 of wall area.
Water Infiltration – Water infiltration is defined as uncontrolled water

leakage through the exterior face of the assembly. Systems not using
a construction sealant at the panel joints (i.e. Rout and Return Dry and
Rear Ventilated Systems) shall be designed to drain any water leakage
occurring at the joints. No water infiltration shall occur in any system
under a differential static pressure of 0.3 kPa after 15 minutes of
exposure in accordance with ASTM E331.
c. Pressure Equalized Rain Screen Systems shall comply with AAMA 508-
05 Voluntary Test Method and Specification for Pressure Equalized
Rain Screen Wall Cladding Systems
JKT05 SS6/18
6.2.8 ACCESSORIES
1. Extrusions, formed members, sheet, and plate shall conform with ASTM
B209 and the recommendations of the manufacturer.
2. Panel stiffeners, if required, shall be structurally fastened or restrained at the

ends and shall be secured to the rear face of the composite panel with
silicone of sufficient size and strength to maintain panel flatness. Stiffener
material and/or finish shall be compatible with the silicone.
3. Sealants and gaskets within the panel system shall be as per manufacturer's
standards to meet performance requirements.
4. Fabricate flashing materials from 0.75mm minimum thickness aluminum

sheet painted to match the adjacent curtain wall / panel system where
exposed. Provide a lap strap under the flashing at abutted conditions and
seal lapped surfaces with a full bed of non-hardening sealant.
5. Fasteners (concealed/exposed/non-corrosive): Fasteners as recommended

by panel manufacturer. Do not expose fasteners except where unavoidable
and then match finish of adjoining metal.
6.3 EXECUTION
6.3.1 INSPECTION
1. Surfaces to receive panels shall be even, smooth, sound, clean, dry and free
from defects detrimental to work. Notify contractor in writing of conditions
detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with
erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2. Surfaces to receive panels shall be structurally sound as determined by a

registered Architect/Engineer. This will have to be further verified/proven by
the relevant contractor’s Professional Engineer as well.
6.3.2 INSTALLATION
1. Erect panels plumb, level, and true.
2. Attachment system shall allow for the free and noiseless vertical and
horizontal thermal movement due to expansion and contraction for a material
JKT05 SS6/19
temperature range of -30°C to 85°C. Buckling of panels, opening of joints,

undue stress on fasteners, failure of sealants or any other detrimental effects
due to thermal movement will not be permitted.
Fabrication, assembly, and erection procedure shall account for the ambient
temperature at the time of the respective operation.
3. Panels shall be erected in accordance with an approved set of shop

drawings.
4. Anchor panels securely per engineering recommendations and in

accordance with approved shop drawings to allow for necessary thermal
movement and structural support.
5. Conform to panel fabricator’s instructions for installation of concealed

fasteners.
6. Do not install component parts that are observed to be defective, including

warped, bowed, dented, abraised, and broken members.
7. Do not cut, trim, weld, or braze component parts during erection in a manner
which would damage the finish, decrease strength, or result in visual
imperfection or a failure in performance. Return component parts which
require alteration to shop for refabrication, if possible, or for replacement with
new parts.
8. Separate dissimilar metals and use gasketed fasteners where needed to

eliminate the possibility of corrosive or electrolytic action between metals.
6.3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
1. Remove and replace panels damaged beyond repair as a direct result of the
panel installation. After installation, panel repair and replacement shall become
the responsibility of the General Contractor.
2. Repair panels with minor damage.
3. Remove masking (if used) as soon as possible after installation. Masking

intentionally left in place after panel installation on an elevation, shall become the
responsibility of the General Contractor.
4. Any additional protection, after installation, shall be the responsibility of the

General Contractor.
JKT05 SS6/20
5. Make sure weep holes and drainage channels are unobstructed and free of dirt
and sealants.
6. Final cleaning shall not be part of the work of this section.
6.4 ALUMINIUM VENTILATION LOUVRES AND DOUBLE BANK LOUVERS
The aluminium ventilation and double bank louvres to be used for the building shall be
weather-tight with virtually 100% efficient at rain defense. The louvres shall be double
bank shallow section louvres. 2UL/SH louvres offer the same airflow as conventional
louvre but, in rainy weather, is five and a half times more effective at keeping rain out
with front louvres at 50mm pitch. The interval gaps between the louvers shall be
25mm.
The double bank louvre system, 2UL/SH, must be tested complying to the following:
• Rain Defence Performance = Class A (up to 1m/s suction velocity)
• Aerodynamic Performance = Min. performance coefficient (Cv) of 0.308, Class

2 to HEVAC 4th Edition
Specification and Dimensions
2UL/SH offers the same airflow as conventional ‘Z’ section louvre, with tangential
separation, 50mm pitch.
Materials
Louvre systems are to be manufactured from specially designed aluminium extrusions

and roll-formed materials. The details below show the principle materials for the louvre
profiles.
Roll-formed Parts including Universal Louvre profiles:
• Aluminium alloy to BS 1470, type 5251 H22.
• Stainless steel to BS 1449 pt2, type 316S31.
• Galvanised mild steel (Galvatite) to BS 2989 class Z2.
• Zinc/aluminium coated steel to BS 6830 Grade ZA2.
JKT05 SS6/21
Extruded louvre profiles are manufactured from high-grade aluminium alloy to BS

1474, type 6063-T6.
Sealants and gaskets are used between materials that can have an adverse reaction
when in contact with each other.
Finishes
The finishes of the louvres shall be PPC -Polyester powder-coated finish to a RAL
colour to match external finishes; Colour to Architect’s selection & approval.
Fixing and Construction
The ventilator is designed to be fitted into an opening and/or onto supporting members
supplied and fitted by others. Details of supports required depend upon the size of
opening and design wind load. Ventilators fitted into sheeting require a framework
round the opening.
Universal louvre is usually assembled on site. All components for each

ventilator/opening are packed and clearly labelled. Painted and anodised parts are
wrapped to protect the finish.
Care must be taken to ensure that 2UL will be flushed with the wall when fitting the
framework.
Drainage
Special drainage systems are to be incorporated into each ventilator. Water is drained
down to the bottom frame, directly from the outer surface and via a system of internal
channels.
The bottom frame of 1UL and 2UL ventilators forms a cill preventing re-entainment.
Water collected on the inner louvres of 2UL is drained internally via hollow box
sections. Water is discharged from 2.5”D outlets for connection to PVC pipes
(BS4576). They should be spaced evenly along the width of the unit and fitted, if
possible, at mullion positions.
On 2UL/SH it is possible to specify the outlet with the pipe connection at the front or
rear of the ventilator. The drainage capacity of the ventilator has been calculated in
accordance with CP.308 based on rainfall of 76mm per hour. The wall area above 2UL
must be included in the calculations for drainage purposes. When exposure to gale
JKT05 SS6/22
force winds and rain is expected, a gutter should be fitted to divert extra rainwater
away. In this instance the wall area would not be included in the calculations.
The limitations of 2UL per rainwater outlet are as follows:
a. Maximum height of 2UL/H including the wall above: 15m
b. Maximum width of 2UL/V excluding the wall above: 13m
c. Maximum area of 2UL/V including the wall above: 50m2
d. Maximum area per outlet including the wall above: 50 m2
If the size of a single ventilator panel exceeds these limits, more than one ventilator
must be used, fitted side by side and/or one above the other.
Testing
Performance data in the Louvre Specifiers Manual is taken from tests using two test
methods.
Where possible, data has been included from tests carried out by BSRIA using the
1988 HEVAC standard ‘Method of test for water rejection performance of Lourdes
subjected to simulated rainfall’. All other data is the result of extensive testing carried
out to our own exacting standards.
Both tests are similar in concept, the HEVAC method being developed partly from the
Colt test method. The tests simulate, as far as possible, typical UK site conditions.
The HEVAC method uses a single rig, to assess both the louvre coefficient and its
rainfall rejection efficiency, simulating wind at 0 and 13m/s, rain at 75mm per hour,
and inlet airflows between 0 and 3.5m/s. The Colt test for weathering performance is
similar, but utilises a different test-rig configuration. Colt louvre coefficient tests are
carried out on a separate wind tunnel.
All tests are carried out on louvre panels of nominal face area 1m x 1m and panel area
1.2m x 1.2m.
Mock Up
Full height louvre panel with a min. of 1.5m in width (to Architect’s approval).
Guarantee/Warranty
JKT05 SS6/23
The louvre systems are to be guaranteed against faulty materials and workmanship
for 10 years.
Shop drawings and approved test reports are to be submitted for approval before
installation.
All Louvres profiles into mechanical ventilation ducts, flue ducts etc on the wall or roof
level, are to be weatherproof to prevent the entry of rain or other elements into the
ducts and come with bird or insect screen installed on the interior face of the louvres
properly secured to louvre frames with stainless steel sheet metal screws located at
each corner and spaced approximately 300mm c/c around the screen perimeter.
Fabricate screen frames from the same material as louvres and join by welding or
mechanical fasteners.
6.5 ALUMINIUM FRAMED ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS / WINDOW WALLS
Offset flush glazed, jambs and vertical mullions with continuous, head and sill
members attached by screw spline method; or continuous head and sill members with
intermediate horizontals attached by shear clips. Manufacturer's standard extruded
aluminum mullions and indicated shapes.
The thermal barrier shall consist of a single durometer EPDM glazing gasket/isolator
and isolator clips at the perimeter that minimize all metal to metal contact between the
exterior and interior. Systems employing non-structural type thermal barriers are not
acceptable.
The system shall include the following :
A. Aluminum Window Wall System – YKK AP Series YWE 60T Aluminium

Window Wall with Framing System or approved equivalent
a. Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), 6063-T5 Aluminum Alloy.
b. Aluminum Sheet:
i. Anodized Finish: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 5005-H14

Aluminum Alloy, 0.050” (1.27 mm) minimum thickness.
JKT05 SS6/24
ii. Painted Finish: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 3003-H14

Aluminum Alloy, 0.080” (1.95) mm) minimum thickness.
B. Sealants – Non-skinning type, AAMA 803.3.
C. Glass & Glazing – Double glazed laminated glass panels with 4mm thick
polyester safety and security film (on the interior side). U-value and shading
coefficient to comply with LEED Gold Certification and MEP requirements
Setting blocks, edge blocks, and spacers in accordance with ASTM C 864,
shore durometer hardness as recommended by manufacturer; Glazing gaskets
in accordance with ASTM C 864.
D. Fasteners – Zinc plated steel concealed fasteners; Hardened aluminum alloys

or AISI 300 series stainless steel exposed fasteners, countersunk, finish to
match aluminium color.
6.5.1 Fabrication
A. Shop Assembly : Fabricate and assemble units with joints only at intersection of
aluminium members with uniform hairline joints; rigidly secure, and sealed in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
a. Hardware: Drill and cut to template for hardware. Reinforce frames and door
stiles to receive hardware in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
b. Welding: Conceal welds on aluminium members in accordance with AWS

recommendations or methods recommended by manufacturer. Members
showing welding bloom or discoloration on finish or material distortion will be
rejected.
6.5.2 Finishes & Colours
A. YKK AP America Anodized Plus® Finish
B. Anodized Finishing
a. Anodic Coating: Electrolytic colour coating followed by an organic seal

applied in accordance with the requirements of AAMA 612. Aluminium
extrusions shall be produced from quality-controlled billets meeting AA-
6063-T5.
JKT05 SS6/25
b. Extrusions shall be given a caustic etch followed by an anodic oxide

treatment and then sealed with an organic coating applied with an
electrodeposition process.
c. The anodized coating shall comply with all of the requirements of

AAMA 612: Voluntary Specifications, Performance Requirements and
Test Procedures for Combined Coatings of Anodic Oxide and
Transparent Organic Coatings on Architectural Aluminium. Testing shall
demonstrate the ability of the finish to resist damage from mortar, salt
spray, and chemicals commonly found on construction sites, and to
resist the loss of colour and gloss.
d. Overall coating thickness for finishes shall be a minimum of 0.7 mils.
C. High Performance Organic Coating Finish:
a. Fluoropolymer Type: Factory applied two-coat 70% Kynar resin by

Arkema or 70% Hylar resin by Solvay Solexis, fluoropolymer based
coating system, Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVF-2), applied in accordance
with YKK AP procedures and meeting AAMA 2605 specifications.
b. Colours: Selected by Architect from the following:
i. Standard coating colour charts.
ii. Custom coating colour charts.
c. Colour Name and Number:
D. Finishes Testing:
a. Apply 0.5% solution NaOh, sodium hydroxide, to small area of finished

sample area; leave in place for sixty minutes; lightly wipe off NaOh; Do
not clean area further.
b. Submit samples with test area noted on each sample.
6.5.3 Testing
A. Air Filtration
Completed window systems shall have 0.06 CFM/FT² (1.10 m³/h·m²) maximum
allowable infiltration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at differential static
pressure of 6.24 PSF (299 Pa).
JKT05 SS6/26
B. Water Infiltration
Conduct field test to determine water tightness of entrance system. Conduct test in
accordance with AAMA 501.2.
No uncontrolled water on indoor face of any component when tested in accordance

with ASTM E 331 at a static pressure of 15 PSF (719 Pa).
C. Wind Loads
Completed window wall system shall withstand wind pressure loads normal to wall
plane indicated for both exterior and interior walls, value of which shall comply with
local standard requirements.
D. Deflection
Maximum allowable deflection in any member when tested in accordance with ASTM
E 330 with allowable stress in accordance with AA Specifications for Aluminum
Structures.
a. Without Horizontals: L/175 or 3/4" (19.1mm) maximum.
b. With Horizontals: L/175 or L/240 + 1/4" (6.4mm) for spans greater than 13'-6"
(4.1m) but less than 40'-0" (12.2m).
E. Thermal Movement:
Provide for thermal movement caused by 180 degrees F. (82.2 degrees C.) surface
temperature, without causing buckling stresses on glass, joint seal failure, undue
stress on structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners, reduction of performance,
or detrimental effects.
F. Thermal Performance for YWE 60 T when tested in accordance with AAMA 1503 and
NFRC 102:
a. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRFf): A minimum of 64.
b. Thermal Transmittance U Value: 0.47 BTU/HR/FT²/°F or less.
Note: The CRF for the glazed system as a whole will be affected by the
characteristics of the glass specified.
G. Acoustical Performance: When tested in accordance with AAMA 1801
JKT05 SS6/27
a. Sound Transmission Class (STC) shall not be less than: 1" IGU; 31, laminated;
34.
b. Outdoor–Indoor Transmission Class (OITC) shall not be less than: 1" IGU; 26,
laminated; 28.
6.5.4 Submittals
A. General: Prepare, review, approve, and submit specified submittals in accordance

with "Conditions of the Contract" and Division 1 Submittals Sections. Product data,
shop drawings, samples, and similar submittals are defined in "Conditions of the
Contract."
B. Product Data: Submit product data for each entrance series specified.
C. Substitutions: Whenever substitute products are to be considered, supporting

technical data, samples, and test reports must be submitted ten (10) working days
prior to bid date in order to make a valid comparison.
D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles, and product
components, including anchorage, accessories, and finish colours.
E. Samples: Submit verification samples for colours. Minimum 2-1/2 inch by 3 inch (61
mm by 73 mm) samples on actual aluminium substrates indicating full color range
expected in installed system.
F. Quality Assurance / Control Submittals:
a. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified
performance characteristics and physical properties.
b. Installer Qualification Data: Submit installer qualification data.
G. Closeout Submittals:
a. Warranty: Submit executed warranty documents specified herein, endorsed by

YKK AP authorized official and installer.
b. Project Record Documents: Submit project record documents, including

operation and maintenance data for installed materials in accordance
with Division 1 Project Closeout (Project Record Documents) Section.
c. Maintenance Data: Maintenance procedures for care and cleaning of entrance

systems.
JKT05 SS6/28
6.5.5 Mock Ups
Install at project site a job mock-up using acceptable products and manufacturer
approved installation methods. Obtain Owner's and Architect's acceptance of finish
color, and workmanship standard.
A. Visual Mock-Up: The visual mock-up should feature full size glass panels following the
production methods and specifications of that proposed for the typical panels. The
visual acceptance of the glass is to be assessed using the visual mock-up.
B. Maintenance: Maintain mock-up during construction for workmanship comparison;

remove and legally dispose of mock-up when no longer required.
C. Incorporation: Mock-up may be incorporated into final construction upon Owner's

approval.
D. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project

requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions and
manufacturer's warranty requirements.
6.5.6 Warranty
A. Project Warranty: Refer to "Conditions of the Contract" for project warranty.
B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard

warranty document executed by an authorized company official.
a. Warranty Period: Manufacturer’s ten year standard warranty commencing on

the substantial date of completion for the project provided that the warranty, in
no event, shall start later than six (6) months from the date of shipment by YKK
AP America Inc.
6.5.7 Adjusting and Cleaning
A. Adjusting: Adjust swing doors for operation in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations.
B. Cleaning: The General Contractor shall clean installed products in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions prior to owner's acceptance and remove construction
debris from project site. Legally dispose of debris.
C. Protection: The General Contractor shall protect the installed product's finish surfaces
from damage during construction.
SS007_Glass & Glazing
JKT05 SS7/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 7 - GLASS AND GLAZING
SECTION 7
7.0 GLASS AND GLAZING
7.1 GENERALLY
This section describes the requirements for providing glass and glazing and specified
to include:
a. Curtain Wall, Aluminium window system, entrances and shop front, if any.
b. Interior glass and glazing at windows, screens and glass doors
c. Glass Screens
d. Heat Resistance Glass and doors
e. Joint Sealers
f. Mock-Ups and Tests as specified in the Specification under Mock-up and

Tests
External glazing selection & details shall comply with requirements to design
standards/ performance which equivalent to LEED Gold Certification standards.
7.2 STANDARDS
Unless other wise agreed by Architect, ensure all of the works comply with the
Architect, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes
SS 341 Safety glazing materials for use in buildings (Human Impact

considerations)
Other Standards
ANSI Z97.1 Safety Glazing Materials Used in Building Safety
ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
ASTM C 864 Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal

Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers
ASTM C 1036 Standard Specification for Flat Glass

JKT05 SS7/2
ASTM C 1048 Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT
Coated and Uncoated Glass
ASTM C 1172 Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass
ASTM C 1193 Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants
ASTM E 773 Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units
ASTM E 774 Specifications for Sealed Insulating Glass Units
ASTM E 1300 Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in

Buildings
ASTM 1233 Security Glazing Materials and Systems
ASTM F 1450 Standard Test Methods for Hollow Metal Swinging Door Assemblies
for Detention Facilities
ASTM E 1886 Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s)
and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials
ASTM E 1996 Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain

Walls, Doors and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by
Windborne Debris in Hurricanes
CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing
IBC International Building Code
GANA Sealant Manual
GANA Glazing Manual
GANA Laminated Glass Design Guide
GSA-TS01 Standard Test Method for Glazing and Window Systems Subject to
Dynamic Overpressure Loadings
HPW-TP-0500.03 Level 1 Forced Entry Resistance of Structural Materials
NFRC 100 Procedures for Determining Fenestration Product U-Factors
NFRC 200 Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain
Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
NFRC 300 Test Method for Determining the Solar Optical Properties of Glazing
Materials and Systems
UL 10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
UL Building Materials Directory
JKT05 SS7/3
BS 6206 British standard impact testing for annealed glass with applied safety
film
BS 6399-1 Loading for buildings – Part 1: Code of practise for dead and
imposed loads
BS EN 10088-1 Stainless steel – List of stainless steel
BS EN 12878 Pigments for the colouring of building materials based on cement
EN12600 Classification of resistance of glazing to impact
7.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide glass and glazing that has been produced, fabricated and installed to
withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading and impact loading (where
applicable), without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or
gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glass and glazing materials
and other defects in the work.
a Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from an ambient

temperature range of -7°C to +93°C and from a consequent temperature range
within glass and glass framing members of 100°C.
b Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as the development of

manufacturing defects including edge separation or de-lamination which
materially obstructs vision through glass.
7.4 SUBMITTALS
7.4.1 Product Data
Submit manufacturer's technical data for each glazing material and fabrication glass
product required, including installation and maintenance instructions.
7.4.2 Samples
Submit, for verification purposes, 600-mm square samples of each type of glass
indicated except for clear single pane units, and 600-mm long samples of each colour
required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install
sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative of adjoining
framing system in colour.
The Architect will be concerned about the ‘Flatness’ of the proposed glass panels. The
Contractor will provide manufacturers data relating to Flatness and arrange for a visit
by the Architect to a completed example of the proposed glass in a curtain wall floor to
floor glass installation.
JKT05 SS7/4
7.4.3 Certificate
Submit certificates from respective manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing
materials furnished for project comply with requirements
a Separate certification will not be required for glazing materials bearing

manufacturer's permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass,
provided labels represent a quality control program involving a recognised
certification agency or independent testing laboratory acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
7.4.4 Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report
Submit statement from sealant manufacturer indicating that glass and glazing
materials have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants and
interpreting test results relative to material performance, including recommendations
for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.
7.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
a Glazing Standards
Comply fully with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association

(FMGA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where more stringent
requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass
and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced
standards.
i Tempered glass is not acceptable except where required for safety, or

when design pressures exceed the capability of heat-strengthened
glass.
ii Glass panels which break due to a material defect (including nickel

sulfide stones) during the warranty period shall be replaced at no cost
to the Employer.
iii All glass shall be produced by an approved manufacturer, factory-cut to

size, with cleanly cut edges.
iv Except where permanent labels are required, each glass lite shall have
a removable label which will be removed only after acceptance of glass.
b Safety Glazing Standard
All glass panels within 1000mm of adjacent floor levels, where safety glass is
indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide type of products
indicated which comply with relevant ANSI and testing requirements of 16 CFR
Part 1201 for category II materials.
i Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently

marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council
JKT05 SS7/5
(SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.
c Fire Resistance Glass as specified shall meet with the fire rating required and
tested in recognised laboratory and have the test certificate recognised and
acceptable by the Singapore Fire Authority or local Fire Authority.
d Single Source Responsibility For Glass
To ensure consistent quality of appearance and performance, provide

materials produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator for each kind and
condition of glass indicated and composed of primary glass obtained from a
single source for each type and class required.
e Pre-construction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing
Submit samples of all glass, gaskets, glazing accessories, and glass framing
members proposed for use in contact with, or proximity of, glazing sealants, to
sealant manufacturer for compatibility and adhesion testing in accordance with
sealant manufacturer’s standard testing methods and the following
requirements:
i Submit not less than 9 pieces of each type and finish of glass framing
member and of each type, class, kind, condition, and form (monolithic,
laminated, insulating units) of glass for adhesion testing and one
sample of substrates (gaskets, setting blocks and spacers) for
compatibility testing.
ii Schedule sufficient time for testing and analysis of results to prevent

delay in the progress of the Work.
iii Investigate materials failing compatibility or adhesion tests and obtain

sealant manufacturers written recommendations for corrective
measures, including use of specially formulated primers.
f Water Penetration Test
1. After completion of the installation and allowing for the curing of

sealants and glazing compounds, and before installation of interior trim
members, test for water leaks by the following means:
i. Spray water at a constant rate by use of a standard minimum 5/8

inch garden hose.
ii. Water source shall be from nearest fire hydrant location.
iii. Direct water spray primarily at aluminum head, jamb, and sill
sections for no less than 10 minutes.
JKT05 SS7/6
2. Conduct test in the presence of A/E or authorized Owner’s

representative.
3. Notify all parties of proposed test date a minimum of 7 working days

prior to actual test.
4. Water test will be performed to determine the effectiveness of the

sealed component parts of the window system and its ability to resist
water leakage. Water leakage is defined as the appearance of
uncontrolled water, other than condensation, on any inboard part of
window system, either during testing or under actual weather
conditions.
5. Correct deficiencies observed as a result of the test and retest following

remedial procedures.
7.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage and handling to comply
with manufacturers’ directions and as required to prevent edge damage to glass, and
damage to glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture including
condensation, of temperature changes, of direct exposure to sun, and from other
causes.
7.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing material
manufacturer or when joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation or other
causes.
Install liquid sealants at ambient and substrate temperatures above 4.4°C.
7.8 MANUFACTURERS & INSTALLERS
The contractor shall identify the manufacturer for the glass and glazing materials for
Manufacturer must have a minimum of seven years documented experience in

production of glazing products specified in this section.
Installers must have a minimum of seven years documented experience in installation

of glazing products specified in this section.
JKT05 SS7/7
7.9 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
Glass Type Location of use
12mm tempered laminated clear glass as specified in drawings
10mm clear float glass as specified in drawings
17mm Fire Resistance Glass as specified in drawings
*Note- All glass thickness to be verified by specialist contractors P.E.
7.10 PRIMARY GLASS PRODUCTS
7.10.1 Clear Float Glass
ASTM C 1036 Type I, (transparent glass, flat), Class 1, Quality q3 (glazing

select).
7.10.2 Tinted and Coated Float Glass (Types I and 3)
ASTM C 1036 Type I, (transparent glass, flat) Class 2 (tint heated absorbing
and light reducing), Quality q3 (glazing select)
7.11 HEAT-TREATED GLASS PRODUCTS
7.11.1 Manufacturing Process
Manufacture heat-treated glass as follows:
a By horizontal (roller hearth) process with roll wave distortion parallel with
bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.
Uncoated Clear Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM 1048, Condition A

(uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality
q3 (glazing select), kind HS (heat strengthened) or kind FT (fully tempered) as
indicated as indicated below.
7.12 LAMINATED GLASS PRODUCTS
7.12.1 General
Refer to primary and heat-treated glass requirements relating to properties of

uncoated glasses making up laminated glass products.
JKT05 SS7/8
7.12.2 Clear Laminated Glass
a Fabricate laminated glass using laminator's standard heat-plus-pressure

process to produce glass free from foreign substances and air/glass pockets.
b Provide polyvinyl butyral interlayer, not less than 30 mil thickness, for
laminating panes of glass, with a proved record of showing no tendency to
bubble, discolour or lose physical or mechanical properties after laminating and
installation, in clear or colours and of thickness indicated; "Saflex"; Monsanto
co. or equal.
7.12.3 Laminated, opaque graphic interlayer
Two 6-mm clear glass lites with graphic interlayer:
a Standard Plastic Interlayer
Polyvinyl butyral interlayer for laminating panes of glass, with a proved record
of showing no tendency to bubble, discolour or lose physical or mechanical
properties after laminating and installation
7.12.4 Laminating Process
Fabricate laminated glass using laminator's standard heat-plus-pressure

process to produce glass free from foreign substances and air/glass pockets.
7.13 INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS
7.13.1 Sealed Insulating Glass Units
Pre-assembled units consisting of organically sealed lites of glass separated

by dehydrated air spaces complying with relevant ASTM and with other
requirements indicated, including those in Insulating Glass Product Data Sheet
at the end of this Section.
a Provide heat-treated, coated float glass of kind indicated or, if not

otherwise indicated, Kind S (heat strengthened) where recommended by
manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements specified
and Kind T (fully tempered) where safety glass is designated or required.
B U-values are expressed as Btu/hour x sq. t. x deg
c Spacer Bars: Black.
Insulated Glass Assemblies.
JKT05 SS7/9
7.14 FIRE RESISTANCE GLASS
Fire resistance glass shall be a multi-ply sheet glass with special intumescent and
armour shield interlayer. The glass shall be manufactured with an extremely light
“whisky” tint.
The fire rating of the glass shall be 2 hours and tested successfully according to the
relevant International ISO Standard and several national standards. The glass shall
also be designed to safety behaviour according to relevant BS impact test standards.
This standard details the impact performance requirements for flat safety glass. When
a 12mm glass is submitted to an impact of 540 Joule (about 400 lbs-ft):
a there is no perforation
b there are no glass projections
The fire resistance glass shall transforms itself into the complete protective barrier
when exposed to fire as follows:
a For the first few minutes of the fire, the transparency of glass is preserved,
allowing occupants and firemen the opportunity to see through the glass and
evaluate the severity of the outbreak.
b As the heat intensity increases, the special in tumescent interlayer expand, and
the glass becomes completely opaque:
i this indicates an intense fire on the other side
ii ensures that bystanders do not see any flames, nor feel any heat,
thereby reducing the danger of panic during evacuation
c Even when a fire develops temperatures of 850°C and over the glass
maintains constant and complete protection :
i as the heat of the fire increases, the temperature on the side opposite the
fire remains very low (about 100°C) as there is little heat transfer by
conduction or convection
ii so the risk of combustible materials being ignited is completely discarded
d The special structure of glass ensures that no heat-radiation passes from the
fire-side to the other side. This complete elimination of heat-radiation is of the
utmost importance in the effective containment of fire.
7.14.1 General Considerations
The conditions for laminated glass shall be respected and in particular :
a avoid all glass to metal contact
b the glass shall remain free of all restraint
c edge clearance : 4 to 5mm
JKT05 SS7/10
d lateral clearance : 4 to 5mm
e the rabbets shall remain dry
f to be stored away from humidity
g the edge protection shall not be damaged
7.14.2 Glazing Materials
a Elastomer strip (elastozel tape T1). Any foam strip with closed cells can
be used.
b Silicon sealant (Perennator V23-4). Any neutral sealant can be used
c Setting blocks = the usual hardwood blocks
d Fiberfraz Tape – to be used at top side only, for 17mm and 19mm
glass unit
7.15 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS
7.15.1 General
Provide products of type indicated and complying with the following requirements:
a Compatibility
Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials with
which they will come into contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass
units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as
demonstrated by testing and field experience.
b Suitability
Comply with recommendations of sealant and glass manufacturers for selection of

glazing sealants and tapes that have performance characteristics suitable for
applications indicated and conditions at time of installation.
c Elastomeric Sealant Standard
Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base

polymer Indicated which complies with ASTM C-920 requirements, including those for
Type, Grade, Class and Uses.
d Colours
Provide colour of exposed sealants indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected
by architect from manufacturer's standard colours.
JKT05 SS7/11
e Structural Glazing Sealant
Requirements are specified separately.
7.15.2 One-Part Non-Acid-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant
Type S; Grade NS, Glass 25; Uses NT, G. A, and, as applicable to uses indicated, O;
and complying with the following requirements for modulus and additional joint
movement capability.
a Medium Modulus
Tensile strength of not less than 45 nor more than 52,730 kg/m2 at 100
percent elongation when tested per relevant ASTM after 14 days at 20 deg. C
and 50 percent relative humidity.
b Additional capability
When tested per relevant ASTM for adhesion and cohesion under maximum
cyclic movement, to withstand the 40% increase and decrease of joint width,
as measured at time of application, and remain in compliance with other
requirements of relevant ASTM.
c Manufacturer
One-Part Non-Acid Curing Medium- Modulus Silicone Glazing Sealant:
7.16 GLAZING GASKETS
Cellular Elastomeric Pre-formed Gaskets
Extruded or molded closed cell, integral-skinned neoprene of profile and hardness

required to maintain watertight seal; complying with relevant ASTM, Type II; black.
a Sponge gasket shall provide 20-30% compression.
b Dense gaskets shall be extruded black neoprene with a shore A hardness of

75 +/- 5 for hollow profiles, and 60 +/- 5 for solid profiles, and shall conform to
relevant ASTM.
c Dense gaskets of EPDM are also acceptable, provided the material conforms
to all requirements of relevant ASTM, except for flame propagation.
d Mould all corners of all interior gaskets where compatible with installation
procedure.
e It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide gaskets of a hardness and

design such that they will be in contact at all times with adjacent elements
during dynamic loading, building and thermal movements, and provide a
watertight seal as required to meet the performance criteria. They shall be
sized in length to prevent pull-back at corners.
JKT05 SS7/12
7.17 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIAL
7.17.1 Compatibility
Provide materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in

installation.
7.17.2 Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers
Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
7.17.3 Setting Blocks
Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing

sealants 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness.
a Setting blocks and setting block chairs shall be secured against migration.
b Setting blocks and edge blocks shall be sized and located in accordance with
FGMA Glazing Manual.
7.17.4 Spacers
Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks, or continuous extrusions, as required for

compatible with glazing sealant, of size, shape and hardness recommended by
glass and sealant manufacturers for application indicated.
7.17.5 Edge Blocks
Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing

sealant, o size and hardness required to limit lateral movement (side-walking) of
glass.
7.17.6 Compressible Filler Rods
Closed-cell or waterproof jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam,

flexible and resilient, with 3516 to 7031 kg/m2 compression strength for 25 percent
deflection.
7.17.7 Safety & Security Glazing Films
4mm thick film polyester passing ANSI Z97.1 or BS 6206 or EN12600 at 150 ft. lb.
impact, tear resistant, penetration resistant with an acrylic, abrasion resistant
coating, able to reduce UV through glass and tested in accordance with ASTM D
1004.
Product – 3M Fasara Glass Finish – Aerina Series by 3M or approved equivalent
Film Type: Polyester Shading Coefficient: 0.91%
Visible Light Reflectance: 13% Visible Light Transmittances: 79%.
JKT05 SS7/13
7.17.8 One-Way Vision Glazing Films
One-Way Vision Glazing Films, where necessary, shall be installed as per the
manufacturer’s instructions and specifications. The applied material shall be as
follows :
• Internal Film
3M Dual Colour Foil 3635-222 or approved equivalent
Opacity – Opaque
Colour – Black
• External Film
3M Sun Control Window Film Silver 15 Exterior or approved equivalent
Visible Light Transmittance – 15%, 35%
7.18 EXAMINATION
Require Glazier to inspect work of glass framing erector for compliance with
manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets
at corners; for presence and functioning of weep system; for existence of minimum
required face or edge clearances; and for effective sealing of joinery. Obtain Glazier's
written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of glazing work. Do not
allow glazing work to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
7.19 PREPARATION
a Pre-installation Meeting
At Contractor's direction, Glazier, sealant and gasket manufacturers' technical

representatives, glass framing erector and specialist’s contractor whose work
affects glass and glazing shall meet at project site to review procedures and
time schedule proposed for glazing and co-ordination with other work.
Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass,

immediately before glazing. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to
substrates. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants
are indicated for use.
JKT05 SS7/14
7.20 GLAZING, GENERAL
Comply with combined printed recommendations of glass manufacturers, of

manufacturers of sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials, except where more
stringent requirements are indicated, including those of referenced glazing standards.
Glazing channel dimensions as indicated in details are intended to provide for

necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant
thickness’, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at time of
installation.
Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation; use a rolling block in
rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners.
a Do not impact glass with metal framing.
b Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass
with a pry bar.
c Rotate glass with flares or bevels along one horizontal edge which would occur
in vicinity of setting blocks so that these are located at top of opening.
d Remove from project and dispose of glass units with edge damage or other
imperfections of kind that, when installed, weakens glass and impairs
performance and appearance.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined
by pre-construction sealant-substrate testing.
7.21 GLAZING
Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located one quarter of glass width
from each corner, but with edge nearest corner not closer than 150-mm from corner
unless otherwise required. Set blocks in thin course of sealant that is acceptable for
heel bead use.
Provide spacers inside and out, of correct size and spacing to preserve required face
clearances, for glass sizes larger than 1270 united mm (length plus height), except
where gaskets or glazing tapes with continuous spacer rods are used for glazing.
Provide 3.2-mm minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed
thickness of tape.
Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing standard,

except where otherwise required by glass unit manufacturer. Provide 4 sided blocking
of all glass units except where butt glazed.
Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar
characteristics.
JKT05 SS7/15
Provide compressible filler rods or equivalent back-up material, as recommended by

sealant and glass manufacturers, to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel
weep systems and from adhering to joints back surface as well as to control depth of
sealant for optimum performance, unless otherwise indicated.
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete
"wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial "wash" away from glass.
Install pressurised tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel, so as to
eliminate dirt and moisture pockets.
Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurise
sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket
will not "walk" out when installation is subjected to movement.
Mitre cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in manner

recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent pull away at corners; seal corner
joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
7.22 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation by use of crossed
streamers attached to framing and held away from glass. Do not apply markers to
surfaces of glass. Remove non-permanent labels and clean surfaces.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into
contact with glass, remove immediately by method recommended by glass
manufacturer.
Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry
surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less often than once a
month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits or staining. When examination reveals
presence of these forms of residue, remove by method recommended by glass
manufacturer.
Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in
other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and
vandalism.
Wash glass on both faces not more than 4-days prior to date scheduled for
inspections intended to establish date of Completion in each area of Project. Wash
glass by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
JKT05 SS7/16
7.23 FUNCTION LIQUID CRYSTAL FILM
Functional liquid crystal film is a film which is able to transform between a transparent
state and an opaque state with a flick of a switch. This product is designated to be
used on the glass separating the L1 NOC Command Centre with corridor along GL-3.
The extent of this product should be read in conjunction with the related drawings.
This should be a product supplied by Seiko Innovative Light film or any other
approved equivalent products by the Architect. The crystal film chosen shall be the
‘sticking type’. It is a layer of ‘functional Liquid Crystal film with transparent and
opaque capabilities to be stuck onto the glass.
Features:
• High Permeability
• Vision Permeability – Dramatically improved vision through a newly developed

crystal film where transparency has been improved even when viewed from an
angle.
• Low Voltage Drive – Energy saving low rated voltage of AC50V is used.
Voltage used is not large enough to risk harm to humans and electricity fees
are not charged when it is opaque.
Application methods:
The Functional Liquid Crystal Film is to be stuck onto the designated glass. This glass
Is to be stuck on via an adhesive layer/sticking film which is connected to an exclusive
control box with voltage below AC50V. The application of the film should be carried
out by the relevant designated sub-contractor who is approved by the supplier for
carrying out the task.
This includes the sticking on of the film to the connection of the electrical wiring
between the film and the exclusive control box. A proper plan of work has to be
submitted to the Architect before any work is to be carried out. A licensed electrician is
to be present to carry out any relevant electrical work.
The work done must 1) guarantee the implementation of a protective function to the
exclusive control box and 2) provide a low voltage drive (50V).
1) Concerning protective function (Protection from an electric shock)
The degree of danger to get an electric shock is to be decided by:
a) The value of the current that goes through the human body
b) The time when going through
The size of the current and the time that the current might pose a danger here will be
reduced with the exclusive control box of the sticking tppe. This implementation will
JKT05 SS7/17
provide a safe protective function that can detect an electric leakage of 1mA
(minimum of detective current) and disconnection within 0.5 seconds.
The Japan Electric Association – Response of Humans to Alternating Current
The time in which the current goes through someone must fall within AC2 category of
the response curve of humans to an alternating current. This category demonstrates
that the response time of the human body to different current and the period of time
must have ‘no harmful psychological effect’.
2) Concerning safety of 50V (Contact condition and contact voltage)
When a person standing on the earth touches a live part gets an electric shock, we
call the voltage that applies to human as contact voltage. Depending on various
contact condition (including it’s possibility), allowable contact voltage is different.
The contact condition and voltage reference value that this falls within with reference
to the ‘Guide of protection from earth leakage in low voltage circuit by the Japan
Electric Association’ should fall within the category of ‘Type 3’. The contact condition
for this category states that except for type 1 and 3, there is high possibility that
electric voltage applies to someone at all times. The electric circuit where humans
have easy access to (For example, electric tools which may easilty be touched by
humans, in houses, factory, offices and such usual places,). This Contact Voltage
should be lower than 50V.
Rated Item – Drive Voltage

Rated – AC50 +/-
Unit – V
Remarks – Effective Value (Sine wave or square wave)
Thickness - 0.6mm
Maximum dimensions - 900mm × 2400mm （Accept mm level of order）
Power consumption - 6Ｗ／㎡
Response speed - ON 1msec ／ OFF 80 msec （measurement：ambient
temperature 25℃）
Optical Characteristics
Function Item Value
Transparency（power: ON） Turbidity [Haze] Haze=3.7%
JKT05 SS7/18
Parallel line transmission [PT] PT =85.2%

Opacity（power: OFF） Turbidity [Haze] Haze=89.1%
Parallel line transmission [PT] PT= 8.6%
Remarks : Instrument：Turbidity meter

NDH 5000 【JIS-K7105 compliance】
Precautions for use:
o The product is for inside use.
o If it is applied on the outside of the window which is reached by sunshine, there

are cases that the degree of transparency decreases because of infrared rays.
o In the case of reinstallation or reuse after being taken off, it will not be
guaranteed.
o When power is ON transparency state, property of transparency, which liquid

crystal has, may deteriorate with increasing of the angle seeing from the front.
o Ununiformity of opaqueness may appear, which does not influence its use.
Depending on the surrounding environment of functional liquid crystal film
which includes the condition of sunshine and lighting, cases of spotting or
being seen through may appear.
o When used in an environment of lower than 0℃, transformation between

transparency and opaque, which is one of liquid crystal properties, will
become slower.
o Please use in an environment where there is no water, vapor or fire.
o Since influence such as pressure or twisting from the ambient set or frame,
etc., when installing it, can decreases the degree of opaque, cases of spotting
or being seen through may happen.
o Contact by sharp or hard things can cause trouble.
o Functional liquid crystal film is an electric product. Therefore be careful not to

spray water or liquid cleaner directly on the film when cleaning it. Since it will
cause scratches or cuts when wiping it dry, please use a slightly wet cloth etc.
to wipe it lightly.
o When using sticking type consequently, please make sure the distance
between the different pieces of film to be 1mm. at minimum, and to insert
insulated calking compound in between.
o Be careful not to use conductive calking compound.
JKT05 SS7/19
o After functional liquid crystal film is delivered to the customer, requests for size
modification (cutting work and dimension adjustment) are not accepted.
o Make sure to connect an ground wire to the exclusive control box (power
source).
7.24 INDEMNITIES
All glazing related works and glass installed onsite shall be lodged with the Architects
by the Contractor with 10 years indemnity against any glazing related defects, seal
failures, and interpane dusting and misting.
Under this indemnity, the Contractor will be required to replace, make good any
defects and failure in the glazing, glazing related works and any defects arising from
installation. The contractor will be responsible for any consequential loss attribute to
any failure in the glazing and glazing related works during the warranty period.
7.24.1 Replacement Warranties
1. Provide new conforming glass units to replace glass units which break for a
period of one year.
2. Units broken by impact, fire, earthquake, or similar events which exceed the
design loads and conditions are not subject to this requirement.
3. Do not include probability for glass breakage based on specified statistical

glass breakage analysis factor.
4. Include all labor and materials for replacement of failed unit(s). Replacement
shall include coordination with the Owner, immediate provision for maintaining
openings secure and weather tight, timely ordering and fabrication of
replacement items as required, installation, and cleaning.
SS008_Epoxy Flooring
JKT05 SS8/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 8 – EPOXY FLOORING
SECTION 8
8.0 SEAMLESS SOLVENT FREE EPOXY TERRAZZO FLOORING
[Applicable to proposed Floor Type 4]
8.1 GENERAL
8.1.1 Summary
A. Scope of Specification
This specification includes materials and installation methods (execution)

required to install epoxy terrazzo flooring for a complete, operational system,
including not limited to, the following:
a. Solvent free, cast in situ seamless epoxy terrazzo floor.
b. Other items and accessories as indicated on the drawings and as

specified herein.
8.1.2 References
Referenced publication within this specification shall be the latest revision, unless
otherwise specified, and applicable parts of the referenced publication shall become a
part of this specification as is fully included.
8.1.3 Submittals
A. General: Submit the following items to the Architect/ Engineer for review in
accordance with the Contract requirements.
B. Product Data: For each type of product specified, include manufacturer’s technical
data, installation instructions, and recommendations for each resinous terrazzo
flooring component required.
C. Sample for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s colour charts showing the full range of
colours, textures, and patterns available for each resinous terrazzo flooring system
indicated.
D. Product Schedule: Use designations indicated in the Resinous terrazzo Flooring

Schedule and room designations indicated on Drawings in product schedule.
JKT05 SS8/2
E. Installation Instructions: Submit Manufacturer’s standard installation instructions

for each type of resinous terrazzo flooring system specified.
8.1.4 Quality Assurance
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer (licensed applicator) who

has specialized in installing resinous terrazzo flooring similar in material, design,
and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to resinous
terrazzo flooring manufacturer.
a. Engage an installer who employs only persons trained and approved by

resinous terrazzo flooring manufacturer for installing resinous terrazzo
flooring systems specified.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous terrazzo flooring materials, including

primers, resins, hardening agents, and sealing or finish coats, through one source
from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials including patching and fill
material, joint sealant, and repair materials of type and from source recommended
by manufacturer of primary materials.
8.1.5 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken,

bearing manufacturer’s labels indicating brand name and directions for storage
and mixing with other components.
B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions to prevent

deterioration from moisture, heat, cold, direct sunlight, or other detrimental effects.
C. Store materials in unopened containers at a temperature of 10oC (minimum) to

30oC (maximum).
8.1.6 Project Conditions
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous terrazzo flooring manufacturer’s

written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture,
ventilation, and other conditions affecting resinous terrazzo flooring installation.
a. Work shall not proceed without proper results from moisture testing for
each flooring system and area of Work.
JKT05 SS8/3
B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place,

simulate permanent lighting conditions during resinous terrazzo flooring
installation.
C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous terrazzo flooring application and for not less
than 24 hours after application, unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.
8.1.7 Warranty
The Owner shall receive a written guarantee against defects due to improper material
and installation for a period of 10 years following the completion of installation.
8.2 PRODUCTS
8.2.1 Manufacturers and Products
A. Manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into Work include
a. Flowcrete
b. Approved equivalent.
B. Manufacturer’s Product Designations: The product designations and names of one

or more manufacturer are listed for each flooring system type required for the
purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product
designated or, where more than one manufacturer is listed or specified above, the
comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with
requirements indicated.
8.2.2 Materials
A. Resinous Terrazzo Flooring: Resinous Terrazzo floor surfacing system consisting

of primer, epoxy terrazzo screed, grout coat(s) and sealing or finish coat(s).
Comply with requirements indicated in the Resinous Terrazzo Flooring Schedule.
a. Waterproofing Membrane: Resinous terrazzo flooring product of or

approved by resinous terrazzo flooring manufacturer and recommended by
manufacturer for application indicated.
JKT05 SS8/4
B. Patching and Fill Materials: Resinous terrazzo product of or approved by resinous

terrazzo flooring manufacturer and recommended by manufacturer for application
indicated.
C. Joint Sealant: Type recommended or produced by resinous terrazzo flooring

manufacturer for type of service and joint condition indicated.
a. Provide flooring manufacturer’s recommended high strength epoxy control

joint sealant
D. Metal Edge Strips: Provide Zinc Alloy or Aluminium edge strips, 14B & S gauge, of
depth to suite flooring.
E. Equipment: Mixing, cleaning, and application equipment shall be as recommended

in Manufacturer’s printed installation procedures.
8.3. EXECUTION
8.3.1 Inspection
A. Inspect surfaces to be covered before starting work to ensure satisfactory

conditions. Report to Construction Manager in writing on surface and ambient
conditions not conforming to the resinous terrazzo flooring Manufacturer’s
instructions, and not within the scope of this specification. Starting work shall
construct acceptance of surfaces and the responsibility for performance of finished
floor.
B. Moisture Test: Use of hygrometer to determine moisture content of the concrete

floor. Moisture content of the concrete floor shall not exceed 5% or 75% (RH)
Relative Humanity.
C. Moisture test – additional means ---- Perform polyethylene sheet cover test for
excessive moisture in each area prior to starting Work. Test shall conform to
ASTM D- 4263, as follows:
a. Securely tape heavy gauge clear plastic film to concrete floor. The sheet
shall remain undisturbed for a period of 24 hours, and then inspected. The
presence of condensation, moisture, or dampness on the concrete or
plastic sheet indicates excessive moisture in the concrete slab.
JKT05 SS8/5
b. Sheet film shall be 18 inches square and 4 mils thick. Duct tape shall be
used for fastening plastic sheet to substrate.
c. Report to Construction Manager, in writing on surface and ambient

conditions not conforming to the Manufacturer’s instructions, and not within
the scope of this specification.
8.3.2 Preparation
A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to resinous terrazzo flooring

manufacturer’s written instruction for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry, and
neutral substrate for resinous terrazzo flooring application.
B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces (minimum 25N/mm2

compressive strength) free of laitance, glaze, curing compounds, form- release
agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminates incompatible with resinous
terrazzo flooring.
a. Mechanical Abrasion: Shot blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades

the concrete surface, contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus,
and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup. Upon completion of abrasive
blasting, remove residual abrasive, dust and loose particles from the
substrate by vacuuming.
b. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous terrazzo

flooring manufacturer’s written recommendations.
C. Substrate Level: The level of the floor substrate for receiving resinous terrazzo
flooring shall be not more than 3mm deviation over 3 metres straight edge
(BS8204; SR1).
D. Resinous Terrazzo Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to

resinous terrazzo flooring manufacturer’s written instructions.
E. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according
to manufacturer’s written instructions.
F. Protect adjacent surfaces from damages resulting from work of this trade.
G. Safety precautions recommended by Manufacturer shall be followed in mixing and

applying coating. Keep working area well ventilated, using fans if required for
protection of others in the area.
JKT05 SS8/6
8.3.3 Installation
A. GENERAL
Apply components of resinous terrazzo flooring system according to

manufacturer’s written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing
surface of thickness indicated.
a. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of

resinous terrazzo flooring system to substrate and optimum intercoat
adhesion.
b. Cure resinous terrazzo flooring components according to manufacturer’s

written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing
processes.
c. At substrate expansion and isolation joints, provide joint in resinous

terrazzo flooring as per engineer’s written recommendations.
i. Apply joint sealant to comply with manufacturer’s written

recommendation.
B. SURFACE PREPARATION
Totally enclosed shot blasting and/ or scarification. All cementitious laitance to be

removed to expose sound screed beneath and provide a dry, dust free, open
textured surface.
C. APPLICATION OF SEAMLESS SOLVENT FREE EPOXY TERROZZO FLOOR

FINISH
a. Mix & spread a coat of primer at manufacturer’s recommended coverage

rate by using a medium pile roller, brush and/or squeegee, ensuring it is
worked into all surface irregularities. For porous floors where a second coat
is required, allow the first coat to cure overnight.
b. Approximately 10 minutes to 30 minutes (dependant on temperature) after

the application of the primer, broadcast silica sand at manufacturer’s
recommended coverage rate. When the first coat is cured remove the
excess grains and loose particles thoroughly by brush and vacuum.
JKT05 SS8/7
c. Form temporary formwork at perimeter and termination edges. The

formwork thickness should be slightly less than the thickness of the
installed Mondéco, depending on the substrate texture i.e. rough substrate
will require thinner formwork. 7mm thick formwork would be typical for the
installation of an 8mm floor. Mild steel strips 50mm wide can be used to
screed the Mondéco off in bays, and as the temporary formwork at edges.
d. Within 24 hours of the application of primer, mix & spread the epoxy
terrazzo screed at manufacturer’s recommended coverage rate by using
hand trowel or screed box slightly thicker than the required thickness and
compact to the required thickness using a steel bladed trowel.
e. After approximately 48 hours, wet diamond grinds and continues grinding

with progressively finer diamonds. Clean thoroughly by vacuum.
f. When dry, apply 1 to 2 coats of grout at manufacturer’s recommended

coverage rate by using a tight trowel and allow to cure for at least 16 hours
before polishing with fine diamonds.
g. Apply the sealer coat at manufacturer’s recommended coverage rate by

using a polish mop. Apply in 3-4 coats as required to produce a luster/shine
to the floor surface.
D. TRAFFICKING
Allow to cure for 24 hours at minimum 10oC before light trafficking.
8.3.4 Field Quality Control
A. Retain the empty product containers for the purpose of determining the actual
average coating thickness.
8.3.5 Cleaning and Protection
A. Protect resinous terrazzo flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of
construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary
covering, recommended in writing by resinous terrazzo flooring manufacturer.
B. Clean resinous terrazzo flooring not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for
inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each Project
area. Use cleaning materials and procedures recommended in writing by resinous
flooring manufacturer.
JKT05 SS8/8
8.3.6 Resinous Flooring Schedule
1. Finish : A seamless, semi gloss 8mm grind down to 6mm solvent

free cast in- situ epoxy terrazzo floor system
incorporating clear crystal glass aggregates.
2. Product : Flowcrete ‘Mondeco Crystal’
3. Colour : As selected by Owner from Manufacturer’s full range of

Colours and patterns produced for resinous terrazzo
flooring complying with requirements indicated.
4. Physical Properties: Provide resinous terrazzo flooring system with the

Following minimum physical property requirements when
tested according to standard test methods indicated:
Fire Resistance : BS 476:Part 7: Spread of Flame Class 2
Slip Resistance : TRRL Pendulum Slip Test Dry >40 low slip potential
Temperature Resistance: Tolerant to sustained temperatures up to 60ºC
Water Permeability: Nil/Impermeable - Karsten Test (impermeable)
Abrasion resistance: To BS 8204:Part 2 Grade AR2 – Medium duty Industrial

and Commercial
Compressive Strength: >55 N/mm2 (BS 6319)
Flexural Strength : >25 N/mm2 (BS 6319)
Tensile Strength : >10 N/mm² (BS 6319)
Bond Strength : Greater than cohesive strength of 25 N/mm² concrete.

>1.5 MPa
8.3.6 Mock-Up
Samples and visual mock-up to be provided as per Client requirement
SS009_Mock-ups & Tests
JKT05 SS9/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 9 – MOCK-UPS AND TEST
SECTION 9
9.0 MOCK UPS AND TESTS
9.1 GENERAL
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to the Work of this
Section.
9.2 SUMMARY
9.2.1 This Section describes the requirements for testing mock-ups of exterior façade,
wall elements and visual mock ups of exterior façade, wall elements and of interior
building and finishes elements. There may be requirements for additional mock-
ups stated in the various sections of this specification.
9.2.2 Testing Mock-ups: Provide full-scale mock-ups of exterior façade, wall for
evaluation of colour, texture, alignment, general appearance and quality of
workmanship, and for specified performance tests.
a Exterior Testing Mock-ups (Located at approved testing laboratory) for Pre-

Cast Wall System including sealants.
b. Façade: Metal Roof & Walling, Curtain Wall, ACP Cladding & Fixed/
Removable Alum. Louvre systems.
9.2.3 Visual Mock-ups
Provide full-scale mock-ups of the following to illustrate colours, textures and

workmanship. Enclosure shall be provided at the back of visual mock-up to
simulate background where deem required by Architect, for example Pre-Cast
Wall system, Curtain Wall system, Alum. Composite Panel Cladding system,
Alum. Window/ Louvre system, etc.
a. Exterior Visual Mock-ups (Off-Site)
Exterior Visual Mock-ups (Located off site) shall be provided for the
following components & systems:
i. Pre-Cast Wall System (including sealants, pre-cast off form wall, etc)
ii. Façade system: Metal Roof & Walling, Window Wall Glazing System,
ACP Cladding, Fixed/ Removable Alum. Louvre, Alum. Louvre
screening systems
JKT05 SS9/2
b. Exterior Visual/ Field Mock-ups (On-Site)
Exterior Visual/ Field Mock-ups (Located at building site as Work-In-Place)

shall be provided for the following trades, components & systems:
i) Façade (Main Component):
a. Min. 3 panels by 6m;
b. Coating colour (3 options) to Architect’s selection & approval.
ii) Façade – Removable Insulated Cladding and Walling system : Fire

rated ACP Cladding system, etc., inclusive of penetration details for
testing purposes
iii) Masonry –
a. A 1m x 1m panel of each of the masonry types at a location agreed

with the Owner.
b. A wall including window set into each of the masonry wall types.
The windowis to include the lintel, DPCs, weepholes, sill and
sealant. The sample can form part of the final construction
c. Construction of external masonry shall not be permitted without

prior approval of the mock-ups
iv) External Renders –
a. One wall, location to be agreed upon with the Owner, shall be used
for the mock-up of all render finishes for approval
v) Roof – Standing Seam Roof System, Metal Flat Roof, Aluminium

Composite Panel Canopies. Mock-ups shall include flashing, sealant,
fascia and necessary interfacing and termination details
vi) Façade & Glazing Works: external Alum. Window & Glazing System.
vii) External Alum & Steel Works: Fixed/ Removable Alum. Louvre system,
fixed Alum. Louvre Screen system (double bank louvre), external alum.
& steel doors.
viii) Fencing works – 2-3 modules with connection system and termination
details
a. 3m high K-12 rated anti-climb fence as per detail drawing
b. 1.8m high chainlink fence as per detail drawing
c. 2.4m high Anti-climb/ anti-scale fence system
d. Others: security items where applicable.
JKT05 SS9/3
ix) External finishes
a. Benchmark for external finishes ie external painting, floor finish

works, steps, etc. shall require to be established (for CM or
Architect’s sign-off) prior site installation.
x) Steps and ramps and railing as per drawings and details
c. Interior Visual Mock-ups
Interior Visual Mock-ups (Located at building site as Work-In-Place) shall be

provided for the following trades, components & systems:
i) Finishes: Main Entrance Lobby finishes
ii) Finishes Mock-ups (Floor/ Wall/ Ceiling/ Skirting/ Threshold):
a. Typical Corridor
c. Typical Toilet
iii) Internal Drywall system (incl. finishing & typical details) and Internal
Masonry
a. A 1 m x 1m panel of each of the masonry types at a location to be

agreed with the SO.
b. A wall including window set into each of the masonry wall types.
The window is to include the lintel, DPCs, weepholes, sill and
sealant. The approved sample shall become the control sample
and can form part of the final construction.
c. If proprietary blocks are used, submit verification from

manufacturer that all installation works or the mock up have been
completed in accordance with their recommendations.
iv) Internal Glass Screen/ Partitions
v) Internal Door systems
- Incl. door jamb, threshold, skirting, ironmongery, etc; To be

arranged with MEP mock-ups where applicable.
vi) Floor Finishes (each type)
a. Hardener & Dustproof Sealer
o Floor finish mock-up or benchmark shall incl. skirting and

adjacent trades.
o Provide sample no smaller than 2m x 2m and to include

movement joint and skirting when the latter is formed from
the screed material
JKT05 SS9/4
b. Epoxy Flooring system
c. Tiling, Tiling Adhesive & Grouting works (where required)
o A wall approximately 3m x 2.4m (location to be agreed with

the Owner) and adjacent floor area approximately 2m x 2m
to be tiled including termination at head, skirting, movement
joint and drainage outlet.
d. Carpet Tiles
o Prior to finalising the design and ordering floor covering lay

in a location to be agreed with the SO. The mock-up must
include all edge trims. Obtain comments and approval of
appearance before proceeding. The purpose of the mock-
up is to finalise the design prior to installation on site.
e. Others – benchmark to be established for Architect’s sign-off.
f. Skirting – Terrazzo, Rubber base, Tile
vii) Internal Suspended Ceiling System
a. Ceiling system - incl. lighting panel, perforated panel, perimeter

angle, ceiling hold-down clip, etc…; Mock-up extent to Architect’s
approval.
b. Suspended Acoustic Ceiling – 1200mm x 600mm / 600mm x

600mm ceiling panels showing penetration detail through one
panel
c. Fire-rated Ceiling – 2hr and 1hr fire rated ceiling
d. Others each type – min. 2m x 2m complete with edge angle detail,

wall interfacing, access panel where applicable.
e. Feature ceiling mock-up extent to Architect’s approval.
f. Install a mock up area complete with all finishes, components and

fixtures and fittings of the ceiling tiles. Unless otherwise agreed,
selected area to be 4500mm x 4500mm. Complete the mock up
and submit to the SO prior to procurement and fabrication.
viii) Colo (Data Hall) racking and Hot Aisle Containment systems consisting
of the following
a. Server Row
b. IDF Row
c. RNG Row
d. Flex Row
JKT05 SS9/5
e. Telecom and electrical equipment and all overhead utilities,

mounted to each of the Server, IDF and Flex rows.
f. Server rack identified by the MS OPS will need to be installed to

address each conditions and sealing methods.
Mock-up of must be approved before procurement. Accepted mock-up

may be included as part of the final work
ix) Internal High level Cable Containment (where applicable)
x) Signage
- Paper mock-ups for each type of signage shall be prepared for

sign-off prior fabrication
xi) Joinery – Door/ Panelling/ Carpentry
xii) Builder’s Hardwares
xiii) Any other repetitive works, as directed by the Architect.
xiv) Waterproofing
a. 1m x 1m panel sample shall be prepared of each internal floor and

wall waterproofing type, clearly showing compositional materials
and components from the structural slab to finished surface.
b. Sample for floor and wall junction shall be provided.
c. 50mm diameter pipe and drain outlet with flashing sample mock-up
9.2.4 Applicable sections containing interior mock-up requirements (which applicable) to

be erected at a safe location on site where they can remain as control samples for
the duration of the work.
Refer to Items listed in Section 9.2.3 (c) Interior Visual Mock-ups.
Contractor to review project Construction schedule and propose Mock-up list &
schedule to determine interior mock-up items which shall be remained as control
samples for the duration of work, for Client’s & Architect’s review & approval.
Contractor shall also require to submit schedule for submission of samples at the
earliest practical time.
9.2.5 Completed mock-up as accepted by the Architect shall be maintained in good

condition during the Work as standards of workmanship and appearance for the
completed Project.
Mock-ups reviewed and approved by Architect shall be properly documented in

site observation or site progress report and submit for Client & Consultant’s
record.
JKT05 SS9/6
9.2.6 Responsibility: Where required the Contractor shall engage the services of an
independent testing Laboratory to administer the required testing and issue the
test report to certify whether the components of the mock-up pass the prescribed
test criteria, re-test of the mock-up or components will be required until they pass
the test.
9.4 SCHEDULING TESTS
9.4.1 Allow sufficient time in the schedule to accommodate failures of tests and
necessity to modify and re-test. The mock-up shall be erected in sufficient time to
allow final approval of window frame colour, glass selection, sealant colours, and
panel finish. Allow sufficient time to accommodate adjustments in colours and
design profiles without detrimental effects on the Project Schedule.
9.4.2 Specialist Installers approved for the project shall install the mock-ups. Personnel
representing manufacturers, fabricators, and installers of exterior wall components
shall be present during mock-up construction and testing as appropriate for
efficient evaluation and revision if required.
9.5 LABORATORY TESTING
9.5.1 Location of Tests: Test mock-up shall be assembled at the testing facilities with
proper testing equipment and approved by the Architect: In the case where the
mock-ups are located outside Singapore and/or Jakarta, the Contractor shall be
responsible to arrange, at his own cost, for the Architect and his representatives
(total 4 persons) to witness the tests.
9.5.2 Mock-up Evaluation:
General: Before testing, mock-up will be evaluated for type of glass, window
frame colour, sealant colour, and metal panel finishes.
Glass: Vision glass and spandrel glass as indicated.
9.5.3 Glass Aesthetic Requirements: Mock-up will be used to establish the maximum
permissible roller mark distortion in the glass. Final approved mock-up glass shall
serve as a standard for the Project.
9.5.4 Test Methods: The mock-up shall be tested at the Laboratory in accordance with
the following AAMA and ASTM test procedures:
JKT05 SS9/7
1. ASTM Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls and Doors.
2. ASTM Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,

Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference.
3. ASTM Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain

Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
4. AAMA “Standard Test Method, Curtain Walls for Water Penetration

Using Dynamic Pressure”.
9.5.5 Perform seismic and other tests, as specified below.
9.5.6 Where tests to failure occur, furnish number of duplicate components necessary
for all tests.
9.5.7 Wind Design Pressures: As specified in Specification and the wind tunnel test
report.
9.5.8 Order of Pressure Testing:
1. Pre-test.
2. Air infiltration at 29 kg/m2.
3. Static water infiltration at 49 kg/m2 (16-meter height).
4. Dynamic water resistance at 49 kg/m2 (16-meter height).
5. Structural performance at design pressure.
6. Repeat Test 3.
7. Seismic performance at design displacement.
8. Repeat Test 3.
9. Structural performance at 150% design pressure.
10. Seismic performance at 200% design displacement.
11. Negative structural performance to failure (for information only)
9.5.9 Pressure Tests: As specified in Specification and wind tunnel test report.
1. Pressure shall be positive and negative per code calculations for wind
pressure tests, with a limiting deflection of l/300L or 12.7-mm maximum
from resting position.
2. Tests per relevant ASTM shall show no air infiltration in excess of values
specified. Tests per the relevant ASTM shall show no leakage - defined as
JKT05 SS9/8
uncontrolled water on the interior of the mock-up. Uncontrolled means not

channelled directly to the exterior.
3. Do structural test to demonstrate 2.0 safety factor after satisfactory

completion of all other tests. Increase pressure slowly to 2.0 times
maximum corner wind design pressure. Results of this test will not negate
results of satisfactory completion of earlier tests. Record pressures and
deflections at maximum pressure or failure, as applicable. Performance
criteria at 1.5 times design pressure and loads for metal supporting glass
and panels shall be as follows:
a. Net permanent deflection of framing members shall not exceed 1/1000

times span.
b. There shall be no failures or gross permanent distortion of framing

members, anchors or connections.
4. Describe all failures in test report.
5. In the plane of the wall, deflection of framing members shall not reduce the
glass or panel bite below 75% of the design dimension, and shall not reduce
the glass or panel edge clearance below 25% of the design dimension or 3-
mm, whichever is greater. Restrict deflection further if required for assembly
and fit of components.
9.5.10 Seismic Tests:
Seismic tests are to consist of displacement of the curtain wall in a horizontal

direction parallel to the plane of the glass, in both directions, held for ten seconds
in each of the displaced positions, and returned to the original position. Three two-
stroke cycles are required for each test.
1. At design displacement of 0.005 x H (H = floor height), no failure or

deterioration of any kind may occur.
2. At two times design displacement, wedge gaskets may disengage and

perimeter sealants may split or lose adhesion, but no other failure or
deterioration of any kind may occur. No failure of structural silicone seals is
permissible.
3. Inform the Architect of failures of the assembly to meet requirements.
4. Correct components and assemblies that fail, to the satisfaction of the

Architect, and re-test until no failures occur under test. Corrections required
because of failures shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.
JKT05 SS9/9
Incorporate approved corrective changes in the final shop drawings and the
Work
Acceptance: Installation of wall and window elements on the building shall not
proceed until mock-up testing and evaluation are finished and accepted by the
Architect.
9.6 VISUAL MOCK-UPS
9.6.1 Building Façade: Provide evaluation mock-up on site, to consist of “work-in-place” to

illustrate erection, aluminium window wall system, sealants, glass, glazing and
finishes.
Schedule site visual mock-up after aluminium window wall components have been
reviewed at fabrication facility.
Evaluation mock-up shall be built of the same materials, components and using the
construction procedures and subcontractors proposed for the Work.
Modifications to the Work, if needed, to obtain the quality of workmanship and finish
required in the finished structure shall be made during construction of the mock-up.
9.6.2 Interior Construction / Finishes:
a. Entrance Lobby finishes
b. Meeting and conference rooms finishes
c. Office area finishes,
d. Break-out area finishes
e. Toilets and prayer rooms finishes
9.6.3 Completed mock-ups as accepted by the Architect shall be maintained in good

condition during the Work, as standards of workmanship and appearance for the
completed Project.
SS010_Roofing
JKT05 SS10/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 10 - ROOFING
SECTION 10
10.0 ROOFING
10.1 GENERALLY
The whole of the roofing works are to be carried out by the Roofing Specialist
approved by the Architect.
Roof should also be suitable for fixing array of solar panels and accessible from
ground level via catladder or internal staircase.
Spit-outs are to be provided for all flat roofs with upturn beams or parapet walls
(incl. RC flat roof layer below metal roof liner system proposed at Main Building).
These spit-outs are to be located at 6000mm intervals, 50mm above the roof level,
unless otherwise indicated. Spit-outs are to be 50mm diameter, with a drip, with an
overhang from the building of 25mm, unless otherwise directed by the Architect.
Fall arrest system or maintenance safety lifeline system shall be deem provided
along with Aluminium Standing Seam Roofing & Façade Cladding system as a
part of “complete” system for used of maintenance and access purpose.
10.2 INVERTED WARM DECK CONCRETE FLAT ROOFS
a) The cement and sand shall be as specified in “Engineer’s General Concrete

Specification”.
b) All surfaces to be covered with screed are to be brushed clean and well
wetted before screed is applied. All screeds shall be kept damp and
adequately cured to prevent shrinkage and cracking.
c) The mortar for the screed is to be mechanically or hand mixed as directed

by the Architect and the Contractor is to make allowance for the use of
additional cement necessitated by the method of mixing instructed. Only
whole bags of cement are to be used in any one batch of mix.
d) The 25mm thick cement screed shall be composed of one part of cement to
three parts of sand and laid to falls on concrete roof slab. Form (25 x 25)mm
angle filler at all junctions with vertical surfaces.
e) Dress screed up/around walls, upstand beams, kerb, gutter, etc.
f) Screed to be laid to fall unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
g) Waterproofing Membrane
Refer to Waterproofing Specification.

COPYRIGHT BY M/S AWP PTE LTD.
THIS SPECIFICATION IS THE PROPERTY OF AWP PTE LTD AND CANNOT BE COPIED, MODIFIED, REPRODUCED PARTLY OR WHOLLY WITHOUT WRITTEN
PERMISSION.
JKT05 SS10/2
h) The insulating material must be unaffected by water and capable of

withstanding anticipated roof loads.
i) Calculation of the thermal insulating value of the material must be based on

the ‘wet condition’.
j) Lightweight Extruded or Expanded Polystyrene hard foam or equivalent

insulation is to be used, laid over a protective fleece. Refer to Insulation
Specification.
k) Insulation thickness should be sufficient to satisfy the Overall Thermal

Transmittance Value required or not be less than 50mm thick, which ever is
the greater.
l) Ballast
50mm thick (600 x 600)mm concrete slabs to be laid over insulation and
supported by appropriate underlay pads.
10.3 INTERLOCKING PROFILED METAL SHEET ROOFS
Interlocking concealed fixing roof system is to be used.
Sheets to be of Z55 high strength steel with 350g/m2 zinc galvanizing and
minimum 25 micron thick polyvinylidene Fluoride Coating or equivalent finish.
A pitch of 5° should be achieved or pitch as indicated on Architect’s Drawings with

sealing tape applied to side laps.
Note: Any pitch at all times must be above 2o.
Galvanized steel panel clips fastened to steel purlins from ridge to eaves.
Clips should be fixed one row at a time and sheet snapped into position. The
subsequent rows of clips located so as to fit into groove of the proceeding sheet. A
spacer gauge should be used to ensure precise alignment.
Lightweight Extruded or Expanded Polystyrene hard foam or equivalent insulation

located between Tee Bar/Spacer sleeves for panel clips sandwiched between steel
purlin and profiled metal sheet.
Where an internal lining panel is required below insulation layer a notched Z

section spacer should be used above steel purlin and below profiled metal sheet.
All clips, starter Trims, End Trims, Ridge Capping, Ridge Closure Flashing, Fillers,
Fixing Straps, Eaves Closures and Barge Board details to be proprietary to system
unless otherwise indicated on architectural Drawings and shop drawings as
approved by Architect.
Failure of any constructed details is the sole responsibility of the Sub-Contractor.

PERMISSION.
JKT05 SS10/3
10.4 ACOUSTIC ALUMINIUM STANDING SEAM ROOFING & WALL CLADDING

SYSTEM
10.4.1 STANDING SEAM ROOF & WALL CLADDING SYSTEM – STANDING SEAM
ROOFING AND WALLING SYSTEM LYSAGHT LOCKSEAM™ 0.8MM BMT
COLOURBOND ® XAL or approved equivalent
[Applicable to proposed Metal Pitched Roof System]
Aluminium standing seam roof system manufactured from aluminium alloy (Al-Mg-
Ti) as specified in DIN 1725, material thickness min 0.80mm, 330mm cover width,
25mm deep ribs c/c spanning 600mm. Pre-treatment is a corrosion resistant
conversion coating. The primer is a corrosion inhibitive primer, nominal thickness
of 5µm. The finish exposed surface of the liner will be a PVDF finish coating with a
nominal film thickness of 20µm. The backing coat is custom formulated Shadow
Grey with film thickness 5µm.
Unless otherwise indicated in drawings or agreed by the Architect the finish colour
shall be Silver Metallic or alternative selected colour to shade and tone approved
by Architect. Stucco-embossed surface finish maybe required and should be
option available to Architect for selection.
The substrate is aluminium alloy 3105 H16, Yield Strength min 210Mpa, Tensile
Strength 250-320 Mpa, elongation >3%.
Aluminium elements to be supplied in single lengths with no laps where possible.

Sheets are to be laid to meet the requirements of the building geometry. The
aluminium roof / cladding elements will be supported by and joined longitudinally
with an electrically operated closure machine over concealed extruded AL-fixing
clips integrated into the longitudinal element flange thereby allowing for the
possibility of transmitting reaction forces resulting from positive and/or negative
loads and also accommodating unobstructed thermal movements resulting from
the specified ambient temperature range.
Aluminium elements will be supported by structural roof of Aluminium Zinc Steel

Liner Sheet, LYSAGHT SPANDEK OPTIMA™ 0.35MM BMT ZINCALUME or
approved equivalent, 0.35mm base metal thickness, 935mm cover width x 24mm
deep ribs at 93.5mm c/c spanning 1200mm. The substrate is Zinc-alloy coated
steel with minimum coating mass 150gr/m2 Yield Strength 550Mpa conforming to
AS 1397 – 2001 or equivalent. Coating composition shall be 43.5% zinc, 55.0%
aluminium and 1.5% silicon. All points of contact between the aluminium sheet and
other structural materials are to be separated by isolating mediums as
recommended by the manufacturer of the roofing sheet.
Waterproofing membrane, which is self-adhesive bitumen felt 1.5mm thick lay on

Single layers of calcium silicate board 12mm but joined and sealed fixed to
decking, over which a single layer of mineral wool insulation of 100mm thickness x
minimum 60kg/m3 density with thermal conductivity of k=0.034 W/m K at 20oC.
Fire classification to standard AS 1530: Part 3 – 1976 (specifies similar test
procedures to BS 476: Parts 6 & 7). In addition, a single layer of double-sided
PERMISSION.
JKT05 SS10/4
aluminium insulation foil should be laid to roof mesh with diameter 1,5mm @ 3”x3”
or as per manufacturers’ written instructions.
Note. i. The roof panels spanning the width of the building shall be continuous
with no joints and no ridge cap to avoid water permeability through the
joints.
ii. This specification is to be read in conjunction with Architectural

Specifications for ‘Curtain Wall, Cladding, Glass Screens &
Canopies’ (where applicable) which shall also apply to the `Standing
Seam Roof & Wall Cladding System’ for all items and clauses unless
agreed otherwise by the Architect. Consideration for the omission of
non-applicable items and clauses shall be made in writing to the
Architect by the contractor recognised in the construction contract.
iii. Unless enclosing an acoustically sensitive environment the Type A

Standing Seam System shall be used on vertical or inclined wall planes
to form external cladding over an `inner wall’ of concrete, masonry or
drywall construction to Architects detail.
iv. Determination as to the suitability of the superstructure or wall

(constructed by others) to support and fix the system remains the
responsibility of the contractor. Fully co-ordinated detailed shop
drawings of the system, its substructure support, fixing and other
relevant details to demonstrate the integrity of the system, its design
and specification must be submitted to the Architect and Structural
Engineer for review and comment.
A. Integrated Fall Arrest System
The roofing system shall be provided with an integrated hands free fall
arrest system for upto three persons, which shall be fixed onto the standing
seam in order to avoid roof penetrations.
a. A cable-based fall arrest/restraint fall protection system for roof

tops, façades and overhead applications. The system provides
hands free falls from height protection compliant to ANSI Z359,
CSA Z259 and AS/NZS 1821. System incorporates PAS
(Progressive Absorbing System) The shock absorbers, intermediate
brackets and support posts are designed to deploy and deform
should an operative fall, thus reducing the loadings applied to the
building’s structure to below 10kN.
b. Primary components connecting to the cable are fabricated from

316 Grade Stainless Steel. Secondary components are fabricated
from steel to A283D A529 Gr.D. All steel components are hot
dipped galvanised to ASTM A53 & A153. All fixings are A2 Grade
Stainless Steel. The cable consists of 5/16 or 0.31” 316 grade
stainless steel 7 x 7 structure with breaking resistance of >8318lbs
(37kN). The system is pre-tensioned to 80daN.
PERMISSION.
JKT05 SS10/5
c. All systems are designed, as far as possible, to be used as fall

restraint systems (At least 8’from a leading edge). When designed
as fall arrest systems a rescue plan must be incorporated within the
design. The spacing between intermediate supports can be up to
12m. When used overhead this can be extended up to 24m
depending on ground clearance and “V” deflection. The system can
be used in any horizontal configuration including curves and/or
inclinations up to 15º. The system can be installed on various
structures using specifically designed posts.
d. The traveller suits multiple connectors and has been designed to

allow entry/exit at any point along the entire length of the system.
When mounted at roof level the user can move either side of the
cable. This traveller has been engineered with a double action fail
safe mechanism and has no mechanical/moving parts which
reduces the potential for misuse and maintenance of the system.
The traveller suits multiple connectors and has been designed to
allow entry/exit at any point along the entire length of the system.
When mounted at roof level the user can move either side of the
cable. This traveller has been engineered with a double action fail
safe mechanism and has no mechanical/moving parts which
reduces the potential for misuse and maintenance of the system.
e. All systems shall conform to the requirements of ANSI Z359, CSA

Z259 and AS/NZS 1821.
f. Annual recertification in accordance with National Standards and

manufacturers recommendations.
10.4.2 STANDING SEAM ROOFING SYSTEM LYSAGHT FLEX-LOK™ 0.5MM BMT

COLOURBOND ® XRW or approved equivalent
[Applicable to proposed Metal Flat Roof System]
Aluminium standing seam roof system manufactured from aluminium alloy (Al-Mg-
Ti) as specified in DIN 1725, material thickness min 0.50mm, 400mm cover width,
65mm deep ribs c/c spanning 400mm, with a minimum 2o roof slope. Pre-
treatment is a corrosion resistant conversion coating. Roof shall be fixed with a
concealed fix system that requires no piercing fasteners and helps provide
weather tightness and superior resistance to wind uplift.
ZINCALUME ® steel, COLORBOND® XRW steel *Standard offering includes

COLORBOND® XRW steel but other options like COLORBOND Ultra steel,
COLORBOND® XPD steel and COLORBOND® Metallic steel can also be used
after consultation from Tata BlueScope Steel authorities
Coating Class (min.) ZINCALUME AZ150 (150g/m2) (55% Aluminium, 43.5% Zinc,
1.5% Si) as per AS1397 / IS15961 – with Super Durable Polyester

PERMISSION.
JKT05 SS10/6
COLORBOND®; steel XRW quality paint system of approved color conforming to

AS/NZS 2728 type-4 / IS15965 class 3
Unless otherwise indicated in drawings or agreed by the Architect the finish colour
shall be Silver Metallic or alternative selected colour to shade and tone approved
by Architect. Stucco-embossed surface finish maybe required and should be
option available to Architect for selection.
Aluminium elements to be supplied in single lengths with no laps where possible.

Sheets are to be laid to meet the requirements of the building geometry. The
aluminium roof / cladding elements will be supported by and joined longitudinally
with an electrically operated closure machine over concealed extruded AL-fixing
clips integrated into the longitudinal element flange thereby allowing for the
possibility of transmitting reaction forces resulting from positive and/or negative
loads and also accommodating unobstructed thermal movements resulting from
the specified ambient temperature range.
Waterproofing membrane, which is self-adhesive bitumen felt 1.5mm thick lay on

Single layers of calcium silicate board 12mm but joined and sealed fixed to
decking, over which a single layer of mineral wool insulation of 100mm thickness x
minimum 60kg/m3 density with thermal conductivity of k=0.034 W/m K at 20oC.
Fire classification to standard AS 1530: Part 3 – 1976 (specifies similar test
procedures to BS 476: Parts 6 & 7). In addition, a single layer of double-sided
aluminium insulation foil should be laid to roof mesh with diameter 1,5mm @ 3”x3”
or as per manufacturers’ written instructions.
Note. i. This specification is to be read in conjunction with Architectural

Specifications for ‘Curtain Wall, Cladding, Glass Screens &
Canopies’ (where applicable) which shall also apply to the `Standing
Seam Roof & Wall Cladding System’ for all items and clauses unless
agreed otherwise by the Architect. Consideration for the omission of
non-applicable items and clauses shall be made in writing to the
Architect by the contractor recognised in the construction contract.
ii. Determination as to the suitability of the superstructure or wall

(constructed by others) to support and fix the system remains the
responsibility of the contractor. Fully co-ordinated detailed shop
drawings of the system, its substructure support, fixing and other
relevant details to demonstrate the integrity of the system, its design
and specification must be submitted to the Architect and Structural
Engineer for review and comment.
10.4.3 SURFACE APPEARANCE
The roofing system shall be designed, fabricate and installed so that the complete
Work shall merge perfectly with the overall building architectural and present a
uniform and smooth appearance.

PERMISSION.
JKT05 SS10/7
10.4.4 THERMAL AND ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE
The aluminium roofing system will be designed, fabricated and installed to

withstand the expansion and contraction forces resulting from an atmospheric
temperature range of 18oC to 45oC. The complete roofing system will meet the
required thermal and acoustic performance. The minimum U value = 0.4W/m20K.
The acoustic performance will meet or exceed the criteria Rw=42dB.
10.4.5 DETAILS AT FLASHING, CAPPING, GUTTERS AND FASCIA
a) Flashing and Capping
All flashing and capping to the roof will be manufactured from the same quality
grade and colour of material as the roofing elements.
b) Fasteners
Fasteners such as screws and other fastening devices shall be suitable for the
conditions of each application and shall be of austenitic stainless steel to prevent
galvanic action with the components fastened. Where fasteners are not
manufactured in stainless steel, then fasteners of metal compatible with adjoining
materials and having a permanent corrosion resistant finish will be used.
c) Fascias, Eaves & Verges
All external fascias, Eaves and Verges shall be manufactured from minimum
3.0mm thick aluminium, workshop fabricated to required curvature and supplied
complete with required supports. An approved non-staining silicone sealant should
be used on all joins. The fascia will be finished in a two coat PvF2 paint finish. The
colour shall match main panel colour or alternative selected colour to shade and
Tone approved by Architect. Stucco-embossed surface finish maybe required and
should be option available to Architect for selection.
Unless otherwise indicated by Architectural design intent all Verges shall be closed
by an Aerofoil profile cover plates nested over expansion joint and zipped up to
roof / wall panel (sheet). Soffit-face to be of required length and support with return
to mechanically fix or tack weld back to cantilever overhang or wall face. Detail by
manufacturer to Architect approval.
10.4.6 WARRANTY PERIOD
The aluminium standing seam roofing and wall cladding system will be guaranteed
for 10 years with regards to its composition, surface and tensile strength. In
addition, the Contractor and his Roofing Specialist (Manufacturer and or Supplier)

PERMISSION.
JKT05 SS10/8
are to severally and jointly furnish a 10 years warranty that the above roofing
system shall be waterproof and watertight in terms acceptable to the Client.
10.5 INDEMNITY OF WATERTIGHTNESS
10.5.1 Before commencing roof coverings, the contractor shall lodge with the Architect a
10 or 15 (dependent on roof type) years indemnity against roof leaks, after the
issue of the Completion Certificate (in the joint name of the Specialist and the
Contractor) in favour of the Employer and assigned against faulty workmanship
and premature breakdown of materials in a format approved by the Architect.
Under this indemnity the contractor will be required to make good any defects and
to keep the roofs perfectly watertight and will be responsible for any consequential
loss directly attributable to any roof leakage during the warranty period.
10.5.2 If, in the opinion of the contractor, the forgoing Specifications are insufficient for
him to give the Indemnity then he shall allow for upgrading as he shall deem
necessary to enable him to so indemnify.
10.6 RATES
10.6.1 The description of and rate for each item of ‘Roofing’, will be held to include for
taking delivery, unloading carrying in, sorting, storing, stripping or removing
protective wrapping or coverings, checking, assembling, returning packages,
handling, hoisting and placing and lowering, or fitting and fixing materials and
goods in position, adjusting, re-fixing, and for cutting away and making good,
levelling, and touching up all in accordance with the generally accepted
requirements of the specific item, including protecting and safeguarding until the
issue of the Completion Certificate.
10.6.2 The description of and rate for each item of ‘Roofing’, shall be held to include for
the cost of all tests required by the Specifications.
10.6.3 The description of and rate for each item of ‘Roofing’, shall be held to have
complied with all the foregoing requirements of the specification and drawings,
referred therein.
10.7.1 Samples
For each system type specified provide samples of each component to permit
approval of material quality, thickness, finishes and profile. Submit samples of
fasteners for approval.
10.7.2 Mock-Ups

PERMISSION.
JKT05 SS10/9
Within timeframe as directed, provide mock-up panel of sufficient size to permit

approval of the intended construction. Also include the following elements where
applicable:
a. Eaves
b. Ridge
c. Edge/gutter
d. Upstand
e. ent pipes / other building services protrusions
If approved, this sample mock-up panel may form part of the works.
10.8 INSPECTION AND TESTS
10.8.1 On Site Water Test
Carry out on site water tests, upon completion of a part of the works, in
accordance with the following procedure:
a. Spray with a continuous water jet from a water hose with normal tap pressure.
Hold the hose at 1.2 m away from the roof surface. Place the hose at the level of
horizontal joints so that the jet cone scatter will cover the joints.
b. The test is deemed as passed if there is no water seepage or dampness

observed from the underside of the roof.
c. Any areas showing water seepage or other defeats shall be made good after a
method statement for reinstatement has been accepted by the SO.
d. Use tested areas as a site quality standard for the remainder of the project.
10.8.2 On Site Drainage Test
Upon completion of the roofing works and installation of rain water goods, carry
out on site drainage test to verify proper functioning and performance of the roof
drainage system, in accordance with SS CP 26.
10.9 POST-CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION AND TESTS
Integrity Testing of the roofing system and waterproofing membrane are to be

carried out annually in accordance to the supplier/applicator’s inspection, tests,
maintenance manuals and recommendation to ensure any potential forms of
failure is avoided.
In addition, inspections on the joints and roof sheeting shall be inspected annually.
Method statement of inspection check-list and post-construction maintenance

schedule to be included in O&M Manual, to Client’s & Operation team’s approval.
PERMISSION.
SS011_Floor Screed & Hardeners
JKT05 SS11/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 11 - FLOOR SCREED & HARDENERS
SECTION 11
11.0 FLOOR SCREED AND HARDENERS
11.1 GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
11.2 SCOPE
This section covers the requirements for common floor screeds applied in buildings,
including bonded and un-bonded cement sand screeds, polymer modified toppings
and resin flooring. It also covers the requirement for common floor hardeners.
11.3 RELATED SECTIONS
Read this work section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the other
work sections including the following:
• Waterproofing Series
• Finishes Series
11.4 STANDARDS
Unless otherwise agreed by the Architect, ensure all of the Works comply with the
comply with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes
SS 26 Ordinary Portland cement
SS 31 Aggregate from natural sources for concrete
SS 32 Welded steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete
SS 73 Methods of sampling and testing mineral aggregates sand and fillers
SS 78 Testing of concrete
JKT05 SS11/2
SS 289 Concrete
SS 477 Portland blast furnace cement
Other Standards
BS EN 934-2 Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout
and/or lime – Specifications and methods of test
BS 146 Specification for Portland blast furnace cements
BS 410 Specification for test sieves
BS 1052 Mild steel wire for general engineering purposes
BS 1521 Specification for waterproof building papers
BS 3837 Expanded polystyrene boards
Part 1: Specification for boards manufactured from expandable beads
BS 4483 Specification for steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete
BS 4841 Rigid polyurethane (PUR) and polyisocyanurate (PIR) foam for building
Applications Part 1: Laminated board for general purposes
BS 5385 Wall and floor tiling
Part 3: Code of practice for the design and installation of ceramic floor
tiles and mosaics
Part 5: Code of practice for the design and installation of terrazzo tile
and slab, natural stone and composition block flooring
BS 6213 Guide to selection of construction sealants
BS 8000 Workmanship on building sites
Part 9: Code of practice for cement/sand floor screeds and concrete

floor toppings
BS 8204 Screeds, bases and in situ floorings
Part 1: Code of practice for concrete bases and screeds to receive in

situ floorings
Part 2: Code of practice for concrete wearing surfaces
Part 3: Code of practice for polymer modified cementitious wearing

surfaces
JKT05 SS11/3
11.5 TRADE PREAMBLES
11.5.1 Contractor’s Submissions
The intended types of floor screed for the project are set out in clause 3.1 and
locations are indicated in the drawings. Base on the information; submit the following
items to the Architect.
A. Submit manufacturer(s) and products of pre-packed or proprietary screed and

hardeners where specified.
B. Submit suitable mix and application methods taking into account of the
performance requirements as set out in clause 2.1.
11.5.2 Co-ordination with other Works
Co-ordinate the screeding works particularly the interfacing with the following trades:
a. Floor finishes
b. Floor waterproofing
c. Dry walls
d. Internal masonry
Liaise and coordinate with services engineer for location of services perforations in
the floor.
11.5.3 Spare Materials
Deliver to site in strong protective packages marked for identification, and store
where directed, components and materials for future replacement and repair.
11.6 WARRANTY
11.6.1 Floor Hardeners
Provide a ten-year indemnity in accordance with contract conditions for the floor
hardeners where specified in the project.
11.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
11.7.1 Contractor’s Brief
When carrying out the proposals as set out in clause 1.4.1, take account of the
following performance requirements:
JKT05 SS11/4
11.7.2 Structural Movement and Movement between Works by Others
Take into account, that performance, appearance and proper functioning of the
screeding Works are not affected by any movements, settlement, deflection,
expansion or contraction which can be expected to occur in the building or the
construction process.
Junction between the screeding Works and adjacent work by others shall be formed
to take into account, possible structural deflections or movement in that adjacent
element without distortion to the Works, or disintegration of joints between works.
11.7.3 Environmental
Take cognisance to the environment for which the Works are to be applied, paying
particular attention to the following environmental effects:
a. Daily variations in humidity and temperature resulting from air-condition

operations within the building.
b. For non air-conditioned areas, daily and seasonal variations in humidity and
temperature in the Tropics.
c. Humidity or damp variations or other consequences resulting from the activities

occurring within the spaces for which the Works are applied or in proximity.
11.7.4 Appearance
Include any measures necessary to take into account, that the surface finishes are
uniform in colour and texture and appearance throughout. Achieve surface level
tolerance as set out in BS 8204.
11.8 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
11.8.1 FULLY BONDED SCREED
A. Base
In-situ slab mechanically prepared or heavily roughened and thoroughly cleaned

base concrete substrate.
B. Thickness
35 mm~50mm unless otherwise indicated in the drawings.
C. Mix
Cement: Ordinary Portland to SS 26 or Portland blast furnace to SS 477.
Sand/Fine aggregate: To SS 31, grading limit M, but with not more than 10%
passing sieve size 150 microns.
JKT05 SS11/5
Mix proportions: 1:3 for flexible floor finishes and/or 1:4~4.5 for thick or rigid floor
finishes.
Admixture: Water reducing to BS EN 934-2: Part 1, dosage to manufacturer’s

recommendations.
D. Finish
Refer to Floor finishes schedule and other relevant specification.
E. Soundness
Test to BS 8204: Part 1: Appendix B.
F. Maximum Depth of Indentation
3mm for areas expected to take very heavy traffic and/or where disruption, dust
or pollution may occur. 4mm for areas expected to take heavy traffic including
heavy trolleys e.g. public areas and main corridors. 5mm for other areas subject
to mainly foot traffic and light trolleys.
11.8.2 CEMENT SAND SCREED – UNBONDED
A. Base
Separating Layer or DPM on concrete that will not provide a good bond e.g.
smooth high strength concrete.
B. Thickness
50mm~200mm unless otherwise indicated in the drawings.
C. Reinforcement for Crack Control
Mesh Type D49, D98 or other conforming to BS 4483 or SS 32 to be provided for

every 16m2 of screed area and at all joints.
D. Mix
Cement: Ordinary Portland to SS 26 or Portland blast furnace to SS 477.

Sand/Fine aggregate: To SS 31, grading limit M, but with not more than 10%
Mix proportions: 1:3 for flexible floor finishes and 1:4~4.5 for thick or rigid floor
finishes.
Admixture: Water reducing to BS EN 934-2: Part 1, dosage to manufacturer’s

recommendations.
E. Finish

JKT05 SS11/6
F. Soundness
G. Maximum Depth of Indentation
As for unbonded screed.
11.8.3 CEMENT SAND SCREED – PARTIALLY BONDED
A. Base
Base concrete prepared by brushing prior to hardening.
B. Thickness
50~75mm unless otherwise indicated in the drawings.
Mesh Type D49, D98 or other conforming to BS 4483 or SS 32 to be provided for

every 16m2 of screed area and at all joints.
D. Mix
a. Cement: Ordinary Portland to SS 26 or Portland blast furnace to SS 477.
b. Sand/Fine aggregate: To SS 31, grading limit M, but with not more than 10%
c. Mix proportions: 1:3 for flexible floor finishes and 1:4~4.5 for thick or rigid floor
finishes.
d. Admixture: Water reducing to BS EN 934-2: Part 1, dosage to manufacturer’s

recommendations.
e. Other Requirements: e.g. movement joints, mat well frames, pre-formed

access ducts, drainage channels etc.
E. Finish
F. Soundness
G. Maximum Depth of Indentation
JKT05 SS11/7
11.8.4 FINE CONCRETE FLOATING SCREED
A. Base
Separating Layer or DPM on thermal or acoustic insulation on base concrete with

floated finish.
B. Thickness
65mm~200mm unless otherwise indicated in the drawings.
Type D49, D98 at mid-depth of the screed, to SS 32 or other to BS 4483.
D. Mix
a. Cement: Ordinary Portland to SS 26 or Portland blast furnace to SS 477.
b. Sand/ Fine Aggregate: To SS 31, grading limit M, but with not more than 10%
c. Coarse aggregate: To SS 31, 10mm single sized.
d. Mix proportions: 1:4~5 total aggregate, proportion of sand to coarse aggregate

between 60/40 and 40/60, adjusted to facilitate trowelling.
e. Admixture: Water reducing to BS EN 934-2: Part 1, dosage to manufacturer’s

recommendations.
E. Finish
F. Maximum Depth of Indentation
11.8.5 QUICK DRYING SCREED
A. Construction
Bonded, Unbonded or Floating Construction.
B. Reinforcement for Crack Control
Type D49, D98 at mid-depth of the screed, to SS 32 or other to BS 4483 for

description of appropriateness of use.
C. Minimum Thickness at Any Points
Depth may vary in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations however

the general rule of thumb is as follows:
JKT05 SS11/8
a. 40-50 mm Bonded
b. 50-65 mm Unbonded
c. 65-75 mm Floating
D. Insulation
Thermal or Acoustic insulation in accordance with performance requirements
E. Manufacturer
Submit to the Architect.
F. Mix
a. Cement: Ordinary Portland to SS 26.
b. Sand/Fine aggregate: To SS 31, grading limit M, but with not more than
10% passing sieve size 150 microns.
c. Coarse aggregate: This may be included in the manufacturers list for

screed over 75mm. Delete if not appropriate.
d. Mix proportions: 1:4~1:5 total aggregate, proportion of fine to coarse

aggregate 40/60, adjusted to facilitate trowelling.
G. Finish
H. Soundness
Test to BS 8204: Part 1: Appendix B - Not applicable for floating construction
I. Maximum Depth of Indentation
11.8.6 POLYMER MODIFIED SCREED
PVA materials are water sensitive. Do not use in areas where permanent dampness
is expected.
A. Base
Mechanically prepared or heavily roughened and thoroughly cleaned base

concrete substrate.
B. Construction
Bonded.
JKT05 SS11/9
Depth may vary in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and may be

as little as 6mm however inaccuracies in the base slab should be considered so
generally the screed will rarely be less than 20m
D. Manufacturer
E. Mix
Pre blended proprietary mix
Mix proportions: Polymer content in accordance with manufacturers

recommendations or refer to BS 8204: Part 3 clause 6.4 table 1 and table 2 for
the actual proportion
F. Finish
G. Soundness
H. Maximum Depth of Indentation
11.8.7 HIGH STRENGTH CONCRETE TOPPINGS (INCLUDING GRANOLITHIC)
A. Base
In-situ concrete slab
B. Construction
Bonded in accordance with BS 8204 Part 2.
Unless otherwise indicated in the drawings:
a. 20mm for bonded
b. 100mm for unbonded
c. 45mm for floating screed
JKT05 SS11/10
D. Mix
a. Cement: Ordinary Portland to SS26 or Portland blastfurnace to SS 477.
b. Sand/Fine aggregate: Natural sand of uniform colour, to SS 31, grading

limit M.
c. Coarse aggregate: To SS 31, 10 mm single sized.
d. Proportions: 1:1:2
E. Finish
11.8.8 POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENTITIOUS TOPPING
A. Base
Surface strength and hardness of base to be in accordance with BS 8204.
B. Construction
Bonded.
C. Manufacturer
D. Mix
Proportions: To proprietary manufacturer’s recommendations.
Other Requirements: Colour, limitations on bay size etc
E. Finish
F. Surface Hardness
Test to BS 8204: Part 3: clause 10.7.
Minimum rebounds hammer value in accordance with wearing class defined in

the above BS.
G. Slip Resistance
Test to BS 8204: Part 3: Annex C.
JKT05 SS11/11
11.8.9 FLOW APPLIED CEMENTITIOUS TOPPING
A. Base
Concrete substrate to be prepared in accordance with manufacturers’

recommendations
B. Construction
Fully Bonded. This type of topping should fully reflect any movement joints within
the structural base
C. Manufacturer
D. Mix
Proportions in accordance with manufacturers recommendations
E. Finish
11.9 MOVEMENT JOINT
11.9.1 Metal Edgings
Refer to clause 3.1 for selected proprietary product to be used for movement joint.
Bed in 1:3 cement/sand centred over joint and to finished floor level. Mechanically fix
with stainless steel screws to base.
11.9.2 Movement Joint Filler
Closed cell polyethylene filler, bond breaking tape and sealant as noted in clause 3.1.
11.10 FLOOR HARDENER
Proprietary water based metallic fluorosilicate and wetting agents solution designed
for the hardening of concrete surfaces. Submit suitable product to the SO. If no
metallic hardener is specified, proprietary non-metallic hardener may be submitted to
the SO.
JKT05 SS11/12
11.11 WORKMANSHIP
11.11.1 Suitability of Bases
Before starting work ensure that Bases are sufficiently flat to permit specified levels
and flatness of finished surfaces, bearing in mind the permissible minimum and
maximum thicknesses of the screed/topping. Bases are clean and free from plaster,
dirt, dust and oil.
11.11.2 Bonded Construction
Shortly before laying screed/topping completely remove mortar matrix from surface
to expose coarse aggregate over entire area of hardened base slab using abrasive
blasting or, for in situ slabs only, pneumatic scabbling. Remove all dust and debris.
Keep base slab well wetted for several hours before laying screed/topping. Remove
free water then brush in recommended bonding agent: cement slurry. Lay
screed/topping while slurry is still wet to ensure a good bond.
11.11.3 Partially Bonded Construction
Before surface of base slab has completely hardened brush off all surface laitance
with a stiff broom. Thoroughly clean base slab and keep well wetted for several
hours before laying screed. Remove free water then brush in recommended bonding
agent: cement slurry. Lay screed/topping while slurry is still wet to ensure a good
bond.
11.11.4 Unbonded Construction
Lay separating sheet of polythene not less than 65 microns thick (250 gauge) on
base and lap all joints not less than 50 mm.
11.11.5 Floating Construction
Lay insulation with tight butt joints and turn up for full depth of screed at all wall
abutments.
Lay separating sheet of polythene not less than 125 microns thick (500 gauge) with
50 mm laps. Lay wire netting to BS 1521, mesh size 50 mm, wire designation 19
over separating sheet with 50 mm laps tied securely with tying wire at 300 mm
centres.
11.11.6 Conduits
Haunch up in cement/sand 1:4 on both sides of conduits. Conduits which are to be

cast into screeds to be overlaid with 500 mm wide strip of steel fabric to SS 32 or BS
4483, reference D49. Place the reinforcement at mid depth between the top of the
conduit and the screed surface.
JKT05 SS11/13
11.12 BATCHING AND MIXING
11.12.1 Batching
Batch proportions of mixes by weight. Batching by volume may be permitted on the

basis of the previously established weight-volume relationship(s) of the particular
materials and using accurate gauge boxes. Batch proportions of mixes made with
lightweight aggregates by volume using accurate gauge boxes.
11.12.2 Mixing
Keep water content of mixes to the minimum, slump not exceeding 25 mm,
necessary to achieve full compaction, low enough to prevent excessive water being
brought to the surface during compaction. Mix materials thoroughly to a uniform
consistency. Mixes other than no-fines must be mixed in a suitable forced action
mechanical mixer: do not use a free fall type (drum) mixer.
Use all mixes within 2 hours or time limit set out by supplier / manufacturer. Discard
all left over mixes. Use while sufficiently plastic for full compaction.
11.13 LAYING
11.13.1 Sand/Cement Screeds
Fully compact by double beam vibrator or plate vibrator or, where this is not
practicable, by hand.
11.13.2 Fine Concrete Screed/Toppings
Either: Lay in two layers of approximately equal thickness, thoroughly hand

compacting both layers. Roughen the surface of the lower layer and lay the upper
layer within one hour, or Lay in a single layer and compact by double beam vibrator
or plate vibrator.
11.13.3 Joints in Screed
Unless otherwise specified cast screeds continuously, as far as possible without

defined joints, using ‘wet screeds’ between strips or bays.
11.13.4 Movement Joints
Ensure that movement joints are taken through the full depth of the screed and are
clean prior to the insertion of the filler strip.
11.13.5 Joints in Toppings
Unless otherwise specified, bay sizes to be not more than 16m², ratio of length to
breadth not more than 3:2, a joint occurring over every construction joint in the base
slab. Where location of bay joints is not shown on drawings obtain approval before
starting work.
JKT05 SS11/14
Forms to be square edged with steel top surfaces, securely fixed. Compact
thoroughly at edges to give level, closely abutted joints with no lipping. Alternatively,
toppings may be cast continuously, bay joints being formed with approved plastics or
metal dividing strips.
11.14 FINISHING
11.14.1 Timing
Carry out all finishing operations at optimum times in relation to the setting and
hardening of the material. Do not wet surfaces to assist surface working. Do not
sprinkle cement onto surface.
11.14.2 Wood Floated Finish
Use a wood float to give an even slightly coarse texture with no ridges or steps.
11.14.3 Trowelled Finish
Trowelled finish to receive applied floor finishes. Float to an even surface with no
ridges or steps.
Hand or power trowel to give a uniform smooth but not polished surface free from
trowel marks and other blemishes, and suitable to receive the specified flooring
material.
11.15 PROTECTION
Adequately protect the surface from construction traffic. If, because of inadequate
finishing or protection, the surface of the screed is not suitable to receive the
specified flooring material, submit to the SO and carry out remedial measures.
11.16 HARDENERS
11.16.1 Application
Allow concrete floor to cure for 14 days prior to treatment. Remove all loose material,
laitance or grease contamination. Prepare solution of hardener strictly in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions. Apply only to dry surfaces. Brush out to prevent
ponding, allow the solution to be absorbed for two hours, do not let the floor dry out
during this period. While the floor is still damp wash with clean water and dispose of
surplus solution. Re-Apply further coat to dry surface after 24 hours ensuring the
floor is dry.
JKT05 SS11/15
11.16.2 Disposal of Material
Do not discharge soluble fluoroisilicates into the drains. Surplus solution is to be

vacuum collected, stored in polythene, plastic or stainless steel containers and
neutralised by the addition of builders lime until a PH of 7 or above is achieved
before disposal. Strictly follow Manufacturers details for neutralisation and disposal.
11.17 CURING
Unless otherwise specified:
a. Immediately after laying, protect surface from wind, draughts and strong
sunlight.
b. As soon as screed/topping has set, closely cover with polythene sheeting and
keep in position for not less than 7 days.
11.18 VERIFICATION AND SUBMISSION
A. Submissions
Include in construction program, event for submission of the following

information:
a. Name of the manufacturer and inclusion of copies of technical data

relating to each screed system proposal.
b. Name of sub-contractor, if any.
c. Information of current or completed similar jobs during the previous 5

years and details of Quality Control Procedures adopted.
B. Work Submissions
Prepare an installation strategy, containing the following information, prior to the

preparation of detailed shop drawings:
a. Sequence of construction
b. Method statements
C. Maintenance Submissions - No item.
D. Warranty - Submit the warranty upon completion of the works.
JKT05 SS11/16
11.19.1 Mock-ups
Each sample to be no smaller than 2mx2m and to include movement joint and
skirting when the latter is formed from the screed material.
11.20 TESTS
A. Tap Tests
Tap test all screeded areas four weeks after laying at intervals at 1m intervals
and submit a report to the Architect. There shall be no hollows in the completed
screed.
SS012_Bricklayer, Blockwork & Plaster
JKT05 SS12/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 12 – BRICKLAYER, BLOCKWORK & PLASTERING
SECTION 12
12.0 BRICKLAYER & BLOCKWORK
12.1 GENERALLY
This section covers requirements for the erection of masonry walls, including
common clay bricks, concrete blocks and Autoclave Aerated blocks. Whenever a
material, item, article or product is specified by trade/brand name, manufacturer's
name or catalogue reference, the Contractor propose to use its equivalent in the
Works, subject to the written confirmation of the Architect.
12.2 STANDARDS
Singapore Standards (or equivalent Standards)
SS 18 Hard drawn mild steel reinforcement
SS 26 Portland Cement
SS 31 Aggregates from natural sources for concrete
SS 103 Bricks, burnt clay and shale bricks
SS 271 Precast concrete blocks
Other Standards
BS EN 499 Welding consumables – covered electrodes for manual metal arc

welding of non alloy and fine grain steels - classification
BS EN 10088-1 Stainless steel – List of stainless steel

and/or lime
BS EN 13055 Lightweight aggregates for masonry aggregates and structural
Concrete
JKT05 SS12/2
BS EN 13139 Aggregates for mortar
BS EN 13369 Common rules for precast concrete products
BS 1200 Specification for building sands from natural resources
BS 1243 Specification for metal ties for cavity wall construction
BS 3921 Specification for clay bricks
BS 4551 Testing for Mortar Strength
BS 4887 Mortar Admixtures: Specification fro air entraining (plasticizing)

admixture Part 1
BS 5224 Specification for masonry cement
BS 5234 Partitions (including matched linings). Code of Practice for

design and installation
BS 6398 Specification for bitumen damp-proof courses to masonry
BS 8000 Code of Practice for masonry Part 3
DIN18175 – EN 1051 Glass Blocks
12.3 BRICKS
All common bricks shall be of a standard size of even shape, hard, well burnt,
machine-made pressed bricks with true arises. Bricks to be regular in shape and
meet the requirements of relevant BS and PSB. Bricks will have a minimum
compressive strength of 35MN/mm2.
Bricks shall be delivered to the Site by the supplier and shall be carefully stacked in
convenient positions on arrival. All bricks shall give a clear ring when struck with a
trowel or another brick. No soft or defective bricks are allowed and no bats or broken
bricks shall be used except for closers.
12.4 SAMPLES
The Contractor shall supply sample bricks and blocks for the approval of the
Architect before delivery to the Site and all bricks and blocks delivered must not fall
below the standard of the approved samples.
Further samples of bricks and blocks taken at random from the load shall be
deposited with and be approved by the Architect before being used and all
subsequent deliveries shall be up to the standard of that approved.
JKT05 SS12/3
The removal of bricks and blocks not up to the standard of the approved samples
shall be at the expense of the Contractor as it shall be his responsibility to accept
from the suppliers’ bricks or blocks of the approved standard only.
12.5 MORTAR
The sand for mortar is to comply with relevant British Standard and is to be clean,
sharp fresh water river or naturally occurring sand free of organic impurities to be
washed and screened if so directed by the Architect.
Cement is to be as described in the engineering specification, General Concrete

section.
Mortar shall consist of cement and sand in the proportions of one part Portland
cement to six parts sand, by volume, with an approved plasticiser added, in
accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.
The materials are to be accurately measured in purpose made measuring boxes on

a watertight raised platform, first dry, then with the addition of water until desired
consistency is attained. Alternatively mortar can be mixed using an appropriate
machine, subject to the ARCHITECT’s approval.
The use of plasticiser or other additives may be allowed upon application being
made to the ARCHITECT. Any such plasticiser or additives that are permitted shall
be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.
Mortar to have a minimum compressive strength of 3.6N/mm2 at 28 days when

tested in accordance with BS 45541. Mortar is to be used within one hour of the
addition of water, and any mortar that has started to set, is to be discarded and not
re-tempered.
All mixing boards and boxes are to be cleaned at the end of each day’s work, and all
unused mortar is to be removed from the Site.
12.6 SETTING OUT
The Contractor shall provide proper setting out rods and shall set out on the same
all works showing openings, heights, sills and lintels and shall build the various walls
and piers to the thickness, widths and heights as shown in the drawings. No part of
the walling shall be constructed more than one meter higher than any other part at
any one time and in such cases the jointing shall be made in long steps and not by
toothing so as to prevent cracks arising. All walls shall be levelled around at floors
and all brickwork must be built in level courses, no four courses of brickwork to rise
more than 300mm.
Proper plumbing must be carried out to ensure those brick walls constructed are
perpendicular to the floor throughout its height and length. Brick walls that are not
JKT05 SS12/4
constructed straight shall be demolished and reconstructed at the Contractor's own

cost.
12.7 LAYING AND JOINTING BRICKWORK
Before commencing any brickwork, the Contractor shall confer with other specialist
contractors to ensure that all pipes, conduits, drains, sleeves, bolts, hangers, door
and window fixing lugs or timber pellets or any other materials necessary to be
installed in the brickwork at the time it is built have been fixed or provided for.
All bricks shall be well wetted by being soaked in clean water for at least half an hour
before use and tops of walls where left off shall be wetted before re-commencing
building. Clean all supporting surfaces and remove loose mortar before laying units
All joints shall be 10mm thick and flushed up and grouted in solid as the work
proceeds.
All constructed brickwork and block work must be cured with water for 5 days and
protected from sun rays 2 days after laying.
Except where specified to be fair face, all faces of brickwork and walling shall be left
rough and the joints raked out to a depth of 10mm whilst the mortar is green to form
adequate key for plaster.
Tops of walls where built to underside of soffits to be pointed up with 25mm layer of
‘Flexell’ or similar approved expansion jointing material. In the case of fire resisting
walls, the walls including associated steelwork must provide fire separation and
smoke sealing between rooms/compartments to the fire rating as indicate in the
drawings. Where noted on drawings install fire sealants to vertical and horizontal
joints and intumescent paint to the steelwork to achieve the required fire
performance.
Frames, grounds, bearers etc. to be fixed to walls to be built in as the work proceeds
and are to be bedded solidly at the back in cement mortar and pointed.
Mesh Reinforcement is to be laid, every fourth course (Every course for walls less
than 100mm thk.). Mesh to be galvanised steel or Grade 1.4401 stainless steel
0.3mm thick.
Walls on ground floors, roof, carparking floors, external wall or party to a ‘wet’ room
etc, to be built off a DPC at slab level. Damp proof course to be in accordance with
BS:743.
Where brick units occur on sloped ramps, cut bottom course to maintain horizontal
jointing.
Contractors provide RC stiffeners to structural engineer’s detail where required.
JKT05 SS12/5
12.8 BONDING BRICKWORK
All half-brick thick walls throughout the work shall be built entirely in stretchers and
shall be laid so that there is always a lap of one brick over another of half a brick. All
one brick walls and over throughout the works shall be built in English Bond in the
best-approved manner. All piers and intersections and angles of walls shall be
properly bonded together. All must be built in level courses; no four courses to rise
more than 300mm.
All perpends, reveals, quoins and other angles of the walls, etc. shall be built strictly
true and square.
Bonding ties shall be 6mm diameter mild steel rods, galvanised once kneed, not less
than 450mm long, hooked both ends, one cast into concrete columns and the other
built into the brickwork at every fourth course, where brickwork or blockwork abuts
concrete columns.
Start joint reinforcing 225mm above supporting floor slab or first course above
supporting floor slab. Stagger ends of joint reinforcing in jointing courses and lap
150mm. Provide joint reinforcing in 2 horizontal mortar joints 75mm and 150mm
above and below wall openings, extending beyond each side of opening. Terminate
joint reinforcing not more than 50mm from openings, expansion joints and control
joints. Longitudinal wires of joint reinforcing not to be less than 18mm or more than
25mm from each face, woth longitudinal wires fully embedded in mortar.
Where brickwork or blockwork abuts steel stanchions, the bonding ties shall be
welded for a length of 75mm, to the steelwork.
12.9 RAKE OUT JOINTS
Rake out joints of brickwork or cut grooves for turn-in of flashings, wedge with
hardwood wedges and point in cement mortar (1:3) where required.
Contractor to take into account of the following performance requirements.
12.11 AUTOCLAVED AERATED CONCRETE BLOCK
[Applicable to proposed wALL Type 2]
(i) Lightweight autoclaved aerated concrete block shall conform to the

requirements of the relevant British Standards (or equivalent local
Standards).
JKT05 SS12/6
(ii) Lightweight blocks shall be laid with cement and lime mortar of 1:6 mix with
approved plasticiser. Horizontal and vertical joints should be 10mm thick.
Lightweight concrete blocks or foam concrete should satisfy the following technical
specifications.
(i) Manufacturing Requirements
A characteristic compressive strength of 3.95N/Nm2 at 28 days.
A density (oven dry) of between 650 to 800kg/m3.
A drying shrinkage not exceeding 0.09% tested to SS 271.
A total water absorption not exceeding 23.5% tested to SS 271.
A minimum fire rating (100mm thick block) of 4 hour to ISO 834.
(ii) Dimension Tolerance
The blocks are manufactured to satisfy the following requirements:-

Height : ± 2mm
Width : ± 2mm
Thickness : ± 2mm
12.12 LAYING AND JOINTING CONCRETE BLOCKWORK
The blockwork shall be laid in stretcher bond. Lay first course on DPC with sand
cement bed so that the first course is level and plump. Lay subsequent courses on
thin bed adhesive, tapping the blocks with a rubber mellet to achieve level. Walls
shall be carried up in a uniform carefully levelled every second course and
reinforced with ‘Exmet’ every forth course, maximum at 1m high interval, and on one
portion raised more than 800mm above another at any time. Corners shall be well
bonded, plumbed and all perpendicular and quoins kept true and square.
Broken or cracked blocks shall not be used. Face of blocks shall not vary from the
general vertical face of wall by more than 3mm. The cement mortar joint thickness
shall be approximately 10 mm thk. Blocks should be bedded and jointed in cement
and sand mix of 1:4 with approved plasticiser. All fair face internal and external
concrete blocks walls shall be flushed pointed in 1:3 (Masonry Cement: Sand Mix or
Ordinary Portland Cement: Sand Mix with approved plasticiser) at least three days
after the blocks have been laid.
The work shall be executed course by course and every third course shall be
levelled.
Steam cure all concrete block, air dry for not less than 30 days before delivery. All
blocks shall be well wetted before being laid.
JKT05 SS12/7
All walls and corners shall be well bonded, plumb and true, and all perpends and
quoins shall be kept strictly true and square. No broken or cut blocks shall be used
in the work.
Except where specified to be fair faced, all faces of blockwork and walling shall be
left rough and the joints raked out to a depth of 13mm whilst the mortar is green to
form adequate key for plaster.
Carefully execute all straight and raking cutting where necessary.
12.13 BUILDING IN WOOD FRAMES
Openings for doors, windows and ventilators, etc shall be properly marked out and
left unbuilt until the wooden frames have been fixed in position. All timber frames
shall be built in as the work proceeds.
All door frames, window frames and vent frames, plates, etc. shall be bedded in
13mm thick cement mortar (1:6 incorporating plasticiser).
All door frames shall be carefully fixed and stayed in position and shall be anchored
into walls with 38 x 3mm galvanised m.s. holdfasts of 225mm girth, one end turned
up 75mm and twice countersunk drilled and screwed to frame and other end
swallow-tailed and built into joints of walling at approximately 600mm centres.
12.14 PUTLOG HOLES
All putlog holes shall be carefully, properly and completely filled up on completion of
walling work and before any plastering work commences.
12.15 DEFECTIVE BRICKS/BLOCKS
Cut out any defective bricks found in the work after completion and replace with
sound ones at the Contractor's expense.
12.16 CUT AND PIN ENDS, ETC
Cut and pin or build in ends of bars, railings and the like and make good in cement
mortar. Leave or form all holes, mortices, openings and the like in brick walls for
fittings, pipes and the like and make good in cement mortar (1:6 incorporating
plasticiser) to the satisfaction of the ARCHITECT
JKT05 SS12/8
12.17 LINTELS/STIFFENERS
To be provided by Contractor as required and subject to Engineers’ & Consultants’

approvals. Install steel lintels where required and as directed by Architect and
Engineer.
Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 300mm for
brick size units and 600mm for block size units are shown without structural steel or
other supporting lintels.
Provide precast lintels made from concrete matching concrete masonry units in
color, texture, and compressive strength and with reinforcement bars indicated or
required supporting loads indicated.
Provide prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels. Use specially formed bond

beam units with reinforcement bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout.
Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-
place lintels until cured.
Provide either of above at Contractor's option or provide precast or formed-in-place

concrete lintels.
Provide minimum bearing of 200mm at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
12.18 GLASS BLOCK WALLS
Unless otherwise specified, Glass blocks to be 190mm x 190mm x 80mm thick

partially evacuated hollow ubnits with polyvinyl butaryl edge coating complying with
DIN 18175.
Joint reinforcing shall comprise 6mm diameter galvanised steel double wire mesh
formed of two parallel wires 50mm on centres with electrically welded cross wires at
regular intervals. Panel anchors shall be 38mm wide x 1mm thick x 600mm long
galvanised steel perforated strips.
Bed blocks on mortar mixed in the ration of 1:3 by volume. All mortar joints shall be
full and not furrowed. Steel tools shall not be used to tap glass blocks.
Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, joint width shall generally be 10mm.
Lay Glass Blocks complete with sealant joints, expansion strips, panel anchors and
reinforcing wires and separate from any adjoining masonry by expansion and gliding
joints. Expansion and gliding joints to consist of compressible filler and sealant.
Provide metal reinforcement and flashing of the types recommended by the
manufacturer of the sill. Lay the glass block in strict compliance with manufacturer’s
recommendation.
Where glass block panels abut dissimilar elements such as walls, slab soffits, etc.,
install panel anchors at 600mm centres anchored to the adjoining element in a
JKT05 SS12/9
suitable manner and extending into the glass block mortar joints that contain the
reinforcing.
Place succeeding courses of blocks in a similar fashion, striking joints smooth while
the mortar is still plastic and before final set. Tool joints to be concave.
Surplus mortar shall be removed and faces of the blocks wiped dry at the time the
joints are tooled.
Final cleaning shall be carried out after the mortar has attained final set but before
becoming dry on the block surfaces. Clean with water and glass-cleaning detergent
specifically recommended for such purpose. Do not use abrasive cleaners, such as,
steel wool, wire brushes or acid.
12.19 CEMENT
All cement used in the works to be as specified in Engineer's Specification for Concrete
Works.
12.20 PLASTERING SAND
All sand used in the works to be as specified in Engineer's Specification for Concrete
Works but is to be fine sand of light colour and to be approved by the Architect.
The clay-plus-fine silt cement shall not exceed 5% by weight and 15% by volume as
specified in BS 1199.
12.21 HEIGHT OF WALL FINISH ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILINGS
Where there is a suspended false ceiling all wall finishes shall rise a minimum of 50mm
above the height of the suspended ceiling and be finished off in a neat straight line.
12.22 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
All concrete surfaces to be plastered shall be hacked to give hammer depressions

evenly spaced at 150mm both ways to provide key before plastering. The surface shall
be clean and well wetted before each plaster coat is applied.
All ordinary portland cement plaster or masonry cement plaster shall be kept continually
damp between application of coats and for seven days after application of final coat.
Concrete surfaces need not be hacked if they are coated with cement slurry applied by
approved mechanical applicator. This cement slurry coating shall not be taken as
replacing the base coat of plastering where this is required or specified.
JKT05 SS12/10
12.23 ARRISES AND ANGLES IN PLASTERING
All arrises, internal angles, external angles, etc shall be straight plumbed and slightly
rounded.
12.24 PLASTERING ACROSS CONCRETE COLUMNS/BEAMS/WALLS
When concrete occurs in a brick or block background, allow for differential movement as
follows: fix expanded metal lathing over to walls on each side; apply first coat to lathing
and cut through on both sides, before first coat has set, apply second coat. Use
Expamet Strip Mesh (ref. 779-100) 100mm wide tight coat galvanized steel.
12.25 PLASTERING ACROSS DIFFERENT BACKGROUNDS
Fix metal lathing across the junctions.
12.26 PLASTERING ACROSS OPEN CHASES, ETC
Bridge with expanded metal lathing securely fixed on both sides.
12.27 FIXING METAL BEADS
Securely fix with plaster dabs reinforced with galvanised nails plugged. Coat nails and
cut ends with bitumen.
12.28 PLASTERING - DESCRIPTION
12.28.1 MAKING GOOD
All making good is to be cut out to a rectangular shape, the edges undercut to form
dovetailed key and finished flush with face of surrounding plaster.
Cut out and make good all cracks, blisters and other defects and leave the whole of the
work perfect on completion.
12.28.2 PARTIALLY OR WHOLLY SET PLASTER
No partially or wholly set plaster or paving will be allowed to be used or re-mixed and
must be removed from the site.
12.28.3 PLASTER WORKS TO BRICKWORK AND CONCRETE WORK
Plastering may not be required to concrete soffits should the concrete surfaces be
smooth and even. However, should the concrete surfaces of concrete walls, columns,
beams and other concrete works be smooth and true to plane and shape a skim coat
JKT05 SS12/11
to even but minor defects is acceptable. The skim coat shall be pure masonry cement
slurry.
The Architect shall decide whether wall surfaces are sufficiently smooth and true to
plane. Refer also to Accuracy in Plastering.
12.28.4 DRIPS AND GROOVES
Drips and grooves should be formed to give a clean clear and straight surface free
from loose sandy mortar.
12.28.5 ACCURACY IN PLASTERING
The plane of any smooth untextured finished surface of plaster, which is at least 13mm
thick, is to be controlled to within 3mm. Measure between the face and any point along
a 1.8m straight edge placed against it.
For plastering to receive wall tiling, finish the surface accurately so that any gap under
a 2m straight edge laid on the surface is not greater than 3mm for tiling to be fixed with
adhesive, or 6mm for tiling to be fixed with sand cement.
Minimum thickness of plaster shall be maintained by forming thickness markers of
backing coat plaster during application at approximately 1m centres both ways.
Finishing coat shall be applied to at least the outer surface of these markers to ensure
minimum thickness.
12.28.6 MIXING OF MORTARS
All mortars for plastering are to be mechanically or hand mixed as directed by the
Architect, and the Contractor is to make allowance for the use of additional cement
necessitated by the method of mixing instructed. Only whole bags of cement are to be
used in any one batch of mix.
12.28.7 SAMPLES
The Contractor is to prepare, demolish and amend a sample three square metres of
such type of plastering as directed until the quality, texture and finish required is
obtained and approved by the Architect after which all plastering executed is to equal
the approved samples.
JKT05 SS12/12
ITEM DESCRIPTION
A COMPOSITION OF CEMENT AND SAND (1:3) PLAIN FACE PLASTER
Cement and sand (1:3) plaster shall be mixed on clean boards in a sheltered place in a
batch mixer and shall consist of one part of cement to three parts of sand and be applied
in two coats to a total thickness of 20mm as specified.
The first coat to be 10mm or 13mm thick rough plastering and shall be cross scored to
receive the second coat which shall be 3mm or 7mm thick finished with a steel trowelled
smooth finish internally and wood float finish externally.
External plastering shall be mixed with an approved plasticiser used strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
B COMPOSITION OF CEMENT AND SAND (1:4) PLAIN FACE PLASTER
Cement and sand (1:4) plain face plaster shall be mixed on clean boards in a sheltered
place in a batch mixer and shall consist of one part of cement to four parts of sand and
be applied in two coats to a total thickness of 20mm as specified.
The first coat to be 10mm or 13mm thick rough plastering and shall be cross scored to
receive the second coat which shall be 3mm or 7mm thick finished with a steel trowelled
smooth internally and wood float finish externally.
External plastering shall be mixed with an approved plasticiser used strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
PLAIN FACE PLASTER GENERALLY
Unless otherwise stated, all internal and external brick walls and concrete surfaces flush
with brick walls are to have 20mm thick cement and sand plain face plaster.
Unless otherwise stated, all internal exposed concrete soffits and sides and soffit of
beams are to have 15mm thick cement and sand plain face plaster.
Unless otherwise stated, all external exposed concrete soffits and sides and soffit of
beams are to have 20mm thick cement and sand plain face plaster.
Provide cement and sand plastering to areas as indicated on the Architect's drawings
and the Schedule of Finishes.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
A WALL TILING
The tiles are to be bedded in cement mortar (1:3) with mortar buttered on to the back of
the tiles to give a bed of 3mm, after which the tiles are to be pressed and tapped home
on and including cement and sand backing (1:3) mix overall 20mm thick taking care to
keep the joints as recommended by the tile manufacturer.
JKT05 SS12/13
The joints are to be pointed with approved neat white or coloured cement.
The tiles shall be thoroughly soaked in clean water before fixing.
Erect the wall tiles to areas as indicated in the Architect's Schedule of Finishes.
Overall thickness of the ceramic wall tiles and cement and sand backing shall be
minimum 20mm thick.
The wall tiling is to be neatly cut at all junctions with walls, etc. and to be neatly fitted
around all obstructions such as pipes, etc. and laid strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions.
Tiling works are to include for all internal and external angles.
Clean off all dirt, stains, etc. replace all damaged and defective tiles and leave tiling
perfect on completion.
B SHOP DRAWINGS
Submit shop drawings indicating the layout of special tile patterns for the approval of the
Architect.
C PRODUCT DATA
Submit manufacturer's printed instructions for mixing and installation of all materials
used in this section of the Specification.
D PRODUCT HANDLING
Deliver materials, other than bulk items, in manufacturer's unopened containers fully
identified with grade labels, brand name, type, class, size, colour, pattern, etc. Store all
materials in suitable conditions and protect from weather and damage from any source.
Store in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions.
E EXTRA STOCK
Deliver to the Owner, at the Project Site, ten (10) unopened boxes of each type of tile
installed and 2 litre can of each type of factory prepared dry set mortar, grout and
adhesive.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
A INSPECTION OF TILING WORKS
Conditions of surfaces to receive tile shall be firm, dry, clean and free of oil or waxy
films.
Grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers, bucks, electrical and mechanical work in or behind
tile shall be installed prior to proceeding with tile work.
Ensure that the substrates to receive tile are free of any defects detrimental to the work.
Do not proceed with the work until defects are corrected. Commencement of work
indicates acceptance of substrates.
JKT05 SS12/14
B PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATES FOR TILING WORKS
Prepare substrates as may be required to remove curing compounds or other

substances that would interfere with the proper bond or mortar or adhesive for tile. Rinse
with water if required. All arrises, internal angles, external angles, etc shall be clean and
slightly rounded with neatly formed mitres.
Seal substrate with sealer as recommended by the manufacturer of mortar or adhesive.
C GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
All toilet rooms have been designed and dimensioned for full tile size. Tile cutting will not
be permitted unless otherwise approved by the Architect.
Lay out tile work in pattern shown using field tile and trim shapes as shown or as
required. Centre tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall and adjust to
wall dimensions.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures, to form a
complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise shown. Terminate work
neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without
marking visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish or built-in
items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and
other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
Use uniform joint widths of 1.5mm for homogeneous/ ceramic/ porcelain tile (whichever
applicable) to wall (or as recommended by the tile manufacturer).
D WALL TILES INSTALLATION
Surface Preparation
Allow render to cure for at least 7 days prior to tiling. Do not apply rendering over
existing structural or movement joint. The render should consist of 3 or 4 parts (by
volume) suitable sand to one part cement mixed with clean drinkable water. The render
should be left with a wood float finish at approximately 10mm in thickness.
Surface to receive tiles must be clean and free from dust, oil, grease and all loose
contaminating materials. Ensure surfaces are dry before tiling with no residue or
permanent dampness. Do not wet the tiles before laying, if the back of tiles are very
dusty, remove dust with a damp sponge.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
A EXPANSION JOINTS FOR TILING WORKS
Provide horizontal and vertical joints at every 5 metre centres and at every internal
corner unless otherwise stated the width of expansion joints shall match the tile joints.
The joints must be kept free of adhesive and grout dropping during the progress of
works.
JKT05 SS12/15
Provide pointing with approved silicone sealant to all internal expansion joints and
approved polysulphide sealant to all external expansion joints, all in strict accordance
with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
B HOMOGENEOUS WALL TILING
The tiles of approved size, thickness, colour and pattern are to be bedded in cement
mortar (1:3) with approved mortar adhesive on to the back of the tiles on and including
cement and sand backing (1:3) mix taking care to keep the joints as thin as possible all
in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
Tile setting and grouting materials for wall tiling works shall be as described in 'PAVIOR'.
The homogeneous/ ceramic/ porcelain (whichever applicable) floor tiles are to be
supplied and installed by the Contractor to respective areas as shown in the Schedule of
Finishes.
The Contractor is required to furnish a Warranty and Indemnity for tile adhesive to the
Employer against any defects, failures, etc for a period of ten (10) years.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
A MARBLE OR GRANITE WALL SLAB/TILES
The marble or granite wall slab/tiles used in the works shall be as described under
"Pavior", where applicable.
The marble or granite slab/tiles are to be laid to patterns/designs and including jointing
with cement and sand (1:3) mix with approved tile adhesive in the appropriate mix
proportions and all necessary fixing accessories, wastage of materials in handling and
cutting, laying of tiles, supervision and profit and everything else necessary for the
completion of the respective items.
All marble/granite slab shall be from an approved source and shall be of best quality
sound stock, carefully selected, uniform in colour, pattern, markings, texture and finish,
free from defects impairing strength, durability or appearance such as cracks, seams,
mineral stains, quarry sap, holes, flaws, imperfections, or unusual accumulation of
discolouration in any area. Patching or filling is not permitted. All units shall be examined
to ensure uniformity and matching of colour, pattern, markings, texture, finish, etc. to
that of the approved unit. Delivered stone shall match the approved samples and any
stone not matching the approved samples may be rejected by the Architect. All
necessary arrangement must be made to match the texture, vein and colour of
marble/granite slabs before installation.
The wall tiling is to be neatly cut and mitred at all junctions with walls, etc. and to be
neatly fitted around all obstructions such as pipes, etc. and laid strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
JKT05 SS12/16
Before polishing of granite or marble, all blemishes and holes of the granite or marble
shall be filled with approved filler consisting of matching granite/marble chips and hand-
polished where applicable and as directed by the Architect.
All corners shall be mitred with matching finishes. All joints and gaps shall be sealed with
approved tinted cement grout with neat flush pointing.
The Contractor and the Manufacturer/Agent are required to furnish a Joint Warranty and
Indemnity for tile adhesive to the Employer against any defects, failures, etc. for a period
of ten (10) years.
Generally granite skirting shall be 15mm x 100mm high x 600mm length, mitred at
corners.
Generally compressed marble skirting shall be 12mm x 100mm x 600mm long mitred at
corners.
Compressed marble skirting to curved walls shall be 12mm x 100mm high in equal
segments of wedges to suit the curvature of the wall. Segments shall be max. 150mm
long.
All skirting’s shall be bull nosed as shown.
12.29 MOCK-UPS
A 1m x 1m panel of each of the masonry types shall be set up at a location agreed with
the SO/CM.
A wall including window set into each of the masonry wall types. The window is to
include the lintel, DPCs, weepholes, sill and sealant. The sample can formpart of the
final construction.
Masonry works shall not proceed until SO/CM has approved the mock-ups.
SS013_Concrete Wall Panels
JKT05 SS3/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 13 - SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE WALL PANELS
SECTION 13
13.0 SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE WALL PANELS
13.1 GENERAL

equivalent in the Works, subject to the written confirmation of the Architect.
13.2 STANDARDS
Other Standards
BS8110 Structural use of concrete (in particular Section 5 – Part 1 Design

and Detailing of Precast Composite Structures.
BS5328 Concrete parts 1, 2 & 3.
CP297 Precast concrete cladding non-load bearing.
BS8297 Superseding BS297.
BS1217 Cast stone
And the following ASSOCIATED BRITISH STANDARDS (not specifically mentioned

in the following text).
BS12 Specification for ordinary and rapid hardening Portland cement.
BS146 Portland-blast furnace cement.
BS410 Specification for test sieves.
BS882 Specification for aggregates from natural sources for concrete.
BS1014 Pigments for Portland cement and Portland products.
BS1881 Methods of testing concrete.
JKT05 SS3/2
Part 108 Method for making test cubes from fresh concrete.
P art 111 Method of normal during of test specimens (20C

method).
Part 116 Method for determination of compressive strength of

concrete cubes.
BS3148 Methods of test for water for making concrete (including notes on
the suitability of the water).
BS3797 Specification for lightweight aggregates for concrete.
BS4027 Sulphate resisting Portland Cement
BS5070 Concrete admixtures.
Part 1 Specification for accelerating admixtures, retarding

admixtures and water-reducing admixtures.
Part 2 Specification for air-entraining admixtures.
BS5328 Part 1 to 4
BS7583 Portland Limestone Cement
BS8298 Code of Practice Design, Manufacture and Installation of Natural

Stone Cladding and Lining.
13.3 EXTRUDED CELLULOSE FIBRE REINFORCED LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE

PANELS

equivalent in the Works, subject to the written confirmation from Architect
Extruded Cellulose Fibre Reinforced Lightweight Concrete Panels to be used for

internal and external wall partitions.
13.3.1 Typical Details to be in accordance to manufacture details unless otherwise

indicated in architectural Drawings.
13.3.2 Bottom Panel Connection
Panel to be Dowel Bar fixed to 250mm high, 100mm wide RC kerb. RC kerb to have
(75x50x2)mm thick MS perforated continuous angle support.
13.3.3 Panel Connection
Panel fixed between (38x38x2)mm thick MS continuous angle support fixed to

underside or slab.
JKT05 SS3/3
13.3.4 Vertical Perpendicular Wall Connection
Cement Mortar finished flush with panel.
13.4 SPECIFICATIONS
13.4.1 Dimension of Lightweight Panel
a) 600mm width
b) 100-150 mm thickness
c) Cut length up to 6000mm
13.4.2 Weight and Density of Panel
a) 75 kg/m2/1680kg/m3 for 100mm thick Finewall Lightweight Panel or equivalent.
13.4.3 Surface Finish
a) Ready to receive paint/direct tiling/wall-paper and the like.
13.4.4 Partition Strength
a) Shall be tested to pass BS 5234 (Severe duty)
13.4.5 Compressive Strength
Shall not be less than 4.0N/mm2 in accordance to with Singapore Standard

SS271:1983 (or local equivalent standards).
13.4.6 Fire Resistance
a) Test result of the panel must be in accordance with British Standard BS 476:
Part 20 and 22 (Fire Resistance Test).
b) Certificate of conformity issued by the PSB (or local equivalent authority

requirements/ standards) certifying that the product complies with the Test
must be obtained from the Supplier.
13.4.7 Sound Deduction
a) 100mm thick wall panel shall not be less than STC 40 rating when tested to
ASTM E90.
13.4.8 Water Adsorption
a) The average water absorption must meet the requirement by SS271:1983,

which states that it should not exceed 23.5%. This must be verified by Test
done in accordance to with Singapore Standard SS271:1983 (or local
equivalent standards).
JKT05 SS3/4
13.4.9 Heat Transfer Coefficient
a) “C” = 1.0 W/sq.m C
13.4.10 Non-Combustible
a) Product must pass Non-Combustible Test in accordance with British Standard

BS 476 Part 4:1970
b) Certificate of compliance issued by the PSB (or local equivalent authority

requirements/ standards) certifying that the product complies with the Test
must be obtained from the supplier.
13.4.11 Thermal Conductivity
• Test result of the panel must be in accordance with American Standard ASTM
C236 and shall not exceed 0.50W/mC
13.5 MANUFACTURING TOLERANCES
The panel shall manufactured by the process of extrusion with sanding of both
surfaces of the panel process. The manufacturing process shall be as follows:
• Height : (+) (-) 5mm
• Width : (+) (-) 3mm
• Thickness : (+) (-) 5mm
• Bowing/Warping : 5mm in 2000mm along the length
1.5mm in 600 along the width
• Surface Furnishing: Both sides of the panel, sanded down to size

the Manufacturing process. No skim coat or plaster
required.
• Jointing Compound: The jointing compound shall be the same composition

as the wall and applied to the sides of the panel. When
cured the jointing compound will secure both panels
together making it one homogeneous unit. The joint
area of the exterior surface of the joints should be
tooled to have a slight indentation of not more than
3mm in depth and 10 mm in width.
• Finishing Compound: The finishing compound shall be the same composition

as the wall and shall be applied to only the tooled
surface of the jointing compound.
• Finishing of Panels: Ensure that there is no plaster or skim coat to the

panel or tapes to the joints.
JKT05 SS3/5
13.5 GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR ERECTION
A.Ensure that the workers have been properly trained to handle and erect the panel.
B.Ensure that the manufactures guidelines are adhered to.
C.The panels can be laid horizontally above door or window openings not more that
5000mm wide and 2000mm high. Provided the manufactures guidelines are
strictly adhered to.
D.The opening the M&E services can be cut with timber working tools and joined as
specified in the manufactures guidelines.
JKT05 SS3/6
TECHNICAL DATA FOR EXTRUDED CELLULOSE FIBRE REINFORCED LIGHTWEIGHT

CONCRETE PANELS
Weight 75kg/ m2
18-23 m2/ man-day

Productivity
(Includes installation & joint treatment)
Non-Combustibility
Pass
BS 476: Pt 4
Fire Rating
75 mins
BS 476: Pt 20
Sound Insulation 40 dB
Usage in Wet Areas Yes
During installation of wall, services can be run

through wall cell
On-Site Installation of Concealed Wiring,
Ducting & Pipe work After installation of wall, wall surface can be
chased and void within wall filled with packing
material
Applied Finishes: Tiling Yes
Cementitious joint compound is applied between

abutting panels. When dry, joint is tooled to form a
Joint Treatment
3mm groove and applied with a finishing
compound
Fastener Types Cavity Anchors
Allowable bending stress of material 10 – 14Mpa
Allowable Compressive Stress 20 – 25Mpa
Young’s modulus 16,000 – 18,000Mpa
Allowable Shear stress 6 to 8Mpa
Ixx 27.3873 mm^4 x 10 ^ 6
Zxx 0.57 mm^3 x 10 ^ 6
JKT05 SS3/7
13.21 GREEN CONCRETE PANEL
13.21.1 Specification:
JKT05 SS3/8
13.21.2 Functional requirement:
JKT05 SS3/9
13.21.3 Work statement: Erection of green precast panel:
JKT05 SS3/10
JKT05 SS3/11
13.22 MANUFACTURING TOLERANCES
13.22.1 Complete Units (Reconstructed or Cast stone or Precast Concrete Units).
The tolerance in manufacture for units will be generally in accordance with BS 8110
Part 1: 1985: Section 6: Subsection 11.3 except that the permissible deviations from
designed dimensions will be as follows:
13.22.2 Overall length and width (measured at neutral axis of ribbed members)
3m or under : 3mm
3 - 6m : +3mm, - 4mm
6m - 12m : 6mm
Each additional 3m : 1.5mm
Total thickness or flange thickness : -3mm,+ 6mm
Rib thickness : 3mm
Distance between ribs :  3mm
Angular variation of plane of side mould : 0.5mm per 75 mm of depth or 
1.5mm, whichever is greater
Variation from square or designated skew : 1.5mm per 2.0m diagonal or
(difference in length of the two diagonal measurements) : 10mm, whichever is greater.
Length and width of blockouts and openings within :  6mm one unit
Location and dimensions of blockouts hidden from : 18mm view and used for HVAC
and utility penetrations
Dimensions of haunches :  6mm
Haunch bearing surface deviation from specified plane :  3mm
Difference in relative position of adjacent haunch :  6mm bearing surfaces from
specified relative position
Bowing : L/360, max. 18mm
Differential bowing between adjacent panels of the :12mm
same design
Local smoothness : 6mm in 3m
Warping : 1.5mm per 300mm of
distance from the nearest
adjacent corner
Location of window opening within panel :  6mm
Position of plates :  18 mm
Tipping and flushness of plates : 6mm
Position tolerances. For cast-in items measured from datum line location as shown on
approved erection drawings:
Weld plates : 18mm
Inserts :  9mm
Handling devices : 50mm
Reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric :  6mm
Where position has structural implications or affects concrete cover, otherwise 9mm
Tendons :  3mm
Flashing reglets :  6mm
Flashing reglets at edge of panel :  3mm
Reglets for glazing gaskets :  1.5mm
Groove width for glazing gaskets :  1.5mm
JKT05 SS3/12
Electrical outlets, house bibs, etc :  18mm

Haunches :  6mm
13.23 AUTOCLAVED LIGHTWEIGHT AERATED CONCRETE PANELS (ALC)
13.23.1 The pre-cast panels to be used are Autoclaved Lightweight Aerated Concrete Panel
(ALC), a product of FBM Engineering Pte Ltd or any other approved equivalent.
13.23.2 Introduction
The ALC panel is made by raw materials such as cement, lime and silica sand. This
panel will be made to form partition panels for this building’s usage.
13.23.3 Specification
Width : 600mm
Length : 6000mm
Thickness of 100mm per 25mm interval
The joints between panels shall be a T-shape joint.
13.23.4 Thermal Insulation
Thickness Thermal Resistance Heat Transfer Coefficient
δ (mm) R(m².k/W) K(W/m².k)
50mm 0.31 2.17
75mm 0.45 1.67
100mm 0.59 1.35
13.23.5 Fire Safety Protection
The ALC panels are in organic non-combustible materials and have absolute
incombustibility properties. At up to 700 degrees Celsius, the ALC panels should not
experience any strength loss and a 15 cm thick wall should be able to resist fire for
as long as 4 hours. This should be a Class A fireproof construction material.
No smoke or toxic gas should be released from the ALC panels during fire. The ALC
panels should effectively resist fire, spread of fire and protect the internal from the
impact of fire.
JKT05 SS3/13
JKT05 SS3/14
JKT05 SS3/15
13.23.6 Lightweight and Strength
ALC absolute dry densities of different grade products are 400-600 kg/sqm. This is a
lightweight product which reduces labour intensity during construction. ALC panels
can be used with reinforcing bar according to the design to meet a variety of load-
bearing requirements. Reinforcing bar in the panels perform stabilized, toughening
and impact resistance functions. Before producing panels, it is necessary to rationally
design the plate reinforcement (including structure and size of reinforcing bar)
according to the load requirements of the specific projects, making bearing capacity,
shear resistant, stiffness and deflection indicators to meet the requirements. After
production, the panels muste be tested through sampling to review whether the
structure performance meets the load requirements.
ALC Panel
No. Characteristics ALC Panel
Fire Resistance
1 a) 100mm Greater than 4 hours
b) 200mm Greater than 4 hours
2 Precision Block Yes
Sound Insulation: STC Test (Sound Transmission Class)
JKT05 SS3/16
a) 100mm thick wall DB
1) No surface treatment 40
2) 12mm Thick Plastering on both sides 48
b) 120mm thick wall DB
3 1) No surface treatment 42
c) 150mm thick wall DB
1) No surface treatment 44
4 Coverage (for ALC Block) 100mm
8.33 pc/m2
5 Coverage (for ALC Block) 100mm
77kg/m2
13.23.6 Noise Insulation & Absorption
Noise insulation of the ALC Panels are between 40-60DB. ALC has a dual nature,
soud absorption and sound resistance.
13.23.7 Impermeability & Damp Proofing
Study shows that besides structural reasons, the seepage of external walls is
generally infiltrated from the masonry mortar joint, but ALC panels mainly use special
adhesive mortar joint denser than ordinary masonry mortar joint, thus they greatly
reduce the seepage probability. The technical ability ensures that the inside holes of
ALC products are independent closed holes, and their diameter is about 1-2mm, so
that they can prevent the moisture diffusion effectively.
JKT05 SS3/17
13.23.8 Efficient Construction
Precise Size
ALC products are of precise sizes and the tolerance of length, height and width is
+1.0mm. Precise sizes make it possible to avoid cracking by the way of coating thin
mortar and putty.
Dry Construction
This aerated concrete products can be installed by the way of dry masonry
continuous operation. They are not restricted from the height of one time masonry, so
they can highly improve the speed of construction. When special adhesive is used to
dry masonry installing our blocks, it does not need watering in the surface of blocks
to be wet. After installation, the surface ALC product walls can be directly coated with
putty. Without watering and heat conservation, it effectively reduces cracks caused
by masonry wall shrinkage as a result of expansion and contraction due to change of
water content. It not only reduces the construction difficultly, but also is conducive to
the quality of the project and shortens project period.
Good Processing Ability
Easier to process than wooden products, these ALC products can be processed
simply into different shapes as per your demand. They are easy to groove and do not
need much time spent in cutting. Various processing methods like sawing, drilling,
nailing, hanging, craving and coating thin-layer mortar make it easier and more
flexible to bury pipeline and do second decoration.
13.23.9 Economical Cost
Shorter Project Period
ALC Panels are lightweight and easy-processed, which may ease labour intensity.
Internal and external walls can be constructed at the same time, so construction
speed is faster and labour costs are reduced. ALC panels are masoned and coated
by dry powder mortar. Heat insulation time is reduced, project time is shortened by
about 2/3.
Good Anti Cracking Ability
Shrinkage rate of ALC products is much smaller than national standard 0.5mm/m and
other wall materials. The smaller the dry shrinkage rate, the better the anti-cracking
ability. Moreover, dry construction avoids wall cracking because of dry shrinkage.
ALC panel is masoned by special mortar whose thickness is only 3mm, so cracking
possibility of the gap is greatly lowered. Wall is elastically connected, which is
beneficial to avoid cracking even if the base subsides
JKT05 SS3/18
13.23.10 Internal Partition Wall Panels
ALC panels can be used directly in internal wall of concrete structures and steel
structures, such as in hotels, schools, offices, market places and houses etc. The
internal walls such as household walls, separating walls, partition walls in bathroom
and kitchens etc, conform to hang various things such as air conditioning, water
heater, radiator, hanging cases, etc. Compared with traditional internal wall partition
materials, ALC internal panels have obvious advantages in various technical
performances; lightweight, high strength, thermal insulation, fire resistance, sound
insulation, seepage prevention, frost resistance, durability, anti-seismic, high
softening coefficient, no radiation, good creativity, scientific installing method,
convenient and quick construction.
ALC internal panels are reinforced by antirust double-layer and two way steel mesh.
They have good load-bearing capacity, the static hanging weight in a single point
being 120kgs. They are produced in high temperature, high pressure and steam
curing, with the minimum shrinkage ratio in the inorganic materials, caulked with
special polymer binders, which can effectively prevent cracking.
Specifications
Thickness 75mm 100mm 125mm Greater than 150mm
Length (mm) ≤3000 ≤4000 ≤5000 ≤6000
13.23.11 External Wall Panels
ALC panels can be used directly in exterior walls of concrete structures and steel
structures. As an excellent heat insulator, they surpass most other similar building
materials. They are also guarantee of a comfortable and pleasant environment inside
the buildings, with lower heating and cooling costs throughout the lifespan of a
building.
ALC panels improve the reliability and security of node strength in external walls.
During the rotation and extension in plane of the connecting nodes of wallpanels,
ALC panels ensure that the walls can be adapted to the interlayer displacement in
different directions of the main structure and satisfies the need for the interlayer
deformation of the main structure conforming to the seismic design intensity.
The installation nodes of ALC panels are scientifically designed, with high strength
and a certain amount of rotating performance. It can bear an interlayer displacement
of between 1/200 to 1/50 without damage or only a minor damage.
JKT05 SS3/19
ALC panels are regarded as constructional elements with flexible connection in terms
of seismic design, so their stiffness and seismic bearing capacity are not counted.
Structure members supporting the ALC external panels can count the effect of
seismic action of ALC wall panels as an additional effect and meet the anchoring
requirement of connecting accessories.
Specifications & Standard Designs
DesignLoad/ 100mm 125mm 150mm 175mm 200mm

Maximum
Length/
Thickness
≤1.2kn/m² 3600 4200 5200 6000 6000

1.4kn/m² 3500 4200 4900 6000 6000
1.6kn/m² 3300 4000 4700 5700 6000
1.8kn/m² 3100 3900 4500 5400 6000
2.0kn/m² 3000 3800 4300 5200 6000
2.2kn/m² 2800 3600 4200 5000 5800
2.3kn/m² 2700 3400 4100 4700 5600
13.23.12 Construction Guidelines
Instructions of ALC panel construction
Preparation
1. Check the drawing before construction, and compose on designing, the width of
partition wall should fit multiples of 600mm, we should better arrange the rest near
the concrete column or the side of wall. It's inadvisable to arrange it near the
windows and doors.
2. Clean up the joint part between panels and roofs, sand, soil and so on. All the
mortar and concrete which are bulged out over the walls should be cleaned up.
3. According to the drawing, mark the columns, beams, floor which is connected with
Panel, and pop the two-side upper and lower line of control by using ink fountain.
JKT05 SS3/20
METHOD OF STATEMENT
On-site.
While composing and the 600mm modulus. If the width can't fit the multiples of
600mm, we should better arrange the rest near the concrete column or the side of
the walls. Its inadvisable to arrange it near the windows and doors.
Clean up the joint part between panels and roofs, floors and walls. Clean the floating
ash, sand, soil and so on. All the mortar which are bulged out over the walls should
be cleaned out.
According to the drawing, mark the columns, beams, floor which is connected with
ALC Panel, and pop the two-side upper and lower line of control by using ink
fountain.
Installation and construction
4-5 workers form a group. Use hydraulic trolley for transportation. Panels should be
kept flat during the transportation. Pulling on the floor or unilateral support is forbidden
during transportation.
Use special fixture when lifting. Hoisting belt should be flexible nylon tie belt. Use 1:3
cement mortar on the bottom of the panel to make level, mortar thickness is 10 to
20mm.
While installation, one worker uses a chain hoist to make the panel stand up, other
workers stabilize the panel to the corresponding location.
Each panel should be connected to major structure by special U panels by nail gun.
After panel is upright, adjust the verticality by a wadge stuffed on the bottom of the
panel.
U-Card which is shot on the panels by a nail gun. After panel is upright, adjust the
verticality by a wadge stuffed on the bottom of the panel.
Groove between panels to bite each other should be close.
Pay attention to control the verticality during the installation, and check-up carefully
after installation.
Gap between panels to be caulked by special mortar, and extra mortar should be
pushed out while connecting panels.
Then clean up adhesive cracks between panels, and use specialized pointing mortar
to fill up gaps and level out.
JKT05 SS3/21
To avoid cracking on gaps between panels, cover the adhesive gap with a layer of
200mm wide alkali-resistance fibre mesh.
13.23.13 Submittal
Samples
The contractor is to submit manufacturer’s literature for Architect’s approval for

usage of a particular brand. Further various samples with the different required
finishes have to be submitted for the Architect’s approval.
Mock Ups
Contractor is to provide for a single story full height mock-up with a width of 8m as
part of the submission for approval
Shop Drawing
Code of Compliance Certificates
Submit shop drawings showing project layout and elevations; fastening and
anchoring methods; detail and location of joints, sealants, and gaskets, including
joints necessary to accommodate thermal movement; trim; flashing; and
accessories.
Affidavit certifying material meets requirements specified.
Two copies of manufacturer's literature for panel material.
Code Compliance
Documents showing product compliance with the national and local building code
shall be submitted prior to the bid. These documents shall include, but not be limited
to, appropriate Evaluation Reports and/or test reports supporting the use of the
product.
Alternate materials must be approved by the architect prior to the bid date.
JKT05 SS3/22
13.24 NATURAL GRANITE, MARBLE, PORTLAND STONE OR OTHER STONE
13.24.1 Natural stone for casting on to concrete units to be supplied by the Contractor in
accord with BS 8298 1989.
13.24.2 Colour, Graining & Matching of Stone Applied Finishes. Naturally occurring granites,
marbles and other stone are subject to variations in colour, shade, texture and
graining.
Estimates of variations to be based on the use of facing in natural materials as

selected by the Architect. Proposed stone supplier, colour, texture and graining
subject to Architect’s Approval.
13.24.3 Facing Aggregates
i) Provide fine and coarse aggregate for each type of exposed finish required
from a single source for entire job.
ii) Aggregates shall be clean, hard, strong, durable, and inert, free of staining or
deleterious material.
13.25 BRICKS OR TILES FOR CASTING ON TO CONCRETE OR GRC UNITS
13.25.1 Bricks or brick tiles used for casting on to precast units must be:
i) to a face size tolerance of +1mm – 2mm and:

ii) be of a consistent shape with 90 angles and with relatively sharp arises
iii) Clay product-faced units must have joint widths controlled by locating the units in
a suitable template or grid system set out accurately on the mould face.
iv) Back of Brick Facing Tiles to be dove-tailed grooved or keyback to provide
adequate key to concrete when cast.
v) Brick Tile to be a minimum of 20 – 30mm thick and should comply with ASTM
C1088. Colour, texture and size to Architect’s selection.
13.25.2 An allowance of +15% on the calculated nett brick quantities is required for size and
shape selection. Bricks received to be checked to ensure sufficiently sharp arises
and uniform shape. Where insufficient, additional bricks are to be supplied foc or an
exchange of “rejects” for new supplies made.
13.25.2 Panels rejected by the Architect due to brick quality to be replaced at no extra cost
by Contractor.
13.25.3 Fabricator to ensure placement of brick order upon confirmation of shape, sizes and
quantities approved by Architect. The delivery of sufficient quantity of bricks required
for the completion of the pre-cast panels in accordance to the construction schedule
JKT05 SS3/23
is the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
13.25.4 Brick Jointing and Courses
i) Unless agreed by Architect, all brick pointing to be “Pointing in the mould” not
hand pointing after casting.
ii) The minimum joint width that can be used is 9mm and therefore subject to the
bricks being supplied/used to the tolerances quoted above the minimum
nominal design joint width will be 10 mm.
iii) Joint to be either recessed/raked to a depth of 9mm or struck at 45 degrees.
Architect to approve.
iv) Unless otherwise indicated drawings, courses to be ‘Running Bond’ (Stretcher)
with course stating and finishing on half or full bricks to avoid cutting and to
match adjacent spandrels or column covers.
v) Alternate course vertical joints to align.
vi) Stretcher, corner, edge corner and 3-sided corner brick facing modules to be
used.
13.25.5 Contractor must consider the following in design and production in order to minimize
or eliminate panel bowing:
1. The temperature differential (exterior to interior).

2. Coefficients of expansion of the materials.
3. Ratio of cross sectional areas of the materials and their moduli of elasticity.
4. Amount, location and type of reinforcement in the concrete panel.
5. The use of pre-stressing
6. Type and location of connections to the structure.
7. Shrinkage of the concrete and expansion of the facing.
13.25.6 Exposed horizontal bottom panel edges and soffits to have drip/groove.
3.26 PRECAST PANEL FINISHES
3.26.1 Clay Product Faced Precast Concrete Panels
i) Refer to 5.00 “Bricks or Tiles for casting on to concrete or GRC Units”

ii) The brick tile/facings to comply with the following specification:-
JKT05 SS3/24
Typical dimensions:
Length : 230mm
Width : 70mm
Depth : 20 – 30mm
Dimensional Category:
Typical Weight (kg) :2.08 – 2.3
Compressive Strength (Mpa) :12.1 – 33.0
Unconfined Compressive Strength (Mpa) :6.6 – 21.0
Average Modulus of Rupture (Mpa) :2.2 – 3.8
Characteristic Modulus of Rupture (Mpa) :1.7 – 2.0
Average Cold Water Absorption (%) :7.2 – 9.6
Average Boiling Water Absorption (%) :10.0 – 12.2
Average Bulk Density (kg/m3) :2000 – 2100
Durability Category :General Purpose
Coefficient of Expansion (mm/m) :0.6
Liability to Efflorescence :Nil to Slight
Notes: All testing to be carried out in accordance with British or Australian/New

Zealand Standards AS/NZS 4456 test methods where applicable.
iii) Colour and texture to Architect’s selection.

iv) Brick tile sample to be submitted for approval prior to mock-up fabrication.
JKT05 SS3/25
13.26.2 Smooth off the Form Concrete Panels
i) General
1. Non-Porous moulds constructed so that no water or grout leakage will occur.

No joints permitted on mould face.
2. Form vibration to be employed. When unavoidable immersion vibration may be

used but vibrator must not touch sides of mould.
3. Concrete mix design to combine minimum cement content and a constant low
water-cement ratio with high density.
4. Uniformity of manufacturing procedures for cleaning mould, application of

mould release, uniformity of concrete quality, consistent curing process and
careful storage procedures.
5. Minimise chance of chipping and therefore necessity to repair.
6. Portland Blast Furnace Cement manufactured to comply with BS 12, supplied

from same source and batch to be used.
ii) Specification
1. Detailed specification and method statement to be submitted for proposed

mock up by Specialist for Architect approval.
2. Full scale mockup of one typical panel to be made for Architect review and
subsequent mock-ups prepared until colour and standard of finish acceptable
to Architect is achieved.
3. Approved mock up finish to be accepted standard of finishes for all panels and
will form basis of comparison. Panels failing to meet the standard of mock up
sample may be rejected at the discretion of the Architect.
Acid Etched – Light Grey
i) The finish to comply with the following specification:-
Cement : white
Fine aggregate : 80% - Crushed grey granite
20% - Crushed black obsidian
Coarse aggregate : 7mm white marble
Pigment : Dark Grey
ii) Colour and texture to Architect’s approval.
JKT05 SS3/26
iii) Sample to be submitted for approval prior to mock up.
iv) Architect Approved full scale mock up to be datum standard of finish for
production panels.
13.26.3 Acid Etched – Sandstone (Bath Stone)
i) The finish to comply with the following:-
Coarse and fine aggregate of Ashton Keynes gravel (or equivalent single
source), white cement with acid etched and rubbed finish to achieve Bath
sandstone appearance.
ii) Colour and texture to Architect’s approval and/or sample available at

Architect’s office.
iii) Sample to be submitted for approval prior to mock up.
iv) Architect Approved full scale mock up to be datum standard of finish for
production panels.
All panels to be treated with fluorosilane or equivalent for dirt, mould and graffiti
resistance.
13.27 REINFORCEMENT
Units should be reinforced as necessary to resist shrinkage, handling, stressed

and service loads in accordance with the appropriate design calculations using
mild steel and high tensile steel in accordance with BS4449, BS4461, BS4466,
and BS 4483.
Cover to reinforcement will be at least as good as indicated by BS8110.
13.27.2 Tolerances in placing reinforcement within the mould will be to BS8110.
13.27.3 Stainless steel or galvanised reinforcement to be used if identified as being

required by the fabricator and if used will be in accordance with the relevant
British Standards.
JKT05 SS3/27
13.28 MOULDS
Moulds will be:
13.28.1 Fabricated in stout seasoned timber, fibreglass lined or treated where necessary to
produce true matt faces and made accurately to full size templates and length rods.
13.28.2 Of such construction that casting deviations may be readily controlled to give
compliance with the manufacturing tolerances outlined above.
13.28.3 Maintained in clean sound condition and inspected carefully for accuracy and
surface defects before reuse.
13.28.4 Reused only if any damage can be reasonably repaired and if this would not impair
the surface appearance of the unit.
13.28.5 Constructed to prevent grout loss.
13.28.6 Where specially textured surfaces to the units are required the mould faces will be
lined with either fibreglass or polyurethane or silicone rubber. These linings having
been reproduced from hand finished master casts.
13.28.7 Moulds for containing bricks, natural stone or other cast on materials will be pre-
guided using rubber, steel or timber grids to standard sizes in order to retain the
applied materials. (See also section on tolerances).
13.28.8 Where deemed necessary by Fabricators, mould release agents, face retarders and
other mould treatments may be used strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s
instruction to assist in producing the various finishes and effects and as dictated by
the sample selected and the practical requirements of casting.
13.28.9 Complex moulds/ artwork and special architectural features shall be based upon
the intent of the Architect’s drawings. Detailed shop drawings and models to be
submitted by Fabricator to the Architect for approval.
13.28.10 When the shop drawings and models are completed the Architect will be requested
to view them and if necessary attend whilst any minor modifications are carried out.
13.28.11 Unless otherwise stipulated moulds remain the property of the Fabricator. However
the Architect’s copyright must be respected. No mould may be destroyed without
the consent of the Architect and Employer.
JKT05 SS3/28
13.29 CONCRETE MIXES
13.29.1 All concrete mixes used must be generally in accord with BS5328. All materials
used will comply with the relevant British Standards and concrete mixes will attain a
characteristic compressive strength of 40N/mm2 at 28 days. (C40)
13.29.2 However as well as crushing strengths the mixes must be designed specifically to
produce colours and finishes as represented by the sample finishes selected by the
Architect and to enable units to be produced taking account of shapes, casting
attitudes etc.
13.29.3 Details including aggregate/cement and water/cement ratios, compressive strength

results and ISATT test results for the various mixes are to be available on request.
13.30 MORTAR MIXES (Brick faced units. “Pointed in the Mould”)
Such mortar mixes will consist of a 6:1 by weight. Sand/cement mix with an
appropriate additive used in accordance with the Manufacturers’ instructions.
13.30.1 Admixtures
Admixtures may be used in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions as

necessary and at the discretion of the Fabricator in order to produce the finishes and
types of units required and as directed by the practical casting requirements.
All additives used to be calcium chloride free.
13.30.2 Pigments
Dry inorganic powder pigments used to be in accordance with BS 1014 where tinted
finishes are required. The pigments are to be weight batched and dry blended with
the appropriate cement before the combined materials are used in a wet mix.
Pigments must be:-
i) Harmless to concrete set and strength.

ii) Stable at high temperature.
iii) Sunlight and alkali-fast.
JKT05 SS3/29
13.31 FIXING CAST INTO UNITS
13.31.1 Fixings will be cast into units for the purposes of lifting and for attaching units to the
structure via loose metal fixings etc. as appropriate.
13.32 Lifting
All lifting sockets cast into units whether for works lifting or for site lifting to be in
galvanised mild steel. Where these occur on an exposed face or on a face covered
by other works, they are to be sunk at least 25mm below the finished face and
grouted in solid and where they occur on an exposed face, filled on site to match as
closely as possible the finish of the panel.
13.32.1 Where these sockets are on an internal face protected from weathering, they are not
required to be filled.
13.32.2 Site lifting should be via proprietary wire loops, screwed into lifting sockets, or similar
connections located approximately on the centres of gravity of the individual unit,
where possible. Alternative methods of lifting, such as slinging, using flat plait nylon
slings, or via cast in nylon rope lifters, may be used where appropriate.
13.32.3 Special lifting devices, clamps etc are to be provided if required.
13.32.4 Fixings etc cast in the unit to have a tolerance on positioning when measured from
the appropriate faces on the unit of + or – 6mm and generally in accord with BS8810.
13.32.5 All cast in items within the unit for the purposes of fixing securely to the building
must be in stainless steel.
13.32 CASTING AND CURING
13.32.1 Reconstructed or Cast Stone or Precast Units
The concrete material to be placed in the mould within 10 minutes of mixing,

consolidated by external vibration generally and by submersible vibrators in certain
special circumstances as dictated by the mould shape.
13.32.1 Units must not be de-moulded prematurely and in no instance should they be de-
moulded less than 18 hours after casting or until the concrete within the unit has
achieved a compressive strength of 20 N/mm as determined by Schmidt hammer
testing. Damage to and distortion to immature units due to movement, vibration,
JKT05 SS3/30
overloading, physical shock, rapid cooling and thermal shock must be prevented and
is the sole responsibility of the manufacturer.
13.32.2 Following de-moulding, units to be cured in air under cover generally for a minimum
of 5 days and therefore protected from the effects of sun and drying winds.
Following finishing of the units they may be removed to a covered stacking area
where they must be stacked on non-staining bearers as appropriate for the type of
unit.
13.32.3 No units to be delivered to site until they have reached 14 to 21 days old or have
attained their designed strength by comparison with the normal 7 and 28 day cube
strength results and if necessary confirmed by an in-house test with a Schmidt
hammer.
13.33 FINISHING
13.33.1 When sufficiently hardened the exposed surfaces of the units to be treated to
achieve the finish as selected by the Architect and as represented by the approved
sample. The finished surfaces of the units to be then cleaned with a dilute acid
solution and clean water.
13.34 Quality of Finishes
i) Approved mock-up; to be standard of quality for Architectural precast concrete

work, when accepted by Architect and Employer.
ii) The mock-up will determine the range of acceptability with respect to colour and
texture variations, surface defects, and overall appearance.
iii) Precast concrete products that do not meet the colour and texture range or the
dimensional tolerances of this specification may be rejected at the option of the
Architect, if they cannot be satisfactorily corrected, as determined by the
Architect.
13.34.1 The Contract is deemed to be ‘Delivered and Fixed’ where cleaning is a normal part
of the fixing service and together with the making good of any minor damage caused
during delivery of fixing and the undertaking of minor final finishing, works be
undertaken towards the end of the on site period, just prior to final
inspection/handover.
JKT05 SS3/31
13.34.2 Potential problems associated with obtaining the colour, grading, texture and profile
of the precast units should be highlighted by the Fabricator prior to fabrication.
Reasonably predictable problems will not be considered as ground for an Extension

of Time or additional cost.
13.34.3 A mild hydrochloric acid wash or equivalent suitable cleaning agent should be used
to remove efflorescence or ‘lime bloom’.
13.35 JOINTS & SEALANTS
13.35.1 General
i) All joints to provide watertightness consistent with the design, exposure

(orientation and climatic conditions) and anticipated structural movement.
ii) Joints are required to accommodate changes in wall panel or structure
dimensions caused by changes in temperature moisture content, or load, whilst
preventing water and air penetration through the building envelope.
iii) Local panel movement to be accommodated by joint. Cumulative movement and
differential expansion of adjacent wall materials to be taken by expansion joints.
iv) Joint width, type, location and sealant selection to be in accordance to
specification and approved shop drawings. Architectural Drawings to be used as
guide for design intent only.
v) Joint width to be based upon visual requirement, panel size, building tolerance,
joint materials and adjacent surfaces.
13.35.2 One-stage Joints
i) One-stage joints not to be used unless otherwise directed by the Architect or

approved in shop drawings.
13.35.3 Two-stage joints
i) General
To be based upon open ‘rain-screen’, ventilated pressure equalized joints.
JKT05 SS3/32
b) Horizontal joint
i) Horizontal joint to be a shiplap joint with gasket sealant air seal at the internal
edge face. Exterior face to be open to vent air chamber to form pressure qualized
space. Open joint width to be 12 -20mm, or as otherwise indicated in drawings.
ii) Air tight interior seal to be prime seal preventing warm, moist air movement.
iii) Water from penetration or condensation, should be drained from the joint by
proper flashing installations.
iv) Flashing using electrometric sheet at each 2nd floor level to be used.
v) Vent or drain tubes should be a minimum 7mm inside diameter polyvinyl chloride
or other non-staining materials. Vents should be located at the junction of horizontal
and vertical joints.
vi) Drip groove to be cast into bottom horizontal outer edge panel.
c) Vertical joint
i) Vertical joint to be two stage joint with gasket/sealant air seal at the internal
edge face.
ii) Air chamber to be provided and Neoprene or equivalent baffle strip to be

compressed between panels lipped over horizontal flashing of the shiplap edge.
iii) External open joint width to be between 12 – 20mm, or as otherwise indicated in

drawings.
13.35.4 Shop drawings to be reflect full-scale details and mock-up of joint detail to be tested
prior to fabrication and installation.
JKT05 SS3/33
13.35.5 Joint Materials
(a) General
i) All sealants and gaskets to be fit for purpose and detail proposed and to be
applied/fixed in accordance to manufacturer’s instructions and good
international building practice.
ii) All sealants used to be chemically compatible however contact between

different sealants to be avoided.
iii) Joint to be designed and positioned to allow correct sealant application.
iv) Sealant/Gasket manufacturers written directions should be followed

regarding mixing, surface preparation, priming, application life, and
application procedure.
v) Edges of the precast concrete units and the adjacent materials must be
sound, smooth, clean and dry. Edges must be free of frost, dust, loose
mortar or any other contaminants that may affect adhesion.
(b) Sealant
i) Joint to consist of sealant, band breaker (if required) and pre-formed rod or
tubular backing.
ii) Joints to be completely filed and neatly tooled slightly concave, to eliminate
air pockets or voids.
iii) Surface of sealant should be full, smooth bead, free of ridges, wrinkles,
gags, air pockets and embedded impurities.
iv) Back up material must not stain sealant and be of suitable size and shape
for compression to provide watertight joints.
v) Primers may be used if recommended by sealant manufacturer, but must be
non-staining.
vi) The following characteristics must be considered when selecting sealants

for suitable physical (durability) and mechanical (movement capability)
properties:
JKT05 SS3/34
1. Adhesion to different surfaces – concrete, glass, aluminium, etc.
2. Surface preparation necessary to ensure satisfactory performance –

priming, cleaning, drying, etc.
3. Serviceable temperature range.
4. Drying characteristics – dirt pickup, susceptibility to damage due to

movement of joint while sealant is curing.
5. Puncture, tear and abrasion resistance.
6. Colour desired and colour retention.
7. Effect of weathering – water and sunlight – on properties such as

adhesion, cohesion, elasticity, etc.
8. Minimum staining of surfaces caused by sealant or primer.
9. Ease of application.
10. Environment in which the sealant is applied.
11. Compatibility with other sealants to be used on the job.
vii) Specification of proposed sealant to be submitted to Architect for approval,

stating performance characteristics.
(c) Gaskets/Compression sealants
i) Air seals to be closed-cell neoprene sponge conforming to ASTM C509 or

equivalent.
ii) Neoprene compression seal must remain compressed approximately 15%

of uncompressed seal width at the maximum joint opening.
iii) Foam plastics are not to be used.
iv) Allowable movement to be approximately 40% of uncompressed seal width.
JKT05 SS3/35
13.36 MATERIALS TESTING AND RECORDS
Details and records of the following tests should be submitted.
13.36.1 Cement
Were in receipt of manufacturer’s test certificates for cement on a weekly basis and
these certificates show details as follows:
(a) initial set

(b) final set
(c) fineness
(d) alkali content
(e) specific surface fineness
In addition, in-house visual inspections of cement for colour by comparing “parts of

cement” with a standard colour sample must be carried out.
13.36.2 Aggregates
All aggregates delivered load by load to be subject to sieve analysis and silt content
tests and visually inspected against control samples for both colour and grading. In
addition physical and chemical properties as provided by the various specialist
aggregate suppliers are as stable.
13.36.3 Batched Concrete – Minimum sampling should be follows:
WEEKLY QUANTITY PRODUCED
No. OF SETS
(3 CUBES) taken weekly
Up to 2 cubic metres 1
2 –5 cubic metres 2
Exceeding 20 cubic metres 5
JKT05 SS3/36
From each of the above sets of cubes one will be tested at 7 day, and two at 28
days.
Where the sample elected is a new mix design the suitability of the mix must be
assessed in accordance with B.S. 5328 and B.S. 8110 and ISAT performance
assessed by (in house) trial mixes. Details to be made available on request.
13.36.4 Cube Testing
Fabricator to maintain own in-house or engage an approved cube testing facility.

The cube testing will be carried out by this lab and the appropriate cube test
certificates and analysis information will be submitted to Architect and Engineer.
Tests may be carried out independently and therefore the Fabricator must include
for making an additional set of three cubes, once per month, as and when directed
by the Architect for testing by an independent testing house to be agreed.
13.36.5 Reinforcement
Following placing of reinforcement in moulds, the cages are submitted to a location

and cover check.
Up to 20% of all units cast must have reinforcement cover checked by means of a
cover meter survey, details of which are to be recorded.
13.36.6 Metal fixing and Lifting Devices
Loose metal fixings as supplied by specialist manufacturers and are to be supplied

in stainless steel in accordance to relevant British Standards applicable and ‘Metal
Worker Specifications’.
Screw in lifting devices and lifting sockets as supplied by specialist manufacturers to

be supported by test certificates.
13.36.8 Manufactured Units
All units manufactured to be identified by the unit number related to Fabricators key
elevation drawings and must be marked with the date of casting and issued to
Architect.
JKT05 SS3/37
13.37 SUBMITTALS AND MOCK UPS
13.37.1 Programme
Prior to commencement of Main Contract work Contractor must submit a
programme of work which must include but not limited to the following:-
i) Shop drawing preparation, submission and required approval dates.
ii) Sample submission and required approval dates.
iii) Mock up preparation, submission, period for revision and required approval
date.
iv) Manufacturing, testing, supply, installation aid defect rectification schedule.
13.37.2 Samples
i) Prior to commencement of manufacture samples representative of finished

exposed face sharing typical range of colours and texture must be submitted to
Architect for approval.
ii) A sample of every proposed finish, joint details and sealant/gasket must be
submitted in a size not less than 300 x 300mm.
Contractor to expedite submittal of full shop drawings to the Architect for approval.
The content of these drawings should include but not limited to the following:-
a) Unit shapes (elevations and sections) and dimensions.
b) Handling procedure, plans and elevations showing panel location, and sequence
of erection.
c) Finishes
d) Reinforcement, joint and connection details
e) Lifting and erection inserts
f) Location, dimensional tolerances, and details of anchorage devices that are

embedded in or attached to structure or other construction.
g) Other items cast into panels.
h) Relationship to adjacent materials and trades.
i) Show location of unit by same identification work placed on panel.
JKT05 SS3/38
13.37.4 Testing
Refer to Material Testing and Records
13.37.5 Design Calculations
i) Contractor must engage a professional engineer with a minimum of 5 years’

experience in the design of precast concrete panel product (registered in the
country where the building is to be constructed) to endorse all design
calculations.
ii) All statutory submissions required for the completion and installation of the
system to be made by the Contractor/Contractors appointed Consultants.
iii) Calculations must include although limited to all design calculations for precast
concrete products not defined or completed on the drawings and for steel
reinforcement required for handling and erection loads.
13.37.6 Design Modifications
i) All changes must be submitted to Architect for approval prior to incorporation

within the works.
vi) All design modifications necessary to meet performance requirements and held
coordination to be submitted.
iii) Variations in details or materials shall not adversely affect the appearance,
durability or strength of units.
iv) General design concept must be maintained without altering size of members,
profiles and alignment.
13.38 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
13.38.1 Contractor should coordinate arrival of precast concrete units and provide for
possible storage and for erection in a safe manner within the agreed schedule and
with due consideration for other trades. Handling procedures, including type and
location of fastenings. The Contractor shall:-
a) Deliver all architectural precast concrete units to project site in such quantities
and at such times to assure continuity of erection.
b) Handling and transport units in a position consistent with their shape and design
in order to avoid stresses which would cause cracking or damage.
c) Lift or support units only at the point shown on the shop drawings.
JKT05 SS3/39
d) Place non-staining resilient spacers of event thickness between each unit.
e) Support units during shipment on non-staining shock-absorbing material.
f) Not place units directly on ground.
g) Store and protect units to prevent contact with soil, staining, and physical
damage.
h) Store units, unless otherwise specified, with non-staining, resilient supports

located in same positions as when transported.
i) Store units on firm, level, and smooth surfaces to prevent cracking, distortion,
warping or other physical damage.
j) Place stored units so that identification marks are discernible, and so that
product can be inspected.
13.38.2 Damage
Any damage during loading, delivery and installation to be rectified by Fabricators

specialist finisher and subject to the approval of the Architect.
13.39 ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS AND TENDER
13.39.1 The architectural drawings are diagrammatic and do not purport to identify or solve
the problems of thermal or structural movement, vapour barriers, fixings and
anchorage, flatness and stability of facing, and moisture disposal.
The drawings merely indicated the ‘profile, configurations and finishes required
together with the position relative to the structural frame and interior building
elements. The details contain therein serve merely as suggested directions for
solving some of the major design requirements. The Contractor may use these
details and develop them as he deems fit.
The Specification specifies the minimum requirements without limiting the Fabricator
as to the method of achieving such performance.
13.40 Site Conditions & Existing Structures
The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited the site before submitting his Tender
and shall be wholly responsible for acquainting himself with the nature, position,
constraints of the site and the full extent and character of the works and all other
information relevant to the execution of the works.
JKT05 SS3/40
The Contractor shall not be entitled to claim extra payment on the grounds of
insufficient or inaccurate tender information relating to propose or existing
structures.
A thorough examination of all available drawings shall be carried out by the

Contractor. The accuracy and completeness of any available drawings of existing
structure(s) is not guaranteed. The Contractor shall check all dimensions and beam
etc., positions on site himself.
13.41 Design Recommendations/Proposals
Preliminary design proposals must be submitted with the tender. Notwithstanding the
acceptance of the Contractor’s design recommendation/ proposals by the Architect,
Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of the works including design
and shall make good any damage or defects arising from inadequate design.
13.42 Shop Drawings
The Contractor shall submit for the consideration of the Architect preliminary design
drawings showing typical details fully dimensioned, showing finish, thickness,
profiles, jointing, welds, intersections and assembly; details of construction,
weatherproofing hardware and hardware schedules; reinforcement, anchorage and
structural supports; and such drawings and details as required to fully illustrate all
details of the work. The scale and detail of the drawings are subject to Architect’s
approval.
The Contractor shall outline details of his intended temporary works to the Architect
and incorporate his comments into the design. He shall then submit for the
Architect’s approval before the commencement of any on site construction, shop
drawings and calculations showing all details, manner and magnitude of the loading
on the structure. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the structural
elements to which the elements are to be fixed is adequate to support the load.
Within four weeks of the acceptance of the tender, modify the preliminary drawings
to full working shop drawings complying with the Architect’s instructions and
requirements. Supply to the Architect for distribution to those connected with this
project, four copies each of the final approved drawings.
13.43 Measurements
All true measurements of the building are to be in the metric system. The Contractor
shall be responsible for verifying all the dimensions and actual conditions on site.
These dimensions should be incorporated in the shop drawings prior to final
approval.
13.44 Preliminary Programme

The Tenderer shall also submit a preliminary programme of the works showing the
various stages of design sampling, testing, fabrication, delivery and installation of
the works.
JKT05 SS3/41
13.45 TENDER REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall submit with his Tender details of builder’s work and special
attendance required other than those already described in this Specification. Any
other items of work or facilities not so stated shall be deemed to be provided by the
Contractor when required.
13.45.1 (a) Submittals
Within one month of award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit updated
information as follows:-
i. Organization Chart.
ii. Detailed programme of the Works.
iii. Shop Drawings:-
Complete scaled construction detail drawings drawn to full scale. The
drawings shall fulfil all requirements made by the Architect during the
technical negotiation with the Contractor.
iv. Sealant & Gaskets

Samples and performance data of sealant and gasket materials.
v. Structural calculations as required verified and endorsed by a Professional

Engineer.
vi. Performance Testing Particulars:-
The testing programme with detailed description of the testing procedure,
testing facilities to be used and the testing mock-up drawings, following the
testing requirements as specified in Part IV.
(b) Upon Architect’s approval of the shop drawings, four copies and one
reproducible print for each of the final approved drawings, plus four sets of the
above reduce to one-quarter of the original size shall be submitted for the
Architect’s and Employer’s use.
(c) After the shop drawings and the structural calculation, etc. are approved, the
Contractor shall submit the following for the Architect’s approval before
fabrication of the bulk.
i. Plan of Inspection of Component –
Material specification, supply source, and procedure for inspection of the
quality of the components of the systems during the manufacturing and
fabricating process.
(d) Should the Contractor consider it necessary to fabricate in bulk before

approval in order to meet completion date, it is entirely at his own risk and no
compensation in time and cost will be granted if the material and/or
workmanship is eventually not acceptable to the Architect.
(e) Before the components are installed, the Contractor shall submit the following
for the Architect’s approval.
JKT05 SS3/42
i. Performance Test Report –

Four copies of the performance Report as described in this Specification
shall be submitted upon approval of the testing by the Architect.
ii. Report of Inspection of Components –

Report on the conditions and procedure of the manufacturing process and
also results of the inspection the products in accordance with the approved
‘Plan of Inspection of Components’.
iii. Report on Inspection on Building Works/Site Conditions –

The Contractor shall monitor the site conditions constantly and report every
month the results of the inspection, in a deviation/defects list form to the
Architect. Format to be submitted for approval.
iv. Plan of Inspection –

Preliminary plan of the procedure for site inspection during installation stage
so as to maintain quality control on the site.
v. Plan of Protection –
Preliminary plan of the method of protecting the works with description as to
when the protection can be removed. The plan to consider effect on other
trades.
(f) Before the date of completion of the works, the contractor shall prepare and
supply to the Architect, record drawings and record photographs of the whole
of the works as installed and as requested by the Architect. These drawings
and photographs shall be specially prepared for record purpose and the copies
as finally provided to the Architect shall consist of (four) sets of reduced size
prints together with its corresponding (drawings) and (two) sets of
photographs.
(g) The Contractor shall submit a maintenance manual for all systems.
13.46 Manufacturers & Erectors

Manufacturers and erectors shall have proven achievement experience in similar
work for at least (5) years and are subject to approval by the Architect.
13.47 Guarantee
(a) Submit written guarantee agreeing to repair or replace defective materials and
workmanship during the guarantee period. The Contractor shall be responsible
for damages to building and furnishings caused by defective materials and
workmanship including water leakage during the guarantee period.
Defective materials and workmanship of the work shall include abnormal
deterioration, aging or weathering of the work, leakage of water or air
pressures and forces, failure of operating parts to function normally,
deterioration or discolouration of finishes in excess of normal weathering and
aging, glass breakage, secondary glass damage or breakage due to falling
JKT05 SS3/43
fragments, and failure of work to fulfil other specified performance

requirements. The guarantee should not include damage caused by vandalism,
or natural conditions exceeding the performance requirements. However, the
guarantee should include failures or defects for which the causes cannot be
determined. This guarantee and its enforcement shall not deprive the
Employer of other action, right or remedy available to him.
(b) The general guarantee shall cover a period of ten years from the date of issue
of the Completion Certification of the Main contract by the Architect.
(c) Repairs or replacements during the guaranteed period required by unforeseen

circumstances (which exceed performance requirements), alterations, abuse of
the work, vandalism will be completed by the Contractor at Employer’s
discretion and paid for by the Employer at prevailing rates.
(d) The guarantee shall cover structural failure and latent defects of the system in
compliance with the current and latest regulations and requirements stipulated
by the relevant local authorities.
SS014_Handrails, Guardings & Railings
JKT05 SS14/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 14 – HANDRAILS, GUARDINGS AND RAILINGS
SECTION 14
14.0 HANDRAILS, GUARDINGS, RAILING AND CATWALK SYSTEMS
14.1 GENERALLY
The Works includes the design, engineering and fabrication of the following:
a. Painted M.S., Stainless-steel & Stainless Steel/ Aluminium, guardings,

handrails and railing systems incl. Catwalk systems.
b. Combination supports of steel welded to stainless steel.
Related Specifications – this specification is to be read in conjunction with the

specification for Steel and Metal Works
14.2.1 General
Design and engineering the handrail, railing and Catwalk systems to withstand
structural loads indicated and coordinate as required, determine allowable design
working stresses of railing materials based on the following:
a Stainless Steel: ASCE "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Stainless

Steel Structural Members."
b Cold-Formed Structural Steel: AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold-

Formed Steel Structural, Members."
14.2.2 Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems
Engineer, fabricate, and install handrails and railing systems to comply with applicable
code requirements.
14.2.3 Thermal Movements
Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in
ambient temperature in engineering, fabricating, and installing handrails and railing
systems to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components and
connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on actual
surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and night time sky heat
loss.
a Temperature Change (Range): 67 deg, ambient; 100 deg, material surfaces.
JKT05 SS14/2
b Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by

insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible
materials.
14.3 SUBMITTALS
14.3.1 General
Submit each item in accordance to the Conditions of the Contract and Specification.
Product data for manufacturer's product lines of handrails and railing systems
assembled from standard components. Submit product data for grout, anchoring
cement, and paint products.
Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of handrails and railings, including
plans, elevations sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of
Work.
For installed handrails and railing systems indicated to comply with certain design
loading include structural analysis data sealed and signed by the qualified professional
engineer who was responsible for their preparation.
Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on

components indicated below of same thickness and metal indicated for final unit of
Work. Where finishes involve normal colour and texture variations, include sample
sets showing the full range of variations expected.
a. 50-mm-long sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including

handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters.
b. Fittings and brackets.
c. Welded connections.
d. Assembled sample of railing system made from full-size components, including

top rail, post, handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing members at
intersections. Sample need not be full height.
14.4.1 Engineer Qualifications
The contractor is to engage a professional engineer (P.E.) registered with the

Engineering Professional Board provide engineering services of the kind indicated that
have resulted in the installation of handrails and railing systems similar to this Project
in material, design, and extent and that have a record of successful in-service
performance.
JKT05 SS14/3
14.4.2 Mock-ups
Prior to installing railings, construct mock-ups for each form of railing system and
finish required to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mock-ups to
comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work.
a. Place mock-ups on site in the location indicated. Provide mock-ups consisting

of 2 posts, top rail, in-fill area, and anchorage system components that are full
height and not less than 1000mm in length.
b. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mock-ups
will be constructed.
c. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
d. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mock-ups before start of final unit of Work.

Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition
as a standard for judging the completed Work. Accepted mock-ups in an
undisturbed condition at the time of Completion may become part of the
completed Work.
14.5 STORAGE
Store handrails and railing systems inside a well-ventilated area, away from uncured
concrete and masonry and protected from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion,
extreme temperatures, and humidity.
14.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
14.6.1 Field Measurements
Where handrails and railings are indicated to fit to other construction, check actual
dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication;
show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Co-ordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
14.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
Sequence and co-ordinate installation of wall handrails as follows:
a. Mount handrails only on completed walls. Do not support handrails temporarily

by any means not satisfying structural performance requirements.
b. Mount handrails on plaster or gypsum board assemblies only where reinforced

to receive anchors and where the locations of concealed reinforcements have
been clearly marked for the benefit of the installer.
JKT05 SS14/4
14.8 METALS
14.8.1 General
Provide metal free from surface blemishes where exposed to view in the finished unit.
Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolourations, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.
14.8.2 Stainless Steel
Grade and type designated below for each form required:
a. Tubing: ASTM, Grade MT 316.
b. Pipe: ASTM, Grade TP 316.
c. Castings: ASTM, Grade CF 8 or CF 20.
d. Plate: ASTM, Type 316.
14.8.3 Steel and Iron
Provide steel and iron in the form indicated complying with the following requirements:
a. Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and other requirements as

follows:
i Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade A, unless otherwise

indicated or required by structural loads.
ii For exterior installations and where indicated, provide tubing with hot-
dip galvanised coating per ASTM A 53.
b. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
c. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30.
Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and
finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
14.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
14.9.1 Filler Metal and Electrodes
Comply with AWS D I. I, "Structural Welding Code - Steel".
Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as recommended by producer of
metal to be welded or brazed and as required for colour match, strength, corrosion
resistance, and compatibility in fabricated items.
JKT05 SS14/5
14.10 FASTENERS
14.10.1 Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction
Select fasteners of the type, grade, and class required to produce connections that
are suitable for anchoring railing to other types of construction indicated and capable
of withstanding design loading.
a. For stainless-steel railings, provide fasteners fabricated from Type 316 stainless
steel.
b. For steel fittings, use plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn
25 for electro-deposited zinc coating.
14.10.2 Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components
Use fasteners of same basic metal as the fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated.
Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined.
Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting handrail and railing components and
for attaching them to other work, except where otherwise indicated.
14.10.3 Cast-in-Place and Post-installed Anchors
Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion resistant materials with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when
installed in unit masonry and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in
concrete, as determined by testing per relevant ASTM conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
a. Cast-in-place anchors.
b. Expansion anchors.
14.11 PAINT
14.11.1 Shop Primers
a. Exterior Assemblies
Comply with requirements of "Acrylic Polyester Polyurethane Finish System".
b. Interior Assemblies
Comply with requirements of "High Performance Epoxy Finish System".
JKT05 SS14/6
14.11.2 Galvanising Repair Paint
High-zinc-dust-content paint for re-galvanising welds in galvanised steel, with dry film
containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-
21035 or SSPC-Paint 20.
14.12 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
14.12.1 Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout
Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous grout

complying with relevant ASTM. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
14.13 FABRICATION
14.13.1 General
Fabricate handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements indicated for
design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of
hollow members, post spacing and anchorage, but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
Assemble railing systems in shop to the greatest extent possible to minimise field
splicing and assembly Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations- Clearly mark units for re-assembly and co-ordinated installation Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
Form changes in direction of railing members as detailed.
Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform
curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain profile of member
throughout entire bend without buckling twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming
exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components.
14.13.2 Welded Connections
Fabricate railing systems and handrails for connecting members by welding. For
connections made during fabrication, weld corners and seams continuously to comply
with the following:
a. Use materials and methods that minimise distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
b. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
c. Remove welding flux immediately.
JKT05 SS14/7
d. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and

blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface
matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
14.13.3 Non welded Connections
Fabricate railing systems and handrails by connecting members with railing

manufacturer's standard concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings, unless
otherwise indicated. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid,
hairline joints.
Fabricate splice joints for field connection using epoxy structural adhesive where this
represents manufacturer's standard splicing method.
14.13.4 Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors
Provide manufacturer's standard wall brackets, flanges miscellaneous fittings, and

anchors to connect handrail and railing members to other construction.
Provide inserts and other anchorage devices to connect handrails and railing systems
to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding
loads imposed by handrails and railing systems. Co-ordinate anchorage devices with
supporting structure.
For railing posts set in concrete, provide pre-set sleeves of steel not less than 150mm
long with inside dimensions not less than 12.7mm greater than outside dimensions of
post, and steel plate forming bottom closure.
Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed cut
edges.
Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1-mm, unless otherwise indicated.

Form bent-meta corners to the smallest radius possible without causing grain
separation or otherwise impairing work.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap components, as indicated, to receive finish hardware,
screws, and similar items.
Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of
railing members that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from condensation or other
sources.
Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a watertight manner.
Close exposed ends of handrail and railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated.

Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of the railing and wall is 6-mm or
less.
JKT05 SS14/8
14.13.5 Fillers
Provide steel sheet or plate fillers of thickness and size indicated or required to
support structural loads of handrails where needed to transfer wall bracket loads
through Wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thickness’
Size fillers to produce adequate bearing to prevent bracket rotation and over-stressing
of substrate.
14.14 FINISHES, GENERAL
Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to

applying and designating finishes.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strip-

able, temporary protective covering prior to shipment.
14.14.1 Appearance of Finished Work
Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are

within one half of the range of approved samples Noticeable variations in the same
piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples and they are assembled
or installed to minimise contrast.
14.15 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES
Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish. Mirror-like Reflective,
Non-directional Polish: Match AISI No. 8 finish.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded

foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
14.16 IRON AND STEEL FINISHES
14.16.1 Galvanising
Hot-dip galvanise items indicated to be galvanised to comply with applicable standard

listed below:
a. ASTM A 153 for galvanising iron and steel hardware.
b. ASTM A 123 for galvanising iron and steel products made from rolled, pressed,
and forged steel shapes, castings, plates, bars, and strips.
Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished work, unless indicated
to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
JKT05 SS14/9
For galvanised handrails and railing systems, provide galvanised fittings, brackets,
fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare un-coated ferrous metal surfaces to

comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation
specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed railings:
c. Exteriors (SSPC Zone IB): SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
d. Interiors (SSPC Zone IA): SSPC-SP 7 "Brush-Off Blast Cleaning."
e. Galvanised Components: After galvanising, thoroughly clean railings of grease,

dirt, oil, flux, an other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.
14.17 EXECUTION AND PREPARATION
Co-ordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for

installing anchorages, such as sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
miscellaneous items having integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete as
masonry construction. Co-ordinate delivery of such items to Project site.
14.18 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installing handrails and railings. Set handrails and railings accurately in location,
alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free from
rack.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrails and railing components that have
been coated or finished after fabrication and are intended for field connection by
mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.
Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 2-mm in 1-m.
Align rails so that variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with
rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 2-mm in 1-m.
14.18.1 Field Welding
Comply with the following requirements:
a. Use materials and methods that minimise distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
b. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
JKT05 SS14/10
c. Remove welding flux immediately.
d. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and

blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface
matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
14.18.2 Corrosion Protection
Coat concealed surfaces of the following that will be in contact with grout, concrete
masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
14.18.3 Alignment
Adjust handrails and railing systems prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment
at abutting joints. Space posts at interval indicated but not less than that required by
structural loads.
14.18.4 Fastening to In-Place Construction
Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing handrails and
railings systems and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
14.19 RAILING CONNECTIONS
Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing
components by welding. Cope or butt components to provide 100 percent contact, or
use fittings designed for this purpose.
14.20 ANCHORING POSTS
Anchor posts in concrete with pipe sleeves pre-set and anchored into concrete. After
posts have been inserted into sleeves, solidly fill annular space between post and
sleeve with the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with
anchoring material manufacturer's directions.
a. Non-shrink, non-metallic grout
Leave anchorage joint exposed, wipe off surplus anchoring material, and leave 3-mm
build-up, sloped away from post.
Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type or floor type as required
by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:
For stainless-steel railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.
JKT05 SS14/11
14.21 ANCHORING RAIL ENDS
Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to rail ends
and anchored into wall construction with post-installed anchors and bolts.
Anchor rail ends to metal surfaces with oval or round flanges. Weld flanges to rail
ends.
14.22 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS
Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings. Provide bracket with 38-
mm clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.
Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support

structural loads.
Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building construction as follows: Use
type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt.
a. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shield and
either concealed hanger bolt or exposed lag bolt, as applicable.
b. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts with square heads.
14.23 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Testing Agency: Contractor shall employ and pay a qualified independent testing
agency to perform field quality control testing.
Extent and Testing Methodology: The testing agency will randomly select completed
railing assemblies for testing that are representative of the different railing designs and
conditions in the completed Work. Railings will be tested for compliance according to
relevant ASTM.
Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Architect.
Remove and replace railings where test results indicate that they do not comply with
specified requirements, unless they can be repaired in a manner satisfactory to the
Architect, so that they will comply with specified requirements.
Additional Testing: Where railings are removed and replaced or is repaired, additional
testing will be performed to determine compliance with specified requirements.
JKT05 SS14/12
14.24 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
Clean the stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, followed
by rinsing with clean water.
Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material.
For galvanised surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
and apply galvanising repair paint to comply with relevant ASTM.
14.25 PROTECTION
Protect finishes of railing systems and handrails from damage during construction
period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer Remove
protective coverings at the time of Completion.
Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so that no

evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the
field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new
units.
SS015_Cement Paving
JKT05 SS15/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 15 - CEMENT PAVING
SECTION 15
15.0 CEMENT PAVING
15.1 GENERALLY

manufacturer's name or catalogue reference, the Contractor may propose an
equivalent alternative subject to the written approval of the Architect.
15.2 MAKING GOOD
All making good of cement paving shall be cut out to a rectangular shape, the
edges undercut to form dovetailed key and finished flush with face of
surrounding paving. Cut out and make good all cracks, blisters and other
defects and leave the whole of the work perfect on completion.
15.3 PARTIALLY OR WHOLLY SET MORTAR
No partially or wholly set mortar will be allowed to be used or remixed.
15.4 MIXING OF MORTARS
All mortars for paving shall be mechanically or hand mixed as directed by the
Architect and the Contractor shall make allowance for the use of additional
cement, necessitated by the method of mixing instructed. Only whole bags of
cement shall be used in any one batch of mix.
The ingredients for all paving mixes shall be accurately gauged in approved
boxes and mixed on proper watertight boarded platforms. Mixes containing
cement shall be used up within two hours of the first contact of the cement with
water.
15.5 CEMENT SKIRTINGS
The skirtings and risers shall be the heights and thickness shown in the
drawings or as directed. Junction with paving at bottom shall be covered and
paving at top shall have a rounded edge. All vertical angles shall be covered
and vertical material angles shall be rounded.
JKT05 SS15/2
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 15 - CEMENT PAVING
15.6 INDEMNITY FOR HARDENER AND DUSTPROOFING TREATMENT
Prior to commencement of floor hardener and dustproofing works, the

Contractor shall lodge with the Architect a 5-year indemnity against failure of the
hardener and dustproofing treatment works. Under this indemnity, the
Contractor will be required to make good any defects and failure in the materials
or installation and will be responsible for any consequential loss attributable to
any failure in the hardener and dustproofing treatment works during the
warranty period.
If in the opinion of the Contractor, the Specifications are insufficient for him to
give the specified indemnity then the Contractor shall allow in his tender for
upgrading the Specifications as necessary to enable him to do so indemnify.
SS016_Tiles & Tiling Adhesives
JKT05 SS16/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 16 - TILING AND TILING ADHESIVES
SECTION 16
16.0 TILING AND TILING ADHESIVES
16.1 GENERALLY

equivalent alternative subject to Architect’s written approval. The supply and delivery of
all wall and floor tiles is included in this Contract.
At least 90% of all flooring, by cost or surface area, meets the VOC emissions
evaluation OR inherently non emitting sources per LEED Gold Standards
At least 75% of all adhesives and sealants, by volume or surface area, meet the VOC
emissions evaluation AND 100% meet the VOC content evaluation as per LEED Gold
Standards
16.1.1 Suitability of backgrounds/Bases
Before starting work ensure that backgrounds/bases:-
Are sufficiently flat to permit specified flatness of finished surfaces, bearing in mind
the permissible minimum and maximum thickness of the bedding material.
Have been allowed to dry out by exposure to the air for not less than the following:
Concrete slabs : 6 weeks
Concrete walls : 4 weeks
Brick/Block walls : 4 weeks
Cement and sand screeds : 4 weeks
Rendering : 2 weeks
Gypsum plaster : 4 weeks
16.1.2 Samples
Before placing orders submit full sets of samples of all tiles or panels specified to the
Architect for selection of patterns, and all deliveries to the Site shall be equal to these.
JKT05 SS16/2
On colours and patterns being selected, the Contractor shall place his orders for the
total requirements to ensure conformity in the colour and texture of the tiles or panels.
In the event of under-ordering, the Contractor will be responsible for ensuring that the
further orders conform entirely to the colouring and specification of the tiles or panels
previously supplied.
16.1.3 Control Panels
Samples of all floor finishes shall be laid in representative areas not less than 2000 x
2000mm, and in the case of stonework in such areas as the Architect may direct.
Such sample areas shall be subjected to the approval of the Architect, and following
any such approval, all finishes subsequently laid shall be equal to the approved areas.
A mock-up floor will be used for the majority of sample finishes, but other sample
areas of non-typical finishes will be laid in locations as directed by the Architect.
Particular care to be taken in sorting and preparing tiles, with all special pieces for
matching.
16.1.4 Tile Laying
All tiling is to be carried out by trades people experienced in this specialist work. All tiling
is to be laid strictly in accordance with approved shop drawings.
All Tile beddings, adhesives and grouts to Architect’s approval and strictly in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.
Tiles to wet areas to be laid neatly to falls to ensure no standing water. Falls should be
dished from perimeter of room to maintain a horizontal skirting.
All items suffering damage in transit prior to acceptance shall be rejected, and
replaced at the Contractor’s cost, and the Contractor to hold sufficient stocks of the
specified materials for such replacements.
16.1.5 Performance Specification of Floor Tiles
After confirmation of tiles by the Architect the contractor is to have the tiles tested by
SESCO (or equivalent local Standards) to ensure compliance with specification
JKT05 SS16/3
a Non-slip Homogeneous tiles (Full Body)
Size : As specified in the drawings/ schedules
Properties :
Minimum thickness : 10 mm
Length/width tolerance :  0.6 % max.
Thickness tolerance :  5% max.
Warpage of edges :  0.6 % max.
Flatness :  0.5 % max.
Water Absorption :  0.5%
Modulus of rupture :  38 N/mm2
Scratch Hardness (MOHS scale) :6
Deep scratch resistance :  205 mm3
Thermal expansion :  9 x 10
Resistance to chemical :
No sample must show visible signs of chemical attack.
16.1.6 Performance Specification of Wall Tiles
a Homogeneous Tiles Polished (Full Body)
Size : As specified in drawings/ schedules
Properties :
JKT05 SS16/4
Scratch Hardness (MOHS scale) :6
Resistance to chemical attack :
b Glazed Ceramic tiles
Size : As specified in drawings/ schedules
Properties:
Scratch Hardness (MOHS scale):  4
Resistance to chemical attack :
c Locations : As specified in the drawings/ schedules.
16.2 PREPARATION
a New In-Situ Concrete
Scrub with water containing detergent to ensure complete removal of mould, oil,
surface retarders and other materials incompatible with the bedding. Rinse with
clean water and allow to dry unless specified otherwise.
JKT05 SS16/5
b New Plaster
Ensure plaster is dry, solidly bedded, free from dust and friable matter. Apply
plaster primer recommended by the adhesive manufacturer and allow to dry
before tiling.
c Keying
Formwork to vertical surfaces of concrete to be covered with tiling or other

applied finish shall be stripped within seventy-two (72) hours of casting,
proprietary bonding agent such as Laticrete applied immediately as
manufacturers specification. Should the Contractor fail to strip the formworks
within the period, he shall carry out hacking of the surface of concrete to the
satisfaction of the Architect, before application.
d Hacking for Key
Roughen specified backgrounds thoroughly and evenly by removing the entire

surface to a depth of 3mm by pneumatic scabbing, bush hammering or abrasive
blasting. Remove all dust and debris and wash clean before commencing tiling.
e Raking Out for Key
Rake out soft joints in existing brickwork to a depth of not less than 13mm.
Brush out joints to remove dust.
16.3 FIXING GENERALLY
Check that there are no unintended colour/shade variations within the tiles for use in
each area/room. Thoroughly mix variegated tiles.
All surfaces on which tiling is to be laid shall be suitable for that purpose, and the
Contractor shall report any factors that may affect the execution of satisfactory tiling to
the Architect. The Architect will issue necessary instructions with regard to any action
required to be taken in this respect.
Tiles are to be laid in accordance with good practice, and the written instructions of the
manufacturer.
a. Check that adhesive is compatible with background/base.
b. Cut tile neatly and accurately.
c. Fix tiles so that there is adhesion over the whole of the background/base and tile
backs.
d. Before bedding material sets, make adjustments necessary to give true, regular
appearance to tiles and joints when viewed under final lighting conditions.
JKT05 SS16/6
e. Clean surplus bedding material from joints and face of tiles without disturbing
tiles.
16.4 SETTING OUT
All tiles in this project are to be set-out in accordance with approved shop drawings by
the contractor. Shop drawings need to be co-ordinated with M&E at an early stage to
ensure that all fittings align with the tile grids. Falls in floor are to be formed by dishing
away from wall to maintain horizontal floor/wall interface.
Joints to be true to line, continuous and without steps. Joints on walls to be truly
horizontal, vertical and in alignment round corners. Joints in floors to be parallel to the
main axis of the space or specified features.
Cut tiles/slabs to be kept to the minimum, as large as possible and in unobtrusive

locations. Joints in walls and floors to be in alignment.
Where positions of movement joints are not specified they are to be agreed with the
Architect.
16.5 FLATNESS OF WALL TILING
Sudden irregularities not permitted. When measured with a slip gauge to relevant BS
or equivalent, the variation in gap under a 2m straight edge (with feet) placed
anywhere on the surface to be not more than 2mm.
16.6 FLATNESS OF FLOOR TILING
Sudden irregularities not permitted. When measured with a slip gauge to relevant BS
or equivalent, the variation in gap under a straight edge (with feet) placed anywhere
on the surface to be not more than:
3m straight edge : 3mm
1m straight edge : 2mm
16.7 MORTAR FOR BEDDING
Unless specified otherwise:
a. Cement :Ordinary Portland to relevant BS
JKT05 SS16/7
Sand for walls :To relevant BS
Sand for floors :To relevant BS, grading limit M but where fine sand is
specified grading limit F.
b. Batch by volume. Specified proportions are for dry sand, allow for bulking if
damp
c. Mix materials thoroughly to a uniform consistence in a suitable forced action

mechanical mixer. Do not use a free fall type (tilting drum) mixer. Use the
minimum amount of water necessary to give required workability.
d. Use mortar within two hours of mixing at normal temperatures. Do not use after
the initial set has taken place and do not re-tempered.
16.8 POROUS TILES
If to be bedded in cement and sand screed, soak in clean water for at least 30
minutes, and fix as soon as surface water has drained.
16.9 TILE SKIRTINGS
Bed solid to wall with cement based adhesive after laying floor tiles. Ensure joints in
skirtings match and align with joints in floor tiling.
16.10 WALL TILING ADHESIVE
Thin Bed Adhesive - Solid (Walls)
Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry background in areas of approximately 1 sqm.

and comb the surface with the recommended solid bed trowel. Apply thin even coat of
adhesive to backs of dry tiles. Press tiles onto bedding with twisting/sliding action to
give finished bed thickness of not more than 3mm. Also to follow the adhesive
manufacturer's instructions regarding to usage of adhesive.
16.11 FLOOR TILING ADHESIVE
Thin Bed Adhesive - Solids (Floors)
Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry base and comb the surface with the
recommended solid bed trowel. Apply adhesive to backs of tiles as necessary to fill
JKT05 SS16/8
any depressions or keys. Press tiles firmly into position to give finished bed thickness
within the range recommended by the tile manufacturer.
Apply adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
16.12 CHECKING TILE ADHESION
As work proceeds and before the bedding has set, carefully remove random tiles as
directed and in the presence of the Architect to verify that there is adhesion over the
whole area. Remove the initial adhesive, butter the removed tiles with fresh adhesive
and re-fix.
16.13 GROUTING/COMPLETION
a. Grouting Mix
Use proprietary waterproof grouting mix as recommended for the purpose by

the tiling manufacturer for each tile type. Colour to Architect’s selection. Mix
thoroughly and use strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
b. Grouting
Allow bedding material to harden sufficiently before grouting.
Ensure that joints are 6mm deep (or the depth of the tile if less), and are free
from dust and debris.
Fill joints completely, tool to an approved profile, clean off surface and leave
free from blemishes.
Polish wall tiling with a dry cloth when joints are hard.
c. Tiling Joint
All tiling joints of maximum 3mm width to be maintained throughout all tiling
areas unless it is contrary to the tile manufacturer's recommendation. In which
case, the Architect's approval is to be obtained prior to execution of any work.
d. Movement Joints
Movement joints shall be formed at not more than 4.5 metre centres in both
directions, unless otherwise shown or described, and shall be taken through
the full depth of the cement screed to substrate. Ensure that joints coincide
with any movement joints left for the purpose in the substrate. Joints shall be
JKT05 SS16/9
filled with a polyethylene backer rod and finished with a modified polyurethane
sealant in selected colours, all to match floor finish.
e. Movement Joint Metal Edgings
Stainless steel (316), angle, size: 25mm x 15mm
Fix to base by screwing to plugs at 450mm centres to exact finished level of

floor.
f. Sealant Movement Joints
Sealant : Two part polysulphide to relevant BS
Manufacturer and Colour : To Architect's approval
Joints must extend through tiles and bedding to substrate. Ensure that joints
coincide with any movement joints left for the purpose in the substrate.
Prepare joints and apply sealant according to the written recommendations

from the applicable sealant manufacturer for each specific application.
All sealants used shall not through position/location or innate material attracts
staining or cause stains to adjacent materials.
g. Proprietary Section Movement Joints
Manufacturer and reference: To Architect's approval
Bed in 1:3 cement and sand screed centred over joint and to finished floor
level. Fix to base in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction.
16.14 PROTECTION
The floor finishes are to be carefully and adequately protected with rigid board and
polythene and kept clean all completed areas until completion of the works. The
protection provided shall be suitable for each type of finish and shall be subject to the
approval of the Architect.
Clean off any droppings immediately. Tiles/slabs to all areas to be kept dry and not
brought into service for at least three weeks after grouting/jointing.
16.15 TRAFFICKING
Keep floors clear of traffic for at least four days and permit only light traffic for the next
10 days.
JKT05 SS16/10
16.16 INDEMNITY FOR TILE ADHESIVE WORKS
Prior to commencement of tiling works, the Contractor shall, jointly with the supplier of
the polyester liquid latex admixture and colour grout, lodge with the Architect a 5-year
indemnity against defects in the tile adhesive works.
The defects shall include but not limited to tiles falling off, cracking of colour grout,
efflorescence, staining of tiles and discolouration of colour grout.
Under this indemnity, the Contractor will be required to make good any defects and
failure in the materials or installation and will be responsible for any consequential loss
attributable to any failure in the tile adhesive works during the warranty period.
If in the opinion of the Contractor, the Specifications are insufficient for him to give the
specified indemnity then the Contractor shall allow in his tender for upgrading the
Specifications as necessary to enable him to so indemnify.
16.17 SUPPLY OF WALL AND FLOOR TILES FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES
The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his Tender for the supply of wall
and floor tiles to be used by the Employer for future maintenance purposes, and the
quantities to be allowed shall be pegged at 3% of each type of wall and floor tiles used
in the Contract.
These tiles for maintenance purposes shall be carefully stored and protected, and
handed over to the Employer's Property Management Department upon completion of
the Contract or when instructed by the Architect. If these tiles are found to be of the
type and/or quality which are inconsistent or do not match those used in the Contract,
the Architect reserves the right to reject them and the Contractor shall then deliver the
required tiles without undue delay.
SS017_Stoneworks
JKT05 SS17/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 17 - STONE WORK
SECTION 17
17.0 STONE WORK
17.1 GENERALLY
The Contractor shall jointly and severally with the Specialist Contractor furnish
a ten (10) years guarantee for the works.
For location of stone, see Schedule of Finishes. Stonework shall include, but is
not necessary limited to the following:-
a. Interior and exterior stone cladding and paving.
b. Stonework for interior floors.
c. Vanity counters.
d. Provide sealant system for all interior and exterior stonework joints
except for interior floor paving.
e. Provide mortar bed as necessary to bed all large solid pieces, pavers,
etc. whether sealant or mortar joints.
f. Provide shop matching of stone pieces based on colour, texture, grain,

etc. as further specified herein.
g. Provide shop drawings, design and engineering drawings and

calculations for stone support system and co-ordination with air
conditioning, electrical work and concrete construction prior to
fabrication as further specified herein. Provide all other required
submittals as specified.
h. Fabricate, cut, finish and install each type of stone in accordance with
approved shop drawings. Provide all slots in stone required for
mechanical/electrical trades, co-ordinate with same.
i. Furnish and install stone supporting system with structural framing

including angles, clip angles, anchors, dowels, plates, bolts, inserts,
and all other fastening or hanging devices or accessories necessary for
complete installation of stonework. Furnish to Architect all metal items
required to be built-in for support or attachment of stonework. Install all
stainless steel feature strips and skirtings specified under Architectural
Metals.
j. Perform all site welding related to stone support system.
k. Provide mortar joints for all interior stonework at floors. All other joints
shall be sealant types as specified herein.
COPYRIGHT BY M/S AWP PTE LTD. THIS SPECIFICATION IS THE PROPERTY OF M/S AWP PTE LTD AND CANNOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED
PARTLY OR WHOLLY WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF M/S AWP PTE LTD.
JKT05 SS17/2
l. Provide mortar bedding behind stonework for walls up to 1500mm high.
m. Provide clear non-staining sealer as specified to all faces including

underside and edges of all floor granite slabs (Check spec. of sealer
will not cause debonding.)
n. Provide one piece solid shaped stones without joint for all shaped
pieces.
o. Perform cleaning of all stone after installation and prior to acceptance.
p. Perform surface sealing of all exterior stone floor paving.
q. Provide stonework protection as further specified herein.
r. Provide all testing as specified herein.
s. Appointment of a Professional Engineer for the works. Testing of

prototype panel to requirements specified.
17.2 SUPPLY OF STONE
The stonework for granite cladding shall be as specified in the finishes

schedule or stone similar in appearance and characteristics; minimum 30mm
thick and shall be of honed, flamed and polished as specified. The Contractor
must confirm panel thickness as being adequate but may deviate from the
30mm indicative thickness. The Contractor must highlight any deviation in
thickness at tender stage.
The stone shall have a low water absorption coefficient, suitable for external
use, and shall be free from iron (which may cause staining to the stone).
Full technical data of the stone must be submitted by the contractor and shall
include the following information:
a. Country of origin
b. Location of quarry
c. Production capacity of quarry
d. Projects where stone is used
e. Water absorption coefficient
f. Mineral composition
g. Compressive Strength
h. Tensile Strength
i. Impact Strength
JKT05 SS17/3
j. Density
k. Abrasion Resistance
All stones of a particular type shall be obtained from one quarry and shall be
free from all flaws, defects, disfigurations and discoloration.
The approved source shall be maintained throughout the Period of the

Contract Works.
All mitred joints shall be formed by factory made mitres, securely bonded with
epoxy resin and reinforced where necessary with stainless steel cramps,
dowels, etc.
Each stone shall be clearly marked with an identification symbol.
Production and storage of stones shall be arranged so that delivery in accurate

sequence for site fixing is possible.
All stone shall be subject to Architect’s review. Stone rejected for non
conformance to the agreed samples or confirmed shop drawings shall be
removed from the site and replaced with material meeting the Architect’s
requirement and all of the specified requirements at no additional cost or time.
The Architect will reject any materials that, in his opinion, do not reasonably
comply with the requirements of the specification.
Notwithstanding any other requirements of the Contract documents regarding

samples, Contractor are required to submit at least four (4) sample stones,
minimum size 600 x 600mm, squared. These samples must show the total
degree of variation of colour, pattern, making grain, etc. which can be
expected from the particular source of supply.
17.3 SAMPLE PANELS
All full size sample panels will be required for those special areas of the work
defined herein.
The sample panels shall be erected with adequate foundation supports and
provision for bracing, at a site provided by the Contractor, as agreed with the
Architect in Singapore, unless otherwise agreed by Architect.
Review sample panels shall remain in place as a standard of acceptable

quality and removed when no longer required.
Sample panels for stone at walls shall provide actual stone support and
anchoring system, on block or concrete back up as shown on the drawings
JKT05 SS17/4
17.4 CO-ORDINATION
Contractor to ensure that all requirements due to this specialist work are made
known to the respective affected sub-contractors and vice-versa
17.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
17.5.1 General
As part of the Contract for furnishing and installing stonework, the Contractor
will be required to engage the services of a Professional Engineer, herein after
referred to as the "Contractor's Engineer", who will be required to provide
review and oversee all other services specified herein. The said Engineer's
credentials shall be offered to the Architect for review, prior to acceptance.
Once engaged, the Contractor will be required to pay all fees relevant to the
services of the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Employer.
17.5.2 Requirements
It is not the intention of the Contract Documents, including drawings and these
Specifications, to determine for the Contractor the means and/or methods for
the fabrication, delivery and installation of all stonework. The drawings and
specifications are provided to convey to the Contractor the desired design
intent and quality of workmanship. The means and methods to achieve same
shall be the total responsibility of the Contractor, including testing for same as
specified herein.
17.5.3 Design Standards
The typical details shown on the drawings, and the criteria set forth herein is
provided to the Contractor to assist in achieving the best workmanship in strict
adherence to architectural design, a stonework installation consistent with
superior structural design procedures, and assurance that all work is designed
and installed in accordance with the best trade practices, the "Standards"
specified herein. The Contractor in co-ordination with said Engineer shall be
responsible for the following:
a. Stonework Phasing Schedule
The Contractor shall prepare a detailed stonework phasing schedule for review
and approval prior to commencement of any stone quarry work, fabrication or
delivery. Said schedule to be reviewed by the Contractor's Engineer and the
Architect concurrently. Schedule shall be revised as required and re-submitted.
Preparation of schedule shall commence immediately upon award of Contract.
JKT05 SS17/5
b. Contract Document Review
Prior to submission of shop drawings the Contractor and the Professional

Engineer will be required to review with the Architect the drawings and
specifications. All questions relative to design intent, materials, stone
thickness, installation procedures, code requirements, submissions for review,
co-ordination and delivery will be reviewed.
17.6 DESIGN BY CONTRACTOR
Based on the conceptual drawings in the tender document, which show the
overall dimensions of the Building and the control joints, as well as the general
layout of the stones.
The Contractor will be required to prepare shop drawings, including shop

drawings of each stone type based on actual physical measurement on site,
showing all labours marked on the stone.
The following specification contains comprehensive technical requirements for

the Works, and the Contractor in submitting proposals for the works will be
deemed to have included against the entire content of this specification in the
Contract as a minimum requirement.
Any additional requirements in respect of the Contractor's design as aforesaid

that may subsequently be found or deemed necessary by the Architect, will be
held to be included in the Contract Sum.
The Contractor shall supply, with his tender, details of projects where the same
or similar designs of stonework, joints, fixings and the like have been utilised.
17.7 PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER REQUIREMENTS
Engineering design development, materials and methods of construction other

than that indicated or implied by the drawings and specifications may be
employed when such materials and methods conform to all of the following:
a. The design intent
b. The performance criteria
c. All applicable codes and standards
d. Approval by the Architect
e. Contractor's Professional Engineer
JKT05 SS17/6
i. The Contractor shall retain an experienced registered

Professional Engineer, acceptable to the Architect and the
building authorities.
ii. The Contractor's Professional Engineer shall prepare and

endorse complete engineering design and calculations and shall
check and monitor the preparation of all shop drawings for
conformance with the engineering design and Calculations and
for compliance with the Contract documents.
The engineering and detail design shall be the Contractor's responsibility to

carry out within performance criteria. Details for methods of support, anchors,
ties, etc., are suggested only to amplify the design intent. The Contractor is to
submit the following for the anchor system proposed.
a. Each anchor shall have the manufacturer's designated maximum

permissible load and airspace clearly marked to ensure correct usage.
b. Manufacturer design system must be strictly adhered to without

modification.
c. Full static calculation if required shall be provided by the manufacturer.
d. All accessories like expansion bolt and/or grout shall conform to

manufacturer's requirement.
Structural calculations shall be submitted for all components of the work

(mock-ups and project) and shall indicate ultimate factor of safety.
As evidence of conformance to these requirements, each shop drawing and

calculation sheet shall bear the seal and self-written signature of the
Contractor's Professional Engineer.
The Contractor's Professional Engineer shall attend to the site supervision

during installation of the Contract Works.
Upon completion of the Contract Works, the Contractor's Professional

Engineer shall prepare and endorse the necessary as-built drawings for
submission to the Architect.
17.8 SHOP DRAWING SUBMISSION
The Contractor shall prepare detailed, co-ordinated shop drawings for

preliminary review of any stone. Said shop drawings shall be reviewed,
approved, signed and sealed by the Contractor's Engineer prior to submission
to the Architect.
As part of shop drawings submission the Contractor's Engineer shall provide

all information relative to all types of design loads and design criteria,
connections, welding, bolting, shop cleaning, prime painting, installation
JKT05 SS17/7
tolerances, deflection criteria, etc. Shop drawings for stonework shall provide
the following information:
a. Complete, detailed and dimensioned plans; elevations and sections,

among other things, the stone material/type and finish for each piece.
b. Large scale details of all special shaped and fitted pieces including
specification and test reports on jointing compounds used in shop
executed jointing.
c. Typical joint details showing sealant, backer rod, anchors, ties, etc. and
mortar beds where required.
d. Large scale details of typical anchoring and/or supporting devices

including lintels, inserts, plates, bolts, ties, lifting holes, attached
anchors, flashings, insulation, waterproofing, damp proofing and
flashings.
e. Large scale details of anchoring and support for all special pieces.
f. List of materials including stone types, anchors, bolts, ties, inserts,

sealants, plates, primers, gaskets, shims, finishes.
g. Details and description of all miscellaneous metal items, whether loose

or attached, specified herein or shown on the drawings required to be
furnished and installed as part of stonework.
h. Provide special details for installation of any anchors in concrete work

that are to be installed after concrete has been placed and set. Said
anchors to be installed only after shop drawings for same have been
reviewed and are returned. Drawings to be marked for Architect's
review.
i. Expansion joint detail and layout indicating position of expansion joints.

Expansion joints layout to match with building module and principles of
sub-modulation and grids to be approved by the Architect.
j. Contractor to construct, on approval of shop drawings control sample

for each of the various stone work areas for formal approval from the
Architect. The approved standard set in these samples will be strictly
adhered to.
JKT05 SS17/8
17.9 CERTIFICATION
Submit certifications stating that all work has been designed, fabricated and
installed in compliance with the Local Authorities' requirements.
Factors of safety shall be taken in accordance with the requirements of

building code, and the professional judgement of Contractor's Engineer, but
not less than:
Metal parts: the requirements of relevant BS, taken without stress increase for
the loading case of self-weight plus wind
a. Connection of metal parts to reinforced concrete: a factor of safety of 4.
b. Connection of metal parts to concrete block: a factor of safety of 5.
c. Connection of metal parts of granite: a factor of safety of 5.
17.10 SITE INSPECTIONS
The services of the Contractor's Engineer shall include site inspections on a

regularly scheduled basis, and shall include the following:
a. Submit programme of planned site inspections and schedule of same

to Architect for review
b. Provide inspections prior to installation of stone support systems
c. Provide inspections during installation of stone support systems,

including inspection of welding and observation of bolting operations
d. Provide inspections during painting or touch-up painting work
e. Provide inspections during stone installation work
f. Provide inspections during sealant operations.
17.11 TOLERANCES AND DIMENSIONAL PROPERTIES
The dimensions of stones shall be worked to those shown or indicated on the

approved design drawings of the Contractor, and any approved shop
drawings, and the Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy and setting
out of the stones and stonework comprising the granite cladding.
a. Stones shall hold out square at the back, i.e. without corners broken
away whereby the strength of the cramp fixing is impaired.
b. Variation of face dimensions on any stone shall not exceed 1mm in

900mm.
JKT05 SS17/9
c. Total variation of thickness on any stone:  3mm.
d. Tolerances shall not be accumulative.
e. Variation from level: max. 3mm in 6m line and 6mm in 12m or more
f. Variation of linear building line: as above
g. Offset of joints: 1.5mm maximum
Any bow or twist on finished faces of any stone should not vary from the
planes by a dimension exceeding 1mm in 1200mm.
All stones, unless otherwise designed, shall stand up square at all face
corners, so that any deviations in length or height dimensions are reasonably
uniform.
The mortises, sinking, perforations and notches for cramps, dowels and corbel
plates for supporting nibs, shall be formed in accordance with the approved
drawings, and in the factory prior to delivery to site.
17.12 STRUCTURAL DESIGN OF GRANITE CLADDING
The granite cladding shall be designed to accommodate all normal structural

movements like settlements, thermal movements including structural
movements occurring under local climatic conditions and temperatures,
deflections, drift or expansion or vibration of the building without affecting their
efficiency and proper functioning:
Cladding systems shall be designed to withstand loads due to wind pressure,

dead loads (e.g. infill panels, etc.) and live loads that may be imposed (e.g.
window cleaning cradle, etc.)
Before approval of shop drawings the Contractor shall confirm that the limits of
in-service lateral and vertical deflections which the installation has been
designed to accommodate are according to these specifications.
17.13 STONE MATERIALS
17.13.1 Characteristics and Quality
a. All stone shall be carefully selected, from sound stock, and free from
defects impairing strength, durability or appearance, such as cracks,
seams, starts, holes, flaws or imperfections which have been patched
or filled.
JKT05 SS17/10
b. All stone shall be uniformly consistent in colour, value, graining texture

and other features to the extent inherent in each stone type.
c. All stone to be used shall first be submitted as samples, reviewed by

the Architect, prior to fabrication.
d. The granite shall be the best grade or type within the quarries and shall
have no large-scale veining or any inclusions.
17.13.2 Stone Types and Quarrying Sources
a. General
All stone, interior and exterior to the structure, are selected as provided
herein by the Architect from selected sources.
Stone selections are made and identified by generally known trade

nomenclature. Each selected type shall be from a quarrying source in
commercial operation capable of supplying quality and production as
required for the Project.
Final selection of stone shall be made by Architect based on actual

samples.
b. Physical Properties
Stone type must be accompanied by documented laboratory testing

acceptable to the Architect, and must meet all minimum requirements
for bulk density, coefficient of expansion, water absorption, water
vapour transmission, mineral and chemical compositions, Modulus of
Rupture, shear strength, compressive strength, modules of elasticity
and tension.
c. Samples
Submission of samples shall proceed until suitable samples,

acceptable to the Architect, are received, in all types of finishes
required.
JKT05 SS17/11
17.14 STONE FABRICATION
All stone shall be cut to sizes, shapes, dimensions, and details as shown on
reviewed shop drawings. There shall be no deviation from jointing shown or
specified thereon. If pre-assembled pieces are proposed, techniques of pre-
assembly and sample where required by the Architect are to be submitted for
review. Adhesives used to be highest quality type.
Exposed surfaces and edges of stone units shall be free from cracks, broken
corners, chipped edges, scratches, or other defects affecting appearance. No
patching or hiding of defects will be permitted. Stone units having flaws or
imperfections are not acceptable and will be rejected, and shall be replaced
with approved material at Contractor's expense.
17.14.1 Thickness
Stone thickness shown herein or on drawings is minimum acceptable for

fabrication tolerances. Whichever is the greater (thicker) shall be provided.
See drawings for special shapes and profiles. Permissible variations ranging
from minimum to maximum shall be as follows:
a. Maximum variation in thickness shall be 3mm for stone less than 50mm
thick.
b. Minimal thickness for stone units
i. Interior paving units and/or flooring shall be 30mm thick. Interior

paving units over 960 mm in any dimension - 50mm thick, or as
selected by the Architect.
ii. Exterior paving shall be 50mm thick or as selected by the

Architect.
iii. Interior and exterior wall veneer shall be 30mm thick.
iv. Other stone shapes, of size and profiles shown on drawings as

minimum. All stone shapes shall be monolithic cut from single
piece of stone, without joints, except where noted otherwise.
c. Provide greater thickness than shown without additional reimbursement

of cost where thickness is insufficient for the sizes, where extent of cut-
outs decreases effective strength of the remaining material, for proper
and sufficient anchorage, or where required for suitable and adequate
bearing areas or surfaces, as determined by Contractor's Engineer.
d. Any revision in thickness, size or shapes affecting Architect’s original

architectural design or specified minimum thickness shall be reviewed
with the Architect prior to preparation of shop drawings.
e. Provide less thickness where required to accommodate restricted

height/depth width of finishes allowed, in accordance to site conditions.
JKT05 SS17/12
f. Toilet counter vanity tops wash basin openings are to be cut through on
faces and polished finish to receive under-counter mounted wash basin
according to the drawings. Provide for openings as required to suit the
specified toilet accessories and sanitary fittings.
Cut all stone full and true on faces, reveals, beds, joints, and top to the full
dimensions required by drawings. All sawn edges shall be straight and true.
Maximum deviation from straight line or radii indicated shall not exceed 1.5mm
when measured with a 3 metres straight edge or radial template, or plus or
minus one-fourth the width of joints, whichever is more stringent. All units shall
fit together accurately.
Fabricate all stone work so that joints between units shall be as shown on
drawings.
Make faces of stone work in same plane flush at joints. All finished surfaces
shall be true.
In all instances where edge of stone is revealed as a nosing such as steps,

copings planter edges, minimum thickness of stone will be 50mm.
17.14.2 Cutting, Drilling and Fitting
Include all cutting, drilling, and fitting of stone work required to accommodate
the work of other trades. In cutting and fitting, carefully cut and grind edges to
a neat, tight fit, cutting in such a manner so as not to impair strength,
appearance or architectural design of stone work. Use physical templates and
accurate site measurements for all cutting and drilling. Obtain required
templates from proper trades.
17.14.3 Vanity Tops, Fascia and Splash Boards
Vanity tops are to be single full length pieces where possible.
Each panel is to be of thickness shown in drawing and will be supported by

stainless steel brackets to be detailed manufactured and installed by
stonework specialist contractor.
The Contractor will complete all shop drawings showing panel sizes, any joints
required, sealants and support fixings.
The Contractor is required to co-ordinate with Architect regarding fixing details

of wash hand basins.
All wash hand basins to be 'under counter' type. Contractor to allow for forming
bullnose finish around wash hand basin openings and front edge of panel as
shown on drawings.
Surface of Counter to be wrought to fall/drain towards basin aperture. To

provide for up to 1,600mm single full-length piece for vanity top, fascia and
splash boards before jointing. Position of joint to be decided at shop drawing
approval stage. Joints, if required, are to be positioned between wash basins.
JKT05 SS17/13
17.15 WIND LOAD
Wind load shall be calculated accordingly to relevant CP. Basic wind speed
shall be taken as 30 m/s for a 3-second gust, at a height of 10m above
ground.
The values of S1 shall be taken as unity. The value of S2 shall be based on

ground roughness 3, and Class A. The value of S3 shall be taken as unity.
Pressure coefficients for wind pressures/suctions are to conform to Clauses of

the code.
17.16 LATERAL DRIFT
The following values of lateral drift shall be used for the cladding design:
a. Overall lateral drift - height/500
b. Local lateral drift - height/350
17.17 MORTAR PACKING
Mortar packing required behind granite cladding shall compose of one part
cement to three parts sand (1:3) thoroughly mixed. Mortar if not mixed by a
mechanical mixer shall be thoroughly mixed twice after adding water on a
clean watertight platform. Mix shall be done in small quantities and used fresh.
Mortar that has begun to set or which has been mixed more than 30 minutes
shall not be used or re-mixed.
17.18 FIXING METALS
All metals and materials selected for the fixing of granite cladding shall comply
with the requirements of the British Standards Institution.
The tying back fixings and load bearing fixings shall be of either:
a. phosphor bronze
b. silicon aluminium bronze
c. austeritic stainless steel
d. high grade proof stainless steel
JKT05 SS17/14
to comply with relevant BS where applicable.
Welding will only be permitted, subject to the Architect's approval, if the

necessary facilities, technical expertise and skills are available. If the use of
dissimilar metals or alloys is unavoidable in the design of the fixings, the
fixings shall be designed so as to be electrically insulated with bushes and
washers of appropriate material, to prevent galvanic corrosion.
The use of materials in fixings susceptible (or possibly susceptible) to stress

corrosion is prohibited.
Fixings shall be designed so as to be capable of withstanding wind pressures,

positive and negative, according to relevant Singapore Standards.
The form of the building and of the surrounding buildings should be considered
in detail when designing the restraint and load bearing fixings. Higher
pressures will be encountered at the corners thereof. The fixings selected
must be capable of being used at any location on any elevation of the building.
All working stress shall conform to the relevant British Standards.
17.19 DESIGN CONSIDERATION FOR FIXING
The Contractor shall include against the following in the design consideration
for fixings:
a. characteristics of the building frame;
b. movement characteristics;
c. thermal expansion;
d. vibration or movement due to wind-load;
e. wind loadings, with particular reference to the appropriate PSB and

British Standards;
f. Vibration due to the movement of the Mass Rapid Transport (MRT)

trains.
17.20 GENERAL CONSIDERATION FOR FIXINGS
The general considerations for fixings shall be as follows:
a. Drying shrinkage and moisture movement of the concrete
b. Elastic deformation of structure under load
c. Creep of concrete under sustained load, and
JKT05 SS17/15
d. Thermal movements of the cladding
17.21 METHODS OF ATTACHMENT AND SUPPORT
The Contractor will be entirely responsible for the attachment of the stones to
the structure.
All fixings should be designed to the appropriate working stresses and all
metals should be of approved type. The suitability of the fixings is to be
supported by detailed calculations by a Registered Engineer in Singapore,
substantiated to the satisfaction of the Architect by tests.
All perforations in stones shall preferably be drilled in the factory, and so

formed that stunning of the surrounding area is avoided.
Whenever anchor slot fixings, inserts or fixings of any kind are cast integrally
with the structure, accuracy in setting out is of the utmost importance.
The mortar used for bedding the fixings in place in the stone or in the concrete
structure shall consist of 1 part ordinary or rapid hardening cement to relevant
BS of clean sharp sand.
The mortar should be mixed to a fairly dry consistency and well tamped into
the aperture around the fixing, and allowed to cure for 48 hours before being
subjected to stress.
Approved non-staining and compatible epoxy or polyester resin mixes with or

without fillers (non-metallic) may also be used, but the manufacturer's
instructions are to be strictly followed, and the Architect’s approval at all times
sought. Load bearing fixings are generally situated at the bottom edge of the
stone, but other locations may be used depending upon the site conditions and
the practicability thereof.
The tieback or restraint fixings are generally located near the top or side edges
of the stone.
The attachment of stones to soffits shall be by means of suspension from bolts

or hangers, let into soffit anchorage.
17.22 JOINTS
The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of all setting out of joints
and the proper fitting-in of the stones.
All joints are required to be completely watertight, and shall accommodate

movement of the cladding and movement of the superstructure and other
differential movement e.g. thermal movement.
JKT05 SS17/16
The joints shall be designed to be suitable for sealing with a compatible or

approved sealant.
Joints on external stone vertical surfaces to be open joint system, with

waterproofing to backing structure.
17.23 COMPRESSION JOINTS
Compression joints shall be designed to allow irreversible shrinkage of the

reinforced concrete frame on each floor immediately under the support of the
stonework. The width of the joint is to be calculated to allow for maximum
shrinkage.
Jointing material shall be readily compressible. No grout or mortar should be

allowed to accumulate in the compression joints, and ideally the joint should be
formed as a void until such time as caulking and pointing takes place.
Expanded polyethylene or similar closed cell separator may be used for the
entire depth of the joint. The polyethylene may be removed, the joint checked,
before pointing commences.
Part of the sealant on the face of the building may be extruded as the building
shrinks, and this projection shall require to be trimmed. The sealant must be
compatible with the polyethylene.
17.24 MOVEMENT JOINTS
Movement along the length of the building will require to be accommodated by

vertical movement joints.
Expansion joints shall be taken through the cladding. The movement to be

accommodated may be appreciable and the sealant selected will require to
have accommodated the movement.
Joints should be provided within 1.5m to 3m of each corner of the building, and
it is at such locations that the effect of moisture and thermal movements are
most likely to be pronounced.
The Contractor shall carefully design detailing of stonework at copings and

parapets.
17.25 SEALANTS
Sealants shall be of an approved adhesive material, suitable for application on

all respects, of a consistency suitable for application by means of a trowel,
JKT05 SS17/17
knife or gun or available as a pre-formed strip or tape used for providing a seal
between stones or between stones and a window unit or structure.
Sealant material shall be capable of accepting deviations and subsequent

changes in the width of the joint.
Sealants should not be of a type likely to cause disfiguration or discoloration of

the surrounding stone or aluminium, adjacent to the joints, or stain by attached
dust or other agents.
The properties of the selected sealant should comply with the requirements of
relevant JIS, or of the ASTM or of the British Standards Institution.
The sealant should have the following properties:
a. elasticity to accommodate expected movement of the substrate

materials;
b. adhesion to joint surfaces;
c. extrusion facility;
d. waterproof;
e. durable to U.V. light and the elements;
f. non-staining;
g. be of suitable colour;
h. self-levelling;
i. stability.
Sealants must be applied under the correct weather conditions and should
conform to all the manufacturer's instructions. The sealant should be applied
by experienced persons with professional supervision of an experienced
person approved by the manufacturer.
The Contractor shall obtain from the sealant's manufacturer a guarantee

against failure of the sealant from any cause, for a period of ten (10) years,
from the date of Completion of the Works. Back up materials for sealants must
be compatible for use with the sealant selected. The materials should
compress easily, and should be such that the sealant does not adhere thereto.
The material should not wick water.
17.26 TREATMENT OF STONE
All stone is to be treated with a proprietary sealant to all faces. The contractor
is to propose a sealant that is suitable and appropriate in the case of each
stone specified.
JKT05 SS17/18
The treatment is to be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturers

instructions.
The colourless waterproof sealant liquid which will not stain, discolour,
disfigure or cause any chemical reactions to the stones but which will prevent
moisture penetration to the stone cladding.
17.27 LIFTING AND HANDLING
Stones shall be boxed or crated in soft non-staining packing with spacers

between stones.
Stones shall be transported in the plane on which the stones are to be fixed in
the Building. Anchorage points should be provided for straps and frames to
hold the units safely in position during transport. Consideration should be given
to the design of racks and other equipment for transportation.
17.28 WORKMANSHIP IN PRODUCTION
The material selected from the quarry shall be equal to the approved samples
in all respects. The exposed faces and all edges shall be polished and all
special shaping is to be accurately worked before delivery to site, apart from
exceptional circumstances where the work requires to be carried out on site.
Care shall be taken to prevent chipping or damage to arises. All damaged
units will be rejected by the Architect and shall be replaced entirely at the
Contractor's own expense. In this respect no extension of time shall be given
and the Contractor shall be responsible for any delay to the project in the
cause of replacing the damaged or rejected unit.
17.29 EXECUTION
17.29.1 Phasing Schedule
17.29.1.1 General
Prior to commencing any work, including submission of shop drawings, the

Contractor shall prepare a detailed phasing schedule for the fabrication
and erection of all stone work and support systems. Said phasing schedule
to be submitted to the Architect for review and shall include but not be
limited to the following:
a. Engineering Development
b. Preparation of Detail Standards
JKT05 SS17/19
c. Submission of Product Data, Stone Properties, etc.
d. Preparation of Shop Drawings
e. Submission of Shop Drawings
f. Sample Submissions
g. Preparation of Sample Panels
h. Stone Fabrication and Selection including Examination of

Blocks
i. Stone Support Systems Fabrication
j. Stone Delivery
k Control Panels
l. Stone Erection
m. Protection, Cleaning and Sealing
17.29.2 Preparation
Prior to installation, examine surfaces and structural systems including

steel and/or concrete framing, to receive all stonework. Do not proceed
until any defects detrimental to the finished work are corrected, including
moisture protection, structural supports, provisions for expansion, or any
other condition that might affect the finished work in appearance, water-
tightness or integrity of the completed installation.
Verify all measurements and dimensions, co-ordinate and supervise the

installation of inserts for this work. Co-ordinate and schedule this work with
the work of other trades. Give particular attention to the location and size of
cut-outs required to accommodate mechanical, electrical and other work or
adjoining construction, in accordance with the reviewed shop drawings for
such trade.
Co-ordinate the installation and/or erection of all structural steel framing

and concrete construction designed or intended to receive stone finishes.
17.29.3 Installation
17.29.3.1 General
a. Stone with chips, cracks, voids, stains or other defects that are visible
shall not be used in the finished work. Any stone, so installed, shall be
JKT05 SS17/20
removed and replaced with proper materials at no additional cost to the

Employer.
b. Clean stone before setting by scrubbing with non-metallic fibre brushes

followed by a thorough drenching with clear water. Use only mild
cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh fillers or
abrasives.
c. Execute stone work by skilled mechanics and employ skilled

fitters/cutters at site for site cutting, only as necessary.
d. Set stone in accordance with final reviewed shop drawings. Furnish

and install anchors, supports, fasteners and other attachments shown,
or necessary to secure stone in place, shim and adjust accessories as
required for proper setting. Completely fill holes, slots and other
sinkages for anchors, dowels, fasteners and supports with sealant
during setting.
e. Erect walls plumb and true with joints uniform in width and accurately
aligned.
f. Include all cutting, drilling and fitting of stone work not performed in the
shop and required to accommodate the work of other trades. In cutting
and fitting, carefully cut and grind edges to a neat tight fit. Do cutting in
such manner as not to impair strength or appearance of stone. Use
physical templates and accurate site measurements for all cutting and
drilling. Obtain required templates from proper trades.
g. Provide chases, reveals, regrets, openings and other spaces as shown

or required for contiguous work. Close up openings in stone work after
other work is in place.
17.29.4 Setting Wall Panels
a. Install stone work support systems and set stone in accordance with
final reviewed shop drawings. Furnish and install anchors, supports,
fasteners and other attachments shown, or necessary to secure stone
work in place. Shim and adjust accessories as required for proper
setting.
b. Erect walls plumb and true with joints as detailed, uniform in width and
accurately aligned.
c. Provide specified sealant system at all exterior and interior joints.

Mortar joints, where required, shall be struck back 12mm from face of
stone to allow for sealant. The Contractor shall provide lead buttons as
specified herein. Provide the quantity of buttons required to maintain
uniform joint width and alignment.
JKT05 SS17/21
d. Joints on all sides of stone work shall be maintained by use of

temporary wedges that shall be removed prior to placing sealant.
e. Maintain cavity space between back of stone wall panels and face of
back-up. Do not fill cavity space with mortar or grout or any other
materials except to the lower 1,000mm that is to be filled with mortar
f. Apply to the back and sides of stone Elastiment seal and glaze sealer
to the lower 1.5m of stone wall panels.
17.29.5 Mortar for Paving
a. Produce mortar according to proportions required for each use.
b. Setting mortar for interior flooring:
One part non-staining Portland Cement to three parts sand, by volume,

mixed sufficiently moist for tamping and compacting. Provide liquid
Elastiment 150 or equivalent latex additive in proportions recommended by
the manufacturer.
c. Grouting and pointing mortar for interior stone flooring joints:
Mortar joints at interior stone flooring shall be a commercially prepared, high

strength grout with approved latex additive. Grout to be custom coloured as
selected by the Architect.
d. Mixing
Add cement just before mixing and mix dry. use as little water as necessary
to produce a workable mix.
17.29.6 Setting of paving (Interior and Exterior), Steps, Copings. etc.
a. Setting Procedure
Thoroughly clean substrate before laying mortar bed.
b. Pattern
Lay stone paving units in pattern indicated on drawings. Joints shall

align or be on centrelines as indicated on drawings, with joints or
centrelines of wall finish materials, site check all dimensions.
c. Water-proofing of underside of stone.
The underside of the stone must be water-proofed with suitable water-

proofing materials as recommended by the specialist supplier.
d. Setting Bed
JKT05 SS17/22
Place setting mortar full depth as indicated on drawings. Screed setting

mortar level. Lay stone units dry. After a sufficient area of stone paving
units have been thus laid, check surface with a 3 metre long straight
edge and any variation exceeding 1.5mm shall be corrected and
brought to proper grade, then lift each piece of stone and butter the
back and edges with a thick paste mixture of cement and fine sand
gauged with high strength latex admixture in recommended
proportions. Lay stone paving and tamp it to proper level and solid
bearing.
e. Any stone unit having a hollow sound after being laid shall be reset to
provide solid backing
f. All interior granite paving units shall be kept perfectly clean. Mortar
joints between stone shall be raked out 12mm for coloured joint grout.
All joints to receive sealant shall be left open, trowel separated through
setting bed. Sealant to be installed as part of this Contract.
g. During setting operations, exposed edges of mortar beds under

previously set paving which have been allowed to hydrate or which are
partially hydrated shall be treated with a paste mix of cement, sand and
latex admixture (no water) immediately prior to placement of adjacent
new mortar bed material.
h. Granite units disturbed in making replacements or correcting variations

shall be settled into place by carefully tamping to grade by use of a
hand tamper applied upon a 50mm thick board.
i. Anchoring
As indicated on shop drawings, provide anchorage devices and dowels

for securing and positioning of granite units. All free ends of granite
paving to be anchored. Completely fill all holes for anchorage devices
and dowels with cement setting mortar.
j. Joints and Grouting
After all stone units have been set and setting bed is thoroughly cured,
brush joints clean. Thoroughly wet raked out portion of mortar joint and
then fill solid with coloured joint grout. Strike joint neatly and tool to a
dense, slightly concave surface, flush with stone surface. Control joints
in interior paving shall be spaced to Sub-Contractor's recommendation
and be 6mm wide and located to Architect's approval.
k. Provide all anchors, dowels, cramps, wires, etc. where approved shop
drawings for setting all steps and copings. It shall be the responsibility
of the Sub-Contractor to design anchoring system and materials for all
paving and related work.
JKT05 SS17/23
l. Sealant systems shall only be installed after inspection by the

Contractor's Engineer has determined that surfaces are suitably dry to
receive same.
All access should be safe and adequate to comply with the Factories
Act and other statutory Acts and Laws of Singapore.
All temporary supports, jointing and bedding materials, fixings and tools
and equipment shall be pre-positioned at the fixing point.
All temporary wedges, shims, spacers, and other devices not designed
for permanent inclusion in the structure shall be removed and spaces
made good before fixing.
In order to allow space for erection of the cladding, it is a normal

requirement of the trade, that the scaffolding be in 2m high lifts and the
inner rail be one board clear of the face of the building. Diagonal braces
are not desirable as these might prevent the stone being moved along
the scaffold on barrows.
Apart from normal co-operation with other trades and Contractors, the
Contractor shall liase closely with the aluminium window specialist
contractor, in co-ordinating the weather tightness of the works.
When fixed in position, all stones shall have their faces in exact planes
and be truly vertical. All joints shall be truly horizontal and vertical, as
required.
Before any erection and fixing of stones, vertical and horizontal datum
lines shall be set out, using piano wires or other approved methods.
17.29.7 Temporary Supports
Temporary supports shall be adequate for the loads to be sustained and

shall be securely but temporarily fixed and easily removable.
Where the supports are of timber or metal, care should be taken by

means of packing and polyethylene sheeting or other non-staining
protective material to protect any stones on which such rest from staining
and damage.
17.29.8 Joints Workmanship
All joint surfaces shall be cleaned free of dirt, dust, grease or other
deleterious material before sealants are applied.
JKT05 SS17/24
17.29.9 Prototype
The Contractor shall erect a prototype for testing for wind, water
penetration and other tests to be determined by the Architect.
Every precaution shall be taken against over-stress or damage by the

provision of suitable packing at designed points of support. There are
considerable dangers of breaking and damaging the stone by supporting
at other than at two (2) positions, and by careless placing of packing.
Handling and storage on site should be to fabricators written instructions.
Contractor to obtain written instructions on handling and storage one
month before first delivery to site for Architect’s comments.
Stacking should be arranged to prevent the accumulation of trapped water

or rubbish between the stones. Prolonged damp conditions must be
avoided so as to prevent staining.
Where site storage is necessary, this should be arranged in erection

sequence with markings visible and with adequate access for the lifting
gear.
All stonework shall be protected from the weather elements, and kept
clear of all other building operations. For work involving highly finished or
polished stones, it is essential to provide safe, dry internal storage, away
from main traffic runs.
17.30 PROTECTION OF STONES
Packing pieces used for protection shall not disfigure or otherwise

permanently mark the stones.
Hooks, crow-bars, oils, grease, paints, cement slurry and liquid agents
liable to cause staining shall not be used in close proximity to the area in
which stones are stacked.
Surfaces shall be carefully protected during construction by a temporary

cover.
Protection to all permanently exposed surfaces especially arises and

decorative features shall be provided by timber strips, hessian or rigid
board with polyethylene sheet and shall remain in position for as long as
necessary. Protective covers to be non-staining.
JKT05 SS17/25
17.31 PROTECTION OF OTHER TRADES
The Contractor shall take extreme care that all adjoining surfaces such as
window frames, glass panes, etc. are not damaged or stained with mortar
or acids during installation. All stains shall be cleaned immediately.
The Contractor shall be responsible and shall pay all costs for cleaning
and/or replacing frames or glass if they have been damaged or defaced by
mortar or chemicals used for cleaning facings.
17.32 COMPLETION
On completion of adjacent building operations, the Contractor shall

thoroughly clean down all completed work and attend to any defects in
pointing and polishing before the handing over.
Clean down all facings remove dirt, mortar, stains, efflorescence or other
harmful material. Use cleaners and procedures recommended by stone
quarry and fabricator. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage during
cleaning operations.
Brush all joints clean, drench and point with tinted mortar. Do not use wire
brushes or acids.
17.33 INDEMNITY FOR STONEWORK
Prior to commencement of stonework, the Contractor shall lodge with the

Architect a 10-year indemnity against defects in the design, materials and
installation of the stonework including granite cladding system.
Under this indemnity, the Contractor will be required to make good any
defects and failure in the materials or installation and will be responsible
for any consequential loss attributable to any failure in the stonework
during the warranty period.
If in the opinion of the Contractor, the Specifications are insufficient for him
to give the specified indemnity then the Contractor shall allow in his tender
for upgrading the Specification as necessary to enable him to so
indemnify.
17.34 BUILDING CONTROL REGULATION
The Contractor shall comply with the building control regulations or local
authority requirement & standards..
JKT05 SS17/26
17.34.1 Design of Claddings
a. All panels used for claddings and their system of fixing shall be
designed to take into account wind load, deflection, relative movements
of the panels and the building frame as well as long term durability and
integrity of the panels and the fixing system.
b. All fixings for securing the cladding to the main structure shall be of
stainless steel, phosphor bronze, aluminium, bronze or other materials
that may be approved by the Building Authority.
17.34.2 Submission by Qualified Person
a. Plans for the fixing of claddings to a building may be submitted

separately for approval by a qualified person and shall be accompanied
by details of the claddings, method of fixing and design calculations.
b. The qualified person shall be the professional engineer from the

Contractor.
c. Should any discrepancies arise between the items as mentioned in this

regulation and the other specifications, the former will supersede the
latter.
17.35 PACKING MATERIALS
Cement shall be Portland Cement complying with relevant BS. Cement

shall be delivered to the site in the manufacturer's sealed bags.
Sand shall be clean, sharp, free from salts, vegetable or other deleterious
matter. It shall be gauged as required for the various works. Sand for
pointing shall pass a No. 12 mesh sieve.
Water shall be clean obtained from the PUB mains and shall be free from
any harmful matter whether in suspension or solution at the time when it is
used.
SS018_Painting and Texture Coating
JKT05 SS18/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 18 - PAINTING AND TEXTURE COATING
SECTION 18
18.0 PAINTING AND TEXTURE COATING
18.1 GENERALLY

The Paintwork and Texture Coating Work, generally, shall be carried out in
conjunction with relevant BS "Code of Practice for Painting of Buildings" and
relevant JIS for texture coating.
All texture coating shall be ceramic quartz and acrylic texture coating or
equivalent.
Manufacturer's samples of all materials are to be deposited in sealed containers,

with the Architect, at the Contractor's expenses, for approval before bulk
deliveries are made and before any painting are commenced.
During the execution of the Works, further samples of all or any of the materials
may be taken by the Architect, and the Contractor is to provide the containers with
necessary seals and all samples at his own expense. The sample may be taken
from sealed or open containers or from the work peoples' pails on the Works.
All material shall be of approved manufacture suitable for the particular purpose
for which to be used, and applied in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
instructions.
All materials for multiple coat work, e.g. priming, undercoat and finishing coats are
to be obtained from the same manufacturer, and to be those recommended by the
manufacturer as suitable for use together, and for the surfaces concerned.
At least 75% of all paints and coatings wet-applied on site , by volume or surface
area, meet the VOC emissions evaluation AND 100% meet the VOC content
evaluation as per LEED Gold Standards
18.2 STANDARDS
relevant requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in
the body of the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be submitted
to the Architect, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards
and Codes comply with the requirements of the standards specified. All standards
and Codes quoted are the current version, unless specific year references are
JKT05 SS18/2
noted.
SS ISO 1248 Iron oxide pigments for paint

SS ISO 3262 Extenders for paint
SS CP 22 The painting of buildings
SS 5 Methods of test for paints, varnishes and related materials
SS 7 Paint: finishes, gloss enamel
SS 34 Undercoat paint for gloss enamel
SS 37 Aluminium paint
SS 38 Aluminium wood primer
SS 82 Bitumen based primer for cold or hot application
SS 88 Mineral solvents (white spirit and related hydrocarbon solvents)
for paints and other purposes
SS 90 Glossary of paints and related terms
SS 91 Solvent-based paint remover
SS 150 Emulsion paints for decorative purposes
SS 269 Paint colours for building purposes
SS 345 Algae resistant emulsion paint for decorative purposes
SS 494 Lead and chromate-free primer for iron and steel substrate
Other Standards
BS 4652 Zinc rich priming paint (organic media)

AS 2855 Paints and related materials. Micaceous iron oxide pigment
SIS 05 59 00 Pictorial surface preparation standards for painting steel surface
ASTM D 16 Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials,
and Applications.
ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
EPA Environmental Protection Agency : Requirements for volatile
solvents content limitation
18.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
All materials are to be delivered to the Site fresh and in the original sealed
containers, bearing the manufacturer's name. The containers are to be clearly
marked with a description of the contents.
All materials are to be stored on the Works, and precautions taken to minimise
exposure to high temperatures and in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendation. Use in order of delivery and before service life expiry date.
After stoppage of work and when containers are not in use, close the containers
(empty or otherwise) and remove to the designated storage area.
JKT05 SS18/3
18.4 TEST
All materials for paint and film and coating finishes may be subjected to tests,
including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Fading and colour fastness.

b. Bending and scratching resistance.
c. Oxidation, weathering and accelerated weathering.
d. Resistance to mould, fungus and algae.
e. Application and self-levelling properties.
f. Pigment content and fineness of grind.
g. Chemical analysis (particularly anti-corrosive paints).
Samples of testing shall be supplied without charge. The costs of testing shall be
borne by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall allow for applying a test colour patch over the appropriate
undercoat of the various surfaces specified to be coated, and for obtaining the
Architect's approval before proceeding with the painting and coating work.
Colours will be selected from the British Standard range of colours, and shall be
mixed as necessary to the instructions of the manufacturer. The Contractor shall
allow for any special colour mixing and/or blending required.
The Contractor shall keep, on site, British Standard Colour Charts of the selected
colours, to relevant BS. Standard colour charts will be used for comparison, and
colours that do not match will be rejected.
Colours for other materials will be selected from the range of colours supplied by
the manufacturer.
Any work executed with material found on test not to fulfil the necessary
requirements, is to be burnt off, or otherwise removed and made good.
The mixing of paints and coatings of different types and brands will not be
permitted.
No internal or external work is to be carried out in wet or excessively humid

weather, or on surfaces that are not thoroughly dry.
All decorative finishes are to be applied with proper brushes or as directed by the
manufacturer. The use of coarse brushes and rags is prohibited.
Unless otherwise instructed by the Architect, all materials shall be evenly spread
and shall be finished uniform in colour free from runs, brush marks or roller marks,
to a high gloss finish. Each coat, prior to the finishing coat, including sealer,
primers, etc. shall be properly rubbed down with pumice, steel-wool, glass-paper,
emery paper, waterproof garnet paper or cutting compound, whichever is the most
JKT05 SS18/4
suitable for the particular surface, to produce the highest quality finish. Wherever
practicable rubbing shall be wet, using one (1) of the above, in combination with
water, lime water, turpentine or benzene.
The Contractor shall allow the minimum drying time between coats as
recommended by the manufacturer.
All ironmongery & electrical cover plates, shall be removed before painting and
coating, and shall be replaced after the final coats have been applied and
approved.
Floors and other work and fittings are to be properly covered up and protected,
and painting pots, etc. are not to be placed on impervious coverings, window cills,
etc.
Primed and undercoated woodwork or metalwork is not to be left for an undue

period before completing the painting process. All coats of paint must be
thoroughly dry before subsequent coats are applied, and rubbed down with fine
glass paper, where necessary, and dusted off.
The Contractor shall allow for painting walls or panels in different tints or colours,
as samples. Subsequent work shall be identified to be sample of colours
approved by the Architect.
The number of coats indicated is in addition to the sealer or priming coat. Each
undercoat shall be in a visibly different tint from the preceding coat, and coloured
to suit the finishing coat.
Where the number of coats specified does not result in an uniformly solid
appearance, and is due to the faulty materials or application, the Contractor will be
required to apply further coats to arrive at a satisfactory appearance, entirely at
his own expense.
Where in the opinion of the Architect, such faulty appearance is due solely to the
selection of the colour and texture; the Contractor must refer to the Architect and
await his instructions before proceeding with further coats.
No painting and coating work shall be carried out before the work of all specialist’s
contractor has been substantially completed, and the areas concerned thoroughly
cleaned. Clean conditions shall be maintained during all painting work.
No paint and coating shall be applied to surfaces that are damp or dusty, and
immediately prior to painting and coating, recipient surfaces are to be inspected
by the Architect for approval.
18.4.1 Pull-off Test
Inform the architect when the first section of paint has cured. Undertake a pull off
test by complying with ASTM D3359-02.
JKT05 SS18/5
18.4.2 Adhesion test
Carry out adhesion test when directed by the architect. Adhesion tests are to be
carried out in accordance with SS 5
18.5 PREPARATION OF CONCRETE SURFACES
Remove form oil. Mould release oil, laitance, grease, dirt and debris from concrete
surfaces using a suitable solvent and then neutralize. Remove grit, dirt, loose
materials, mortar drippings and the like; remove all nibs, projections and
protuberances.
Patch concrete surfaces with a non shrink cementitious grout, or filler compound,
suitable for such use filling all cracks, depressions, and voids to provide smooth
surfaces. Refer any defects other than surface imperfections to the Architect
before patching.
Prior to application, allow the concrete to cure for a minimum of 30 days. Test the
concrete surfaces for moisture content and ensure that the moisture content is
below 15% of a Protimeter scale is used and below 6% if a Kett meter is used.
18.6 PREPARATION OF PLASTERED SURFACES
Plastered surfaces are to be allowed to dry out not less than 14 days. All dust,
dirt, plaster splashes or efflorescence is to be brushed off or removed by wiping
first with a dry coarse cloth and then with a damp clothe. The surface is then to be
left for forty-eight (48) hours to ascertain if further efflorescence occurs.
All cracks, holes, crevices, etc. shall be filled with approved filler for e.g. Din Filler
patty or equivalent before any coating commences.
18.7 COATING SYSTEM
18.7.1 Water repellent Silicone External Wall Coating System
The high performance reactive silicone coating shall consist:
Primer
Apply 1-2 coats of a deeply penetrative silicone primer with intense infiltration and
breathability properties that is highly water repellent, by roller/ brush to achieve a
spreading rate of 0.10 - 0.15 kg/ m2/coat. Allow 2 hours drying time.
Texture Coat:
Apply 1 coat of a water-reducible modified acrylic resin reinforced spray body
JKT05 SS18/6
texture, by spray to achieve a spreading rate of 1.00 –1.70 kg/ m2/coat. Allow 24
hours over-coating interval.
Top Coat
Apply 2 coats of a super-durable water-based acrylic silicone resin paint, by roller/
brush to achieve a spreading rate of 0.15 - 0.20 kg/ m2/coat. Allow 2 hours
drying time before re-coating. Allow 24 hours for final curing.
18.7.2 Testing Standards
The specified paint shall fulfil the Japanese Industrial Standard for silicone resin
paint under JIS 5660 test.
a. The said paint system shall possess the following technical test data: -
Primer Top coat

Finish Low sheen Matt
Specific gravity 0.96 ± 0.03 1.40 ± 0.05
Drying Surface dry 20 minutes 30 minutes
time (at Hard dry 1 hour 1 hour
30oC)
Shelf life Up to 6 months if stored in tightly sealed containers
Pot life 12 hours -
Solid content 100% 60 ± 3%
Viscosity Below 100cp/ 30oC 65 ± 10ps/ 30oC
No. of Components One One
No. of Coats One Two
Coverage 0.10 – 0.15 ltr/m /coat
2
0.15 – 0.20 kg/m2/coat
Dilution 900% with water 0-10% with water
Overcoat Interval 2 hours 2 hours
Method of Application By roller By roller
b. The said paint system shall possess the following performance test data: -
Test Item Result Requirements
Condition inside a container Passed Becomes smooth with no lumps when

mixed.
Low temperature stability Passed No deformation.
(-5 C)
Film Workability Passed No application difficulties when applied
twice.
Drying 20 C Passed 2 hours or less.
Time 5 C Passed 4 hours or less.
Appearance of Film Passed Film has normal external appearance.
JKT05 SS18/7
Opacity (white and light 0.98 0.95 or more.

colours)
Water Resistance Passed More than 80% retention after 96 hour
immersion; no abnormality on film
surface.
Alkali Resistance Passed More than 65% retention after 7 days
immersion; no abnormality on film
surface.
Wet Scrub Resistance Passed Must pass 1000 cycles.
Resistance against Passed More than 80% gloss retention; no
repeated wetting, warming abnormality on film surface.
and cooling action
Accelerated Weather Passed More than 60% gloss retention after 480
Resistance hour test; degree of whitening is 8 points
or more; negligible change in colour
when compared to sample.
Weather Resistance Passed Degree of whitening is 6 points or more
under 12 month test; no cracking,
swelling, holes, blistering; negligible
change in colour and gloss when
compared to sample.
c. Substrate Preparation and Application
i) Substrates receiving paint should be sufficiently cured, sound and free from
foreign substances, surface stresses and cracks.
ii) Remove thoroughly sandy and chalky layers that are incapable of receiving
paint by cleaning with water jets.
iii) Heavily soiled surfaces must be properly treated.
iv) Any damaged receiving substrate shall be leveled and repaired prior to
application of the paint.
v) Preparation of substrate, priming and painting shall be carried out in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended instructions.
18.7.3 Plaster and Acrylic Texture Coating for Internal Applications
Apply acrylic texture (4-coat system) or equivalent consisting of:
a. One(1) coat under-coat for adhesion

b. One(1) coat middle-coat for designed pattern
c. Two(2) coats top-coat for dressing and protection
Coating System for Fibrous Plaster Ceiling
After the plastering of the fibrous plaster surface to remove all the uneven
surface, apply one coat of sealer and finish with two (2) coats emulsion paint.
JKT05 SS18/8
18.8 PREPARATION AND PRIMING OF FERROUS SURFACES AND MILD STEEL
Ultra-antipollution, super durable, hydrophilic, ceramic enamel coating.
a. The ceramic silicone type enamel painting system shall comply with the
following application specification: -
Surface Preparation
The mild steel surface has to be shop-primed and applied with epoxy-based anti-rust
primer by the Steel Supplier prior to application of the coating systems.
b. The coating system shall comply with the following application specifications: -
Anti-rust primer
Apply 1 coat of a high-build epoxy/ polyamide rust-preventing primer, by spray to
achieve a spreading rate of 0.14 - 0.16 kg/m2. Allow minimum 16 hours over-coating
interval.
Undercoat
Apply 1 coat of a two-component high build epoxy-polyamide cured primer, by brush/
roller to achieve a spreading rate of 0.15- 0.25 kg/m2. Allow minimum 8 hours over-
coating interval.
Mid Coat
Apply by roller/ brush 1 coats of an acrylated polyol/ isocyanate cured two pack
polyurethane resin enamel incorporating premium grade weather resistant pigments,
to achieve a spreading rate of 0.125 – 0.15kg/m2/coat. Allow 24 hours for final curing.
Finishing
Apply by roller/ brush 1 coat of a special modified ultra-antipollution, super durable,
two component reactive type curing enamel coating combining special ceramic
elements (inorganic base) and acrylic-silicon resin film (organic base), to achieve a
spreading rate of 0.13 – 0.15kg/m2/coat. Allow 24 hours for final curing.
c. The said paint system shall possess the following characteristic: -
- Excellent adhesion and bonding strength onto substrate due to its special
molecular structure by Siloxane Bond (-Si-O-Si-)
- Easy cleaning function due to its ceramic film
- Excellent weathering performance
- Heat resistance and incombustible
- Outstanding chemical and solvent resistance
- Excellent mould and fungus resistance
- Forms a strong and hard density film which shuts out water and carbon
dioxide penetration, hence excellent against carbonation and neutralization
- Good abrasion and scratch resistance
- Stain resistance
JKT05 SS18/9
- Excellent gloss retention
d. The said paint system shall possess the following technical data: -
ITEM CERATIGHT SI ENAMEL TEST METHOD

Curing Two pack reactive curing type -
Base Ceramic + Acrylic-silicon resin -
Hardener Reaction accelerator -
Bond Siloxane Bond -
Bond Energy Si-O: 433 KJ/mol -
Gloss 86 JIS K 5400 7.6
Surface Hardness 3H JIS K 5400 8.4
Anti Antipollution No Dirt Wash off
Water-based Carbon No Dirt Carbon paste
Oil-based Carbon L 1.9 After 6 months
Outdoor Exposure No rain mark After 3 months
Gloss Retention 98% (after 700 hours) By UC Tester
18.9 PREPARATION AND PRIMING OF NON-FERROUS SURFACES AND

GALVANIZED SURFACES
Ultra-antipollution, super durable, hydrophilic, ceramic enamel coating.
18.9.1 The ceramic silicone type enamel painting system shall comply with the following
application specification: -
Primer : Apply 1 coat of an epoxy primer for galvanized steel with

excellent adhesion properties, by brush/ roller to achieve a
spreading rate of 0.06 – 0.10 ltr/m2. Allow 2 hours over-coating
interval.
Undercoat : Apply 1 coat of a two-component high build epoxy-polyamide

cured primer, by brush/ roller to achieve a spreading rate of
0.15- 0.25 kg/m2. Allow minimum 8 hours over-coating interval.
Mid Coat : Apply by roller/ brush 1 coat of an acrylated polyol/ isocyanate

cured two pack polyurethane resin enamel incorporating
premium grade weather resistant pigments, to achieve a
spreading rate of 0.125 – 0.15kg/m2/coat. Allow 24 hours for
final curing.
Finishing : Apply by roller/ brush 1 coat of special modified ultra-

antipollution, super durable, two component reactive type curing
enamel coating combining special ceramic elements (inorganic
base) and acrylic-silicon resin film (organic base), to achieve a
JKT05 SS18/10
spreading rate of 0.13 – 0.15kg/m2/coat. Allow 24 hours for

final curing.
18.9.2 The said paint system shall possess the following characteristic: -
- Excellent adhesion and bonding strength onto substrate due to its special
molecular structure by Siloxane Bond (-Si-O-Si-)
- Easy cleaning function due to its ceramic film
- Excellent weathering performance
- Heat resistance and incombustible
- Outstanding chemical and solvent resistance
- Excellent mould and fungus resistance
- Forms a strong and hard density film which shuts out water and carbon dioxide
penetration, hence excellent against carbonation and neutralization
- Good abrasion and scratch resistance
- Stain resistance
- Excellent gloss retention
The said paint system shall possess the following technical data: -
ITEM CERATIGHT SI ENAMEL TEST METHOD

Curing Two pack reactive curing type -
Base Ceramic + Acrylic-silicon resin -
Hardener Reaction accelerator -
Bond Siloxane Bond -
Bond Energy Si-O: 433 KJ/mol -
Gloss 86 JIS K 5400 7.6
Surface Hardness 3H JIS K 5400 8.4
Anti Antipollution No Dirt Wash off
Water-based Carbon No Dirt Carbon paste
Oil-based Carbon L 1.9 After 6 months
Outdoor Exposure No rain mark After 3 months
Gloss Retention 98% (after 700 hours) By UC Tester
18.10 PREPARATION AND PRIMING OF WOOD SURFACES
Woodwork that is to be painted is to be thoroughly cleaned to remove dirt, grease,

etc. rubbed down or scraped smooth, and dusted of. All cracks, crevices and
holes rubbed down to an even surface. All knots, gum veins, and resin streaks in
woodwork are to be treated with knotting to prevent bleeding.
Large or loose-knots are to be cut, and replaced with sound wood or cut back and
the surface made good with filler. Smaller knots are to be treated with two (2) thin
JKT05 SS18/11
coats of knotting. Open grains shall be surface filled. The surfaces to be then
primed with one (1) coat of wood primer, well brushed on.
All joinery is to be primed before assembly.
18.10.1 Polyurethane coating for timber coating. The clear coating system shall
comply with the following application specifications: -
Finishing
Apply by roller 2-3 coats of a one pack modified polyurethane clear coating for
old and new surfaces of timber to enhance the natural beauty of the wood, to
achieve a spreading rate of 6 sq m/litre/coat. Allow within 3hour over-coating
interval and 24 hours for final curing.
Test Item Finishing

Finish Satin (30% gloss) / Gloss – Clear Coating
Specific gravity 0.96 +/- 0.05
Drying time 4 hours
Solid content Approximately 20 +/- 3% by weight
Flash point N.A.
No. of Components One
No. of Coats Two –Three
Coverage 6 m2/litre/coat
Dilution Premixed
Overcoat Interval 3 hrs
Method of Application By roller
18.11 VARNISHING AND CLEAR FINISH
Timber which is to be varnished or clear finished is to be carefully rubbed down

and prepared, generally in accordance with the foregoing specification.
18.11.1 Coating System
External varnishing shall consist of two(2) coats of wood stain and two(2) coats of
satin clear finish, or equivalent resin based varnish.
Internal varnishing shall consist of one(1) coat of wood stain and two(2) coats of
clear finish eggshell finish, one(1) pack polyurethane varnish.
JKT05 SS18/12
18.12 PIPEWORK PAINTS
18.12.1 Exposed UPVC Products
Unless otherwise specified, apply one coat of polyamide epoxy primer followed by
two coats of enamel paint.
18.12.2 Galvanised Steel Pipes and Fittings
Unless otherwise specified, apply:

a. One coat etching primer
b. One coat lead and chromate free primer
c. One coat enamel paint undercoat
d. Two finishing coat of enamel paint
18.13 ROADLINE PAINT AND CAR PARK NUMBERINGS
Area of application: All roadlines and traffic sign on carpark floor.
18.13.1 Coating System
Apply two (2) coats Chlorinated Rubber Base Roadline Paint. Application shall be
by brush or spray.
18.14 APPLICATION
The Contractor to observe the following sequences in the carrying out of the
painting and coating works.
a. Colour
Consecutive undercoats of the same colour must not be applied. Where

two(2) finishing coats are specified, these must be of the same colour.
b. Porosity Sealing
The Contractor to consult the Architect in the following circumstances:
1 The adequacy of primers to suit porosity of surfaces is doubted, or,

2 One(1) full coat of sealer or alkali resistant primer emulsion paint is
JKT05 SS18/13
insufficient to satisfy the porosity of the surface to which it is to be

applied, or
3 The sealing-in of materials harmful to a subsequently-applied paint
system.
c. Priming Generally
1 Apply priming coats by brush, unless other methods are specifically

permitted.
2 Wood primer into surface, joints, angles.
3 Ensure that priming coats are of adequate thickness, especially on
sharp angles and edges. Obtain the Architect's approval to thin
materials slightly, if necessary, to suit surface porosity.
4 Ensure that any primed surfaces which have deteriorated on Site, or in
transit, are cleaned and touched up or rubbed down and re-primed so
as to present a satisfactory surface for further applications of paint.
d. Undercoats and Finishing Coats
Apply in a wet even film over all surfaces, ensuring adequate thickness at
edges and angles, and avoiding excessive brush marks, sags, runs, orange-
peel and other defects.
e. Brush Painting
Lay off all areas evenly and ensure that brush marks have been minimised.
f. Roller Painting
Use foamed plastic or short pile sheepskin rollers. Use brushes for cutting-
in. The following must not be applied with rollers:
1 External paintwork
2 Priming coats
3 Work not of a simple character
4 Where specifically described to be brush or spray painted
g. Spray Painting
Use approved equipment with airless spray methods. Do not spray where
soiling of adjacent surfaces cannot be prevented. Spray painting must be
utilised to all doors, and where shown on the Drawings.
JKT05 SS18/14
h. Masking When Spray Painting
Mask all adjoining surfaces and take all necessary precautions to prevent
contamination of adjoining areas by spray mist, and accumulation of vapour.
18.15 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
Before commencing any work, adjoining areas that are not to be painted, or have
been already painted, shall be properly protected.
Any finished surfaces which are stained or blemished, to be cleaned and made
good by the Contractor, to the satisfaction of the Architect, entirely at the
Contractor's expense.
The whole of the work is to be left in a clean and totally satisfactory condition on
completion, with all runs, splashes, etc cleaned off and made good to the
Architect's satisfaction. Provide adequate signage and barriers to protect the
general public, and to prevent damage to freshly applied coatings.
18.16 COATED ALUMINIUM SURFACES
The aluminium finish shall be unless specifically stated as other, a PVDF 4 coat
(Polyvinylidene Flouride) system colour as stated in the finishes schedule and as
approved by the Architect. High performance organic coatings to relevant BS &
AAMA and paint manufacturer’s specifications.
The surfaces of aluminium components to be coated shall be shop finished prior to

assembly in an approved PVDF four coat custom colour metallic finish. Min
Polyvinylidene resin content 70%.
Total dry-film thickness of the coating shall be 25microns minimum consisting of a

chromate conversion coating, an inhibitive primer and a top coat. The finished
product will be factory protected with self adhesive peel off foil. Non-visible
surfaces may be to colour to contractor's selection. To relevant BS.
The application of the selected finishes may either be carried out at the
Contractor's plant or by an approved Applicator. Any application shall be an
accredited Applicator for the paint system and materials being applied. All
applications are to be made by the same applicator.
Aluminium surfaces shall be thoroughly prepared in accordance with the approved

paint manufacturer's recommendation prior to the application of the paint. Care
shall be taken during handling after preparation has been carried out to ensure
that any part of the surfaces to be painted do not become contaminated with
grease.
JKT05 SS18/15
The approved paint system will comprise products of one (1) manufacturer
selected for suitability for the particular application and shall include all preparatory
and or priming coats, conforming to relevant AAMA.
The finish shall meet or exceed the requirements of relevant AAMA when tested
by an independent testing laboratory for the following properties:
a. adhesion
b. scratch resistance impact
c. cupping
d. resistance to mortar
e. resistance to acetic acid/salt spray
f. resistance to humidity
g. weathering
18.17 INTUMESCENT COATING FOR STEEL STRUCTURE
18.17.1 SURFACE REQUIREMENT
The mild steel surface has to be shop-primed and applied with epoxy-based anti-
rust primer by the Steel Supplier prior to application of our coating systems.
18.17.2 DETERMINATION OF DFT
To establish the DFT required for the specified time period of fire resistance, it is
necessary to correlate the Hp/A values with the DFT from the “Size of steel material
and film thickness” chart
18.17.3 APPLICATION SPECIFICATIONS
The coating system shall comply with the following application specifications: -
Undercoat:
Apply 1 coat of SK Tighca Coat Primer OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT, a two-
component high build epoxy-polyamide cured primer, by brush/ roller to achieve a
spreading rate of 0.15- 0.25 kg/m2.
Allow minimum 8 hours over-coating interval.
Base coat:
Apply 2-3 coats of SK Tighca Coat Base OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT, a low
JKT05 SS18/16
conductivity intumescent coating with foaming property comprising ammonium

polyphoshate, multivalent alcohol, special acrylic resin and blowing agent, as an
insulating layer against heat transfer to the structural steel, by spray to achieve
the spreading rate of 1.00 kg/m2/coat (to achieve 500 micron/coat).
Allow minimum 16 hours over-coating interval
Topcoat:
Apply 2 coats of SK Tighca Topcoat OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT, an
environmental-friendly water-based acrylic reactive type paint forming by chemical
cross-linking structure, by roller to achieve a spreading rate of 0.25 – 0.35 kg/ m2.
Allow 24 hours for final curing.
18.17.4 TECHNICAL DATA
Undercoat Base coat Topcoat

Specific gravity 1.30 ± 0.05 1.32 ± 0.03 1.30 – 0.50
Flash Point Approx. 20oC - -
Dry film thickness 40-60 microns Depends on fire 40-55 microns
rating period
Solid content 66 ± 3% 66 ± 3% 60 ± 3%
Viscosity 10 ± 5ps/30oC 1.5 ± 0.2 pa/s 20oC 15 – 60ps/ 30oC
Thinner EH Thinner SK Tighca Coat Base -
Thinner
No of components Two Two One
No of coats One Two
Coverage 0.15-0.25 kg/m2 1.00 kg/m2/coat 0.25 – 0.35 kg/m2
Over-coating Min. 8 hrs Min. 16 hours 3 hours
interval
Method of By spray/ roll/ By airless spray By spray/ roll/
Application brush brush
Submit the following samples for Architect’s acceptance prior to ordering

materials.
a. A 3.0m x 3.0m panel of each of the paint or coating systems in a location to

be agreed upon with the Architect.
b. A 3.0m long sample of the paint system on any frame or tube or other
building element/component to be agreed upon with the Architect.
JKT05 SS18/17
18.19 INDEMNITY FOR EXTERNAL PAINTING WORKS
Prior to commencement of external painting works, the Contractor shall lodge with
the Architect a 5-year indemnity against defects in the external painting works and
10-year indemnity against defects in intumescent coating to steel structures.
The defects shall include but not limited to watertightness, peeling, bubbling,
cracking, disintegration of materials, patchy discolorationn, flakey or powdery
surfaces, uneven loss in gloss or brightness or colour fade.
Under this indemnity, the Contractor will be required to make good any defects
and failure in the materials or installation and will be responsible for any
consequential loss attributable to any failure in the external painting works during
the warranty period.
If in the opinion of the Contractor, the Specifications are insufficient for him to give
the specified indemnity then the Contractor shall allow in his tender for upgrading
the Specifications as necessary to enable him to so indemnify.
18.20 RATES
The description of and rate of each item of painting and coating work included in
the Supplementary Schedule of Rates will be held to include for preliminary
preparatory work to the surface required before the application of any material, all
multi-coloured work and cutting to line and rubbing down between coats, the
provision, erection and removal of scaffolding, the protection and/or masking of
floors, fittings and the like, removing and replacing door and window furniture and
removing splash and spray marks, and for painting and coating in different tints
from wall to wall and/or room to room.
The description of and rate of each item of painting and coating to piping, included
in the Supplementary Schedule of Rates will be held to include for painting on all
fittings, stop-cocks, clips, brackets, grounds, etc. and for painting colour bands.
18.21 FOR ALL INTERNAL WALLS AND CEILING – WITH GREEN LABEL
CERTIFICATION
Low VOC, low odour, stain resistant and anti-bacterial property water based silicon
emulsion paint
The painting system shall comply with the following application specifications: -
JKT05 SS18/18
Primer
Apply 1 coat of a water-based, low VOC low odour acrylic sealer/ primer designed
for application to both exterior and interior of old and new masonry, plastered
painted surfaces, by roller/ brush to achieve a spreading rate of 0.15 – 0.20 kg/
m2/coat. Allow 2 hours drying time.
Top Coat
Apply 2 coats of a water-based, low VOC, excellent staining resistant, dirt
resistant emulsion paint of less than 1% (Volatile Organic Content) low odour
environmental-friendly coating incorporating special silicon resin, by roller/ brush
to achieve a spreading rate of 0.25 – 0.30 kg/ m2/coat. Allow 2 hours drying time
before re-coating. Allow 24 hours for final curing.
The said paint system shall possess the following performance test data: -
Test Item Result Requirements
Condition inside a Passed When stirred, it makes uniform

container condition without any hard lumps
Workability Passed There shall be no difficulties when
applying two coats
Low temperature stability (- Passed No deterioration observed
5oC)
Drying Normal Passed 2 hours maximum
Time condition
(hrs.) 5 C Passed 4 hours maximum
Appearance of Film Passed Normal in appearance of paint film
Contrast ratio (%) (white 97 93% minimum
and light color)
Water Resistance Passed No damage observed when
immersed in water for 96 hours
Alkali Resistance Passed No damage observed when
immersed in the saturated solution
of calcium hydroxide for 48 hours
Washability Passed No damage observed after
washing 500 times
Accelerated weather Passed The degree of chalking shall be 1
resistance point or lower. There shall be free
from blister, peeling and crack, as
well as free from remarkable
change of colour compared with
evaluation sample.
At least 75% of all paints and coatings, by volume or surface area, meet the VOC
emissions evaluation and 100% meet the VOC content evaluation as per LEED
Gold Standard requirements
JKT05 SS18/19
18.22 PREPARATION AND PAINTING
All surfaces are to be properly prepared to Architect’s approval and as directed on

site before painting commences and the Contractor shall include in his prices for
all preparation and for the use of de-rusting and de-greasing solutions (either
dipping, spraying, brushing or other application) and thorough washing and
cleansing of the surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by
the Architect. If after thorough preparation surfaces remain powdery, seal with one
coat of an appropriate primer to Architect’s satisfaction.
Every coat of paint must be thoroughly dry and rubbed down with fine sand paper
where necessary before any subsequent coat is applied.
The description of preparation and painting hereunder is for general guidance but
the Contractor will be expected to comply with the detailed recommendations of
the manufacturer and his prices will be deemed to include for this.
a) Cement and Sand plastered Surfaces Internally
Plastered surfaces are to be carefully rubbed down smooth to remove all loose
particles and efflorescence. All cracks and other imperfections shall be cut out
and make good with suitable plaster and painted. The first coat is sealing coat
and shall be thinned in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and the remaining coats applied neat. Paint one coat alkali
resisting primer, one undercoat and two coats emulsion paint.
b) Wood work to be stained and Varnished
Generally, all internal wood work including external doors and windows are to
be stained and applied with three coats polyurethane varnish.
c) Wood work to be Painted
Preparation:
New unprimed wood work shall be clean from dirt, grease, etc rubbed down or
scraped smooth and dusted off.
Priming:
A think coat of best patent knotting shall be applied to all knots and allowed to
harden. The surface shall then be primed.
Stopping :
When the primer is hard all cracks, holes, open joints and other imperfections
shall be made good with hard stopping of the following type :-
JKT05 SS18/20
- Best washed whiting and boiled linseed oil, well kneaded together with at
least 10% ground white lead in oil worked into;
- Plaster wood or equivalent cellulose stopper;
- Water-mixed proprietary fillers (internally only).
All wood work shall be carefully sanded down after filling and stopping.
Undercoats and Finishing Coat :

Interior wood work is to be prepared and painted with one priming coat, one
undercoat and two finishing coat in synthetic paints (or oil colours if so required
by the particular specification).
e) Clear Finishes to Internal Woodwork
Internal woodwork requiring a clear finish shall be filled with an approved filler
coloured to match the natural wood colour. The following finishes shall be
applied as required by the particular specification.
- Paint with 2 coats of approved teak oil at 24 hour intervals.
- Prime with 1 coat of uncoloured shellac, sand lightly and wax polish with 2
coats applied at 4 hour intervals using a soft line free cloth and finish to an
eggshell finish with a soft bristled brush.
f) Calcium, Silicate Plasterboard Ceiling
All mortar or plaster splashes, etc shall be removed from the plasterboard by
careful scraping, any oil or grease spots shall be removed with white spirit, all
holes shall be filled with gypsum plaster and the whole surfaces brushed down
to remove dust and other loose materials.
18.23 POLYURETHANE COATING
Prepare and apply two coats of Hi-pac P510 or other approved polyurethane
coating to walls and must be carried out by a Specialist approved by the Architect
and in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.
Samples of the polyurethane finish works must be submitted to the Architect for
approved prior to the commencement of the works, The spray coat is to have
complete anti-fungal and weather resistant properties.
JKT05 SS18/21
18.24 REPAINTING EXISTING WORK
Where existing work is required to repainted, this shall be prepared by thoroughly

scraping and sanding down to base plaster, wood, etc and wiping free from dust.
Where existing plaster is rough in texture, remove all loose paint by vigorous wire
brushing. All works except preparation shall be specified above for new materials
to be printed.
After preparation, fungus infected plaster is to be washed with approved fungicide

solution.
18.25 RATES
Rates for painting are to include for all necessary preparation of the surfaces
including cleaning off, and sand papering wood wok, wire brushing metal and
leaving all surfaces free from dust, rust, grease and oil before painting. In addition
rates shall include for additional scaffolding required, all extra labour involved in
external or internal work and all cutting in to line narrow widths and girths.
Rates shall also include for carrying out all works in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions and for using the correct undercoat and the correct
shades.
Rates for painting to walls, soffits, etc are to include for painting two finishing coats
to all electrical cables, battens, roses, etc to match the colour of the surface to
which they are fixed.
18.26 PROTECTION
Adequately protect freshly applied surfaces from any damage.
Display “WET PAINT” signs and provide adequate protective barriers whenever
and wherever necessary.
Mask all adjoining surfaces when spray painting is applied.
Provide portable extract fans to ventilate the area while spray painting is carried
out and to prevent spray painting from emitting into air-con diffuser or exhaust
grille.
JKT05 SS18/22
18.27 WARRANTY PERIOD
All paint and paint work shall have a 5 years warranty against discoloration
peeling, blistering, flaking, cracking and any other forms of unacceptable defects
except general wear and tear. If such defects are detected, the contractor shall
scrape off the all faulty paint and reprime and repaint the areas involved as in
accordance with the specification. Upon completion of the remedial works, the
new repainted area shall have a 5 years warranty dated from the day of
completion of the remedial painting.
SS019_Siphonic Roof Drainage System
JKT05 SS19/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 19 - SIPHONIC ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM
SECTION 19
19.0 SIPHONIC ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM
19.1 GENERALLY
All materials and workmanship the best of their respective kinds subject to the
inspection by the Architect at any stage shall be of manufacture or erection and shall
comply with the latest relevant Singapore Standard unless otherwise stated and the
relevant Singapore Standard Code of Practice or equivalent British Standards and
codes. All samples shall be supplied free of charge.
This section specifies the requirements necessary for the design, manufacture,
supply, installation, testing & commissioning, warranty of Siphonic Roof Drainage
System for the conveyance of rainwater from the roof to ground discharge point via
connection to the drainage system for the whole project.
The Siphonic Specialist shall be responsible to design, supply and install the complete
Siphonic Roof Drainage System. The Specialist shall do the installation of the
complete Siphonic Roof Drainage System where no sub-letting of installation works is
allowed in this system.
All Siphonic systems must carry an international recognized certificate (e.g. British
Board of Agreement Certificates or PSB Test Certificate) or equivalent local
Standards.
Location of application: Siphonic system shall be applicable to Main building block and
ancillary buildings with building height more than 6m.
19.2 PRODUCTS
19.2.1 Standard
The Siphonic system shall generally be designed and installed in accordance with
Singapore Standard SS 525 (Code of Practice for Roof Drainage) and relevant British
/ local Standards.
Siphonic system shall be Fast Flow Siphonic system or approved equivalent system.
19.2.2 Prevailing Condition
The system shall be designed and manufactured to meet the specified performances
and requirements on dimension, thickness and visual appearance, and fit for the
prevailing local weather conditions. The roof rainwater shall discharge effectively from
the collection points to the discharge points upon completion. Pipes and fittings must
meet the local manufacturer’s performance specification.
JKT05 SS19/2
The Siphonic Roof Drainage System proposed by the Specialist must have a track
record of system design, supply and install in Singapore for at least 10 years c/w job
reference in Singapore and have a track record in the world market for more than 10
years.
19.3 DESIGN PARAMETER
The Primary Siphonic System shall be designed to a dimensional rainfall intensity of

330mm/hr in accordance with Singapore Standard SS525 (CP for Roof: Code of
Drainage) or equivalent local Standards. The Overflow Siphonic System shall be
designed to a dimensional rainfall intensity of 165mm/hr or approved equivalent.
19.4 DESIGN VELOCITY
The minimum flow velocity in the system shall not be less than 0.7 m/s for horizontal
pipes and 2.2 m/s for vertical pipes.
When the system is operating at its design intensity, the high velocity of the water will
ensure the system is performing self-cleansing inside the pipeline.
Self-cleansing shall also occur at the rainfalls as low as 50% of the design intensity. At
rainfalls less than the Siphonic roof drainage system shall operate under vented
gravity flow conditions.
19.5 OUTLET CONSTRUCTION
The Siphonic outlet shall be the proven product evident with design technical data (ref
BBA Certificate or PSB Certificate), performance graph, test certificate, etc for primary
acceptance.
The system design shall also ensure that the outlets eliminate the intake of air into the
system. This set up full-bore flow and maximizes the capacity of the pipe work. All
exposed to weather component of the rain water outlet shall be of full metallic
construction for good weathering & durability.
19.5.1 Siphonic Outlet Based Unit Construction
The Siphonic outlet base plate shall be of stainless steel body complete with
aluminium alloy leaf guard & air baffle. The siphonic outlet stainless steel base plate
shall not have a recess of more than 20mm into the roof slab/metal gutter in order not
to interfere with the structure element.
19.5.2 Siphonic Outlet Interfacing Unit On Rc Roof/Scupper
JKT05 SS19/3
The Siphonic outlets shall come complete with stainless steel water proofing clamp
ring for water-tight interfacing with waterproofing material on RC roof/ scupper
construction.
Water-proofing material shall terminate within the base plate unit of the Siphonic outlet
and properly secured by the stainless steel water proofing clamping ring complete with
stainless steel bolts and nuts for water-tightness construction. Water proofing
membrane shall not rap into the outlet spigot as this will reduce the effective bore of
the siphonic outlet.
19.5.3 Siphonic Outlet Interfacing Unit On Metal Roor/Gutter
Siphonic outlets shall come complete with aluminium counter flange and EPDM water
seal for outlet installation on metal gutter for water-tightness requirement on Metal
roof/ gutter construction. Silicon joint as primary with tightness barrier for outlet
installation on metal gutter is not acceptable.
All aluminium flanges and EPDM insulation should be properly secured with the base
plate unit of the Siphonic outlet complete with stainless steel bolts and nuts for water-
tightness construction.
19.6 DESIGN CALCULATION
The Siphonic system shall be designed by computer program specifically developed

for this field or system and certified by either BBA or PSB in accordance to SS525
requirement.
System design shall be supported by calculation report generated for each designed
system. Details of in-line components contained within each system shall also be
clearly indicated. The calculation report shall show clearly the following:
• Drainage capacity
• Velocity
• Upstream pressure
• Downstream pressure
• Headloss
The calculation report must clearly indicate the system imbalance in separate
sections. In system more than one outlet, the imbalance in the system should not
exceed 10% of the hydraulic head (m) or 0.5m, whichever the smaller.
19.7 OUTLET SIZING
The Siphonic system shall be designed by selecting suitable size and quantity of outlet
to accommodate the computed rainfall. The computed flow from an individual outlet
shall not exceed the specified maximum capacity for each outlet type size.
JKT05 SS19/4
19.8 PIPES & FITTINGS
The pipe material shall be of cast iron pipe to comply with the performance
specification for DIN 1691 or EN877 standard and carry a British Board of Agreement
Certificates for the total pipe system. All cast iron pipes and fittings are finished
externally with red oxide primer. Internally, pipes and fittings are finished with
corrosion resistant epoxy coating. The pipe material should also meet the requirement
as stated by the System Technical Manual of Siphonic Roof Drainage System.
The selection of pipes & fittings must be able to withstand a working sub atmospheric
pressure of –0.9bar.
Siphonic System moulded or fabricated pipe fittings must be capable of either resisting
longitudinal forces without sliding apart or must be restrained to prevent relative
movement to the Siphonic Specialist’s requirement.
Sharp radius bends in excess of 45 degrees deviation from the direction of flow should
not be used.
The Siphonic Roof Drainage System shall be designed to use Cast Iron pipe and
fittings subject to withstand both positive and negative pressure required by the
system.
19.9 EXECUTION SUBMITTAL
19.9.1 Sample
The Specialist shall submit sample of all major and minor material classified under
the Siphonic Roof Drainage system scope of supply. Sample submits shall be
accompanied with relevant Product data, such as catalogue, technical data as the
supporting documents for review & approval.
19.9.2 Shop Drawing
The Contractor shall submit 3 sets of Shop drawings & Typical Installation Details
showing outlets position, pipe routes, location and length of each pipe size, including
all relevant details of accessories and assemblies complete with Engineering
Calculation with PE Endorsement for approval before construction.
19.9.3 Work Program
The Specialist shall submit a detail Work Program with referenced to Master Work
Program depicts the interfacing works elaborated with the Builder and their scope of
works.
JKT05 SS19/5
19.9.4 As Built Drawing
The Specialist shall submit the As-Built Shop drawings upon the completion of
installation and handing over of the system for permanent operation.
19.10 INSTALLATION
19.10.1 Pipe Work
All pipe works shall be fabricated, assembled, jointed and supported as per pipe
manufacturer’s recommendation & requirements subject to the material chosen and
confirmed by the Architect.
19.10.2 Changed Of Design (During Site Installation)
The contractor shall maintain all pipes installation is as per system designed. Any
changed of piping re-route, level, dimension deviated from the approved shop
drawings which might be significantly affected the performance shall be reconfirm by
System calculation and gain approval by the System designer and Architect.
The Siphonic Specialist must have its own in-house Design and Operation
Department based in Singapore or Indonesia. The specialist must submit its
company profile and CV of staffs within Singapore or Indonesia to facilitate the
design and installation of the project.
19.10.3 System Protection During Construction Period
The Builder shall be notified by a method of statement to ensure any possible

entries of debris and foreign material likely to affect the system performance during
the construction period.
19.10.4 Temporary Drainage
The system shall not be utilized as temporary roof drainage system during the
construction period.
19.11 TESTING & COMMISSIONING
19.11.1 Leak Check (Outlet)
The Specialist shall conduct the Leak Check to the outlet during the roof water
proofing ‘Ponding Test’ by ensuring proper jointing and water tightness around
outlets.
19.11.2 Leak Test (Pipe Line)
The Specialist shall conduct flow test to all pipe works and visual inspection to
ensure proper jointing at all joints is maintained.
JKT05 SS19/6
19.11.3 Performance Test
The Specialist shall conduct at least one dynamic flow test to ensure proper
discharging from collection points to discharge points.
19.12 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
In accordance to SS525, the maintenance of the surrounding roof slab or gutter is

the responsibility of the Building Owner.
The Specialist shall conduct visual inspection at no additional cost to ensure proper
performance of the Siphonic Roof Drainage. The Specialist shall inspect and
maintain all Siphonic roof outlets installed in the building including cleaning of outlet
surface caused by build-up of debris, where necessary. Water flow test will be
conducted for the pipe works where water point is available on the respective roof.
19.12.1 Accessibility Of Roof & Gutter
The Specialist shall be able to gain access to all RC flat roof / metal gutter to
conduct visual inspection and maintenance of the roof outlets.
The roof drain to be covered with removable wire mesh to control Birds harborage
19.13 PRESSURISED DRAINAGE SYSTEM
This section specifies the requirements necessary for the design, supply and
installation of the Pressurised Drainage System for the conveyance of rainwater
from the terraces, balconies, corridors, planters, lobby etc to ground discharge point
via connection to the drainage system for the whole project.
The Contractor shall carry out the installation of the complete Pressurized Drainage
System to be in accordance to the Manufacturer’s design requirement /
recommendation.
19.14 RELATED WORK
This section shall be used in conjunction with, but not limited to, the other relevant
specifications, the Drawings and Contract Documents to establish the total
requirements for the installation of the Pressurised Drainage System.
In the event of conflict regarding the roof drainage system requirements between
this section and any other document, the more stringent requirement shall apply,
unless otherwise specifically instructed by the Architect.
JKT05 SS19/7
19.15 DESIGN AND PRODUCTS STANDARD
The Siphonic system shall generally be designed and installed in accordance with
Singapore Standard SS 525 (CP for Roof Drainage) or equivalent local Standards.
19.16 DESIGN PARAMETER
The effective catchment area for the covered balcony should be taken as half the
exposed vertical area of the wall up to a maximum height of 10m at a dimensional
rainfall intensity of 165mm/hr in compliance with SS525 : Code of Drainage Practice
(or equivalent local Standards).
19.17 SCHEMATIC DESIGN DIAGRAM
The Contractor shall produce Schematic Design diagram for the Pressurised
Drainage System complete with PE Endorsement for approval before construction to
verify that the drainage capacity of each System is in accordance to the
Manufacturer’s recommendation.
19.18 PRESSURISED SYSTEM’S COMPONENTS
The Pressurised Drainage System shall comprise of the following components :-
a. Anti backflow junction
Roof outlet at each balcony shall be connected to a main rainwater downpipes

(rwdps) which eliminates the risk of water overflowing from balcony outlets which are
linked to RWDPs.
b. Siphonic terrace outlet
All open to sky area shall be provided with siphonic terrace outlet. The outlet
consists of epoxy coated aluminum alloy body, stainless steel edging frame and
epoxy coated aluminum alloy air baffle to the Manufacturer’s details.
c. Siphonic balcony outlet
All balcony shall be provided with siphonic balcony outlet. The outlet consists of
epoxy coated aluminium alloy body, stainless steel edging frame and stainless steel
tile tray to the Manufacturer’s details.
The above components shall be hydraulically tested and validated by PSB, complete
with are port that verify the drainage capacity of each component.
19.19 PIPES & FITTINGS
JKT05 SS19/8
The pipe material to be used in this project for Pressurised Drainage System shall
be UPVC pipes material (external & underground in cast iron material) in
accordance to SS525 (CP for Roof Drainage) standard or equivalent local Standards
to be approved by the Architect.
Pipe joints must be capable of either resisting longitudinal forces without sliding
apart or must be restrained to prevent relative movement.
19.20 EXECUTION SUBMITTAL
19.20.1 Sample
The Contractor shall submit sample of all Components. Sample submits shall be
accompanied with relevant Product data, such as catalogue, PSB Report as the
supporting documents for review & approval before installation works commence on
site.
19.20.2 Shop Drawing
The Contractor shall submit 3 sets of Shop drawings, Schematic Design Diagram &
Typical Installation Details showing outlets position, pipe routes, location and length
of each pipe size, including all relevant details of accessories and assemblies.
19.20.3 As Built Drawing
The Contractor shall submit the As-Built Shop drawings upon the completion of
installation and handing over of the system for permanent operation.
19.21 INSTALLATION
19.21.1 Pipe Work
All pipe works shall be fabricated, assembled, jointed and supported as per pipe
manufacturer’s recommendation & requirements subject to the material chosen and
recommended by the Manufacturer to be approved by the Architect.
19.21.2 System Protection During Construction Period
The Contractor shall submit method of statement to ensure any possible entries of
debris and foreign material likely to affect the system performance during the
construction period.
19.21.3 Temporary Drainage
The system shall not be utilized as temporary roof drainage system during the
construction period unless otherwise obtained written approval from the Architect
JKT05 SS19/9
19.22 TESTING & COMMISSIONING
19.22.1 Leak Test (Pipe Line)
The Contractor shall conduct flow test to all pipe works and visual inspection to
ensure proper jointing at all joints is maintained.
19.22.2 Performance Test
The Contractor shall conduct at least one dynamic flow test to ensure proper
discharging from collection points to discharge points.
SS020_Signage
JKT05 SS20/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 20 - SIGNAGE
SECTION 20
20.0 SIGNAGES
20.1 GENERALLY
Design, supply and installation of Internal, External, Code Compliant, Cautionary,

and Emergency Escape Signage will be the responsibility of the contractor and
shall be included in the lump sum. Other signage will be covered in the provisional
sum included in this contract
a. The Contractor shall provide signage as per the following documents:
• Owner’s Building Signage Guidelines for New Construction
• Owner’s Site Signage Guidelines for New Construction
• drawing schedule and Owner’s Signage Guidelines
b. All Code Compliant and Cautionary signages shall be bilingual (English and
Bahasa) unless specified otherwise.
c. Font to be SEGOE (07-03) as per Owner’s Standards. The font size may
vary as per signage type.
d. Symbols and arrows must match artwork indicated in drawings/Microsoft

Signage Guidelines
e. Where indicated, the company logo shall be the official company logo, as
provided by the Owner in camera ready or digital medium

manufacturer's name or catalogue reference, the Contractor may propose its
equivalent alternative, subject to the written confirmation of the Architect.
Contractor shall review the Signage Schedule for correct copy context and
directional arrows in relationship to floor plan. Note recommended changes in
shop drawing submittals.
20.2 MOCK UP SAMPLE OF FINISH WORK
The Contractor shall erect full size mock up samples of all signage’s and obtain
approval before proceeding with the rest of the works.
JKT05 SS20/2
20.3 DEFECTIVE WORKS AND SIGNAGES
The Architect reserves right to instruct the demolition and reproduction of all
signage’s considered substandard or wrongly produced as determined from
design, drawings, visual inspection, etc.
If for any reason in the opinion of the Architect these defective works are not
practical or convenient to remedy, the Architect shall ascertain the diminution in
the value of the Works due to the existence of such defects and deduct such
amounts from monies due to the Contractor or he may choose to impose an
amount as penalty.
20.4 REQUIREMENTS
All signage’s shall be carried out according to the specified Standards and Codes
of Practice and shall comply with all Building and Safety Regulations including
latest Building Control Act (or equivalent local authority Regulations/ Standards).
The Contractor shall liable for any defects/damages arising out of non-conformity
and all necessary remedial works shall be carried out at Contractor’s own cost
and time.
The Contractor shall take into account any constraints or effects imposed by the
existing works and services in the surrounding areas and works of other nearby
contractors.
The Contractor shall also submit the necessary shop drawings and obtained
approval from the Architect prior to order, fabrication and installation.
The Contractor shall co-ordinate and work closely with the Architect.
20.5 SIGNAGE INSTALLATION
The Contractor shall submit 3 sets of paper prints and 1 set of re-producible of
complete shop drawings of all signs to Architect for approval before fabrication.
Full size details of all exposed edges, joints between materials and details which
affect the appearance shall be included. Prints of copy layouts with white
letterings on black background shall also be provided.
The shop drawings to be submitted by the Contractor shall contain sufficient

information as to enable the Architect to check the Contractor’s proposals for
compliance with the Specification and to assess the soundness and suitability of
the proposed construction with regard for the purpose for which it is intended.
The details shall include but not necessary be limited to the following items:
JKT05 SS20/3
a. Various sectional views of components, fully dimensioned and

accompanied with detailed description of parts of each components;
b. Type of each material used;
c. Thickness or gauge of members;
d. Type of finish;
e. Jointing details showing how composite units are to be connected together;
f. Mounting details of sign units to the door, floor, ceiling or wall where
appropriate.
The shop drawings shall include instructions and explanatory details for the
sequence of fabrication, assembly, erection and the installation of all materials
and elements.
20.5.2 Sample
The Contractor shall submit mock-up samples of layout and choice of colours for
each sign for approval before commencement of fabrication. If the Contractor fails
to comply with the above, the Architect reserves the right to either reject the
whole or part of the works and he shall not be granted any extension of time and
compensation whatsoever to that respect.
All samples shall be labelled, tagged or otherwise clearly identified and each label
shall have sufficient clear space to permit the application of any approval stamp
by the Architect.
All technical information, catalogue and other manufacturers’ products related to

the works shall be submitted. Only materials, components and accessories that
have been approved in writing by the Architect shall be used and installed in the
works.
Before mass production of the signs, samples of each sign shall be put up on
Sites for actual viewing and inspection of the Architect. The Contractor shall allow
for modification and adjustment of sample and in advance cases rejection of the
sample in his tender price. No mass production is allowed until the sample is
approved. Any relay in approval due to the sample not being to the satisfaction of
the Architect will be responsibility of the Contractor.
20.5.3 Erection
Signage works shall be installed and erected in accordance with the approved
shop drawings. All signs shall be fastened securely in correct vertical and
horizontal alignment.
The Contractor shall use fixing and jointing methods, types and spacings of
fastening which are suitable having regard to : -
a. Nature of and compatibility with product / material being fixed and fixed to;
JKT05 SS20/4
b. Recommendations of manufacturers of fastenings and manufacturers of

product / material being fixed to fixed to;
c. Materials and loads to be supported;
d. Conditions expected in use;
e. Aesthetics and appearance;
No short-fired fixing shall be allowed. Power actuated fasteners shall not be used
unless approved by the Architect.
All work shall be installed square, plumb, straight, true to line or radius, accurately
fitted and located, with flush type hairline joints (except as indicated otherwise or
to allow for thermal movement), with provisions for specialist’s contractor, thermal
movement and exclusion of water as required for a secure and rigid installation,
all in accordance with the approved shop drawings.
The Contractor shall protect all metalwork and subsequently remove all protective
applications and clean prior to completion of the works.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for ensuring total co-ordination of all
work and shall take site measurements prior to preparation of any shop drawings
or before commencing fabrication.
20.5.4 Final Location of Signages
The Contractor shall work out precisely the location of signs to be installed, with
reference to the drawings and Owner’s Signage Guidelines and allow ample time
for verification and confirmation of locations, positions and methods of display
before commencement of installation of signs on Sites.
If the Contractor proceeds with installation of signs on Sites without verification

and confirmation, the Architect reserves the right to relocate and reposition the
signs without additional costs. The Contractor shall make good damaged existing
works arising out of relocations and repositions, at this own cost. The Architect
reserves the right to change the positions of signs whenever necessary.
20.5.5 Fixing / Fastening / Adhesives
Unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the Architect, all sign units which are to
be floor, ceiling mounted or wall projected shall be mounted with fixing-screws of
corrosion resistant material, in sufficient numbers as to render the structure firmly
held in place, stable and free from being toppled. In this regard, all exposed or
visible screws and other fasteners shall be steel or heavily chromed brass or
galvanised steel. Ordinary mild steel screws, bolts and nuts and such like
fasteners that are not corrosion resistant shall not be permitted.
Unless otherwise specified, fastening shall be as follows: -
JKT05 SS20/5
a. Signs built into concrete or masonry shall be anchored with galvanised

steel strap anchors, shop welded on.
b. Signs attached to concrete or masonry shall be fixed with welds or bolts

embedded into inserts or expansion shields.
c. Signs attached to metals (other than structural steel) shall be anchored by

bolts or screws.
d. Signs attached to structural steel shall be anchored by welds or bolts and

attached to metals other than structural steel shall be anchored by bolts or
screws. Power actuated fasteners are not permitted unless approved by
the Architect.
Additional frame support shall be provided by the Contractor if necessary at no

extra cost to the Employer to ensure stability and durability of the signs.
Fastenings for all materials and components are to be aluminium alloy or non-
magnetic stainless steel unless otherwise specified. Self tapping screws and nails
shall be aluminium or stainless steel.
Length of fastenings shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendations but

otherwise.
a. Nails are to be not less than 25mm or 2½ times the thickness of the
member through which nails are being driven, whichever the greater.
b. Screws are to be not less than 12mm or twice the thickness of the member
through which the screws are being driven whichever is the greater.
c. Regardless of these specific minimum lengths, fastenings are to be not

longer than the total thickness of the members being joined, less 5mm.
d. Adhesives shall be of the type recommended by the manufacturer of the

product being fixed and fixed to and approved by the Architect.
20.5.6 Joints and Edges
Unless otherwise directed by the Architect, all joints and edges shall be pointed
with an approved coloured silicone sealant. Sealants shall be applied in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions with backer rods where
necessary. All surfaces to receive sealant shall be thoroughly cleaned; excess
material and spillage shall be cleaned and removed.
The joints for each and every material shall be accurately set, cut and neatly
executed and finished with no protrusion, gaps or misalignment. The joints shall
be of stout and sturdy construction to match the purpose for which it is intended.
JKT05 SS20/6
20.6 SILK SCREENING PRINTING
20.6.1 Materials
Silk screen inks shall be of an appropriate quality for the material and finish on
which they are applied. The finish for inks on face-screened surfaces shall be
semi-matt (egg shell).
a. Hue Translucent Inks
Where a specified hue is applied for translucent illumination, the ink must match
that hue when lit.
b. Hue-Face Illumination
i. Where a specified hue is applied for face illumination, the ink shall
match that hue for daylight and colour-corrected ambient lighting
conditions.
ii. Ink hue shall not be affected adversely by the presence or lack of ultra-
violet radiation or of other rays in the spectrum.
iii. There inks are screened onto acrylic to an exact match in hue and
finish with other surface coatings, the resistance to weathering of both
coatings must be consistent in order to retain the match of hue and
finish.
iv. Inks, shall withstand detergent cleaning, rain, humidity, heat and other
ambient conditions.
20.6.2 Workmanship
a. Preparation of Surfaces
Ensure that all surfaces to be screened shall be free from imperfections. Remove
dirt, dust and grease and treat acrylic materials with anti-static cleaner.
b. Application
i. Ink application shall be flat, evenly distributed over the printed area and
free from spotting, marks or imperfections.
ii. Silk-screened graphic content shall be sharp-edged without any

bleeding.
iii. Light colours shall not be printed over dark colours. In the case of face
screening, the light colour shall be block-printed and dark colour stencil-
screened on top. For reverse screening, the dark colour is stencil-
screened first and the light colour behind.
JKT05 SS20/7
20.6.3 Registration
All printing, in particular multiple colour printing shall be carried out with true
registration.
20.6.4 Maintenance
During the Period of Maintenance, the Contractor shall ensure that all sign
system and all sign boxes are kept in good working condition and that at any time
when called upon shall replace all defective parts.
20.6.5 Acrylic
a. Submittal
i. Shop drawings, where required for relevant sign types shall show sizes,
dimensions, and profiles of acrylic sheet or block work.
ii. Samples displaying the available colour range and quality of the acrylic
sheets shall be submitted to Architect for approval before mass
production.
b. Materials
i. The acrylic supplied shall be free from specks, air bubbles, waves,
scratches, air-holes and other defects.
ii. Acrylic sheets shall have consistent transparency or translucency as

selected.
c. Installation & Workmanship
Corners shall be polished unless otherwise shown.
d. Hardware
Provide and install all incidental hardware necessary for the proper functioning of
the signs which shall be in stainless steel unless otherwise approved by the
Architect.
20.6.6 Close-Out Submissions
Upon completion of works and handover, the Contractor shall provide the
following items :
a. Reorder Forms – Provide complete reorder form in Excel format per the
Microsoft Standards; Building and Signage Guidelines for New
Construction, dated June 2013, including prices with types and
description to aid reorders after the date of Practical Completion.
b. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions – Submit installation template

and attachment devices.
JKT05 SS20/8
c. Signage Maintenance Manual – Submit maintenance instructions for the

different types of signages installed throughout the project.
SS021_Termite Control Treatment
JKT05 SS21/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 21 – TERMITE CONTROL TREATMENT
SECTION 21
21.0 ANTI-TERMITE SOIL TREATMENT
21.1 GENERALLY
The Contractor shall employ specialist pest control operator to carry out the anti-
termite soil treatment. The Contractor to note the requirements as stipulated by the
relevant Authorities for the protection of water catchments and the prevention of water
pollution when chlordane is used in soil treatment against termite.
All materials proposed and supplied must possess environmentally friendly attributes
and comply to the Green label product requirements with relevant certifications.
21.2 SCOPE OF WORK
The soil treatment shall be in accordance with internationally recognised standards as

outlined by the Standard Association of Australia (CA43-1966) or to the standard as
recognised by the Ministry of Environment (ENV).
a Areas to be Treated
The area to be treated are:

i. The entire ground floor slab area in contact with ground prior to the
laying of the concrete floor slab;
ii. The area surrounding all sides of column stumps extending to one
metre below the soil surface or to the top of the pile cap, whichever
is shallower.
iii. Two metres all round the building perimeter prior to concreting of
the apron area;
iv. Special impregnation of any perforations through substructures, etc.

including those for incoming pipes.
21.3 CLEARANCE
The pest control operators (PCOs) shall seek clearance from the Ministry of
Environment (ENV) before soil treatment is carried out. The PCOs must certify in
writing that the requirements as stipulated below can be complied with when they
apply to the Department for clearance or whichever requirement as imposed by the
ENV.
JKT05 SS21/2
21.4 SITE PLAN AND CHEMICALS USED
In applying for clearance, the following information shall be provided:
i. The address or lot number of the site together with a site plan showing area
to be treated.
ii. Estimated area for treatment.
iii. The estimated amount (litre) of chlordane used and its application rate
(dosage)
iv. A treatment schedule.
21.5 SITE PREPARATION
Water Table Test shall be carried out at site to determine ground water table. Soil
treatment shall not be carried out if the ground water table is less than 0.5m below
soil level.
21.5.1 Provision of Temporary Drainage
a Temporary drainage of adequate capacity shall be provided around the

whole area to be treated with an outlet at the lowest point. The drains shall
be kept clear of any blockage to ensure completed diversion of rainwater
from other areas.
b A sampling sump shall be provided at the outlet drain for the monitoring of
chlordane in the run-off.
Provision of Impervious Polythene Sheet
Impervious polythene sheet or its equivalent of sufficient quantity to cover the

whole area to be treated shall be kept on site for stand-by use.
21.6 APPLICATION PROCEDURES
When it rains during the course of soil treatment, all treated soil shall be covered
immediately with polythene sheet. The coverage shall extend one metre onto the
untreated area The polythene sheets especially their overlapping parts shall be
properly secured by heavy objects to ensure that all rain water runs into the
surrounding temporary drains.
When treating the soil, special care must be taken out to spray the chemical onto
the temporary drains.
21.7 LEACHATE PREVENTION
When soil treatment is completed, the treated soil shall be immediately covered
securely with the polythene sheet. As soon as practical, a layer of 50mm lean
JKT05 SS21/3
concrete shall be cast on top of the polythene sheet.
Soil treatment and concreting shall preferably be carried out on the same day or
on the following day, latest.
21.8 TIME OF APPLICATION
Soil treatment shall not be carried out when the soil is saturated or excessively
wet (e.g. during or after a rain) or when it is likely to rain. No soil treatment shall
be carried out after 6.00 PM.
21.9 CHEMICAL PREPARATION
Preparation of the chlordane shall be carried out within a kerb area under a roof
with no outlet to the open drain or a public sewer. All spillage shall be mopped up
with soil and the affected soil shall be added into the treated area.
Washing of hands, chemical containers, spraying equipment, etc., shall be carried

out in a wash area connected to a public sewer. At sites where the wash area is
not connected to public sewer, the washing wastewater shall be collected in
containers for reuse or transported to a specified premises for discharge into the
sewer. The wastewater containing chlordane, shall not be discharged into a septic
tank or an open drain.
21.10 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT
All equipment used in soil treatment shall be in good order and in serviceable
condition
21.11 PRECAUTIONARY MEASURES
Every precaution shall be taken to prevent accidental spillage of the chemical

Spillage shall be mopped up with soil or other absorbent materials The affected
soil shall be added to the treated area or kept in plastic bags for disposal at the
Ministry's dumping ground.
Uncovered chemicals shall not be left unattended at the worksite. All unwanted
chemicals and containers shall be disposed of at the Ministry's dumping ground.
Workers responsible for soil treatment shall take necessary precautionary

measures for personnel protection.
21.12 CERTIFICATION OF WORK DONE
When the treatment has been completed, the pest control operator responsible for
the treatment shall inform ENV, Head (Sewerage Department) in writing of the
following:
a A statement that treatment has been carried out in accordance with the
requirements as stipulated by the Department
JKT05 SS21/4
b The address or lot number of the site together with a site plan.
c The date on which treatment was completed.
d Amount of chlordane used.
21.13 CHEMICAL USED
The chemical to be used for the pre-treatment of the soil shall be the following:
a Chemical Dilution
Chlordane -100 % an aqueous emulsion at a concentration of one

percent(%) (2000ml to 200 litres of water)
b The prescribed dosage will be 5 litres to 1 sq.metre of soil surface for the
ground level portion of the barrier while the vertical barrier must provide a
continuous cover (5cm deep against the wall to be protected and either
joined up with the horizontal barrier at the upper and lower limits).
c Should the Ministry of Environment in their new regulation disapprove the

use of Chlordane. Chlorpyrifos 40% (2400ml to 200 litres of water) is to be
used, all to their approval.
21.14 INDEMNITY FOR ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT
Prior to commencement of anti-termite treatment works, the Contractor shall

lodge with the S.O. a 5-year indemnity covering free treatment against termite
infestation.
If in the opinion of the Contractor, the Specifications are insufficient for him to give
the specified indemnity then the Contractor shall allow in his tender for upgrading
the specifications as necessary to enable him to so indemnify.
SS022_Ironmongery
JKT05 SS22/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 22 - IRONMONGERY
SECTION 22
22.0 IRONMONGERY
22.1 GENERALLY

equivalent alternative, subject to the Architect written approval.
a. Ironmongery shall be approved satin stainless steel finish unless otherwise stated.
b. All locksets shall be equivalent to Assa Abloy, Dormakaba, Sargent, d-line or

contractors proposal to the approval of the Architect and shall be come complete
with 3 nos of individual keys. 2 nos of master key shall be provided to each and
every building
c. All locks shall be furnished with temporary cylinder at FOC during the construction
period and to be replaced and fixed with the permanent cylinder by the
manufacturer prior to handing over without additional cost.
d. No individual keys are to be released to any person without prior approval from
the Client.
e. All keys herein above mentioned must be systematically label with door locations
and submitted in sealed envelopes.
f. Contractor shall include approved rubber stopper to all toilet entrance doors and
glass doors. Contactor shall include approved magnetic doorstopper to all doors
except toilet entrance doors, glass doors and water closet cubicles.
h. All Locks, Cylinders and Lever Handles including Exit Device supplied shall be
under the same manufacturer carrying one warranty package from the same
group of companies.
i. The Contractor shall comply with the below listed regulatory requirements and
standards, and also submit valid certificates or approval list for the respective
products:
a) Singapore Fire Bureau (FSSD)

JKT05 SS22/2
b) Productivity & Standards Board (PSB)
c) Code on Barrier-Free Accessibility in Buildings
d) European Standards (CEN)
e) German DIN Fire Standards (DIN)
f) Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Standards
g) American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
h) Swedish Standards (SS)
Or equivalent local authority requirements & Standards
Carefully check and verify Ironmongery Schedule against all drawings to ensure the
ironmongery listed can function as specified. Inform the Architect of any
recommendations concerning quality, quantity, operation or function of ironmongery
selected, prior to submission of tender.
Ironmongery Schedule is a guide for location and type of ironmongery to be used and
is not necessarily an exact list of quantities or qualities required to complete the entire
project. The contractor shall complete, for review, a separate schedule based upon his
own assessment of the requirements.
Contractor is responsible to ensure that all ironmongery selected will function

satisfactorily and adequately for a quality office installation, and that it will meet with all
requirements of the local Building Code and jurisdictional authorities.
Ironmongery which fails to function satisfactorily by reason of improper selection or

installation, shall be replaced with proper ironmongery at the Contractor's expense,
including all remedial and installation costs. Door locations & opening orientations
shall be as shown in the architectural drawings.
Ironmongery on doors that are exposed to weathering shall be of outdoor quality, fully
weather resistant type. Ironmongery on all fire rated doors shall have the appropriate
fire rating to comply fully with the requirements of the Fire Safety Bureau.
Any ironmongery for public communal areas and other specific locations is to comply
with the Code on Barrier Free Accessibility in Buildings or local equivalent authority
requirements.
Ironmongery provision related to security services system: electronic control & alarm
system and emergency exit system (to local Fire Code compliance) i.e. Card access,
electric locks, exit devices, over-riding break glass control panel, panic exit, etc...,
JKT05 SS22/3
shall refer to M&E, Security Services drawings incl. that of specifications & schedules
as well as to be read in conjunction with Architectural Specifications Section 22 -
Ironmongery.
Panic exit device/ push bar system & associated accessories shall applicable to all fire
escape doors for emergency exit purposes unless otherwise stated in M&E or Security
Services drawings and specifications i.e. in replacement with/ of electromechanical
lock etc.
Any exit devices and/ or counter-proposed ironmongery applicable to proprietary

system shall be provided for Architect/ M&E and Security consultant's review &
approval.
All access-controlled & security-monitored doors with proposed security electric

locking devices (ie Electric Mortise Locking system, door access card reader system,
etc) shall be provided with compatible ironmongery provision completing the required
access control system, whichever applicable but not limiting to the following:
• Lever Handle / Push-Pull Handle
• Heavy Duty Hinge
• Heavy-duty 2-stage Door Dlosers (both active and passive leaves for
double leaves door) & Standard Arm
• Parallel Arm for outswing doors (door closer to be installed on secured

end)
• Double Cylinder (unless otherwise specified)
• Cable Pass
• Lead cover
• Strike Plate
• Door Selector (for double leaf door)
• Flush Bolts & dustproof (for passive door locking)
• Flush Bolt & extension rod (where reachable height <2100mm AFFL)
JKT05 SS22/4
• Mortise Locksets (for electric strike lock system)
• Strike Latch Guard (for external outswing doors with electric strike lock
system)
• Grand Master Key system
Delayed egress door system or intuitional lock system shall be provided to all main
entrance doors of each security zoning unless otherwise stated.
The actual quantities shall be based on the tender drawings, the Contractor shall allow
for such in his Tender Sum as no claims for extra on grounds of lack of knowledge will
be entertained by the Employer.
22.2 QUALITY
All ironmongeries shall be of first class quality, heavy duty durable, aesthetically
pleasing and suitable for the specific function for which it is intended. All ironmongery
shall be approved by the Architect who shall be the sole judge as to the brand, quality,
function and suitability.
All ironmongery items shall be complete with screws, bolts, nuts, brackets, striking
plates and the like, necessary for their proper installation. All accessories shall,
preferably, be the products of one manufacturer and with matching surface finish.
Non-ferrous components only to be used.
22.3 IRONMONGERY SCHEDULES
The Contractor shall submit the Architect with two sets of relevant brochures/
pamphlets in which the specified ironmongery items are clearly marked out for easy
reference. An ironmongery schedule shall be prepared and submitted to the Architect
for approval before ordering of the materials.
The schedule will include for ironmongery for all doors indicated on the drawings. The
ironmongery provisions to each door will be as set out in the ironmongery lists
attached to this section and any relevant authorities’ requirements. The contractor will
point out to the Architect, any doors which have ironmongery requirements not
covered in the lists, and confirm the proposed ironmongery provisions that have been
made for those doors.
JKT05 SS22/5
22.4 LOCKSET
a. Locksets will normally be mortise type, ANSI A156.13, Grade 1 with above 1.5
million Cyclic test. All locks must be FULLY REVERSIBE without opening the
lock case and must be available with non-handed guardbolt, unless otherwise
stated in drawings.
b. Locks shall have all functions available in one size case manufactured from 0.125”
heavy gauge steel, completely chrome plated for corrosion resistance and lubricity
of parts. Cases are to be closed on all sides to protect internal parts. Locks are to
have adjustable and normal fronts 70mm backset, convertible from one function to
another, a full ¾" throw one piece anti-friction reversible latchbolt and 1"
throw solid stainless steel deadbolt, with two enclosed hardened-steel roller
armor pin. The fastening should be strictly thru-bolt fixing.
c. Locks shall have all functions available in one size case, for heavy duty usage.
They should have the ability to change lock function and handing without removing
the lock from the door.
d. All latch bolt lock cases must have Anti-thrust feature as required depending on
the location used
e. Function of the lockset:
I. Night Latch
II. Classroom Lock
III. Storeroom Lock
IV. Entry Door Lock
V. Escape Privacy Latch – Anti-Lockout
VI. Double Cylinder Glass Door Lock
VII. Privacy Latch
VIII. Double Cylinder Escape Lock
IX. Escape Office Lock- Anti-Lockout
X. Anti-Vandal Classroom Lock
f. All locksets and lever handle trims to be UL Listed and strictly without any
modification for fire door application. The dimension for the thru-bolt fixing position
on the lockbody is 38mm CTC strictly without any modification.
JKT05 SS22/6
g. Trim Alignment for lockbody to ensure threaded case and trim aligners properly
secure the lockbody on the door centerline. Rigid mounting prevents rocking of the
lockbody when loads apply to the door.
h. Split spindle for lever on both side of door shall operate independently. Spindle
design shall be durable to provide security and integrity of the lockbody by
shearing off under extreme loads while preventing any damage to the lockbody.
i. Cylinder s with the two cone-point cylinder clamp screws are made of hardened
steel and will cut groove in the cylinder if attacked by wrenching.
j. All lock case posts and screws are cold headed into case or cap, and pan head
screws are used to secure the cap to the case. This prevents the spreading of the
lockbody when an excess load to the bolts.
k. All case and cap is heavy gauge of 0.109” steel. The inside front 0.125” steel and
the lockbody’s interlocking construction features provide a rigid assembly. It also
assured proper interaction of all parts while providing a smooth operation during
continuous lockset operation.
l. Hubs are made of 10mm thick copper infiltrated sintered iron for strength and
positive latch retraction. Hub is designed to be stronger than the spindle, yet
weaker than the stop work thus creating a specific failure sequence during attack
on the lock case.
m. Stop work button is guarded with a heat-treated button tail. This tail is the
strongest member in the spindle hub-tail security chain. Tail is always guided in
the case and the cap to ensure proper engagement when projected into the
locking hub.
n. The latchbolt and dead bolt can withstand substantial loads without any permanent
distortion. Then a load is applied to the door, the latch bolt absorbs the load first,
leaving the dead bolt free to move. The guard bolt is not subject to loads or wear,
and automatically retract with the latch bolt.
o. Full retraction of latchbolt by lever at 30 degree.
p. All lockset with deadbolt and latchbolt (dormitory function) shall have an anti-panic
feature.
q. The product warranty is 5 years against manufacturing defects. The warranty must
be issued with the own groups of companies.
JKT05 SS22/7
r. The supplier of the ironmongery hardware must have at least 15 years of

experiences in the similar capacity and has proven good track records using the
specified products.
22.5 CYLINDER
(a) Cylinders shall comply with Keying Security for Cylinders AS4145.2-1993 K3
and Physical Security for Cylinders AS4145.2-1993 K3K4 or its equivalent.
(b) All cylinders proposed shall meet the degree of security desired for the
installation.
(c) The plug shall be made of solid brass. Cylinder housing shall be made of solid
brass and finish to match the appearance of the lock which the cylinder is
fitted.
(d) All cylinders shall be available in at least 6 pins tumbler system with a series of
different key profiles. Each of the 6 positions consists of a security pin, a
security tumbler and a spring. For added security the cylinder shall possess
multi-part construction of the pin mechanism coupled with the rotation factor
and off centre pin to key alignment features, and in 4 multiple rows for security
reasons.
(e) The cylinders shall have detainer pins to protect against picking.
(f) Cylinders shall be designed for tensile loading of 12800 Newton against
wrenching and pulling of the plug within the cylinder.
(g) The cylinder shall suit regular door thickness of 32 - 50 mm but incremental
increases shall be available for doors of thickness more than 60mm.
(h) The cylinder's bodies and plugs are machined from extruded brass to a
diameter of 17mm or 22mm round profile unique as compared to the
conventional cylinder.
(i) It is finished in nickel silver plating as standard to match most door furniture;
however, other finishes are available upon request.
JKT05 SS22/8
(j) The standard length of a double cylinder shall suits most doors up to 50mm
thick. Extended length is available upon request for extra thick doors.
(k) Where external security is vital, cylinder can be surface hardened to prevent
drilling. The pins in such cylinders are also hardened.
(l) The range of cylinders must be very wide. A cylinder can be found to suit most
applications from door locks, roller shutter locks, furniture locks, key switches,
or in certain cases special application.
(m) All cylinders are factory sealed making it impossible to tamper with the
permutation inside the cylinder.
(n) Since a cylinder could be found to suit most applications, it is possible to

master key systems comprising a variety of cylinder locks, e.g. mortise locks,
roller shutter locks, knob sets, padlocks, furniture locks, key switches and
others being integrated into a master key system.
(o) All cylinders supplied shall be under grand master key complete with optional
construction key system. The Contractor shall liaise with his sub-contractor
responsible for producing a key chart in master key system for S.O.'s approval
prior to installation.
(p) Cylinders shall be available in construction key system, which is incorporated

into the permanent cylinder, if requested. The construction key system can be
invalidated by using a special U-key or change code key and only the
mastered keys will be able to activate the cylinder. Alternatively, temporary
cylinders should be supplied at no costs. The Contractor shall resume the
responsibility to change the temporary cylinder to the actual cylinders during
handling-over stage.
(q) The inserts of the master keyed cylinders should be interchangeable for
replacement and security purposes.
(r) The inserts of the master keyed cylinders must be suited to other cylinder
types, namely rim cylinder, 17 mm profile cylinder, 22 mm profile cylinder, 36
mm profile cylinder, etc.
(s) The housing of the cylinder shall be recyclable and interchangeable. These as
well as other components could be kept by the user for maintenance purposes.
(t) The listed security patented cylinders and padlock would be:
JKT05 SS22/9
i. Security patented double cylinder in nickel plated, come in minimum 6

individual pins with tumblers positions, suited to the overall master
keyed system with minimum 5 levels of hierarchy
ii. Security patented single cylinder in nickel plated, come in minimum 6

individual pins with tumblers positions, suited to the overall master
keyed system with minimum 5 levels of hierarchy
iii. Colour Chip Key identification for easy identification
(u) Where higher security is required, the cylinders must be upgradeable to

mechatronic cylinders for ultimate key control and security purposes. Such
cylinders shall be easily programmable with only special programming keys.
Simple master key system shall also be easily programmed by the
programming keys. The retro-fitting of the mechatronic cylinder should not
involve the replacement of doors, but require only little modification to house
the electronic centre. Batteries for the mechatronic cylinder must be common
type available easily on the market.
(v) Restricted key profile and keying for legal protection against unauthorised
duplication of keys.
a. All cylinders shall be of Pin Tumblers mechanism with seven levels Master Key
levels with Multi-key profile. Plug to be 0.51 diameter pin tumbler type, made of
brass. Cylinder shall be made of solid brass and finishes to match the appearance
of the lock, which the cylinder is fitted.
b. All Cylinders provided must complete with 3 keys incorporate under one Grand
Master Key for all doors. Eg.Glass Doors, Aluminum Doors, Cladded doors and
Gates, etc.
c. Cylinders & Keys provided must carry Patent Rights, with the direct back-up
supports from Manufacturer.
d. High security cylinder must be available with Removable Core and

Interchangeable Cylinder upon request by Architect. The manufacturer of High
Security Cylinder must have a capacity for future extension.
e. Temporary cylinders shall be provided during construction period and permanent

cylinders must be replaced and fixed by the supplier prior to handing over.
JKT05 SS22/10
22.6 HANDLE
a. All Cylinder Accessories, Lever Handles, Knobs and Pull Handles shall be from the
same manufacturer and these products must be proven to operate together with
the chosen lockcase.
b. The Lever Handles shall be hollow, by the principle of welding two stamped halves
together, as bended hollow tubes have cracks in the material or in the finish. This
ensures light Lever Handles with long lifetime on the return spring in the Lockcase.
c. The Lever Handles shall have a patented needle bearing system with 18 needles,
which ensure optimum function with the Lockcase.
d. All visible parts shall be made of AISI 316L acid-proof satin stainless steel, which
is bacteria repellent and maintenance free.
e. The required products shall be approved for MPA NRW DIN 18273, with fusing
point of fire handle is 1,450 degree Celsius.
f. Modular and flexible concept, where all types of Lever Handles, Knobs, Roses or
Back plates in the same series can be inter-mixed freely on both the outside and
the inside. All parts have concealed screw fixing with through bolt fixing.
g. Product warranty shall be 5 years against manufacturing defects. The warranty

must be issued with the own group of companies.
h. Contractor shall submit minimum 5 designs of the handles to Architect for approval.
22.7 FIVE KNUCKLE FULL MORTISE BALL BEARING HINGE
a. Pins stems in all non-ferrous bearing hinges are SS 316 stainless steel.
b. Base material must be solid stainless steel. Finish shall be in satin stainless steel.
c. Equipped with either Oil -Impregnated Bearing or Ball Bearing.
d. All hinges have template screw hole location conform to relevant ANSI/BHMA and
U.S government standard for use on either wood or hollow metal doors and
frames.
JKT05 SS22/11
22.8 EXPOSED DOOR CLOSER WITH BACK CHECK & DOOR SELECTOR
a. All door closers must be installed at the secure side; parallel arm to be
provided where necessary
b. Compact body with an option of Sliding Arm & channel.
c. Must be able to carry up to the maximum door width of 1250mm with the
maximum Weight of 100kg.
d. Maximum opening of 180 degree with full hydraulic control.
e. Build-in thermostat and special hydraulic fluid to ensure constant closing speed
even during varying temperature.
f. Pressure relief valve to prevent over-loading and oil leakage.
g. Angle of latching point can be adjusted.
h. Adjustable latching force to ensure that the door is properly closed and
latched.
i. Door closer shall be totally reversible without adjustment and have power
adjustment for relevant EN.
j. Delay action must be available as an option from the same model of Door
Closer.
k. Door closer must comply with all the quality assured manufacture to relevant
ISO, EN, BS. Under the same manufacturer with Lockset specified.
l. Compliance and approved by recognized Fire Safety Bureau authority.
m. Hold open arm available (unless otherwise stated) without back check feature.
n. The listed door selector would be: Stainless steel door selector
o. 5 years manufacturer’s written warranty against any manufacturing defects.
JKT05 SS22/12
p. All door closers shall be equivalent to Assa Abloy, Dormakaba, Sargent, d-line,
Dorma or contractors proposal to the approval of the Architect.
q. Heavy-duty 2-stage door closers (both active and passive leaves for double
leaves door) shall be applicable to all access-controlled & security-monitored
doors. Location for access-controlled & security-monitored doors shall refer to
MEP and/or Security drawings whichever applicable.
22.9 FLOOR SPRING
a. Back check to prevent door from hitting side panel.
b. Floor Spring must be versatile during installation, be able to adjust 6 horizontal & 6
vertical position even after installation or floor spring housing are being cast onto
concrete floor.
c. Pressure relief valve to prevent overloading and oil leakage.
d. Maximum door weight 300kg.
e. Interchangeable spindle from 5-50mm.
f. Adjustable hold open from 90 to 175 degree.
g. Full range of accessories suitable for aluminium, tempered glass, hollow steel or
wood door.
h. Maximum opening of 180 degree with hydraulic control.
i. Floor check shall seal with hermetical seal to prevent water penetration as well as
oil leakage.
j. Floor spring body is cast-iron block, rugged and able to withstand heavy weight
wear & tear. Tested up to 1 million floor checks.
k. Decrease opening stress after 20 degree opening, user friendly idea for children &
elderly.
JKT05 SS22/13
l. 2 years manufacturer’s written warranty against any manufacturing defects.
22.10 MORTISE LATCH & BOLTS
Mortise latch/bolt for doors with card reader & wave sensor and/or iris reader
mechanism needs to be automatically retract upon activation and to be provided with
automatic operator with time delay.
All doors with electric mortise to be equipped with transfer hinge for electrical mortise
cable to go through.
22.11 SAMPLES
Before placing any orders with the manufacturer, the Contractor shall furnish the
Architect with an ironmongery sample board that illustrates a properly assembled set
from each different item described in the hardware legend, for approval.
The sample board shall be properly labeled and kept at the Site for reference as well
as for comparison with subsequent deliveries.
22.12 MASTER KEYING
Contractor to allow for a grand master keying system. Same grand master keying
system shall be applicable to all phases (for phasing development), unless otherwise
stated.
All locksets shall be equivalent to Assa Abloy, Dormakaba, Sargent, d-line or

contactor's proposal to the approval of Architect and Client, and shall come with at
least:
a. 10 cuts of Grand Master Key
b. 10 cuts of MK1 (Building Master)
c. 10 cuts of MK2 (Ground Master)
d. 2 cuts of key for each room in sub master levels as indicated in

ironmongery schedule and/or grand master key diagram (to be read in
conjunction with Security package).
JKT05 SS22/14
22.13 WAVE TO OPEN
Wave to open (WTO) complete system must be provided for all toilet doors and other
doors as indicated in A-500 Series drawing. WTO shall be in BEA MS41 or approved
equivalent, complete with red-green-display indicators and swing door operators and
must be compatible for barrier-free toilet and touchless function.
22.14 DURING CONSTRUCTION
During the construction period, all installed ironmongery shall be protected with plastic
cover properly secured, and removed only after the interiors are finish and ready for
cleaning up. Any damaged or scratched ironmongery shall be replaced.
During construction, the contractor shall only use a construction key to operate and
secure the site, for the locksets installed. No permanent keys are permitted to be used
during the construction. Upon handing over of the building to the employer the
contractor shall arrange to convert the construction locks to the permanent state in the
presence of representatives of the employer, as directed by the Architect.
22.15 ON HANDING OVER
The contractor shall hand over to the employer, upon completion a minimum of three
sets of keys for each lock set clearly marked with labels. Contractor shall supply a
metal cabinet to house and hang all the keys with identification, to the employer
22.16 SPARES
All ironmongery shall be supplied with spares of 10% for each item and such shall be
delivered to the Employer as directed by the Architect.
22.17 WARRANTY
In addition to, and not precluding, other warranty requirements in the Contract
Documents, the following items are to be covered by extended minimum warranties as
indicated:
a. Hinges: Ten years from date of Practical Completion.
b. Locks: Five years from date of Practical Completion.
c. Exit Devices: Three years from date of Practical Completion.
d. Door Closers: Ten years from date of Practical Completion.

JKT05 SS22/15
e. Provide 5 year manufacturer's warranty in writing with Employer named as

beneficiary. Warranty shall provide for correction or, at the option of the
Employer, removal and replacement of steel doors and frames found defective
during stated warranty period after Date of Practical Completion
SS023_Acoustical Design
JKT05 SS23/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 23 - ACOUSTICAL DESIGN
SECTION 23
23.0 ACOUSTICAL DESIGN AND NOISE & VIBRATION CONTROL CONSIDERATION
23.1 GENERAL
Acoustic performance is a major indoor environmental performance requirement of

the project.
The Contractor shall exercise due care in ensuring design co-ordination and
integration among architectural, M&E services and other performance requirements.
The following are some suggested acoustic criteria for the building. The criteria given
are relevant mainly for noise vibration control.
a. External Noise Criteria
Noise emitted from the proposed buildings by way of air discharge, cooling towers,
fresh air intake, generator etc, shall be reduced to an appropriate level at the
boundary of the proposed building. The specialist consultant shall evaluate all the
relevant equipment, materials and methods of installation against noise and vibration
control specification.
Where either design values (or measurements) of one or both (noise and vibration)
are exceeded, the Contractor shall at his own cost carry out all necessary works to
rectify the situation to ensure compliance with the criteria.
b. Indoor Noise Criteria
The permissible indoor noise levels for different accommodation types are as given
in the Table below. These indoor noise criteria refer to resultant noise level in
different spaces measured with the space fully completed and with all equipment
and services fully installed and operating.
Item Area Required Range (NC)
1 Typical enclosed rooms and open areas 40

2 Chiller Rooms, AHUs 60
3 Cooling Tower Space 60
For noise or noise sources which exhibit tonal characteristic in a very narrow band of
frequencies, or in pure tone, the Contractor shall exercise specific care to eliminate
such tonal response where practicable. Alternatively, the Contractor may lower the
general noise level of the affected source to a level where the tone is not clearly
perceptible.
JKT05 SS23/2
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 23 - ACOUSTICAL DESIGN
Any remedial works required to comply with the required NC level shall be at the
Contractor's own costs.
c. All vibration generating equipment and/or installations are to be mechanically

installed from the building structure so that the resultant vibration levels in all
occupied spaces, other then plant room floors or workshops, shall not exceed
the "Design Criteria" as shown in the Reiher-Meister vibration sensitivity curves
below.
d. The entire air conditioning and mechanical ventilation system shall be carefully
designed and installed to ensure compliance with the noise criteria spelt out
above. The Contractor shall take all necessary design measures to ensure that
the stipulated criteria are met.
All equipment and noise control appliances shall be compatible with the specified
noise criteria. The Acoustic performance of such equipment and appliances are
to be supported by independent test certificates issued by approved laboratories.
All noisy mechanical plants equipment eg chillers, pumps, fans, etc are to be
supplied and installed with anti-vibration equipment as provided by the
manufacturer. The final transmitted vibration levels shall not exceed the "Design
Criteria" as shown in the Reiher-Meister vibration sensitivity curves. Acoustical
Design And Noise And Vibration Control consideration. Where necessary, the
Contractor shall provide additional controls to ensure that the specified criterion is
met.
Where the resultant noise exhibits tonal characteristics (the sound spectrum
shape exhibits sharp peak(s) of 5 dB or more above the adjacent frequency
bands), control measures shall be implemented to reduce the tonal
characteristic. Otherwise, the prevailing acoustic criterion (NC curve) specified
shall be reduced by 5 dB.
To minimise noise radiation and noise control requirements as far as possible all
noisy plants and equipment shall be supplied and installed complete with
acoustic enclosure or jacket.
Prior to Building completion, the Contractor shall carry out tests to each of the
areas (at his own costs and witnessed by the Architect or his representative. It is
the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the installations have fulfilled the
stipulated requirements and approval shall be lodged with all calibration
certificates.
Should any installation fail the commissioning test, the Contractor shall be
required to rectify and/or modify the installation to meet the specified criteria. All
further works and additional testing, where necessary, shall be conducted at the
Contractor's own cost. A final test report shall be submitted for final approval by
the Architect.
SS024_External Works
JKT05 SS24/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 24 - EXTERNAL WORKS
SECTION 24
24.0 EXTERNAL WORKS
24.1 GENERALLY
Whenever trade/brand name, manufacturer’s name or catalogue reference specifies a

material, item, article or product, the Contractor may propose an equivalent
alternative, subject to the written approval of the Architect.
24.2 SITE FORMATION & GROUND LEVELS
The contractor shall carry out all the necessary earth filling, cutting and trimming
works to the existing ground to the proposed levels shown as well as forming slopes to
match the surrounding area. Clear site of all rubbish, obstructions, shrubs, undesirable
growth, etc. for proper execution of the entire works and remove all debris off site.
The contractor shall note that the existing ground levels wherever indicated serve as a
guide only, and will check the actual ground levels on site prior to submission of his
tender. No compensation will be paid to the contractor for any work resulting from the
difference in existing levels indicated on the drawings and the actual site condition.
Levels will be made up and mechanically compacted where required with selected
approved fill to the Employers standard technical specification.
24.3 PROPOSED LEVELS
The proposed levels of the works shown on drawings may be varied by the Architect
to tie in with the existing surrounding levels. The contractor shall determine the actual
surrounding levels and make provision in his lump sum tender price to allow for these
adjustments to be made, and also any adjustments necessary to maintain effective
falls and drainage.
JKT05 SS24/2
24.4 CONSTRUCTION OF DRAINS
The contractor following the intent concept indicated on the drawings will prepare the
detail design of the drainage system. The contractor will allow for all temporary works
involved in upgrading and construction of drains including temporary or permanent
diversions of services or road crossings etc.
All work to drains to comply in all respects with the requirements to relevant
authorities. The submission of the proposed drainage system for authority approval
will be prepared by and submitted by the contractors PE.
Contractor to allow for all works connected with the PE’s LTA & SWA OR any local
equivalent authorities submission.
All metal gratings to the external Drains are to be Hot Dipped Galvanised and Heavy
duty. Pavings to be taken up to the back of the grating frame. They shall be able to
withstand the working loads of a Fire engine truck. No Concrete/Cement screed
margins to gratings, I.C.’s etc. will be accepted.
All external walkways, driveways and paved areas are to be laid to falls (min 1in100)
to floor outlets, locations to be agreed with the Architect. Outlets to be fitted with
stainless steel heavy duty cover.
24.5 BASE OF DRAINS
The drains within the site boundary will be suspended beneath the floor slab to
contractors detail. Drains with in the road reserve area will be to contractors PE detail,
forming part of the SWA submission and compliant in all respects with relevant
authorities requirements.
24.6 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING DRAINS
Where proposed drains are to be connected to the existing drains the points of
transition are to be designed by the contractors PE, and constructed to suit site
conditions and to provide and maintain a smooth flow within the drain.
JKT05 SS24/3
24.7 BACKFILLING BEHIND RETAINING WALLS
If back filling is required behind retaining walls it is to be carried out in accordance with
method statement approved by contractors PE.
24.8 HARDSCAPING/PAVINGS/FINISHES
All external areas to be paved in accordance with the drawings and finishes schedule.
All aprons within the site boundary to be suspended to contractors detail, and laid to
sufficient falls to prevent the ponding of water.
Kerbs - All kerbs within the site/building boundary to be stone to match adjacent
pavings.
All kerbs to curves to be purpose made to radius.
Kerbs to be constructed with expansion joint at max. 18m intervals to extend into
base.
24.9 TREES/ LANDSCAPING
Contractor to allow for the adequate protection of existing trees to be retained within
the road reserve and adjacent to the site. The contractor is to allow for the removal of
existing trees as necessary by appropriately qualified and licensed contractors.
The contractor is to propose for Architects approval a planting scheme for those
planted areas indicated on the drawings, or additional planted areas required by the
authorities. Contractor’s proposal to include;
a) Coloured presentation drawings.
b) Illustrations of proposed species.
c) Visits by the architects and representatives of the employer to inspect

proposed specimens at Nursery
d) Suitable planting mixes, sub-soil drainage
e) Planting proposal to be NParks or local equivalent authority compliant

particularly in road reserve
f) Plants to be mature as practically possible on planting

JKT05 SS24/4
g) Planting ground cover to be as dense as practically possible on planting
h) Temporary support as necessary while plants establish themselves
i) Irrespective of the standard requirements for the road reserves.
j) All other requirements for the planting and continued well being of the
completed scheme.
24.10 PROTECTION OF THE WORKS
Contractor to allow in his price for applying coloured decorative graphic to the
hoarding. The contractor will take over responsibility for the removal of the existing
hoarding as necessary. Contractor to arrange approvals as necessary with relevant
authorities to establish temporary works access as necessary.
The contractor will liaise with the authorities and take extra care to ensure the safety
and minimise inconvenience to members of the public and neighbours at all times.
24.11 TURFING
Spot turf all external unpaved areas including all necessary trimming, leveling, 50mm
thick approved loamy topsoil treated with weed killer, well mixed with sludge, watering,
rolling, weeding, maintenance, etc. as specified. Spot turf should not be more than
300mm centre to centre. Close turf all embankments, slopes formed and playfield all
as before for spot turf.
Loamy soil to allow for sub soil drainage in order to avoid ponding in case of heavy
rains.
24.12 CONCRETE DRAINS
Construct reinforced / precast concrete (Grade 20) surface water channels minimum
300mm width and cascade steps including fabric reinforcement and 65mm diameter
PVC weepholes. The width of the drain to be varied according to the depth in
accordance to Ministry of Environment Code of Practice.
Construct concrete u-drains with 50mm thick lean concrete and 100mm thick
compacted hardcore bed.
JKT05 SS24/5
Supply and lay 75mm thick precast concrete (Grade 20) removable cover slab with
notch handle hole at ends including setting slabs over channel.
Supply and lay hot-dip galvanised mild steel grating and hinged grating and angle
seating to all open drains including setting grating over channel.
Break into sides of existing drains to connect surface water channel to existing.
Supply and drive bakau piles for concrete covered drains and surface water channels
including bringing piling rig into site, moving rig around site and removing from site on
completion.
24.13 EXTERNAL WATER SUPPLY AND FIRE HYDRANT INSTALLATION
Construct stopcock pit including precast concrete (Grade 20) cover slab and
galvanised cast iron hinged cover and frame to pit.
Construct sluice valve pit and chamber including removable aluminium chequered
plate cover to pit and chamber.
Supply and lay cement lined coated ductile iron pipe in trench with spigot and socket
joints with rubber ring and fittings to relevant BS including all necessary excavation
and backfilling.
Supply and fix cast iron double flanged sluice valve to relevant BS complete with
wrought iron tee key and bolted flanged joints to ductile iron pipes at both ends.
Supply and fix cast iron horizontal type check valve to relevant BS with flanged ends,
globe shaped body with flow direction arrow cast on and with hexagonal headed
inspection cap and swing check with limit stop cast on including approved drain out
test cock.
Supply and lay heavy duty galvanised steel pipe epoxy lined and fittings to relevant BS
in trench including all necessary excavation and backfilling.
Supply and fix high pressure screw down underground pattern brass stop cock to
relevant BS with square head complete with loose key and screwed joints to
galvanised steel pipe.
Supply and fix spindle screw down type fire hydrant point with double screw outlet
complete with flange ends and necessary painting.
Test the whole of the external water supply and fire hydrant installation to the
satisfaction of the Architect.
JKT05 SS24/6
24.14 FOUL DRAINAGE
The foul drainage and minor sewer works shall be executed by a licensed plumber
and shall be in full accordance with the requirements of the ENV. If the work is not
satisfactory in any respect, the Contractor shall rectify the defects at his own expense.
The Contractor shall include in his pricing for the length of the minor sewer from last
manhole within the boundary of the school site to the existing public sewer. The
connection to the public sewer shall be executed under the supervision of ENV.
Connect the foul drainage system to the existing manhole by breaking into side for
entry, breaking existing benching and making good all works disturbed.
Supply and lay all drain pipes consisting of vitrified clay pipes to relevant BS and
heavy duty cast iron drain pipes to relevant BS and including all appropriate fittings,
trench excavation and backfilling, concrete bed, surround and haunchings.
Construct brick inspection chambers and precast concrete inspection chambers

including galvanised cast iron medium duty cover and frame to chamber.
Construct backdrop and tumbling bays. Construct concrete sumps and gully sumps
precast concrete cover slabs.
Supply and drive where necessary 150mm x 150mm tanalised timber piles at 4m
centres for all sewer lines, inspection chambers and external drains, including bring
piling rig onto the site, moving rig around site and removing from site on completion.
The sewer lines will be supported by capping beam of size, 400mm width by 400mm
depth (width 4Y16m and links Y10mm at 200mm spacing). Only installation of piles
will be considered as provisional item.
The Contractor shall test the whole of the foul drainage system with water to the
satisfaction of the Architect both before and after covering in and flushing out at
completion of work.
24.15 CONCRETE SUMPS AND GULLEY SUMPS
Construct concrete sumps and gulley sumps including hot-dip galvanised mild steel
grating and angle seating and purpose made galvanised wire mesh basket to sump.
Supply and drive where necessary 150mm x 150mm tanalised timber piles including
piling rig, mild steel connector and cutting off piles to receive concrete.
JKT05 SS24/7
24.16 GREASE TRAP
Construct grease trap consisting of precast concrete (Grade 20) chamber rings,
standard aluminium alloy strainer bucket, aluminium alloy removable fan shape plate,
prefabricated glassfibre reinforced plastic cover including all necessary excavation and
backfilling, reinforced concrete base, brickwalls and finishes.
24.17 FLAG POSTS
Flag posts shall be proprietary stainless steel complete with belaying cleat, brass
gulley and approved woven nylon halyard and setting flag post in concrete base.
24.18 PROJECT SIGNBOARD
Contractor to allow for the project signboard/s for the duration of the construction
works.
Contractor to allow for a specialist signage contractor to supply and install graphics
and perspective.
Contractor to allow for effective lighting of project sign board. Contractor will carry out
all necessary authority clearances involved including TOL if on State Land.
24.19 ROADWORKS
Contractor to allow for rebuilding road edge, side table as necessary on the Service
Road Frontage. This includes all road works, diversions of services, new drains, sewer
connection, culverts and any other works required further to the contractors P.E.
submissions to the Authorities and compliance with The Street Works Act.
24.20 SUB-SOIL DRAINAGE
The sub-soil drainage system shall be interlocking cellular drainage modules with non-
woven geotextile filter fabric.
JKT05 SS24/8
The permeability of the soil must be ensured for areas requiring sub-soil drainage.
This is to ensure that water passes though the soil to the drainage, in order avoid
ponding.
The sub-soil drainage modules (‘draincells’) shall be high strength modules of UV-
stabilised polypropylene with compressive strength of at least 100 tonne/m2 to
accommodate both static and dynamic loads during and after installation. It shall have
good resistance to petroleum-based chemicals and naturally occurring soil chemicals.
The draincells shall have a horizontal surface made up of circular perforations, each
not exceeding 350 mm2, to provide optimum water flow with minimum risk of
obstruction by larger fill aggregates.
The draincells shall be at least 30 mm high and the ratio of opening to solid at the
horizontal surface shall be at least 62% of the total surface area. Each drainage cell
shall be interlocked with adjacent drainage cells along connecting edges to form a
continuous entity whether as panels, conduits or tanks.
The draincells shall comprise of one or more layers to ensure a total flow rate of at
least 16.5 l/m.s for maximum rainfall under Singapore Code of Practice or local
equivalent authority requirements.
Typical properties of the draincells are:
PROPERTY VALUE
Material PP or HDPE
Dimensions 500 L x 250 W mm
Height 30 mm
Weight c.a. 3 kg/m2
Size of perforation Max. 20 mm diameter
Area of perforation <350 mm2
Void horizontal area > 62%
Void internal volume > 95%
Compressive strength > 100 tonne/m2
Drainage capacity @ 1% > 16.5 l/m.s

hydraulic gradient
SS025_Carpet Finishes
JKT05 SS25/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 25 - CARPET FINISHES
SECTION 25
25.0 CARPET FINISHES
25.1 GENERALLY
Provide carpet installed in accordance with the manufacturer's published installation

procedures. Related work specified elsewhere.
25.2 STANDARDS
Other Standards
BS 3655 Recommendation for informative labelling of textile flooring

BS 5229 Method for determination of tuft withdrawal force of carpets
BS 5325 Code of Practice for the installation of textile floor coverings
BS 5442: Part 1 Adhesives for use with flooring materials
BS 5808 Specification for underlays for textile floor coverings
BS 5921 Method of Determination of size, squareness and straightness of
edges
25.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Qualifications :
1. Manufacturer : Company specialising in carpet tile manufacturing with a

minimum of ten continuous years of documented experience.
2. Installer : shall be certified by the manufacturer.
3. Submit a list of at least five (5) installations that have been in use for a
minimum of three (3) years using carpet tile similar to what is specified
in this document. Provide contact name and numbers.
4. Commitment to quality - carpet manufacturer must provide verification

of its registration to the ISO 9001/9002 Quality Management System.
JKT05 SS25/2
5. Commitment to sustainability - carpet manufacturer must demonstrate

environmental responsibility through programs of source reduction,
recycling, reuse and conservation and registration to the ISO 14001
Environmental Management System.
6. All products must comply with Carpet & Rug Institute “Green Label
Plus” or equivalent local Standards.
7. Finished Modular product is required to be 3rd party certified as climate

Neutral, offering program that offset greenhouse gas emission
associated with life cycle of the product.
8. The average quantity of green house gas emissions associated with the
life cycle of the product, a description of the green house offsets used
to make the product green house gas neutral, and the name of the 3rd
party organization certifying such offsets must be submitted for
verification.
9. Manufacturer must have in place a reclamation program at the end of

life cycle of product.
10. Finished product must have recycled content and is able to contribute
to the attainment of design standards of the Green Mark (DC) Platinum,
to Consultants’ selection & approval.
B. Pre-Installation Meeting : After approval of submittals but prior to beginning

installation of work of this Section, conduct a meeting at the site attended by
the architect, contractor and carpet installer to describe installation process
and establish agreement, co-ordination and responsibilities.
C. Tests : Carpet furnished under this section shall comply with the following test
requirements :
1. CRI Indoor Air Quality Testing Program :
a. VOCs not to exceed 0.5 milligrams per square metre per hour.
b. Styrene not to exceed 0.4 milligrams per square metre per hour.
c. Formaldehyde not to exceed 0.5 milligrams per square metre
per hour.
2. ASTM 2859 or CPSC FF-1-70 Methanamine Pill Test : Pass
3. ASTM E 648, Critical Radiant Panel Flux : Class I, greater than 0.45
watts per square centimetre.
JKT05 SS25/3
4. AATCC 16, Option E : Minimum rating of 4 on grey scale after 80 hours

of exposure.
5. ASTM 662 (NFPA 258) : Smoke density less 450 optical density.
6. AATCC 165 : Minimum rating of 4, wet and dry.
7. AACHEN Test : Dimensional Stability 0.2 percent shrinkage or growth.
25.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
A. Deliver all materials to site in manufacturer's original packaging. Packaging

shall contain manufacturer's name, product colour and pattern name,
identification number and other related information.
B. Carpet tiles shall be stored between 40o F and 100o F and shall be conditioned
between 60o F and 90o F for 48 hours prior to installation.
25.5 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS:
A. Floor temperature shall be minimum 60o F for proper adhesive performance.
B. Floor pH shall not exceed 10.0 (acid etch using a 50/50 vinegar and water or a
1/20 muriatic acid and water solution if greater than 10.0).
C. Water vapour transmission of sub-floor shall not exceed 3 lbs. per 1000 sq.
feet per 24-hour period as determined by the # 625 Calcium Chloride Test.
D. Permanent building lights or lighting of equal brilliance available during

installation.
25.6 WARRANTY:
A. Provide certified copies of product warranties from the manufacturer:

Warranty shall be sole source responsibility of the manufacturer. Second source
warranties that involve parties other than the manufacturer are unacceptable.
25.7 EXTRA MATERIALS:
Provide 5%, but not less than one box/bundle of each colour and pattern.
JKT05 SS25/4
25.8 MATERIALS:
Carpet tiles shall be provided by a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of

PVC-Free carpet tiles. Selected products shall be suitable for reconditioning/reuse
after initial life of the products. Selected manufacturer must have the technology to
provide re-conditioning in the future if desired by the user.
Tufted textured loop pile, CRI Indoor Air Quality Testing Program certified, with non-
woven primary backing and PVC-Free secondary backing. Wet dye injection pattern
application to match approved design, conforming to the following criteria.
25.9 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS:
Modular carpet tile shall meet the following specifications:
1. Yarn System: Type 6.6 nylon with up to 100% post industrial recycled nylon
2. Dye Method: 100% Solution Dyed
3. Construction: Tufted
4. Patterning: Permanent Integrated pattern (topical application /wet patterning or

printed not allowed)
5. Texture: Textured Loop
6. Tufted yarn weight : min 20 oz/sq yd
7. Gauge: Minimum 1/12
8. Stitch : Minimum 10 per inch
9. Pile Height: 4.0mm
10. Total Thickness: 7.5mm
11. Backing Weight : 125 oz/sq yd
12. Tile Size: 50cm x 50cm
13. Mergeability: Carpet that is of the same style/color, but from different dyelots
and/or manufacturing dates, may be merged and used interchangeably, both at
initial installation and at later selective replacement, to create a continuous
carpeted surface with no tile appearing out of place
JKT05 SS25/5
14. Backing: Free Lay Modular Fiberglass Reinforced Thermoplastic Composite with
minimum 40% of recycled material content and must be 100% recyclable at the
end of its useful life.
15. Soil/Stain Resistance: Must be permanently applied to each fibre during

manufacturing process.
16. Antimicrobial: Must be permanently applied during manufacturing of modular tiles.

(AATCC 138 Washed ) (AATCC 174 parts 2&3)
17. Installation method: Tactile ( 100% glue free ) or equivalent – full spread adhesive
installation not allowed.
25.10 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS:
Flammability: (Radiant Panel ASTM - E - 648) : > 0.45 watts, Class I

Smoke Density (NFPA -258-T or ASTM-E-662) : <450
Methanamine Pill Test
(CPSC FF-1-70 or ASTM D 2859) : Self Extinguishing
Lightfastness (AATC 16E) : >4.0 at 80 hours
Crocking (AATCC 165) : >4.0 at 80 hours
Static Electricity: (AATCC - 134): 20% R.H., 70o F : < 3.5KV
Dimensional Stability - Aachener Test (DIN 54318) : <0.2%
Appearance Retention Rating (CRI TM 101) : Severe Use
Recommended maintenance :-
CRI Indoor Air Quality Certification No. :-
25.11 ACCESSORIES:
A. Adhesive: Non Releasable water based adhesive (CRI Green Label Certified or
equivalent local Standards)
B. Edge strips as approved by the architect.
25.12 BARRIER MATTING:
Approved manufacturer must have acceptable barrier matting to be installed at

transition points. The products must be available as a standard product in modular
format to be installed with the selected carpet modules. Manufacturer must have
barrier matting products suitable for outdoor and indoor applications.
Submit samples that meet or exceed the attached specifications. Installer must
provide samples suitable for specific application and quantify each area.
JKT05 SS25/6
25.13 FLOOR PREPARATION:
A. The sub-floor shall be structurally sound, clean, dust free, smooth and level.
B. Holes and Protrusions : Any holes greater than 1/8" (3 mm) in diameter must
be patched regardless of floor surface. All protrusions in excess of 1/32"
(0.8 mm) must be smoothed.
C. Sealing of floors : Concrete floors should be sealed. Most non-silicone

sealers are satisfactory with PVC-Free EverWher or ComfortPlus backing.
(However, when PVC backed tiles is used many sealers on the market are not
chemically compatible and can create damage to the carpet.)
D. Do not sand or mechanically abrade any asphalt adhesive.
E. Floor must be flat (not undulating) to within 1/4" in 12 ft with no abrupt

changes.
F. Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured.
25.14 INSTALLATION:
A. Apply carpet tiles and adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer's

installation instructions.
B. Proper layout and planning must be completed prior to any application of

adhesive or carpet tiles.
C. Adhesive application: Carpet tiles must be installed with a full spread water
based adhesive in case of cushioned carpet tiles. Apply adhesive using a
paint roller with a 0.75 - 1.0 inch nap.
Allow releasable adhesive to fully dry so it does not transfer to the module
backing.
D. All carpet tiles shall be applied in the direction of the pile.
25.15 CLEANING:
A. Remove excess adhesive from the floor, base and wall surfaces without any
damage.
B. Vacuum entire carpeted area.
JKT05 SS25/7
25.16 PROTECTION:
A. Protect completed installation with appropriate cover (Polythene sheet)
B. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 24 hours after installation
25.17 WARRANTY
a. Provide certified copies of the following product warranties from the

manufacturer:
1. 10 years against excessive surface wear

2. Latent Defect
3. Pattern Match Warranty (applicable for patterned products)
4. Lifetime Floor Compatibility Warranty
5. Lifetime Anti-static Guarantee
b. Warranty shall be sole source responsibility of the manufacturer. Second

source warranties that involve parties other than the manufacturer are
unacceptable.
25.18 EXTRA MATERIALS
Provide 5%, but not less than one box/bundle of each colour and pattern.
SS026_Acoustic Wall Lining System
JKT05 SS26/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 26 - ACOUSTIC WALL LINING SYSTEM
SECTION 26
26.0 ACOUSTIC WALL LINING SYSTEM
26.1 GENERALLY
The fabric acoustic wall lining system shall be installed in strict accordance with
the manufacturer's instruction.
The fabric acoustic wall lining system is a versatile fabric wall covering system
that combines high performance acoustic control with a crisp, even fabric finish,
suitable for all internal walls and ceilings.
26.2 DESCRIPTION
The fabric acoustic wall lining system consists of perimeter UPVC frame, acoustic
linings and fabric.
The perimeter frame composed of a UPVC extrusion, normally in standard track

profile, includes a flange through which attachment is made to the substrate and a
channel into which the covering fabric is fed and then held.
The acoustic linings are normally of 50 mm standard thickness high density glass
fibre panels of density between 50 kg/m3 to 60 kg/m3 to provide good acoustic
performances and the required strength to withstand direct impact especially in
heavy traffic areas.
Fabrics, normally woven and acoustically transparent, must be the type approved
for use in acoustic panel/wall installations.
The following are some suggested acoustic criteria for the building. The criteria
given are relevant mainly for noise vibration control.
26.3 EXTERNAL NOISE CRITERIA
Noise emitted from the proposed buildings by way of air discharge, cooling towers,
fresh air intake, generator etc, shall be reduced to an appropriate level at the
boundary of the proposed building. The specialist consultant shall evaluate all the
relevant equipment, materials and methods of installation against noise and
vibration control specification.
JKT05 SS26/2
Where either design values (or measurements) of one or both (noise and vibration)
are exceeded, the Contractor shall at his own cost carry out all necessary works to
rectify the situation to ensure compliance with the criteria.
26.4 INTERNAL NOISE CRITERIA
The permissible indoor noise levels for different accommodation types are as given
in the Table below. These indoor noise criteria refer to resultant noise level in
different spaces measured with the space fully completed and with all equipment
and services fully installed and operating.
Required Range
Area
(NC)
Office: Executive and Conference Rooms 25-30

Office: Open Plan Areas 35-40
Office: Business Machines/Computers 40-45
Office: Public Circulations 40-45
Chiller Rooms, AHUs 60
Cooling Tower Space 60
For noise or noise sources which exhibit tonal characteristic in a very narrow band
of frequencies, or in pure tone, the Contractor shall exercise specific care to
eliminate such tonal response where practicable. Alternatively, the Contractor may
lower the general noise level of the affected source to a level where the tone is not
clearly perceptible.
All vibration generating equipment and/or installations are to be mechanically

installed from the building structure so that the resultant vibration levels in all
occupied spaces, other than plant room floors or workshops, shall not exceed the
"Design Criteria" as shown in the Reiher-Meister vibration sensitivity curves below.
The entire air conditioning and mechanical ventilation system shall be carefully
designed and installed to ensure compliance with the noise criteria spelt out above.
The Contractor shall take all necessary design measures to ensure that the
stipulated criteria are met.
All equipment and noise control appliances shall be compatible with the specified
noise criteria. The Acoustic performance of such equipment and appliances are to
be supported by independent test certificates issued by approved laboratories.
All noisy mechanical plants equipment e.g. chillers, pumps, fans, etc are to be
supplied and installed with anti-vibration equipment as provided by the
JKT05 SS26/3
manufacturer. The final transmitted vibration levels shall not exceed the "Design
Criteria" as shown in the Reiher-Meister vibration sensitivity curves. Acoustical
Design and Noise and Vibration Control consideration. Where necessary, the
Contractor shall provide additional controls to ensure that the specified criterions
are met.
Where the resultant noise exhibits tonal characteristics (the sound spectrum shape
exhibits sharp peak(s) of 5 dB or more above the adjacent frequency bands),
control measures shall be implemented to reduce the tonal characteristic.
Otherwise, the prevailing acoustic criterion (NC curve) specified shall be reduced by
5 dB.
To minimize noise radiation and noise control requirements as far as possible all
noisy plants and equipment shall be supplied and installed complete with acoustic
enclosure or jacket.
Prior to Building completion, the Contractor shall carry out tests to each of the areas
(at his own costs and witnessed by the Architect or his representative. It is the
Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the installations have fulfilled the stipulated
requirements and approval shall be lodged with all calibration certificates.
Should any installation fail the commissioning test, the Contractor shall be required
to rectify and/or modify the installation to meet the specified criteria. All further
works and additional testing, where necessary, shall be conducted at the
Contractor's own cost. A final test report shall be submitted for final approval by the
Architect.
26.5 PERFORMANCE
a) Fire
The fabric and the acoustic linings can be supplied to meet Class 1 or Class
0 fire requirements of the Building Regulations or equivalent local authority
requirements.
JKT05 SS26/4
b)
Sound
Sound absorption coefficients for typical 50 mm linings are shown in the
table below.
________________________________________________________________________
Frequency (Hz)
Application 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC
________________________________________________________________________
Without air gap 0.17 0.75 0.98 0.93 0.94 0.96 0.90
With air gap 0.46 0.73 0.87 0.93 0.96 0.97 0.90
________________________________________________________________________
Where specialised acoustic control is required, the acoustics specialist can advise
on the extent of treatment to achieve a particular performance.
26.6 INSTALLATION
All installation work is to be undertaken by approved and trained installers. The

track profile is fastened to the metal or timber stud frame by means of staples,
nails or screws.
The acoustics lining is cut to the size of the panel and fix in place with the
perimeter frame. If the panels are too large, the linings can be held in place by
means of glue or hold-down pins.
The fabric is mounted by use of a special application tool that inserts the fabric
into the jaws of the track. Once fitted, the fabric completely covers the area and
no braiding or cover strips are required. The fabric should not be installed until:
a) the space has been enclosed and is weather tight;
b) all wet work has been completed and is dry;
c) painting is completed and wall base and floor covering are installed;
d) all adjacent and related work of other trades has been completed;
e) any air gaps, cracks or holes in the substrate are sealed.
SS027-Sealant
JKT05 SS27/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 27 - SEALANT
SECTION 27
27.0 GENERAL
27.1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
All Work in this Section shall comply with the requirement of the Contract
Documents for the Main Building works, with the Drawings, Schedules and with
all other Contract Documents.
27.2 WORK INCLUDED
(a) Sealant work for control joints, expansion joints, and other joints at the
following:
i. Concrete work
ii. Caulked joints at masonry work including gaps between walls

and structural elements
iii. At perimeter joint around door frames, windows, louvres and

other openings and penetrations at interior or exterior walls
iv. Between metal and stonework, tiles, concrete block, or

concrete at interior or exterior walls
v. Beneath door saddles in exterior walls
vi. Between tile and fixture
vii. Between tile and vanity counter
viii. Between vanity counter and sanitary fixtures, fittings and

accessories
ix. Between mirror and stonework
x. Between grilles
xi. Between roof panels
xii. Between ceiling work
xiii. Sealing of penetrations of ducts, pipes, cables and all other

M&E items through fire barriers.
COPYRIGHT BY M/S AWPPTE LTD.

THIS SPECIFICATION IS THE PROPERTY OF M/S AWP PTE LTD AND CANNOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED PARTLY OR WHOLLY WITHOUT THE WRITTEN
PERMISSION OF M/S AWP PTE LTD.
JKT05 SS27/2
(b) Provide fire rated sealant assemblies at all through openings in fire
rated masonry, concrete partitions or partitions.
27.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
Sealants for work of other Sections : See respective Trade Sections
Sealants must comply with the latest version of the following British Standards:
BS 2499 Specification for hot applied joint sealants for concrete

pavements
BS 3712 Building and construction sealants
Part 1 Methods of test for homogeneity, relative density, extrudability,

penetration and slump
Part 2 Methods of test for seepage, staining, shrinkage, shelf life and
paintability
Part 3 Methods of test for application life, skinning properties, tack

free time
Part 4 Methods of test for adhesion in peel, tensile extension and

recovering and loss of mass after heat ageing
BS 4254 Specification for two-part polysulphide-based sealants for the

building industry
BS 4643 Glossary of terms relating to joints and jointing in building
BS 5212 Specification for cold poured joint sealants for concrete

pavements
BS 5215 Specification for one-part gun grade polysulphide-based

sealants
BS 5385 Wall and floor tiling

JKT05 SS27/3
Part 1 Code of practice for internal ceramic wall tiling and mosaics in
normal conditions
Part 2 Code of practice for external ceramic wall tiling and mosaics
Part 4 Code of practice for ceramic tiling and mosaics in specific

conditions
BS 5889 Specification for silicone based building sealants
BS 6093 Code of practice for design of joints and jointing in building
construction
BS 6213 Guide to selection of constructional sealants and AMD 5466
Sealants must comply (where applicable) to the Federal Specification TT-
S00227E(3).
(a) Sealant Field Test
A pull-out field test in accordance to manufacturers’ recommendation is to be

conducted for all sealant types used. A minimum of one test is to be carried out
randomly for every 1000m2 of building floor area for all types of sealant used.
(b) Submittals
(i) Shop Drawings

Submit showing fire rated sealant assemblies complete with types of materials.
(ii) Samples
Submit :
i. Samples of each type of sealants for custom colour appraisal (where
exposed) and compliance with Specifications
ii. Complete sealant assembly for fire rated sealants
(iii) Manufacturer’s Literature

Submit printed Specifications and installation details for the following:
i. Sealant materials, Backer Rods and Primers
ii. Fire rated sealant assemblies
(iv) Manufacturer’s Certification

JKT05 SS27/4
i. Submit compatibility test reports between sealant and applied

surfaces. Highlight any adverse effect on compatibility of any surface
finish in contact with the sealant.
ii. Submit per requirements specified herein.
iii. Submit proof of acceptance by local authorities for use as fire rated
sealant.
(v) Sample
See respective Trade Sections for Sample requirements. Provide all sealing
as necessary to complete same.
(c) Environmental Conditions
(i) Temperature
Install all work of this Section in accordance with approved manufacturers

instructions relative to temperature controls.
(ii) Moisture
Do not apply work of this Section on surfaces which are wet or damp.
27.5 PRODUCTS
(a) Materials and Acceptable Manufacturers
(i) Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with specified

requirements. Other manufacturers providing similar and equal product will be
given equal consideration:
i. Expandite Ltd, UK
ii. Sime Tremco
iii. Mameco International Inc
iv. Bostik

JKT05 SS27/5
(ii) Sealants
Shall be approved equal to those types and products specified herein. Other
manufacturers, providing similar materials will be given equal consideration.
All sealants shall be custom coloured, unless otherwise approved. Silicone-
based sealant shall not be used where sealant is in contact with mirror or
porous stone.
i. Types (for all vertical and horizontal joints, as noted below)
Provide the following sealant :
1. Polyurethane Sealant
One part polyurethane sealant for vertical joints
Example: Tremco Dymonic
Vulkem 116
Bostik 2637
Two part polyurethane sealant for horizontal joints
Example: Expandite Secoscal 12
Tremco Dymeric
Vulkem 255
Bostik 2655P
2. Silicone Sealant to all glazed surfaces
Example: Expandite Hilastic G
Tremco Tremsil
3. Submersible type sealant
Submit for approval prior to application. Sealant to be

designed for full time submersion in salt water without
noticeable colour change or degradation.
Example: Expandite Secoseal 12
Vulkem 227

JKT05 SS27/6
4. UV resistance sealant
Example: Expandite Thioflex One
Vulkem 116
Bostik 2638
ii. Performance Requirements
1. Grade
For all vertical joints, use “non-sag” type sealant. For

horizontal joints, use “self-leveling” type sealant
2. Hardness (upon full cure)
At non-traffic bearing surfaces, 20 to 30 Shore A Durometer
3. Joint Movement Capability
Plus or minus 25%
4. Color’s
Custom color’s, as selected by the Architect
5. Environmental – to comply to LEED Gold rating
At least 75% of all adhesives and sealants, by volume or

surface area, meet the VOC emissions evaluation AND 100%
meet the VOC content evaluation. To meet the 100%
requirement for VOC content evaluation, a VOC budget may
be used.
The adhesives and sealants product category includes all

interior adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site.
iii. Sealant Primer
Colorless, non-staining liquid materials, of types suited to substrate surfaces,

as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
iv. Joint Backing
Preformed, compressible, resilient, non-waxed, non-extruding, non-staining

circular closed-cell continuous strips of foamed polyethylene, vinyl, rubber or
other materials recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Backing shall be
JKT05 SS27/7
of the sizes and shapes to suit the various conditions, and shall be 30% wider
than the joint width. Joint backing shall be compatible with sealant and
primers. Backing at paving joints and the traffic bearing joints shall be sponge
rubber, conforming to ASTM D-1752, Type I, Sponge Rubber; “Cementone
Sponge Rubber No. 3329” by Serviced Products, Division of Grace
Construction Materials or approved equal.
(v) Bond Breaker
Polyethylene tape, or as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
(vi) Cleaning Agent
Chemically pure, non-staining, commercial solvent type recommended by the

sealant manufacturer.
(vii) Fire Resistant Joint Material
As specified herein.
(b) Manufacturer’s Responsibility and Certification
Contractor shall require sealant manufacturer to review the project joint

conditions and all stone working details for this Section of the work. Contractor
shall submit to the Architect written certification from the sealant manufacturer
that joints are of the proper size and design, that the materials supplied are
compatible with adjacent materials and backing, that the materials will properly
perform to provide permanent watertight, airtight or vapour tight seals (as
applicable), and that materials supplied meet specified performance
requirements.
27.6 EXECUTION
(a) Workmanship and Installation
(i) Supervision
The Contractor shall submit to the Architect written certification from the
sealant manufacturer that the applicators are approved by the manufacturer
and have been instructed in the proper application of their materials. The
Contractor shall use only skilled and experienced workmen for installation of
sealant.
(ii) Preparation
Joint surfaces to receive sealant shall be sound, smooth, clean, dry and free
of all contaminants. Factory or site applied coatings shall be removed with a
JKT05 SS27/8
suitable, non-staining solvent prior to priming. Clean joints prior to installing

sealant Review and coordinate setting of stonework necessary to the proper
application of sealant system.
(iii) Sealant Installation
i. General
All sealant instructions shall follow approved manufacturer’s printed

specifications, and installation procedures. Use of primer, bond breaker, and
specified materials shall all be shown in Shop Drawings submitted for
approval prior to installation.
ii. Primer
Thoroughly clean joints and apply primer to surfaces that will receive sealant.
Apply primer on clean, dry surfaces, and prior to installation of joint backing.
Completely wet both inner faces of the joint with primer. Mask adjacent
surfaces of joint with non-staining masking tape prior to priming. Allow primer
to dry prior to application of joint backing, bond breaker or sealant. All joints
must be primed prior to application of sealant in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
iii. Joint Backing
In joints where depth of joint exceeds required depth of sealant, install joint
backing (after primer is dry) in joints to provide backing and proper joint
shape for sealant. Proper shape for sealant is a very slight “hourglass” shape,
with back and front face having slight concave curvature. Use special blunt T-
shaped tool or roller to install joint backing to the proper and uniform depth
required for the sealant. Joint backing shall be installed with approximately
30% compression. Do not stretch, twist, braid, puncture or tear joint backing.
Butt Joint backing at intersections, to be cemented.
iv. Bond Breaker
Install bond breaker smoothly over joint backing that would bond to sealant
and at back of joints where joint backing is not required, so that sealant
adheres only to the sides of the joint and not to backing.
v. Sealant Application
Apply sealant in accordance with the manufacturer’s application manual and

manufacturer’s instructions, using hand guns or pressure equipment, on
clean, dry, properly prepared substrata. Temperature of sealant, as well as of
substrata, at time of sealant application, shall be as recommended by sealant
manufacturer. Mask adjacent surfaces of joint with non-staining masking

JKT05 SS27/9
tape. Force sealant into joint in front of the tip of the “caulking gun” (not pulled
after it) and force sealant against sides to make uniform, contact with sides of
joint and to prevent entrapped air or pulling of sealant off of sides. Fill sealant
space solid with sealant.
vi. Tooling
Tool exposed joints to form smooth and uniform bends, with slightly concave
surface. Finished joints shall be straight, uniform, smooth, and neatly finished.
Sealant to finish flush with adjacent surfaces, except where otherwise
indicated on Drawings. Remove masking tape immediately after tooling of
sealant and before sealant face starts to “skin” over. Neatly remove any
excess sealant from adjacent surfaces of joint, leaving the work in a neat,
clean condition.

SS028-Door
JKT05 28/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 28- DOORS
SECTION 28
28.0 DOORS
28.1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
28.1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for external doors including fire doors and their
associated ironmongery.
28.1.2 Related Sections
Read this work section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the other work
sections including the following:
- External Render
- Wall Tiling
- Painting
28.1.3 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the Architect, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of the
Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be submitted to the Architect, provided
it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the
requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted are the current
version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards (or local equivalent Standards)
SS 1 Plywood
SS 71 Nomenclature of commercial timbers
SS 72 Treatment of timber and plywood with copper/chrome/arsenic wood preservative
SS 91 Solvent-based paint remover
SS 173 Glossary of terms relating to timber and woodwork
SS 332 Fire doors
SS 341 Safety glazing materials for use in buildings (human impact considerations)
SS 347 Timber doors
Code of Barrier Free Accessibility in Buildings
Other Standards
BS EN 438-2 Decorative high-pressure laminates (HPL) sheets based on thermosetting

resins. Determination of properties.
BS EN 485-3 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – sheet, strip and plate.
JKT05 28/2
Tolerances on shape and dimensions for hot-rolled products

BS EN 486 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extrusion ingots
BS EN 573-3 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - chemical composition and form of wrought
products. Chemical composition
BS EN 755 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Extruded precision profiles in alloys EN AW-
6060 and EN AW-6063. Technical conditions for inspection and delivery
BS EN 1125 Panic exit devices
BS EN 1154 Building hardware: Controlled closing devices.
BS EN 1155 Electrically powered hold open devices
BS EN 10088 Stainless steel-lists of stainless steels
BS EN 10143 Continuously hot-dip metal coated steel sheet and strip – tolerances on
dimensions and shape
BS EN 12020 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded precision profiles in alloys EN AW
6060 and EN AW 6063
BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structures
BS 1161 Specification for aluminium alloy sections for structural purposes
BS 1449-2 Steel Plate
BS 3698 Specifications for solvent-based paint remover
BS 4255-1 Rubber used in preformed gaskets for weather exclusion from buildings.
Specification for non-cellular gaskets
BS 4965 Decorative laminated plastic sheet veneered boards and panels
BS 5588 Fire precautions in the design, construction and use of buildings.
Code of practice for shops, offices, industrial, storage and other similar buildings (AMD
9838) (AMD 10213)
BS 8118 Structural use of aluminium
BS 8300 Code of practice for the design of buildings and their approaches to meet the needs
of disabled people
AS 1231 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Anodised coatings for architectural applications
AS 3715 Metal finishing. Thermoset powder coating for aluminium and aluminium alloys
ASTM 2605-2 Wet applied organic coatings
ASTM 3715 Pressure sensitive tapes
ASTM C 509 Elastomeric cellular preformed gasket and sealing material
ASTM C 1172 Laminated architectural flat glass
ASTM D1056-00 Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials–Sponge or Expanded
Rubber

JKT05 28/3
28.1.4 TRADE PREAMBLES
28.1.4.1 Contractor’s Submissions
The intended type of external doors and their associated ironmongery are set out in relevant
clauses and locations are indicated in the drawings and / or door schedules.
Engage qualified and experienced personnel to carry out and submit the following items to
the Architect.
28.1.4.1.1 Develop all necessary details for the doors based on the design drawings.
28.1.4.1.2 Submit names of manufacturer’s for door leaves, door sets (if specified) and
ironmongery.
28.1.4.2 Shop Drawings
Prepare and submit shop drawings to enable the fabrication and installation of the doors.
28.1.4.3 Co-ordination with other Works
Co-ordinate the external door works, particularly the interfaces with the following work
packages and trades:
a. External walls including masonry, in-situ concrete and glazing.
b. External finishes
Liaise and coordinate with M & E engineer for location of all doors linked to security or fire
systems.
28.1.4.4 Provide Spare Materials
Deliver to site in strong protective packages marked for identification, and store where
directed, components and materials for future replacement and repair.
Supply the following spare materials and stored in an area agreed with the Architect
28.2 GENERAL
Doors shall be of 40mm thick skeleton framed plywood faced flush with 38 x 12mm
timber lipping all around or as shown in the drawings.
Doors shall be in accordance with BS: 459, with regard to workmanship. To be

effectively kiln dried to prevent future warping.

JKT05 28/4
Where doors are in two leaves, they shall have 38 x 25mm timber rebated meeting
stiles.
The door frames shall be in solid moulded timber sections to suit the profile of
partition of folded m.s. sections as shown in the drawings.
All timber doors are to be finished with laminated plastic finish unless otherwise
indicated.
Where required, provide observation panels on the doors glazed with 6mm clear
float glass with timber glazing beads on both sides and bed edge of glass in
neoprene as detailed in the drawings.
For framed glazed doors, install 9mm toughened glass with one side colour
chemically coated to manufacturer’s specification and architect’s selection.
The Contractor is to provide opening in the framing for housing of electrical wiring
for contract alarms and door opening electrical controls.
Materials and construction of fire doors shall comply with the Fire Safety Bureau’s
(FSB) requirements and be delivered to site tested, permanently labelled and
approved by the PSB or equivalent authority requirements/ Regulations. All solid
core fire doors shall be guaranteed to be to the approval of the Authorities.
Where fire doors are indicated in the Contract Documents, all door frames and
ironmongery thereto shall also conform to the requirements in this respect.
Vision Panels to be provided in fire doors as required in the FSB Code of Practice
for Fire Precautions in Buildings 1997 (or latest edition) or equivalent authority
requirements/ Regulations.
Door frames to be solid timber to match door leaf finish. Door frames to wet areas
to have 100mm high heel stone profiled to match door frame.
28.3 FLUSH DOORS AND PANELS
Flush doors and flush panels shall be constructed as specified hereafter.
The widths, heights and thickness of doors and panels specified are the finished
sizes. Likewise, the thickness specified for the component members of flush doors
and panels are the finished thickness required.
All doors and panels shall be provided with accessories such as mohair/brush
seals, weather-sealing strips, dampeners, felts, etc. where deemed necessary.

JKT05 28/5
28.3.1 Hollow Core Flush Doors
Hollow core doors shall be 50mm thick constructed of Kapor cores with 6mm
plywood facing to both sides. The core shall consist of 76 x 38mm top rail and
stiles, 150 x 38mm middle and bottom rails, 75 x 38mm intermediate rails and with
10 x 50mm Kapor lipping tongued on to all four edges. Rebated lippings to stiles
shall be 20 x 50mm.
Glazing openings shall be trimmed with 75 x 38mm core framing and fitted with 20
x 12mm Kapor glazing beads loosely pinned in all round on both sides.
28.3.2 Hollow Core Flush Panels
Hollow core panels shall be 50mm thick constructed of Kapor cores with 6mm
plywood facing to both sides. The core shall consist of 100 x 6mm plywood facing
to both sides.
28.3.3 Solid Core Flush Doors
Solid core doors shall be 50mm thick constructed of Kapor cores with 6mm
plywood facing to both sides. The core shall consist of 75 x 38mm top rail and
stiles, 150 x 38mm bottom rail and in-filled with 76 x 38mm vertical battens glued
and well cramped together and with three 10mm diameter mild steel bars passing
horizontally through the width of the door with nuts and washers at each end sunk
into stiles and with 10 x 50mm Kapor lipping tongued on to all four edges. Rebated
lippings to stiles shall be 20 x 50mm.
Glazing openings shall be fitted with 20 x 12mm Kapor glazing beads loosely
pinned in all round on both sides.
28.3.4 Solid Core Flush Panels
Solid core panels shall be 50mm thick constructed of Kapor cores with 6mm
plywood facing to both sides. The Core shall consist of 100 x 38mm muntin and
framing, in-filled with 75 x 38mm vertical battens glued and well clamped together
and with one 10mm diameter mild steel bar passing horizontally through the width
of the panel with nuts and washers at each end sunk into the framing and with 10 x
50mm Kapor lipping tongued on to all four edges.

JKT05 28/6
28.3.5 Glazed Panelled Door
Glazed panelled doors shall be PSB/FSB approved & 50mm thick constructed of
Kapor 100 x 50mm top rails and stiles, 150 x 50mm bottom rails and in-filled with
6mm thick clear tempered glass. Glazing shall be fitted with 20 x 12mm Kapor
glazing beads loosely pinned in all round on both sides.
Glazed paneled doors must also be equipped with mohair brush around the door
leaf or door frame for draught and sound proofing.
28.3.6 Fire Rated Doors
Materials and construction of rated doors shall comply with the Building Authority’s
requirement and be delivered to the site labelled and approved by PSB or
equivalent authority requirements/ Regulations.
28.3.7 Doors With Decorative Veneer Finish
Architraves, Frames, Lippings Beadings etc. to doors will match the facing to the
door as indicated on the drawings.
28.3.8 Framed Glazed Doors
For framed glazed doors, install 9mm thick toughened glass with one side colour
chemically coated to manufacturer’s specifications and architect’s selection.
Framed glazed door must also be equipped with mohair brush around the door leaf
or door frame for draught and sound proofing.
The Contractor is to provide opening in the framing for housing of electrical wiring
for contract alarms and door opening electrical controls.
Materials and construction of fire doors shall comply with the Fire Safety Bureau.
All framed glazed doors shall be equipped with alumunium metal plate (to match
the finish of the door/door frame unless mentioned otherwise) on the internal &
external sides to mount card reader and other controllers/services as indicated in
drawings or where deemed necessary (to be read in conjunction with Security &
MEP drawings).
The door frame shall allow for cable pass routing within the frames to conceal all
cables.

JKT05 28/7
28.3.9 Mesh Doors and BRC Doors
All mesh doors and BRC doors are to be equipped with alumunium metal plate on
the internal & external sides to mount card reader and other controllers/services as
indicated in drawings or where deemed necessary; necessary (to be read in
conjunction with Security & MEP drawings).
The door frame shall allow for cable pass routing within the frames to conceal all
cables.
28.4 AUTO SLIDING DOORS
The auto sliding glass door shall be DORMA INDUSTRIES EL300/EZYFIT SERIES,
BWN or BESAM Approved Equivalent auto sliding door operator or approved
equivalent.
Automatic EL300/EZYFIT Single Slide/Bi-Parting Door Operators are to be SEC

approved 240V fully electric Operators, fully housed in an extruded aluminium
housing (height 265mm x width 150mm). The said Operators must be manufactured
in Australia and have at least 85% Australian Content and must have a Class 3 Duty
Cycle in accordance with the AS4085-1992.
The equipment will incorporate the following:
Constant rated 7kg torque capacitor start and run squirrel cage motor. No thermal
overload is permitted. The motor to have operational rating of 60 minutes in the
hour, 24 hours per day. It is a self-lubricating planetary gearbox with spiral bevel
drive. No intermediate belts, pulleys or couplings which are subject to failure,
breakage, slippage, shearing or loss of tension.
Computerised micro-processor control with a programmable feature that incorporates

solid state switching of the motor. The micro-processor is to have a non-volatile
memory which remains intact during a power failure. Automatic reversing if
obstructed during closing sequences with a fully adjustable sensitivity setting.
Automatic stop and retry after adjustable delay if obstructed during opening
sequence. Safety “creep” speed facility allowing doors to reduce speed before
reaching location of previously detected obstruction.
Chain drive with average tensile strength of 1950kg and a 12.7 minimum pitch. Belts
or chains of lesser strength and average tensile strength shall not be considered.
The track is to be hard coated anodised aluminium track fully replaceable carrying
hanger bars supported by fully fibre-glass reinforced nylon track wheels (min. 50mm
diameter) for smoother wear and increased life. No external lubricant required.
JKT05 28/8
Dual sets of jamb fitting sun resistant light cells flush mounted in door jamb that will
prevent the door from closing if threshold area is obstructed. Located at
approximately 150 mm and 600 mm from finished floor level. In the event that there
is no door jamb, Activ.8 sensor shall be used as a normal and safety sensor to
prevent doors from closing when there’s obstruction in the middle of the doors.
Four position key switch incorporating the following modes:
Auto / Exit / Open / Off or Locked by electric lock.
28.4.2 Actuation
The Operator is to be actuated by two (2) BWN sensor or Activ.8 sensors or kick
button.
28.4.3 Safety Feature
As per regulations, doors drive fully open automatically on power failure/fire alarm.
Failsafe consists of a 12VDC/110VAC invertor also incorporating battery
alarm/monitor to alert, if power is low. Doors automatically return to original function
mode when power is returned or fire signal is deactivated.
The sliding door system shall include safety sensors located at overhead or side of
entry opening for restraining door closure when the opening is obstructed. Safety
system performance specifications shall be submitted to Architects for comments
before installation.
28.4.4 Warranty
The Automatic Door Operator is to be covered by a two-year parts guarantee. A

twelve (12) month labour warranty is to be included and is to take effect upon
handover.
28.4.5 Electric Lock
Motor to have an electric lock fitted between the motor and the gearbox. Breaking
strength of electric lock shall be 2000kg. Solenoid locks will not be considered.
Electric lock to incorporate battery reserve, rechargeable circuits and all associated
wiring, battery and charger monitor.

JKT05 28/9
28.4.6 Door opening provision
Opening width for single leaf shall be from 700mm to 3000mm and 700mm to
4000mm for double leaf. Maximum loading capacity for single leaf shall be 150kg
and double leaf at 250kg. Adjustable maximum opening and closing speed at
700mm/sc. Dwell time 0-12secs. Glass to be used shall be 12-15mm thick tempered.
28.5 AUTO SWING DOOR
a) The Automatic Swing Door Operator drive unit must be an electromechanical

system using an economical DC motor and reset spring. It must have a
smooth and silent operation and must come with a chromium steel covering
for protection.
b) The drive unit must be small and compact with dimensions not exceeding
530(W) x 100(H) x 104(D), appropriate for all the installation positions
according to DIN 3-5 standard.
c) The drive unit must be able to be installed on both sides of the hinges or on
the opposite side and able to be connected with the appropriate rod (normal
rotating arm, parallel, or sliding), guarantees a trouble free opening and
closing of the door.
d) The drive unit must be able to be used as a pulling or pushing version

according to requirement.
e) It shall have provisions to be connected to opto-sensor for with stopping and

reversing mechanism to ensure safety in the event of pinch points or
oncoming traffic.
f) The drive unit must be able to be adjusted to suite both:-
• Lintel depth of min. 160 – 250 mm
• Lintel height of min. 84 – 117 mm (using extensions)
g) The opening angle must not be less than 60° and not greater than 95°.
h) The drive unit must be able to drive a max. weight of 350 kg panel with a
max. door width not greater than 700 mm and min. weight of 85 kg panel with
a max. door width not greater than 1400 mm.
i) The basic drive unit must have a min. integrated functions to allow the drive
unit to function in the following mode:-
• Automatic

JKT05 28/10
• Manual
• Open
j) The drive unit must also come with an option of remote control switch to allow
a wide choice of on-line options for the selection of programs, adjustment of
functions and self-diagnostic display (see Table A):-
• Open, Automatic, Manual, Exit, Night, Error Number Display.
• Adjustment of closing power depending on weight of the door.
• Can be either set to fully automatic mode controlled by sensors, or Push-

and-Go mode, or manual.
• Capable of closing sequence control for double doors and provide an

interlocking control for double layer doors.
• To set the opening width of the automatic as well as the opening and
closing speeds, and holding time.
• Optional high security key switch to prevent unauthorized access (can be

tight into master key system).
k) The drive unit must be capable of providing at least 4 potential free signal for
subsequent data processing or building management functions such as:-
• Door position status feedback
• Electric lock actuation
• Error message
• Audio signal
l) The unit must have a provision for optional features to handle fire protection
and smoke control application especially for units that are linked to a building
management system.
m) It should be in compliance with local authority requirement for fail-safe, which

will open doors upon power failure with auto reset (by sending signal to the
electric lock controller).
n) It should be in compliance with local authority requirement for fire alarm

interface.
o) Can be finished with different colour shades or surface treatment to suite

architectural concepts.
p) Must be manufactured according to ISO 9001 / EN29001 quality standard.

JKT05 28/11
28.5.2 Operating Modes
Normal Mode
Manual Operating Mode The installation is at a standstill. The door

wings are opened by pushing
Open The installation opens and remains open.
Automatic Automatic operation with full opening
Automatic Reduced Automatic operation with reduced opening

width.
Exit One-way traffic from the inside to the outside.
Lock / Night Only those commands are accepted which are

given by the key-operated switch outside, card
reader, or by the push-button from inside.
Special Function Mode
Exit Locked or unlocked Only allow people to walk out, no entry is

allowed.
Emergency Closing / When connected with e.g. fire alarm signal or

Opening security control signal, the door will respond to
the command accordingly.
Light Contact / Alarm Special output relay functions.

Output / Gong Control
Interlocking Operation Master and slave operation.
Diagnostic Test programs.

JKT05 28/12
Door Movement Settings
Opening Speed Adjusting range 30 – 100%, standard 100%
Closing Speed Adjusting range 30 – 66% of the maximum

opening speed, standard 66%
Opening Width Adjusting range 60 – 100%, standard 100% of

total opening width.
Hold Open Time Adjusting range 0 – 30 seconds, standard 2

seconds.
Hold Open Time (Lock Adjusting range 0 – 30 seconds, standard 7

Mode) seconds.
Note : All above functions can be changed when the drive unit is in operation.
28.6 MANUAL SLIDING DOOR GEAR
i) The manual sliding door gear shall be “Dorma Agile 150 Sliding Gear”, Hafele,
Dormakaba or approved equivalent. It shall be designed and engineered from
quality materials to provide a robust sliding system that meets the highest
standards of reliability and durability. The complete system comes with a full 2
years warranty against manufacturing defects.
ii) The system shall be frameless in design with modular track section with 63mm
height. System shall have two clamps and each clamp shall have only two
rollers on one side. Completely top hung system without bottom track.
iii) The gear must be suitable for normal solid timber door as shown in the drawings
and able to carry door panel weight up to 150kg.
iv) No glass or timber panel preparation required, clamping patches must be

suitable for glass or timber panels. Special profile to be hung and screwed into
the track is available for the use with fixed glass side panel.
v) Clip-on cover is to be provided to cover the exposed side. End stop and holder
in the track shall operate as a cushioned end stop for retaining the door securely
in the end positions.
System shall be tested to EN 1527 standard with 100,000 motion cycles. It shall be
built to last salt spray tests as per EN 1670 standard.

JKT05 28/13
28.7 EXTERNAL AUTOMATIC TURNSTILES AND GATES
Turnstile
Full height turnstile constructed from tubular stainless steel, 2270mm high and
1300mm diameter, (Kentaur FTS-E04 by Dormakaba Singapore Pte Ltd or approved
equivalent). Manual motion, both directions of travel electronically controlled via link
to security office, with card reader access and intercom link to security office. Free
rotation in event of power failure.
Full Height gate
Full height gate (suitable for barrier free access) constructed from tubular stainless
steel, 2270mm high and 1370mm wide (portal width), (Kentaur FGE-M01 by
Dormakaba Singapore Pte Ltd or equal and approved). Power assisted motion, both
directions of travel electronically controlled via link to security office at north gate,
with card reader access and intercom link to security office. Free opening in event of
power failure.
28.8 FITTINGS
All fittings shall be in accordance with the relevant requirements of the British
Standards Institution, with regards to general construction, quality and
workmanship for fittings.
28.9 SHOP DRAWINGS
The contractor is required to prepare shop drawings of all exposed carpentry,

joinery and doors for architect’s approval.
28.10 MOCK UPS
The contractor is required to prepare sample/mock-ups of all the various doors in

the project as highlighted within the door schedule for Architects approval including
Frame, Doorleaf, Architrave, Ironmongery, overpanel etc.
28.11 SITE STORAGE
The storage of doors in areas exposed to moisture or excessive humidity is not

acceptable and the contractor will be directed to remove such items from the site.

JKT05 28/14
28.12 RATES
The description of and rate for each item of ‘Carpenter’ will be held to include for all
cutting, knotting, boring, sinking, pelleting, fitting, trimming, mitering, halving,
morticing, tenoning, dovetailing, scarfing and wedging, and all ends, splayed
edges, short lengths and temporary supports, rebating for plaster, and other sundry
items of a like nature, nails, spikes, pins and brads required.
The description of and rate of each item of ‘Joiner’ will be held to include for all
cutting, notching, holes, housing ends, mitering ends and shaped ends, angles,
junctions, heading joints, short lengths and any sundry items of a like nature, labour
to stops or cross grains, nails, spikes, pins and brads and for all testing.
The description of each item of ‘Joiner’ will be held to include for screws, gluing and
any other fixing.

SS029_General Repair
JKT05 SS29/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 29 – GENERAL REPAIRS
SECTION 29
29.1 GENERAL REPAIRS
29.1.1 The terms "general repairs" ‘to be made good’ or ‘make good’ shall mean to
include the following items including removing debris and unwanted materials off
site, taking down to facilitate repairs/replacement works where required,
subsequent re-fixing and making good works disturbed (whether specifically
mentioned or not), etc.
29.1.2 Taking out silt, loose muddy soil or other materials from existing gullies, traps,
running storm water channels, drains, grease traps or sump pits, where necessary
or as directed by Architect.
29.1.3 Cutting out cracks in paved floors, aprons, channels, junctions between channels
and aprons, curbs, etc. (irrespective whether cast in-situ or precast) to a width of
at least 15mm, form undercut edges, diamond cutting where required, making
good to match existing and removing debris off site.
29.1.4 Hacking off defective/damaged cement paving including diamond cutting where
required, patching up with materials to match, and making good to floors, aprons,
channels, curbs, dapor slabs, concrete worktops/tables, etc., and where necessary
re-rendering and regarding surfaces to required falls and gradients (irrespective of
cast in-situ or precast).
29.1.5 Taking up, regarding and re-cementing in-situ or precast concrete inverts and side
slabs of surface and scupper drains.
29.1.6 Renewing existing sealant in expansion joints in aprons, floors, roofs, etc.
(excluding expansion joints in panel roofs and main structures).
29.1.7 Clearing all chokes and debris in weep pipes, water sprouts, rain water downpipes,
gutters, etc. and replacing defective/damaged/missing weep pipes, water sprouts,
rain water downpipes, gutters, rainwater heads, balloon gratings to rain water
outlets, etc. to match existing. Existing galvanised iron rainwater goods shall be
replaced with UPVC type.
29.1.8 Making good all damaged concrete vents and replaces missing/defective vents to
match existing.
29.1.9 Making good damaged and replaces missing/defective brick, quarry tile or other
material copings, cills, steps, arches, kerbs, etc.
JKT05 SS29/2
29.1.10 Replacing all broken or missing precast concrete slabs within the complex, such
as to footpaths, aprons, over drains, etc. with new slabs reinforced with suitable
reinforcement, including levelling of sunken areas, to match the existing.
29.1.11 Make good/reconstruct sunken concrete floors, aprons, steps, footpaths, ramps,
surface water drains and the, like including suitable reinforcement, and levelling
sunken areas, to match existing.
29.1.12 Investigating and curing all roof leaks in roof coverings (any type) including
providing new to match existing tiling, or the like; replacing metal hook bolts, drive
screws or tying wires or the like; sealing existing nail, screw or bolt heads, flashing
and roof ridge joints, side and end laps with approved liquid-applied membrane of
heavy duty acrylic polymer reinforced with fibreglass as instructed; replacing
damaged/defective/missing tiles, roof sheeting’s and accessories, fittings such as
capping, fascia, roof insulation, etc. (but not amounting to total replacement).
29.1.13 Provide all necessary protection to existing lightning conductors, fittings, etc. and
clean all existing profile/corrugated metal and/or cement roofs and the like with
water jet to remove dust, dirt, grease, contaminants, etc.
29.1.14 Cutting out and replacing damaged/defective and missing styles, rails, ledges,
braces and the like to timber doors, windows, and fitment doors etc. (any type and
thickness) with new to match existing.
29.1.15 Cutting out and replacing damaged/defective and missing boarding or panelling in
doors, windows, fitment doors etc. (any type and thickness) with new to match
existing including taking down doors/windows and rehang.
29.1.16 Cutting out and replacing damaged/defective frames to doors, windows, vents,
fanlights, partitions, fitments, etc. with new to match existing including taking down
doors, windows, infill panels, etc. and refix.
29.1.17 Fixing back all loose and replacing damaged/defective and missing lengths of
beads, lippings, picture rails, skirting, and architrave’s, etc. with new to match
existing including making good all round.
29.1.18 Taking out where necessary loose boarding, treads, risers, nosing, strings,
balusters, handrails, newels, ramps, wreaths or staircases, framing and the like
(any design and size) and refix and re-cramp including providing new wedges,
nails, screws, etc. including replacing any damaged/defective and missing portion
with new to match existing.
29.1.19 Replacing all damaged/defective and missing handrails (any type and size) to
steps, ramp areas, corridors, etc. to match existing.
JKT05 SS29/3
29.1.20 Taking out where necessary loose fibreboard’s, cement boards, hardboards,
plywood, signboards and the like including all fillets (any type and size) and refix
including providing new nails, screws or other fixtures. Damaged/defective and
missing fillets shall be replaced to match existing.
29.1.21 Taking out all damaged, badly stained and missing ceiling boards, notice boards,
partition/fitment/door linings, laminated plastic/decorative vinyl or veneer, wall
paper, etc.
29.1.22 Cutting spall or loose concrete and make good defective areas with approved non-
shrink cementitious mortar. Unless otherwise approved by the Architect, areas of
spall concrete with exposing reinforcement shall be made good with approved
epoxy mortar. All repairs including non-shrink cementitious/epoxy resin grouting if
so instructed by the Architect to spall or loose concrete shall be carried out by an
approved specialist firm and in accordance to manufacturer’s recommendations.
29.1.23 Cutting well-defined cracks to form ‘V’ groove and refill cracks with approved non-
shrink cementitious mortar to the approval of the Architect All repairs including
non-shrink cementitious/epoxy resin grouting if so instructed by the Architect, to
well-defined cracks shall be carried out by an approved specialist firm and in
accordance to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
29.1.24 Fixing back all loose lengths of metal, plastic and other materials, dividing strips,
edges, nosings and the like to floor, wall, doorway, step, and the like including
replacing damaged/defective and missing ones with new to match existing.
29.1.25 Taking out loose and damaged/defective and missing putty or sealant from glazed
windows, doors, vents, fanlights, partitions and the like and reputty or refilled with
approved sealant to match existing.
29.1.26 Taking out and replacing all broken and missing glass louvres and panels to match
the existing including replacing sealant, putty or gasket and glazing.
29.1.27 Taking out windows and doors, re-dowelling, re-wedging, recramping, rehinge,
easing and adjusting, planning and smoothening out rough projects, replacing
damaged/defective and missing glazing beads, lippings, fillets, hinges and refixing
to smooth working condition.
29.1.28 Repairing and where necessary replacing all damaged/defective and missing
ironmongery such as door closers, hinges, hooks and eyes, door catch, casement
fasteners, handles, bolts, drawers and cabinet sliding and quiding tracks, to match
existing.
29.1.29 Oiling of hinges to smooth working condition and where necessary renewing
hinges.
JKT05 SS29/4
29.1.30 Replace parts and accessories such as rollers, clips, brackets, etc. to existing
collapsible gates, roller shutters, roller grilles, folding and sliding doors, adjustable
metal louvred frames and the like and put them in smooth running condition.
29.1.31 Refix and adjust dislodged grilleworks such grilled doors/windows, railings, etc
including cutting out and replacing defective grilleworks and frames, all necessary
welding, replacing hinges, stops, bolts, etc., taking down doors, windows, railings,
etc. and refix.
29.1.32 Spot welding any loose metal joint in window, door, grillework, and the like
including taking down and refixing if necessary.
29.1.33 Argon welding or other approved methods to loose joints in stainless steel flashing,
gutter, rainwater downpipes, and the like.
29.1.34 Replacing all damaged and missing gratings to gullies and floor traps/waste to
match existing.
29.1.35 Testing before and after for the whole plumbing system to detect pipe leakage,
chokages and other defective works and fittings and submit reports to the
Architect. Curing pipe leaks, clearing of chokages and repairing defective works
and fittings of the plumbing system.
29.1.36 Testing before and after for the whole drainage system to detect chokages and
repairing defective works of the drainage systems. The drainage system shall
include sandpits, grease traps, inspection chambers, cesspits, and the like located
within the boundary of the building or structure and not under the control of the
Ministry of the Environment (or equivalent authority requirements/ Regulations).
29.1.37 Replacing all damaged and missing roof fascia and soffit boards to match the
existing.
29.1.38 All works in preparing surfaces of new and old substrates for painting including
making good holes and other blemishes affected by removal of existing wiring and
electrical battens and fittings and the like.
29.1.39 All new timber used in replacement work shall be held to include pressure
impregnation with solignum preservative unless chengal, balau or teak is used or
unless otherwise approved by the Architect.
29.1.40 Making good walls, columns, ceilings, etc. affected by rewiring by removing all
unwanted nails, battens, plug and the like and the refilling with non-shrink mortar.
JKT05 SS29/5
29.1.41 Engaging an experienced general foreman to inspect the condition of the building
or structure to detect any signs of defective works such as rotten timber, rusty
hinges, water seepage, sagging beams, leaks, corroded rainwater goods, cracks
etc and report the defects to the Architect before commencement of the remedial
work.
29.1.42 Supplying new signage to the approval of Architect.
29.1.43 For work involving ceiling boards, the Contractor shall remove and reinstall the
lighting fittings and any other fixtures attached to the ceilings boards. This shall
also include rewiring of the existing circuits if necessary.
SS030_Sanitary Fittings and Accessories
JKT05 SS30/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 30 - SANITARY FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
SECTION 30
30.0 SANITARY FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
30.1 GENERALLY
Selection of sanitary wares/fittings shall comply with Employer's requirements to

achieve design standards matching LEED Gold Rating standards/ provisions.
Materials and workmanship of Sanitary Wares and Fittings supplied and installed
shall be similar to the respective manufacturer's printed catalogues. The
Contractor shall be deemed to have included provision for carriage, unloading,
placing orders, delivery to site, custom duties, insurance and all other labour costs
and expenses required in and for the proper completion of each item together with
all risks, liabilities and obligations set forth or implied.
The Contractor is to have included costs for all necessary insurance policies
against all and every risk whatever and however arising extended to cover the
fittings up to delivery to site and put in store. The contractor may propose an
equivalent alternative to proprietary items specified, subject to the written approval
of the ARCHITECT.
30.2 AUTHORITIES' APPROVAL
The Contractor shall ensure at his own expense that the Sanitary Wares and
Fittings, etc. offered are approved and accepted by the relevant authorities in
Singapore or equivalent local Standards. All sanitary wares and fittings delivered to
the site shall bear the indelible brand markings of the manufacturers approved by
the Public Utility Board (PUB) and Ministry of Environment (ENV) or the relevant
Approving Authority and accompanied with ENV serial numbers. Any sanitary
wares and fittings that do not have the above said marking shall be rejected and
removed from the site. Contractor to note that Auto sensor operated flush valves
may be required to be limited capacity (6 litres) and require clearance from PUB.
Contractors PE will liaise with authorities as necessary ensure all appropriate
provisions are included.
For water fittings, selection should be based on LEED Gold requirements. For the
fixtures and fittings listed , as applicable to the project scope, reduce aggregate
water consumption by 20% from the baseline. Base calculations on the
volumes and flow rates shown in the table below.
All newly installed toilets, urinals, private lavatory faucets, and showerheads that
are eligible for labeling must be WaterSense labeled (or a local equivalent for
projects outside the U.S.).
JKT05 SS30/2
Fixture or Fitting Baseline Water Consumption
IP Units SI Units
Toilet (water closet) 1.6 gallon/flush 6 litre/flush
Urinal 1.0 gallon/flush 3.8 litre/flush
Public Lavatory Faucet 0.5 gallon/minute at 60psi 1.9 litre/minute at 415 kPa
Private Lavatory Faucet 2.2 gallon/minute at 60psi 8.3 litre/minute at 415 kPa
Kitchen Faucet 2.2 gallon/minute at 60psi 8.3 litre/minute at 415 kPa
Showerhead 2.5 gallon/minute at 80psi 9.5 litre/minute at 550 kPa
Legend
psi – pounds per square inch kPa – kilopascals
30.3 SAMPLES
Before submitting the fittings and accessories for ARCHITECT’s approval,

Contractor shall ensure that these fittings have been passed by PSB, and approved
by PUB and ENV. The contractor shall be required to submit samples for the
approval of the Superintending prior to the ordering of the fittings. The submission
of the samples of fittings for approval shall be made not more than 8 weeks after
the award of the Contract. All future deliveries shall conform to the accepted
samples.
30.4 DEFECTS
All sanitary wares and fittings shall be free from defects and in good working
condition. All sanitary wares and fittings shall be suitably packed to ensure
protection against handling or breakage during delivery.
30.5 GUARANTEE
The supplier of the sanitary wares and fittings shall rectify faults which may arise in
the sanitary wares and fittings for a period of 12 months from the date shown in
the Completion Certificate of the whole project and replace any defective sanitary
wares and fittings at his own expense if these defects were caused by a
manufacturing malfunction or if the materials do not conform to specification.
JKT05 SS30/3
30.6 SPARES
The contractor shall provide a 5% (five percent spare) for all fittings and
accessories to the Employer upon the completion of the Project, to be handed over
the Maintenance Department’s representatives as directed by the ARCHITECT, for
future maintenance works.
30.7 SAMPLES FOR TESTING
The Contractor shall, as directed by the ARCHITECT, provide any item for the
supply and delivery of sample units and for all arrangements necessary for the
tests thereof by a recognised testing authority such as PSB or other approved
authorities.
Such tests shall be carried out if required by the ARCHITECT, by a recognised

testing authority in the presence of the Testing Officer, the supplier of the sanitary
wares and fittings, the Contractor or in the presence of their authorised
representatives and full details of the tests shall be forwarded by the Testing
Officer to the supplier of the sanitary wares and fittings, the Contractor and the
ARCHITECT and any work subsequently put in hand shall be in accordance with
the sample unit so tested and approved by the ARCHITECT.
30.8 SPECIAL MATCHING BACKNUT, WASHERS, UNIONS, BOLTS,

SCREWS, ETC.
The whole of the works for the Supply of Sanitary Wares and Fittings shall come
complete with matching chromium plated wall plates and brackets, backnuts,
washers, unions, bolts, screws, adaptors, connectors, hangers, chairs, back
plates, holding down or expansion bolts, capping pieces, and all associated
accessories, etc., for the fixing and complete functioning of the Sanitary Wares
and Fittings.
30.9 CATALOGUE AND FILING
The Contractor shall submit to the ARCHITECT for approval, the trade literature,
catalogues, etc. of the fittings offered. All catalogues, etc. shall be properly filled
with pages numbered and cross-references shall be given. Catalogues for the
Sanitary Wares and Fittings shall be kept in separate files.
JKT05 SS30/4
30.10 SANITARY WARES AND FITTINGS
The sanitary wares and fittings shall be white. In the event of delay in the delivery
schedule, the sanitary wares and accessories shall be airfreight without any
additional cost charged to the Employer.
Sanitaryware and fittings to comply to ADA requirements unless specified

otherwise.
30.11 P, Q OR S TRAPS
The price for traps shall be deemed to include for left or right handed P, Q or S
traps. The Contractor to include for use of 'P' strap and highlight if 'P' trap cannot
be used. The Contractor shall be deemed to have checked the installation and
supervision of the hydraulics and sanitary work are appropriate for the
requirements of the traps to suit each piece of sanitary wares and its location in
relation to structural members and supply/ discharge piping.
30.12 NUMBER OF SANITARY WARES AND FITTINGS
The quantities will be as indicated on the schedules and/or the drawings. The
Contractor shall be deemed to have re-checked the numbers and types of sanitary
wares and fittings required prior to placing of order and all costs due to shortage,
wrong orders, etc. shall be borne solely by him.
30.13 FIXING DETAILS
The Contractor shall provide all necessary pamphlets, sketches, drawings,

instructions and fixing details for the approval of the ARCHITECT. The Contractor
retains responsibility for all fixing details.
30.14 SQUATTING PANS
Squatting pans shall be white vitreous china with integral PVC P or S traps,
screws, inlet spud, approved concealed flush valve with sensor device,
photoelectric sensor, stainless steel extension pipe with anti-siphonic arms. All
shall be supplied with provision for venting. Water inlets shall be at the back.
Sanitary wares shall be at least equal in standard to Armitage Shanks Claywood
squatting WC pan.
JKT05 SS30/5
30.15 PEDESTALS
Pedestal W.C. shall be wall-mounted and white vitreous china with double or
single PVC P traps as required and provisions for venting. The following
accessories shall be supplied:
a Matching heavy duty close-front seat with lid to be of ENV approved

type.
b Inlet spud, approved automatic flush valve with sensor device,

photoelectric sensor, stainless steel extension pipe with anti-siphonic
arms.
c All fixing bolts and accessories
30.16 WALL-HUNG/COUNTER WASH BASIN/VANITY BASIN
Basins shall be wall-mounted with backing and over counter type in white vitreous
china as shown in the detail drawings. Basins shall have built-in overflows and be
supplied with the following accessories:
a. Approved water saving tap.
b. 32mm Diameter approved chrome plated stainless steel bottle trap

with union grating and extension tube.
c. Approved and painted mounting brackets, nuts, bolts, and screws

required for fixing.
d. Complete with wall/counter mounted taps and supporting

accessories
30.17 WALL HUNG URINAL
Wall hung urinal shall be white vitreous china and shall come with the following
accessories:
(a) Approved automatic flush valve with sensor device
(b) Back hanger
(c) Flange
(d) Breaker
(e) Stainless steel extension pipe
(f) All fixing accessories such as bolts, etc.
JKT05 SS30/6
30.18 STAINLESS STEEL SINK
Sink shall be stainless steel with single bowl and single drainer complete with
stainless steel bottle trap, extension tube, grating, brackets with bolts and nuts.
Sink shall be equal in standard to Kohler 'Ballad' Utility Sink Model K-3261 19" x
19". Sink to be able to fit into structural opening of the Mop sink Closets indicated
on the drawings. Sink will be fitted with a heavy duty faucet configured to facilitate
the filling of buckets or similar. All fittings/faucets to comply with local codes.
30.19 TOILET TISSUE HOLDER WITH COVER
Toilet tissue holder (to hold 2 rolls at one time) shall include all fixing accessories.
30.20 ELECTRICAL HAND DRYER
Automatic electrical hand dryer to include 3 pins square plug and electric cord of
about 2,200mm long in locations (if any) noted on the drawings
30.21 LIQUID SOAP DISPENSER
Liquid soap dispenser of chrome plated stainless steel in base and cap complete
with concealed mounting bracket to be plugged and surface mounted to vanity
counter. One dispenser will be supplied for each basin.
30.22 SANITARY SCHEDULE
Before commencing the installation works, the Contractor shall submit a full
sanitary ware and accessories schedule for each item listed.
30.23 SANITARYWARES & ACCESSORIES - ACCEPTED RANGES
Before installation the contractor shall provide certification authenticating the

sanitary-ware has been manufactured in the country of origin noted.
JKT05 SS30/7
The colour of all sanitaryware, unless stated as otherwise on the drawings will be
white. The finish of all sanitary accessories will be polished chrome-on stainless
steel
Aerators are to be fitted to all taps within the toilets
30.24 GLASS
All glass is to be from a manufacturer approved by the S.O. and complying with
relevant B.S. and to be of the qualities specified, free from bubbles, smoke wanes,
air holes and other defects for the full weight and thickness specified and to be
bedded in putty, back puttied and sprigged as required.
Glazer Generally
Rates for glass are to include for all raking, circular cutting and risks and for glazing
with "Arbolite" or other equal and approved special tropical glazing putty. Rates for
glass are to include for cleaning all glass inside and out, replacing all cracked or
broken panes and leaving in good condition on completion.
30.25 MIRRORS
All mirrors shall be 6mm thick "Pilkington's" polished plate glass mirrors with
polished bevelled edges all round.
All mirrors are to be in one piece with 15mm bevelled edge and back with 6mm
thick waterproofed marine plywood. Provide stainless steel framing around
perimeter of mirror.
30.26 PUTTY
All putty is to be hard and quick setting tropical putty specially manufactured and
shall receive one coat of paint ten days after glazing. Putty to be ".Arbolite" special
tropical putty or other equal and approved.
30.27 SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION OF TOILET CUBICLES INCLUDING

DOORS
General
The Contractor to supply and install solid phenolic toilet partitions, shower stalls and
urinal screens, top hung, as shown in the architectural drawings. The proprietary
toilet cubicles shall include all the manufacturer’s fittings and accessories.
JKT05 SS30/8
Shop Drawings
The contractor shall provide shop drawings of the toilet cubicles and the name and
country of the manufacturer for the Architects’s approval prior to the order for the
works. They shall also submit the full range of manufacturer’s complete range of
standard colour for the Architects’s selection and confirmation.
Toilet Partition
Toilet partitions shall be configured as per Architect’s approval.
Doors - shall be nominal 25mm thick & of the same design and construction as
specified for dividing panels.
Pilasters - shall be nominal 25mm thick and of the same design and construction
as specified for dividing panels and doors. Pilaster shall be secured to floor to
proprietary detail. Pilaster shall be rebated 13mm x 9.5mm x 1423mm to permit
doors to overlap with flush front appearance.
Hardware - compartments shall be supplied with all hardware and fasteners for a
complete installation. Doors shall be hung on a continuous contact piano-type
hinge, made of extruded brite anodized aluminium and shall weigh not less than 1.5
pounds per foot. Knuckles shall have nylon separators. Pivot pin shall be 6mm type
304 stainless steel.
All fasteners shall be 6mm type 304 stainless steel. All fasteners shall be 19mm
“Pro-Star” tamper-proof screws located 200mm on centre on door and pilaster.
Fasteners shall be concealed under a snap-on cover.
Cover shall be fastened top and bottom with 16mm stainless steel “Pro-Star”
tamper-proof screws. Hinge shall have internal spring which is adjustable to hold
door open or closed as shown on drawings.
Strike-keeper and throw latch shall be heavy extruded brite anodized type 6463T5
aluminium. Coat hook and wall bumper shall be heavy chrome-plated Zamac and
fastened with 16mm “Pro-Star” tamper-proof screws.
Fittings - all brackets shall be heavy extruded anodized type6463 t5 aluminium.

Floor and wall fasteners shall be #14 x 45mm “Pro-Star” tamper-proof screws with
conical plastic anchors. All other fasteners shall be 16mm stainless steel and 19mm
“Pro-Star” tamper proof screws.
30.28 DUCT COVERS
Ducts to Urinals to have post formed roll fronted laminate tops cupped, screwed &
grommeted for maintenance access. Laminate to be Formica Colour portfolio range
or approved equivalent. Colour of laminate to ARCHITECT’s selection
JKT05 SS30/9
30.29 VANITY TOP
The polymer material shall be tested for its chemical resistance to the following
materials. Test result data confirms the material will not show any sign of
deterioration when immersed in the following chemicals and maintained at a
temperature of 80 degrees for a minimum of 30 days.
*Acetic Acid (80%) *Hydrochloric Acid (40%)
*Acetone *Hydrogen Peroxide (305)
*Ammonia (liquid) *Isopropyl Alcohol
*Bleach (12%) *Lactic Acid (25%)
*Borax *Lime Sulphur
*Brine *Nicotine
*Caustic Soda *Potassium Bromide
*Chlorine Water *Soaps
*Citric Acid *Sodium Bicarbonate
*Copper Chloride *Trisodium Phosphate
*Vinegar *Urea: Urine
30.30 VANITY TOPS, FASCIA AND SPLASH BOARDS
Vanity tops are to be single full length pieces where possible.
Each panel is to be of thickness shown in drawing and will be supported by

stainless steel brackets to be detailed manufactured and installed by stonework
specialist contractor.
The Contractor will complete all shop drawings showing panel sizes, any joints
required, sealants and support fixings.
The Contractor is required to co-ordinate with Architect regarding fixing details of

wash hand basins.
All wash hand basins to be 'under counter' type. Contractor to allow for forming
bullnose finish around wash hand basin openings and front edge of panel as shown
on drawings.
Surface of Counter to be wrought to fall/drain towards basin aperture. To provide

for up to 1,600mm single full-length piece for vanity top, fascia and splash boards
before jointing. Position of joint to be decided at shop drawing approval stage.
Joints, if required, are to be positioned between wash basins.
JKT05 SS30/10
30.31 SHOWER
Showers shall be wall mounted, and shall be complete with accessories including
and not restricted to the following :
a. Shower arm, head, sidebar, brackets, flexible hose, diverter, floor

drains/scupper drain, etc.
b. Concealed plumbing works
c. Approved and painted mounting brackets, nuts, bolts, and screws required
for fixing.
d. Shower curtain and shower rods unless specified otherwise
30.32 HANDRAILS AND GRAB BARS
Handrails and grab bars shall be placed to be ADA compliant. They shall be
cylindrical profiled in wood/stainless steel hairline finish, attached to wall, floor or
other stable structure that provides the means to support one person.
Grab bars shall include and not be restricted to swing-up grab bars, vertical and
horizontal grab bar, and L-shaped grab bars.
30.32 BIBTAPS, SCUPPER DRAIN, & FLOOR DRAINS
Wall mounted bib taps to be provided where specified with floor scupper drains to
allow for immediate drainage. Floor drains to be provided with mosquito/insect
traps.
30.33 BIDET HAND SPRAYS
Bidet hand sprays shall be provided with metallic hose complete with wall mounted
angle stop valve with lever handle.
30.34 WASTE RECEPTACLE AND SANITARY BINS
Wall or floor mounted waste receptacles as per Owner’s requirements.
30.35 ROBE HOOKS AND HANGERS
Stainless steel in hairline finish robe hooks and clothes hanging rods to be
provided where highlight in drawings.
SS031_Carpentry & Joinery
JKT05 SS31/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 31 - CARPENTRY AND JOINERY
SECTION 31
31.0 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY
31.1 GENERALLY

manufacturer's name or catalogue reference, the Contractor may propose an equivalent
alternative, subject to the written approval of the Architect.
All timber shall be best quality well seasoned, sawn die square, free from sap, shakes,
wavy edges, loose or dead knots and other defects.
Timber shall comply with the general requirements of the Malayan Grading Rules for
Scantlings, Baulks and Boards, with particular reference to Scantlings for joinery and
dressing.
Full cut timber must be used to ensure that the finished thickness and sizes shown on the
drawings are obtained, except where sizes are shown on drawings to be ‘nominal’, in
which instances the finished sizes may be up to 2mm less for each surface dressed.
The Contractor is to verify all finished sizes with the Architect, before putting the work in
hand, as the contractor will be held responsible for ensuring that all timbers are of the size
required by the Architect.
Should any timber be found to be affected by insect pestilence of a destructive nature,

fixed or unfixed it is to be immediately removed the extent to be decided by the Architect.
All timber is to be stored under cover and properly stacked, to enable air to circulate freely
around all faces.
Where timber is described as ‘plugged’, each item so described will be held to include for
plugging to concrete or brickwork and the plugging will be executed at not more than
450mm centres, unless otherwise described.
Where timber is described as ‘Ramset’, or the like, the gun fixing apparatus will be an
approved type of cartridge powered for fixing gun, firing steel fasteners, and the gun fixing
will executed at not more than 450mm centres, unless otherwise described.
31.2 STANDARDS
Unless other wise agreed by Architect, ensure all of the works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of the
Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be submitted to the Architect,
provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the
COPYRIGHT BY M/S AWP PTE LTD. THIS SPECIFICATION IS THE PROPERTY OF M/S AWP PTE LTD AND CANNOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED PARTLY OR WHOLLY
WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF M/S AWP PTE LTD.
JKT05 SS31/2
requirements of the standards specified. All standards and Codes quoted are the current
version, unless specific year references are noted.
Proposed specifications, selection of materials and proposal of Cabinetry and Joinery shall
comply with requirements/ achieve design standards matching LEED Gold Certification
standards/ provisions
SS CP 1 The use of timber in building construction
SS 1 Plywood
SS 71 Nomenclature of commercial timber
SS 72 Treatment of timber and plywood with copper / chrome / arsenic / wood

preservative
SS 173 Glossary of terms relating to timber and woodwork
SS 332 Fire Doors
SS 341 Safety glazing materials for use in buildings (human impact consideration)
SS 347 Timber Doors
Other Standards
BS EN 438-2 Decorative high pressure laminates (HPL) sheets based on

thermosetting resins. Determination of properties
BS EN 485-3 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – sheet, strip and plate.
BS EN 1125 Panic exit devices
BS EN 1154 Controlled door closing devices
BS EN 1155 Electricaly powered hold on devices
BS EN 1303 Cylinders for locks
BS EN 1634 Fire Resistance tests for doors and shutter assemblies
BS EN 1935 Single axis hinges, requirements and test methods
JKT05 SS31/3
31.3 CRI Indoor Air Quality Testing Program

Air
Formaldehyde TVOC Ozone Particulate Temperature Humidity Bacteria Fungi
CO
CO2 Velocity
ppm
ppm ppm ppm ppm Ug/m3 °C % Cfu/m3 Cfu/m3
m/s
Singapore NEA Recommended Guidelines Maximum Threshold (for guidelines)
1000 9 0.1 3 0.05 150 22.5-25.5 ≤70 ≤0.25 500 500
VOCs not to exceed 0.5 milligrams per square metre per hour.
Styrene not to exceed 0.4 milligrams per square metre per hour.
31.4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
All HPD laminates shall be manufactured in accordance with ISO 9002 criteria and meet or
exceed the performance requirements of European National Standard and International
Standards for high pressure decorative laminates. They should conform to the following:-
Vertical & General Purpose

Horizontal
Test Post forming Surface
Thickness 0.8mm 1.00mm 1.3mm
Wear Resistance 650 cycles 750 cycles 1020 cycles
Scuff Resistance No Effect No Effect No Effect
Impact 609mm 1176mm 1778mm
Dimensional
Change
(machine dir.) 0.39% 0.38% 0.29%
(cross dir.) 0.77% 0.90% 0.90%
Boiling Water No Effect No Effect No Effect
High Temperature No Effect No Effect No Effect
Radiant Heat 180 seconds 200 seconds 200 seconds
Conductive Heat No Effect No Effect No Effect
JKT05 SS31/4
Stain Resistance
No Effect No Effect No Effect
(1 – 23)
No Effect No Effect No Effect
(24 – 29)
Light Resistance No Effect No Effect No Effect
Appearance No ABC No ABC Defects No ABC Defects

Defects
Cleanability 15 Cycles 15 Cycles 25 Cycles (max.)
31.5 TIMBER GRADING
All timber for carpentry and joinery work, except where otherwise described shall be
equivalent to first quality selected Teak or Birch.
All timber for joinery work shall be kiln dried. All timber exposed to air-conditioning shall
have a maximum moisture content of 12%.
All timber used on the works shall be supplied with a Certificate from the Kiln drying plant in
accordance with Appendix D of CP1-1966 the Code of Practice for the use of timber in
Building Construction.
The Contractor shall allow for tests to be made on samples of timber, as required by the
Architect, by an approved testing authority.
31.6 TIMBER PRESERVATION
All timber used in the permanent works is to be treated with preservative, the timber is to be
vacuum/pressure treated, with preservative in accordance with SS 72 after machining. The
Contractor is to produce certificates to this effect, showing the quantities and sizes of timber
treated. Cut ends and saw cuts are to be swabbed with preservative to the satisfaction of
the Architect.
The timber preservatives shall be Tanalith C or Celcure A or other equal and approved.
JKT05 SS31/5
The following table sets down the recommended amount of approved preservative material
for use per m³ of timber.
Use Tanalith C Celcure A
Structural timber and joinery for use in

the
5.61 Kg/m³ 5.61 - 8.03
interiors of buildings (above ground) Kg/m³
Exterior, such as weather board, door

and window frames, sills etc. (above
ground) 8.03 Kg/m³ 8.03 Kg/m³
After treatment, timber is to be carefully open-stacked in a well ventilated covered location,

to ensure complete evaporation of surplus solvent or the preservative.
All treated timber is to be adequately dried before in architect in the Works.
The Contractor shall ensure that all treated timber shall be air dried for three (3) weeks
before being used in the Works.
The Contractor shall obtain from the treating firm a certificate of each consignment of
timber received for treatment to the effect that the timber has been impregnated in
accordance with this Specification, and that of the treating firm.
At all reasonable times, the Architect may visit any impregnation plant and may carry out
such tests and such inspections, as he may consider necessary. To facilitate this, the
Contractor shall lodge with the Architect, copies of all invoices and orders on the treating
firm at the time of dispatch.
31.7 PLYWOOD
Plywood is to be one of the grades specified in BS: 1455 and BS: 1088 and must comply
with Singapore Standard SS1:1984 (or equivalent local Standards) for Plywood
Specifications or which, in the opinion of the Architect, is appropriate to the work as
follows:-
a Grade 1
For in its natural state. The veneer shall be free from knots, worm and beetle
holes, glue stains or other defects.
JKT05 SS31/6
b Grade 2
For use where subsequent painting or similar treatment is required. The veneer
on the face side may have a few sound knots, occasional minor discoloration or
stains and small inlay repairs.
c Grade 3
For use where the plywood is not normally visible. The veneer may have defects
other than those specified above, provided that its serviceability is not affected.
Each sheet of plywood delivered to the Site shall bear the following markings :-
a Manufacturer’s name, or identification.
b BS No.
c WBP or MR
d Grade of finish
e Thickness
Woods used must be from sustainable managed forest face/back red species tropical
wood, long core tropical hardwood & short core tropical hardwood. Registration Certificate
for the statement of wood sources must be submitted.
Unless otherwise specified, plywood for internal use shall be Grade 2 with Type 2
adhesive, and plywood for external use shall be Grade 2 with Type 1 adhesive, the
veneers being rotary cut Luan unless otherwise indicated. Marine ply shall conform in all
respects to BS: 1088.
31.8 LAMINATED PLASTIC SHEETING
Laminated Plastic Sheeting is to be abrasion resisting, synthetic resin bonded decorative

laminated plastic sheet, to BS: 3794 similar to ‘Formica’ - general purpose grade 10 or
other equal and approved, not less than 1.2 mm thick of colour or colours to be as
indicated on tender drawings/schedules or to Architects selection, secured to prepared
surfaces with approved adhesives in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed
instruction.
Laminates to be on non-combustible backing where required under Section 3.13 of the

FSB Code of Practice for Fire Precautions in Buildings 1997 (or latest edition).
JKT05 SS31/7
Physical Properties tested in accordance to BS EN 438:1995
Physical Properties Specification Limit
Wear Resistance 350 (min)
Boiling water Resistance 9.6 (max) - mass
11.5 (max) - thickness
Dry Heat Resistance 4 (min)
Dimensional Stability at Elevated 0.55 (max) – length

Temperature
1.01 (max) - thickness
0.37 (max) – length

Dimensional Stability at Ambient
Temperature
0.60 (max) – thickness
Impact Resistance 2.0 (min)
Crack Resistance 4 (min)
Scratch Resistance 2.0 (min)
5 (min) - (Reagent
1+2)
Stain Resistance
4 (min) – (Reagent
3+4)
Light Fastness 6 (min)
Cigarette Resistance 3 (min)
Steam Resistance 4 (min)
Laminates must be GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certified by the Greenguard

Environmental Institute under the Greenguard Standard (or equivalent local Standards)
FOR Low Emitting Products. They should conform to the following:-
JKT05 SS31/8
Emission Types Standard
Individual VOC’s < 0.1 TLV
Formaldehyde < 0.05 ppm
4-phenylcyclohexene < 0.0065 mg/m3
Total VOC’s < 0.5 mg/m3
Total aldehydes < 0.1 ppm
31.9 VENEERS
Veneers shall be specifically selected and of the timber specified, not less than 1.50mm
thick. Veneers shall be properly bonded to prepared surfaces using approved adhesive, in
accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instruction.
Veneers used on adjacent panels, door, etc., shall be matched.
Veneers to be on non-combustible backing where required under Section 3.13 of the FSB
Code of Practice for Fire Precautions in Buildings 1997 (or latest edition)
External corners to veneered panels to be in solid wood, to match veneer to Architects

detail.
All veneers proposed by contractor are to be to Architects approval
31.10 FIXINGS
Nails shall be the wire cut type of mild or black rolled steel, complying with the
requirements of BS: 1202, and unless otherwise specified shall be ‘bright finish’.
Galvanised, sherardised or cadmium plated nails shall also comply with BS: 1201.
Nails and spikes are to enter the second timber not less than 1½ times the thickness of
the first timber penetrated, where practical.
Nuts and bolts shall be mild steel. Expansion bolts shall be of approved manufacture.
Bolts connecting timbers loaded parallel to the grain shall be spaced a minimum of eight
(8) diameters from the end of the timber.
Bolts connecting timber loaded perpendicular to the grain shall be spaced a minimum of
four (4) times the diameter of the bolt from the loaded edge.
Plugs for fixing timber are to be patent plugs, of an approved manufacture.
JKT05 SS31/9
Wood screws shall comply with BS: 1210. Unless otherwise described, brass screws shall
be used.
Sizes of screws used must be adequate for the purpose.
Exposed screws in public areas shall be the ‘Philips’ head type. Screws will be
countersunk where possible, dome headed where not. Screws to be stainless steel.
Positions and alignment of exposed screws is to be neat and regular, and to Architects
approval.
Screws that have to be removed and replaced periodically shall be fitted with satin
chromium/brass plated cups.
Where necessary, countersunk screws will be pelleted to match the timber.
Self tapping screws shall be of approved manufacture.
Coach screws shall be first quality mild steel, of approved manufacture, with hexagonal
heads. Each coach screws shall be fitted with a soft aluminium washer 3mm thick.
31.11 CARPENTRY
All carpentry is to be left with a sawn surface, except where particularly described as wrot.
31.12 JOINERY
Before the commencement of any joinery work, the Contractor shall submit for approval,
three samples of the timbers and plywood that it is proposed to use in the Works. All
timber and plywood subsequently used in the works shall be equal to the approved
samples.
When delivered to the Site, joinery shall be stored in dry conditions, and protected from
damp, the weather and any other damaging influences.
All joinery work is to be accurately set out, framed, and executed in strict accordance with
the detail drawings, and finished in a proper and workmanlike manner.
Running bonded joints are to be cross-tongued with Teak tongues and where over 38mm
thick, double cross tongued.
Joinery shall not be fixed until the plaster, etc., has completely dried out. Should it be
necessary for any tucking in or pointing to be undertaken, after joinery is in position, this
shall be kept to a minimum.
All joinery shall conform to the relevant requirements of BS: 1186 with regards to quality
and workmanship.
JKT05 SS31/10
All arrises are to be slightly rounded.
All surfaces are to be wrot and glass papered to the Architect’s approval.
All window and door frames, stiles, rails, mullions, and framing of a like nature, are to be
rigidly framed together, with mortice and tenon joints, in accordance with BS: 1186.
All joinery work including plywood, which is to be stained, waxed etc., is to be of full,
matching and selected grains, without streaks. Timber is to be delivered to the Works in
sufficient time, to allow for replacement of any timber rejected by the Architect.
When buildings are completely, partially or intermittently air-conditioned, the Contractor

shall ensure that the moisture content of the various items of joinery is appropriate to
these conditions. Contractor is to further ensure that the arrangements, and jointing and
fixing of all joinery is such that shrinkage in any part or in any direction will be
compensated in the joints, so as not to impair the strength and/or appearance of the
finished work.
Any defects caused by non-compliance with the foregoing shall be remedied entirely at the
Contractor’s own expenses.
31.13 ADHESIVE
Adhesive used for carpentry and joinery work are to be cold setting case in glue in
accordance with BS: 1444 or cold setting synthetic resin adhesive of the moisture
resistant, gap filling type, complying with BS: 1204. The use of animal glue will not be
permitted.
Adhesive for plywood are be of the following:-
a Phenol formaldehyde resin adhesive classified as weather and boil proof (W.B.P) to
BS: 1203.
b Urea formaldehyde resin adhesive classified as moisture and weather resistant (M.R.).
c. Low V.O.C
The adhesive for bonding plastic sheeting is to be an approved synthetic resin adhesive
used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Plastic sheeting shall not
be applied to timber at a temperature less than 60°F or with a moisture content of more
than 15%.
31.14 PLUGS
All plugs described as fixing for joinery shall be stout hardwood dovetailed plugs dipped in
wood preservative before fixing and built into walls or bedded in cement mortar (1:6) in
mortices cut to same, at centres not exceeding 450mm.
JKT05 SS31/11
Alternatively, approved patent plugs may be used. Holes to receive these shall be drilled.
31.15 DEFECTIVE JOINERY
Any Joiner’s work which may show flaws or defects arising from unsound materials or
defective workmanship shall be removed, on the instructions of the Architect, and replaced
with new, all at the Contractor’s expense.
31.16 PROTECTION OF WORKS
The Contractor is responsible for the protection of all Joiner’s work arising from
subsequent operations by his own or other tradesmen. The protection is to be rigid sheets
of a suitable material extending over all exposed surfaces. External corners will need to be
reinforced
Fixed Joiner’s work that in the opinion of the Architect, is liable to become bruised or
damaged in any way is to be properly cased and protected by the Contractor, until the
completion of the Work.
31.17 DOORS
Doors shall be in accordance with BS: 459, with regard to workmanship. To be effectively
kiln dried to prevent future warping.
The Contractor shall supply samples of all doors for the approval of the Architect, before
commencing the manufacture of doors. In the case of flush doors, the Contractor shall
supply, in addition, a sample section of the door showing the internal construction.
Materials and construction of fire doors shall comply with the Fire Safety Bureau’s (FSB)
requirements and be delivered to site tested, permanently labelled and approved by the
PSB. All solid core fire doors shall be guaranteed to be to the approval of the Authorities.
Where fire doors are indicated in the Contract Documents, all door frames and
ironmongery thereto shall also conform to the requirements in this respect.
Vision Panels to be provided in fire doors as required in the FSB Code of Practice for Fire
Precautions in Buildings 1997 (or latest edition)
Door frames to be solid timber to match door leaf finish. Door frames to wet areas to have
100mm high heel stone profiled to match door frame.
JKT05 SS31/12
31.18 FLUSH DOORS AND PANELS
Flush doors and flush panels shall be constructed as specified hereafter.
The widths, heights and thickness of doors and panels specified are the finished sizes.
Likewise, the thickness specified for the component members of flush doors and panels
are the finished thickness required.
31.19 HOLLOW CORE DOORS
Hollow core doors shall be 50mm thick constructed of Kapor cores with 6mm plywood
facing to both sides. The core shall consist of 76 x 38mm top rail and stiles, 150 x 38mm
middle and bottom rails, 75 x 38mm intermediate rails and with 10 x 50mm Kapor lipping
tongued on to all four edges. Rebated lippings to stiles shall be 20 x 50mm.
Glazing openings shall be trimmed with 75 x 38mm core framing and fitted with 20 x
12mm Kapor glazing beads loosely pinned in all round on both sides.
31.20 HOLLOW CORE FLUSH PANELS
Hollow core panels shall be 50mm thick constructed of Kapor cores with 6mm plywood
facing to both sides. The core shall consist of 100 x 6mm plywood facing to both sides.
31.21 SOLID CORE FLUSH DOORS
Solid core doors shall be 50mm thick constructed of Kapor cores with 6mm plywood facing
to both sides. The core shall consist of 75 x 38mm top rail and stiles, 150 x 38mm bottom
rail and in-filled with 76 x 38mm vertical battens glued and well cramped together and with
three 10mm diameter mild steel bars passing horizontally through the width of the door
with nuts and washers at each end sunk into stiles and with 10 x 50mm Kapor lipping
tongued on to all four edges. Rebated lippings to stiles shall be 20 x 50mm.
Glazing openings shall be fitted with 20 x 12mm Kapor glazing beads loosely pinned in all
round on both sides.
31.22 SOLID CORE FLUSH PANELS
Solid core panels shall be 50mm thick constructed of Kapor cores with 6mm plywood
facing to both sides. The Core shall consist of 100 x 38mm muntin and framing, in-filled
with 75 x 38mm vertical battens glued and well clamped together and with one 10mm
diameter mild steel bar passing horizontally through the width of the panel with nuts and
washers at each end sunk into the framing and with 10 x 50mm Kapor lipping tongued on
to all four edges.
JKT05 SS31/13
31.23 GLAZED PANELLED DOOR
Glazed panelled doors shall be PSB/FSB approved & 50mm thick constructed of Kapor
100 x 50mm top rails and stiles, 150 x 50mm bottom rails and in-filled with 6mm thick clear
tempered glass. Glazing shall be fitted with 20 x 12mm Kapor glazing beads loosely
pinned in all round on both sides.
31.24 FIRE RATED DOORS
Materials and construction of rated doors shall comply with the Building Authority’s
requirement and be delivered to the site labelled and approved by PSB or equivalent local
authorities.
31.25 DOORS WITH DECORATIVE VENEER FINISH
Architraves, Frames, Lippings Beadings etc. to doors will match the facing to the door as
indicated on the drawings
31.26 FITTINGS
All fittings shall be in accordance with the relevant requirements of the British Standards
Institution, with regards to general construction, quality and workmanship for fittings.
31.27 SHOP DRAWINGS
The contractor is required to prepare shop drawings of all exposed carpentry, joinery and
doors for architect’s approval.
31.28 MOCK-UPS
The contractor is required to prepare sample/mock-ups of all the various doors in the
project for Architects approval including Frame, Door leaf, Architrave, Ironmongery,
overpanel etc. Mock ups are to be done for one door type each as shown within the door
schedule.
31.29 SITE STORAGE
The storage of doors in areas exposed to moisture or excessive humidity is not acceptable
and the contractor will be directed to remove such items from the site.
JKT05 SS31/14
31.30 RATES
The description of and rate for each item of ‘Carpenter’ will be held to include for all
cutting, knotting, boring, sinking, pelleting, fitting, trimming, mitering, halving, morticing,
tenoning, dovetailing, scarfing and wedging, and all ends, splayed edges, short lengths
and temporary supports, rebating for plaster, and other sundry items of a like nature, nails,
spikes, pins and brads required.
The description of and rate of each item of ‘Joiner’ will be held to include for all cutting,
notching, holes, housing ends, mitering ends and shaped ends, angles, junctions, heading
joints, short lengths and any sundry items of a like nature, labour to stops or cross grains,
nails, spikes, pins and brads and for all testing.
The description of each item of ‘Joiner’ will be held to include for screws, gluing and any
other fixing.
SS032-Others Misc
JKT05 SS32/1
OCTOBER 2021 ISSUED FOR PERMIT SECTION 32 - OTHERS AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
SECTION 32
32.0 OTHERS AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
32.1 GENERALLY

The miscellaneous specifications are for items that have not been covered under
the other specifications and relate more to the specific items as described.
All specialist / proprietary items to be in compliance with all the requirements of

the various Statutory Authorities and Government Departments. Contractor to
engage a QP/PE, where applicable, for submission, supervision/certification to
BCA (or equivalent local authority) for approval as a Qualified Person for the
design/installation of the item.
32.2 FIRE-RATED STEEL DOORS
32.2.1 Hinged Fire Door
Hinged fire doors of ½, 1, 2, 3 & 4 hour rating having a nominal thickness of

47mm. The fire door shall be similar to the A-Class BS 476 Part 8 1972 and ISO
3008.
All fire doors must be labelled by Singapore Institute of Standards and Industrial
Research to comply with fire regulation and approved by the Fire Safety Bureau.
Single and Double leave doors shall be flush type, with door leaf made of two
1mm electro-galvanised steel sheets made in pair as open boxes in a
mechanically fully automatic production line designed to give a modern high
quality flush door with a very high level of smoothness. The door in-fill shall be
insulated with in-combustible glass wool 20 kilos/m³ with (sound reduction of RW
= 34db). This is to be applied not only to the internal fire doors also to the external
facing fire doors and all external facing doors unless specified otherwise by the
Architect.
The door leaf shall have internal steel reinforcements for hinges, lock and door
closer (min 400 x 1200mm WxH at upper hinge corner).
COPYRIGHT BY M/S AWP PTE LTD. THIS SPECIFICATION IS THE PROPERTY OF M/S AWP PTE LTD AND CANNOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED PARTLY OR WHOLLY WITHOUT THE WRITTEN
JKT05 SS32/2
* Weight : Door leaf weight approx. 23 kg/m²
Doors shall have heat bonded laminate finish both sides using approved plastic
laminate. All exposed edges of steel doors and steel frames shall be sprayed
painted with Hipac P520 high performance polyurethane coating as specified or
other equivalent.
All ironmongery to doors shall factory fitted to the Architect’s approval and
selection. Shop drawings of all doors types of adequate detail to explain
installation shall be provided for approval prior to fabrication.
32.2.2 Door Frame
Fire door frame shall be of single (or twice) rebated made from 1.6mm thick
nominal of electro-galvanised steel sheet and are available up to finished
thickness of 290mm wide with a rebated depth of 25mm or 15mm for 1-2 hour fire
rated doors.
All door frames shall be reinforced to receive door closer arms, and suitable look
striker fixing plate with mortar guard behind lock plates and reinforced pockets for
fixing of hinges. A steel spreader is to be fitted to the bottom of each door frame
and can be fixed or removed after installation subject to requirements.
All fire door frames shall be installed true and plumb into door openings and must
be grouted solid with cement mortar. All frames shall also be provided with
“fishtail” cross brackets to be built into mortar joints to at least 75mm in depth at
vertical spacing along the jambs.
The number of cross brackets used is subject to the height of each door frame
and shall follow the original manufacturer’s installation instruction.
The Contractor is deemed to have examined the drawings in relation to Singapore

Fire Safety rated doors and roller shutters required by the Singapore Fire
Authorities or equivalent local authority requirements/ Regulations.
Although the doors and rollers shutters have been measured, the Contractor is
deemed to have checked the rated requirements of these doors and roller
shutters. The Contractor is to have allowed for at his own cost all cost incurred in
the use of other standard equivalent doors including extra structural supports, etc
to comply with the latest requirements of the Singapore Fire Authorities.
JKT05 SS32/3
32.3 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS
The sliding automatic doors shall be manufactured by a reputed experienced

automatic sliding door supplier. The sliding door shall be heavy duty operator and
engineered to open bi-parting glass doors. The sliding door shall be fully electric
operated with the computerised directional sensor. The control system shall be
linked to the fire alarm system of the building and in the event of fire, the fire mode
will over-right the control system and the doors will be kept in the open position.
The over head motor and track will be fully concealed in all cases. Operating
controls will be concealed although readily accessible and at low level
The door operators shall have:

Engineered Safety
a) Computerised directional sensor
b) Safety stop/reverse on opening and closing cycles
c) Invertor failsafe system
d) Adjustable dwell time
e) Positive electric braking
f) Adjustable speed control, opening and closing
Engineered Reliability
a) Constant-rated, stall-proof 5 kg torque capacitor start and run squirrel cage
motor
b) Chain drive, with average tensile strength of 1950 kg and 12.7 minimum
pitch
c) Self-lubricating planetary gear box
d) Adjustable hanger bars
Engineered Security
a) Selectable fire alarm interface
b) Compatible wit and data provider for automatic building systems
c) Sophisticated security control interface
d) Climate control, variable to suit conditions
e) Five selectable mode functions
The Operator shall work through logic controller programmable
microprocessor and any function can be adjusted through a hand-held plug-
in control pad.
JKT05 SS32/4
The equipment shall incorporate, but not limited to the following, as a complete
system:
a) Chain drive with automatic tensioner for smooth, quiet, positive operation.
b) High torque 5kg. Squirrel cage motor using 2 AC windings of 100V AC which
shall not consume more than 1/3 AMP under normal operating conditions
and be capable of successfully opening and closing a pair of 150 kg door
leaves.
c) Self lubricating gear box.
d) The operator shall be directed by a solid state electronics system
comprising; logic control, by the use of reed switches providing logic signals
for door positioning.
e) The operator must have positive electric braking without the use of
compressible cylinders.
f) The operator shall provide a force of 1kg. for 0.5 seconds closing, to ensure
full closure of the doors.
g) The track to be replaceable, made of steel curved to the desired radius,
carrying adjustable hanger bars supported by fully sealed raced fibreglass
reinforced nylon track wheels.
h) Adjustable dwell time (0-12 seconds). Pre-set dwell time will not be
accepted.
The contractor must provide a warranty of 5 years for the guarantee for the
operations of the system including the replacement of parts.
32.4 PATCHING UP
Patching up of hacked portions of structure shall be with 1:2:4 cement, sand,

10mm aggregate mix gauged with approved waterproofing additive mixed in
accordance with manufacturer's written direction and of workmanship no worse
than surrounding parts. Where pipes penetrate floor or roof slab, brush away
loose particle on concrete and pipe. Brush on one coat neat thick cement grout
immediately before patching. Any leakage through such patching shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
The Contractor must be able to patch up to the Architect's satisfaction.
JKT05 SS32/5
32.5 FLOOR MAT
32.5.1 Generally
Minimum 3m long roll-out floor mats shall be provided at the entrance to

comply to LEED Gold rating standards.
32.5.2 Material
Floor mats shall be roll-out type and shall be able to withstand heavy entrance
traffic.
Tread surface shall be vinyl/abrasive treads in standard medium bronze

colour. Abrasive tread colour to be selected by the Architect.
Tread shall be securely locked into tread rails, yet remain easily accessible for
in-field replacement in the event of excessive wear or damage. Tread rails to
be fabricated from 6063-T52 aluminium alloy, and shall be continuously
hinged at each tread connection to permit cleaning. Tread rail finish shall be
standard medium bronze.
Recessed frame along the edge shall be a continuous stainless steel frame in
hairline finish.
32.5.3 Method of Installation
Floor mats shall be installed in the pre-formed recesses with cast-in-frame,

according to the Manufacturer's printed instructions and to Architect's
approval.
32.6 WATERSTOPS FOR LIFT PIT WALLS
Provide a 200mm wide water-stop, centrally placed at the construction joint

between the pile-cap and the lift pit walls and at all other construction joints in
the same pit walls, if any.
32.7 FORMING OF GROOVES
Form grooves in plaster using anodised aluminium C-channels or equivalent

at least 20mm wide x 20mm deep, unless otherwise stated.
JKT05 SS32/6
32.8 FIRE STOPS FOR CABLE CHANNEL, WALL AND CEILING

OPENINGS
All openings in floors, walls and in duct spaces which need to be sealed shall
be fire-stopped with fire stopping system of 2 hours rating.
The system consists of a ready-to-use specially light concrete in a hydraulic

compound which is classed as an incombustible building material of the
building material Class A1 according to DIN 4102 Sheet 4. Its technical data
are as follows:
Pipe seal 400-500 kg/m³
Bulkhead seal 60-100 kg/m³
Pressure resistance 8-12 kg/cm³
Grain size 0-3mm
The fire-proofing installation works shall be carried out by an approved fire

system specialist who shall ensure that the use of the material is in conformity
with all related regulation and requirements imposed by the Fire Safety
Bureau.
The surface of the bulkhead shall be treated with a coating with

decontamination properties and finish painted to conform visually to the
adjoining wall areas.
Installation of fire stopping system in the curtain walling system shall be

carried out by the curtain walling specialist in collaboration with the fire
stopping specialist to provide a 2 hour fire rated system complying with the
current regulation and requirements of the fire Authority. Material used shall
be first approved by the Architect, before the commencement of installation
work.
JKT05 SS32/7
32.9 DOCK BUMPER
32.9.1 General
Loading dock bumpers shall be provided in the loading and unloading area.
32.9.2 Material
Loading dock bumpers shall be heavy duty EPDM bumpers, and shall confirm
to the following sizes:
Height - 200mm
Thickness - 80mm
Anchor bolts - 16mm diameter
Anchor Bolt Projection - 70mm (minimum)
Bolt spacing - 500mm staggered
Material - EPDM rubber
Durometer - 70 ±5
Tensile - 1,850 psi
Elongation - 27%
Tear strength (ASTM 624) - 279 lbs/in
Impact resistance (ASTM 2632) - 75%
Low temp brittleness - No failure at 64°F
Ozone - No cracks at 100 ppm - 1142 hrs @

20% elongation
Deflection - 60,000 ft/lbs - 3" with no ruptures
Tolerance - ±¼"
JKT05 SS32/8
32.9.4 Method of Installation
Loading dock bumpers shall be installed onto the face of the dock or designated
walls according to the Manufacturer's printed instructions and to the Architect's
approval.
Rubber dock bumpers to be extruded resilient EPDM rubber bumpers each

length installed in compliance with appropriate bolt type and recommended
installation.
32.10 WALL AND COLUMN GUARDS
32.10.1 All walls and columns at all service areas shall be fixed with wall and column
guards manufactured under an ISO 9002 Quantity Management System, of
1200mm length corner guards. Walls and column guards shall be provided to all
external areas.
The Corner Guard Profiles shall be manufactured from impact absorbing

elastometric material with a shore A Hardness of (80±5). The primary colour of
the Corner Guard shall be integral and shall be co-extruded with a feature line
with a contrasting secondary colour. The surface shall be smooth and free from
imperfections which will detract from its appearance and function.
The Corner Guard shall be installed in wall corners and pillars at a height of not
more than 100mm from the floor level. Drill 5mm diameter pilot holes in the wall
where the profiles is to be attached using a 2mm(T) x 12.5mm(W) x1200mm(L)
Aluminium Pressure Strip. Install the Corner Guard Profile with 5mm (D) x
45mm(L) nail plugs.
32.11 STAINLESS STEEL
Stainless steel used shall be classified under austenitic 18% chromium and 10%
nickel type 316 conforming to the relevant British Standard. Unless specifically
stated as otherwise. Strippable protective membrane shall be used to prevent
damage to surfaces during fabrication and erection.
Stubborn deposits shall be removed with soap impregnated non-scratching nylon

or other plastic pot scourers. In each case, surface shall be rinsed with clean
water.
JKT05 SS32/9
The Architect reserves the right to replace the length, part or whole of the
stainless steel works if it is found that the above precautionary steps are not
carried out by the Contractor.
32.12 ROLLER SHUTTERS
Roller shutters, shall be electrically operated roller shutters. Switch to be key-

locked in a position to be agreed with the architect. The specification will be heavy
duty. Overhead drum and gear and guide channel to be recessed.
The drum assembly shall consist of suitably graded oil-tempered torsion springs
secured to drumwheels moulded from engineering plastics, with a corrugated
sheet metal wrap-around to form a cylindrical torque tube.
The door curtain shall consist of HD interlocking slate with a matching bottom rail
complete with PVC weatherseal. The edges of the curtain shall be fitted with self-
lubricating nylon end-clips secured to alternate slats to prevent lateral movement.
The slats shall be perforated throughout with 225 x 40mm slots spaced at 20mm
apart to achieve a lattice grille appearance, with exception of the shutter to Bin
centre which is to be fitted with solid slats.
The guide channels shall have PVC inserts on both lips to prevent metal-to-metal
contact with the curtain. The door shall be push-pull hand operated, with a hook
handle provided to assist operation beyond arm's reach.
The whole door curtain including the guides shall be powder-coated to the
approved colour.
The Electrical Operated system shall include the motor and electrical accessories,
properly earthed, with approval by the relevant Electrical Authority. Manual over-
ride system for operating the roller shutter shall be provided in the event of power
failure.
Guarantee/Warranty
The Roller Shutters are to be guaranteed against faulty materials and

workmanship for 5 years.
JKT05 SS32/10
32.13 FINISHES TO ALUMINIUM WORKS
All aluminium works to have finishes as stated on the drawings or schedules.

Specification of these finishes is to follow the specifications set out in the
Aluminium Internal and External Works Document. In the case of aluminium works
which have not been designated with a finish the contractor shall default to the
PPC – Polyester Powder-coated specification set out in the relative section.
32.14 SOLID LAMINATE LOCKERS
1. 1800mm high x 300mm wide x 500mm deep complete with 8mm thick solid
compact laminate doors (phenolic core board) in a choice of standard colours
from Trespa.
2. All edges to be chamfered and radiused at corners.
3. Full height aluminium locker bodies with radiused back corners for ease of
cleaning.
4. Injection moulded plastic tops, shelves and bases with ventilation slots and
drainage holes.
5. Locker base unit to have 3 degree slope to facilitate cleaning or hosing out.
6. Full height extruded aluminium (door and latch) frame sections, fitted with
double unsprung hinges and door stops, trapped within the extrusion to ensure
maximum strength.
7. Full height extruded aluminium (door and latch) frame sections, fitted with
double unsprung hinges and door stops, trapped within the extrusion to ensure
maximum strength.
8. 8mm solid laminate door bonded and mechanically fixed to the hinges with
aluminium rosettes to the outside.
9. Locks to be mechanically fixed to gravoply colour number plate with bonded

pads and concealed fixing.
10. The locks shall be in ‘Prospec’ cam lock supplied with 2 keys each.
11. Master key shall be provided to client upon completion of works.
JKT05 SS32/11
32.15 FIRE ROLLER SHUTTER
The Fire Roller Shutters to be installed at the loading bay are to be GDS Global
Limited’s IFS 50/240 2 hr fire rated roller shutter or any other approved equivalent.
All proposed fire roller shutters by contractor must perform and excel in the
international test criteria. for such shutters set internationally are extremely
stringent.
The Fire Insulated shutter has to undergo a fire test to determine its fire insulation
capabilities. Failure is deemed to have occurred once the surface temperature of
the unexposed side of the test specimen exceeds a mean temperature rise of
140°C. This is measured by the 5 main thermocouples, one placed at the center of
the curtain and the remaining four at the centers of each quadrant of the curtain.
Three additional thermocouples are placed at the right, center and left of the top of
the curtain.
Individually, none of these 8 thermocouples is allowed to record a temperature rise

exceeding 180°C. The prescribed furnace temperature for the test is approximately
800°C after 30 minutes, rising to 1140°C at 240 minutes. It basically requires the
shutter to be so well insulated that the heat emitted from the other side has little or
no possibility of igniting anything.
The standards require a Fire Insulated Shutter to have a minimum of 30 minutes of

fire insulation capability.
Tested to SS 489:2001 and BS 476 Pt 22

TUV-SUD-PSB Singapore
Listed with
(or equivalent local authority requirements/ Regulations)
Maximum Size W 12.0m x Ht 7.0m
Tested Rating Up to 4 hrs Fire Integrity; Fire Insulation Value: 51 minutes
0.8 kW/m2 at 120mins, and 2.24 kW/m2 at 240 mins
Radiation Flux (This value was recorded by a Radiometer placed on the

center line of the curtain 3.0 m away from the specimen
during the fire test)
Drum Assembly
The barrel assembly consists of an extremely rigid steel tube sheathed over a pair
of drive shaft assemblies fitted to heavy duty bearing sets and supported at both
ends by steel head plates. The drive shaft is a solid polished-steel round bar
incorporating key ways to accept the drive sprocket. Corresponding to the size of
the shutter, the head plates are either 6mm or 8mm thick with shafts of either
38mm or 50mm diameter.
JKT05 SS32/12
The entire drum assembly is enclosed by a housing consisting of 2 layers of 1.0mm

thk galvanized steel sheets with a blanket of Ceramic Fibre insulation infill.
Door Curtain
Material
The door curtain consists of 2 layers of double-walled cavity interlocking slats
overall size 80mm x 20mm thick, thus forming an air gap. Located within this air
gap is an additional insulation barrier of silica fabric which is rolled up into a
deployable package. This barrier will be deployed by a separate fusible link in the
event of a fire. The cavity of the slat is filled with insulation material consisting of a
combination of Ceramic Fibre and Gypsum.
End Clips
Custom-shaped steel end-clips are secured to each end of every slat to prevent
lateral movements
Bottom Rail
A notional bottom rail is formed by bottom-most slat linking the two walls of curtain
when the shutter is in the fully closed position.
Door Guides
The door guides are a pair of box module of overall dimensions 250mm wide x
265mm deep. Each module contains a mechanically retractable guide channel that
will automatically latch between the two walls of curtains when the door reaches its
fully closed position. In the opening sequence, the guide channels will automatically
retract to allow the curtains to travel upwards to roll up. The retractable guide
channels are secured to a pair of 100 x 50 x 5mm thick 'C' channel post via
purpose-made linkages. The box module is finished with an external 1.0mm thick
galvanized steel sheet cladding, with the voids packed with Ceramic Fibre blanket
for fire insulation.
Door Operation
Motor Drive
The drive unit consists of a suitably-sized linear drive motor operator mounted
parallel to and behind the door roll. It has an integrated gearbox and a chain-
operated sheave wheel for manual operation in case of power failure.
JKT05 SS32/13
The control box is lockable, housing a set of push buttons for Up', 'Down' and 'Stop'
operations. The door operation shall automatically stop at the desired upper and
lower limits via adjustable limit switches.
For safety reasons, the 'DOWN' button shall require the operator to push and hold
when closing the shutter. This is to ensure the closing operation is being
supervised. Upon sighting an obstruction, the operator will automatically release the
push button by reflex. This will instantly stop the downward travel of the shutter and
prevent accidents.
Power supply shall be either Single Phase 230V x 15amp or 3 Phase 415V x
20amp, depending on the size of the shutter.
Submittals
The contractor is to submit a method statement when proposing the fire roller
shutters. The construction methods and relevant test results have to be provided to
verify the product’s capabilities and compliance to the specifications. No fabrication
is to take place without the Architect’s approval. The contractor is to provide an
indemnity of 5 years of warranty to the client.
32.16 ACOUSTIC RATING
The acoustic quality and STC rating for enclosure of spaces in accordance to the
chart below
NO ROOM STC
1 Offices Min STC45
2 Break room Min STC40
3 Conference Room Min STC53
4 Asset Management Min STC45
5 Colo Cell Dry Wall Min STC50
6 Colo Service Lobby Min STC50
JKT05 SS32/14
32.17 SECURITY-RELATED ITEMS
[TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH SECURITY’S SPECIFICATIONS &

DRAWINGS]
The following are Physical Security Product Selection required to be included in the
Project. Counter-proposal should there be any shall require to be submitted for Client &
Security Consultant’s clearance.
[Provision of security related items shall be read in conjunction with design and
schedules]
NO ITEM BRAND OR EQ. DESCRIPTION
1 Turnstile Dormakaba Kentaur Column Diameter – 1300mm

Full Height Turnstile
FTS-E04 Dimension – 1540(dia)x2270(H)mm
Passage width – 646mm
Stainless Steel portal, housing, and top cover
2 Gate Dormakaba Kentaur Dimension – 1370(dia)x2270(H)mm

Full Height Gate FGE-
M01 Passage width – 1080mm
Stainless Steel portal and housing; Maintenance

opening in Aluminium
3 X-Ray Rapiscan 622XR Tunnel size – 750mm(W) x 550mm(H)

Baggage
Scanning Dimensions – 2822(L) x 1030(W) x 1467(H) mm
4 X-Ray Portal Rapiscan Metor 6E
5 Card Reader HID Signo Reader Dimension – 45 x 121.5 x 19.5mm

Model 20
Colour – Black bezel with silver trim baseplate
Suited for mullion mounting or any other flat

surface
HID Signo Reader Dimension – 80 x 121.5 x 19.5mm

Model 40
Suited to mount and cover
JKT05 SS32/15
NO ITEM BRAND OR EQ. DESCRIPTION
6 Sliding Gate Securitex FAAC For gate length – max.10m (single side)
Operator 994/884T
7 Duress Sentrol 3040 Series Dimension – 4.5(W) x 7.37(L)x1.93cm

Switch
Suited to mount and cover
Location – Toilets
9 K-12 Access Magnetic Autocontrol Set of 2 per entrance

Barrier Access Pro-L
Max. lane width – 6m
Location – Primary Entrance, etc.
Delta Beam Barricades Max. lane width – 9m

DSC7000
Location – Emergency Entrance
10 K-12 bollards Dimension – 20cm dia, 910mm height
Spaced min 1.2m from c/c
Metal sleeve with concrete base; footing to C&S

design
Finishes – Stainless Steel in non-directional

hairline finish
11 K-12 bollards To specialist’s detail Dimension – 20cm dia, 910mm height

(removable) and architect’s
approval Spaced min 1.2m from c/c
Metal sleeve with concrete base; footing to C&S

design
Finishes – Stainless Steel in non-directional

hairline finish
Security Hardlines
Walls comprising of public access control shall be constructed in reinforced concrete of

thickness no less than 150mm spanning the full height of the building – from slab to
slab/roof. The reinforcements shall be of atleast Number 5 rebar spaced at 12.7cm
centre-to-centre and anchored to the slabs.
JKT05 SS32/16
32.18 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENTS
Loading Dock equipment shall be procured and installed in compliance with owner’s and
local requirements. The items include, however are not restricted to, the following :
a. Dock Levelers
• Features: Include a bellows type skirt to close off the pit from debris.
Provide gasketing/weathersealing to prevent air infiltration. Refer to
drawings for additional details.
• Description:
Size: 2000mm x 2500mm unless mentioned otherwise
Minimum Dynamic Capacity: 45,000 lbs.
b. Dock Bumpers
• Size: 200mm x 400mm, applicable to condition.
• Construction:
i. Laminated rubber type made from rubberized-fabric truck tires cut

to uniform pads and punched to receive 3/4 inch supporting rods.
ii. Enclose ends of bumpers with metal angles under 1,500 pounds
pressure and weld to supporting rods.
• Hardware: Mounting hardware and spacers as required for proper

positioning of bumpers. Bumpers shall be positioned so that truck will be
stopped before top of box strikes the building.
• Installation: Install level with dock, plug welded to steel corner angle, or
use 5/8 inch by 3 inches minimum, lag bolts with a minimum length of 3
inches and corresponding
c. Dock Shelter
• Size: Length and width based on door size. 600mm projection.
• Construction:
i. Fabric/Material: 40 ounce (1.13kg) Hi-Tear Vinyl.
ii. Roll-formed galvanized steel framing warranted for 5 years.
iii. Full height guide stripes.
d. Truck Restraints
• Operation:
i. Electro-hydraulic vehicle restraints
JKT05 SS32/17
ii. Dual locking positions at 7 inches and 11 inches from face of 4 inch
bumper.
iii. Horizontal hooking range up to 12" (305mm) beyond the face of the
dock.
iv. Light communication system
• Mounting: Wall or ground mounted powerpack.
• Construction: Dual finish trivalent dichromate zinc-plated steel housing

protects internal components from collision damage, corrosion and rusting.
• Pull-out resistance: 32,000 pounds (14,545kgs).
• Hardware:
i. Standard backplate height 23 ½-inch wall mount / 16-inch ground

mount.
ii. Wedge anchors 3/4 by 5-1/2.
iii. LED interior and exterior communication lights.
iv. Housing profile: 11-5/8" (295mm) above grade and complies with
NHTSA guidelines.
v. High Visibility Barrier Arm: Hydraulic arm secures ICC bars from
12" to 26" (305mm to 660mm) above grade.
vi. Wall or Ground Mounted Body Assembly: Solid anchor framed

bracket with 13inch (330mm) back plate.
vii. Maintenance-free Proximity Sensor: Accurately detects the position

of the ICC bar and confirms the restraint arm’s position via the LED
lights communication system.
viii. LED exterior communication lights.
• Electrical: 120 volt, single phase supply; 24 volt control and lighting circuit.
• Control Panel: Programmable logic controller and real time diagnostic

capability, industrial grade push-buttons, integral LED visual safety warning
system and printed operational instructions.
• Exterior Lights: Low profile flashing green and red LED signals indicate
safe or unsafe conditions for vehicle movement. Caution sign with standard
reversed lettering.
e. Scissors Lifts
• Capacity: 10,000 lbs minimum to take forklift load (MHE Electric Forklift 3-
wheel 1.5t – service weight (incl. battery): 3,050kg)
JKT05 SS32/18
• Platform:
i. Construction: Heavy hot-dipped galvanized steel plate with beveled

toe plates on 4 sides.
ii. Size: 2000mm x 2500mm
iii. Non-skid, safety-tread deck plate.
• Hinged Bridge:
i. Size: 18 inches long by 72 inches wide.
ii. Construction:
o Heavy-duty, piano-type hinge welded to toe guard at end of

platform.
o Heavy duty lifting chains.
o Nonskid, safety-tread steel plate.
o Spring-assisted bridge
• Safety Devices:
i. Removable Handrails: Removable handrails on two sides of

platform with a single, removable chain across each end. Handrails
shall be 42 inches high with a midrail and 4-inch high kick plate at
bottom.
ii. Maintenance Leg: Manufacturer’s standard safety maintenance leg.
iii. Toe Protection: Manufacturer’s standard toe protection along entire

unprotected side(s) of lift.
iv. In-motion warning beeper and flashing light.
v. Accordion Bellows skirting
• Finish: Manufacturer’s standard paint, color as selected. Provide toe

guards with yellow and black stripes.
f. Dock Lights
• Heavy duty, impact resistant LED housing.
• 24VDC with black housing
• 40 inch double arm knuckle with internal wiring.
• Die cast aluminum control box, surface mount, polyester powder coated
finish, yellow color.
• 15 watt LED lamp.
• 8 inch deep stand-off bracket.
• UL listed.
JKT05 SS32/19
• On/off toggle switch.
• 120 volt cord and plug
g. Master Control Box
• Provide dual panel to accommodate electronic function of all dock products

for 2 dock doors. Panel to include (but no be limited to) levelers and truck
restraints (light communication package ALS). A dedicated button shall be
provided for each of the dock equipment listed. Master control panel to be
100% UL and CSA approved (not just components).
• Provide dock light on/off automatic interconnect.
• Type: Control panel to NEMA 12, automatic motor starter, thermal

overload, 2-amp control breaker with reset capability. All components to be
individually circuit protected. S.A. and/or U.L. approved. Mushroom style
“stop” button shall be standard. The “Stop” button shall cease all dock
devices when depressed, and shall not require continuous pressure.
• Functions: Unit shall be capable of being programmed to control all

associated dock equipment and interlock all equipment in sequence.
• Voltage: 400 volts/ 3ph / 50 hz
h. Electrical Requirements
• Provide dual panel to accommodate electronic function of all dock products

for 2 dock doors. Panel to include (but no be limited to) levelers and truck
restraints (light communication package ALS). A dedicated button shall be
provided for each of the dock equipment.
Warranty
Manufacturer’s Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard five-year unlimited warranty against

defects.
Document prepared by
PT Aurecon Indonesia
Revenue Tower, 25th Floor,
Unit 25-113, District 8
Jenderal Sudirman Kav. 52-53,
SCBD Lot 13,
South Jakarta 12190
Indonesia
T +62 21 5099 1060

F +62 21 5099 1061
E jakarta@aurecongroup.com
W aurecongroup.com

JKT05 SPC ARC 00001 C Architectural Specifications JKT05

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

JKT05 SPC ARC 00001 C Architectural Specifications JKT05

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CONFIDENTIAL

T +62 21 5099 1060

A person using Aurecon documents or data accepts the risk of:

Report title Architectural & LEED General Specifications

Document code 512127-JKT05- Project number 512127

File path https://aurecongroup.sharepoint.com/:f:/r/sites/512127/5%20Deliver%20Design/501%

Client contact Patrick Png Client reference JKT05

Rev Date Revision details/status Author Reviewer Verifier Approver

A 2021-08-27 60% Tender Issue Various Colin Eddison

B 2021-09-24 90% Tender Issue Various Colin Eddison

C 2021-10-15 Issued for Permit Various Colin Eddison

Author signature Approver signature

Name Name Colin Eddison

SS01 Section 1 Contents

2.0 SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM

Whenever a material, item, article or product is specified by trade/brand name,

All components of the suspension system to be metal.

BS EN 1461 Hot Dip Galvanised Steel

BS EN 10152 Steel Finishes

BS EN 20354 Acoustics of sound in reverberation rooms

BS CP 290 Code of Practice for Suspended Ceiling using Metal Fixing

BS 1191 Gypsum building plaster

BS 5368: Part 3 Methods of testing window: Wind resistance test

BS 5821 Sound Transmission

BS 6375: Part 1 Performance of Windows: Classification of weathertightness

BS 6496 Specification for powder organic coatings for application and

BS 6497 Powder Coating Steelwork

BS 8290 Suspended ceilings

ASTM C 636 Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension

ASTM E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

ASTM E 580 Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems

2.3 COORDINATION WITH M&E AND OTHER SERVICES

a) Partition and heads of partition

b) Affected mechanical and electrical services installations interfacing with the

2.4 CEILING LAYOUT AND SHOP DRAWINGS

2.4.1 Work Submissions

Upon commencement of the works, submit technical information and data

Include information on:

a) Setting out plans

b) Sectional details of typical and non-typical elements and associated elements

c) Sectional details of all interfaces with adjoining structures and disciplines

d) Dimensions of overall assembly

e) Procedures and sequence to produce distortion-free components and

f) Identification of type and extent of protective coatings to be applied

g) Methods of meeting performance requirements for thermal insulation, fire

h) Identification of type and location of attachments to be built in to the building

i) Identification of junctions and trims to adjoining surfaces

2.5 SAMPLES AND MOCK-UPS

The Contractor is required to install a mock up ceiling of each different type

2.6.1 Tensile pull out test

2.6.1.1 Mineral Fibreboard ceiling

Tensile pull out test results shall exceed:

a) For 1200mm x 600mm ceiling panel – 2kg

b) For 600mm x 600mm ceiling panel – 4kg

c) For suspension system (or wall-mounted ceiling grid system)

i. At anchor points – 50kg

ii. At mid span of suspension grid – 12kg before L/20

2.6.1.2 Seamless fibrous plasterboard

Tensile pull out test results shall exceed:

a) For plasterboard at centre of suspension grid – 20kg

b) For suspension system

i. At anchor points – 50kg

ii. At mid span of suspension grid – 12kg before L/20